End of the World
3
I would like to say right off the bat that i did not write this.
I felt that this story was so good that i had to post it here for you guys to read.
There are 8 chapters in all with an epilogue.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3[B/]
[b]Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Epilogue:
I felt that this story was so good that i had to post it here for you guys to read.
There are 8 chapters in all with an epilogue.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 1
Spoiler:
It has been seven years since the end of the world. Or at least that is how I think of it. I had just had my seventh birthday when it started. Of course at that age I did not pay much attention to news. I was out playing with friends most of the time. My parents told most me of what I know from that period.
It started with China attempting to reclaim Taiwan in June of that year. The USA sent warships to Taiwan to discourage China because we had a treaty to protect Taiwan. China responded by sending nuclear submarines to the sea surrounding Taiwan. We enlisted the support of NATO. North Korea sent their small war fleet down the coast and anchored nearby. Britain sent their fleet in for support. A large portion of the Chinese army approached the coast across the sea from Taiwan. It was like a a little snowball starting down the hill. It started innocently enough but as it reached the bottom it was too big to stop. By the beginning of July Dad said things looked very scary.
At this point my father had our family move to some property we had in the Northern California Mountains. He had always been something of a survivalist and had spent quite a bit of time fixing up the property in case something happened and we would need some place to go to for safety. We had a large rambling ranch house there with five bedrooms. It was high enough in the mountains to be away from everyone yet low enough so that we could grow food if necessary. The house had solar panels and a wind turbine for power. We were way too far from everyone to have power lines or even a telephone. With solar power and satellite cable we were able to watch TV and keep up with everything. The house was well stocked with canned and dry goods plus we had all the tools we would need if we ever had to grow anything. The area was well stocked with wildlife so we would have no problem hunting for game.
When we arrived we settled down pretty quickly. A tree had fallen on one wing of the house damaging two of the bedrooms. It was going to take some time to repair so we had to do some doubling up in the bedrooms. My parents took the master bedroom with my baby sister. My two older sisters, Megan and Shelly, took a second bedroom while my younger sister, Susan and I ended up in a third bedroom.
As I said, I was seven. My younger sister was six, my two older sisters were nine and ten and baby Teri was just four. Our parents were not much older than us. Mom was just 26 and Dad was 28. Mom got pregnant while in high school and dropped out at 16. As soon as she had Megan she began going to night classes to finish high school. She did very well and then went on to become a nurse. My dad was always something of a geek and became a pretty successful computer security consultant. Even though he was fairly young he did very well and could take good care of our large family.
When we usually went to the ranch as soon as we got there we would run all over the place to see if what had changed. There was a stream that ran through the property with some good slow deep pools. If it were summer we would strip and go swimming. This time we just went to the living room and turned on the TV to watch the news.
Then it happened. Even I was paying attention to the news by that point. One of our destroyers had a collision with one of China's nuclear subs. The sub's 16 hydrogen missiles were accidentally, so they said, launched against their targets in the USA. We responded within minutes, while the missiles were still in the air, with a retaliatory strike with 16 of our own missiles against China. We later found out that frantic calls were going back and forth between all the major heads of state around the world to try and prevent this from escalating. While they were successful in preventing any further launches it eventually did not matter. One of our missiles targeted for Shanghai missed and landed one hundred or so miles away. When tens of thousands of people began dying in the next week or so news slowly leaked out that the missile strike had damaged a weapons bio-lab and a virus was released.
By the end of July almost no news reports were coming out of China. Their radio and TV stations were just dead air. Then people began dying in the neighboring countries. Europe and the Americas closed their borders. All airlines were grounded in an attempt to stop the spread of the virus. It did not help. By the second week of August Europe was being decimated and we saw the first deaths begin in the USA. As we switched channels around on our cable we would see stations we used to watch leave the air and go dark. Sometimes we would find a channel where we would just see an empty set. It was as though the station was left on and everyone went away.
It took only two weeks for the virus to spread across the entire USA. By the end of August we could not find any stations, TV or radio, still broadcasting. It looked like we were the only ones left in the world. How we escaped harm I don't know. I guess it was our remote location. The road to our property was a dead-end at our place. There was no reason for anyone to even come out there and we had not seen anyone since the first week we arrived. One family from town that we knew came out to welcome us but my mom and dad, while very friendly with them, did not encourage them to repeat the visit.
There is a small town of a few thousand people, or there were a few thousand people, about 25 miles from us. My dad would drive over every couple of months on an ATV and watch the town from a ridge. Each time he would report no movement, just dead bodies in the streets. He would stay a couple of days watching the houses and roads for movement but saw nothing. From another ridge he could see into the central California valley where I-5, the main north/south freeway passed. Not a single car traveled on it.
It was on one of these trips, about a year after we arrived, that dad had his accident. When he did not return after a week I followed his route and found him. From the tracks it looked like a bear surprised him, or he surprised it, on the dirt road while returning and his ATV went off the road into a ravine. I had to bury him there. The ATV was destroyed and I had no way to get his body home.
As I said it has been seven years. I'm now 14. My sisters are 11, 13, 16 and 19. We have all grown up a lot. We have had to work awfully hard these seven years. It has been easy to get game to last us through the winter; I had gotten pretty good with my bow. But it takes a lot of work to put aside enough fruit and veggies. We tend to get up early and work in the fields, take it easy during the heat of the afternoon and then put in a few more hours in the late afternoon before calling it a day.
It had been a long day and I was tired. My sisters were laying around in the family room watching an old movie on the VCR after dinner while I sat on the sofa reading a book. We did not have much left in the way of clothes because we have all grown up so much nothing fit us any more. Mom was the only one who usually was fairly dressed. When she joined us swimming even she would strip down.
For some reason I was really beginning to enjoy watching my sisters naked. If my mother had explained sex to us I would have understood what was going on but she was alone now and probably did not really think it was that important since we were all family. Now I wasn’t stupid. We had animals, and we all saw them mating on occasion, but seeing two animals going at it and then relating that to my sisters was just too big of a leap at my age.
The problem for me was I would watch them running around naked and end up with an erection. This had happened last summer when we were all skinny-dipping. I started watching my sisters while they were lying in the sun, their breasts sticking up in the air. They would spread their legs so their inner thighs would also get tanned. Megan saw my cock sticking up in the air and pointed it out to the other girls. “Hey, look at Danny. He has a boner”. They all began teasing me. I have been careful to avoid letting that happen again. I am over 6 ft, and the tallest of them is only 5’ 8” but they still treat me like a little brother and can tease me a lot.
As I read I would occasionally look at them over my book. Megan and Shelly physically looked almost identical to mom now. They were very slender and had nice full breasts with nipples that stuck. Susan looked pretty much the same but with smaller breasts and she had just a little bit of hair between her legs. As I watched them I could feel myself stirring. I had better get to bed before it was too late. All I needed was for my cock to start waving around like a weathervane.
I nonchalantly held the open book in front of me while I got up and left the room for my bedroom. Susan would be busy for another hour watching the movie so I would have some time to get rid of this erection. I couple of years ago I had discovered how much fun it was rubbing my cock when it got hard. It had been quite a surprise when that white stuff shot out of it. Later in my reading I found out it was sperm but the book did not really tell me much other than putting a name to it. I knew there was a connection between getting hard and seeing my naked sisters but I was pretty ignorant about connecting any further dots.
I lay down on the bed, closed my eyes and thought of my sisters laying naked out in the living room. Now I was rock hard. I grabbed my cock and slowly began pumping my hand up and down.
“Danny. What are you doing?” I was so focused I had not heard Susan open the door. How long had she been standing there? I quickly let go of my cock and pulled the covers up to my waist. “Nothing”.
Susan was not going be put off so easily, “No. Really, what were you doing?”
There was no point in hiding it now. We had always shared everything. If I did not tell her she would just keep after me making my life a living hell until I gave in. “I was just making myself feel good.”
“What do you mean?”
“Sometimes I get hard….”
“Yes I know. I’ve seen you”.
“Come on. If you want me to tell you don’t interrupt”.
“Ok. Go ahead”.
“Well, sometimes I get hard and if I don’t do something it hurts real bad”.
“What do you mean, do something, and what hurts? Why does it hurt?”
“You’re asking too many questions. My balls hurt and I don’t know why”.
“Well what do you do to make it stop?”
“If I rub it with my hand for a while it feels really good and then some white stuff shoots out the end and then it won’t hurt”.
“Really? You mean you pee?”
“No. It’s something different”.
“Can I see it? She had moved closer and was now sitting on my bed trying to lift up the covers.
“I don’t think so”. Now I was embarrassed. We had seen each other naked for years. We even slept together naked for the warmth many times during the winter. Our room was at the far end of the house and it could get very cold.
“Oh, Please?
It was hard to say no to her when she put that little pout on her face.
“Oh, all right, but just for a little bit. This is just between you and me. Ok? You know how Megan and Shelly tease me”.
“Sure. Now let’s see”. She then pulled down the covers. When Susan first surprised me I had quickly wilted but while we had been talking I had gotten hard again. I lay back down on my bed while she got up and sat down by my hips. I wrapped my hand around the middle of my cock and slowly started pumping up and down.
“Wow. I don’t think I have ever seen you this big before”. I was having trouble thinking of anything to say. I was watching her head get closer to my cock. She reached out and put her fingers around the head of my cock. Oh. That felt so good. “Let me do it”. Her fingers slowly moved down my cock replacing mine. She grabbed me tightly and moved her hand up and down my cock squeezing as she did so.
“Hey, I’m not a cow. You don’t have to milk me”.
With a laugh she replied, “I don’t know about that. You said white stuff comes out”. But she did change her stroke and continued the up and down movement without the extra milking squeeze. “It feels so hard but your skin is so soft”.
I could not talk. I could feel it building up in me. “You have to stop or it is going to start squirting! †˜.
“I want to see it”. She started moving her hand faster. My hips started lifting up off the bed. “Come on Danny. Do it!” Finally I could not take it any more and the white stuff started squirting a couple of feet up in the air. “Cool! That is neat. That has to be sperm. That is what mom said comes out of the bull’s penis when he is mounting the cows”.
My heart finally was slowing down from its’ pounding. “I was going to ask mom about it one time but couldn’t. It feels so good and if it is something bad she would make me stop”.
“Well I won’t tell. Can we do this again sometime? I did it right didn’t I?”
“Yes. You did it very well”.
Then mom’s voice from out in the hall caught our attention. “Hey you kids. It’s time to go to bed. Turn the lights out. We have a busy day tomorrow”.
Susan jumped up off my bed. “Ok mom”. She turned out the lights and then came back to my bed. She scooted up with her back to me. I tentatively put my arm across her hips with my hand on her stomach. She took my hand and slid it up to her breasts. I could feel a nipple getting bigger under my fingers. Her breast felt nice. She had never done this before. She was not near as big as mom, or Megan and Shelly, but it was big enough for me.
“Next time I’ll show you what makes me feel good”. As I drifted off to sleep my last thoughts were, “What did she mean by that? She did not have a cock”.
The next couple of days we did not have a chance for a repeat performance. We were in the middle of winter and it looked like a snowstorm was headed our way. We had to get out and get our cattle and other livestock taken care of. We also needed to move enough wood in to last a few weeks if it ended up being a serious storm. You never knew how long a storm might last. We were dead tired each night and just went to straight to sleep.
One night, a few days after the storm passed, I had gone to bed early. I was busy entertaining myself when Susan came in. She was really tired and did not notice what I was doing. She just got in my bed, backed up against me and went to sleep.
In her sleep she kind of snuggled her butt up against me. I still had a hard-on and the head of my cock was very wet and slippery. Her moving her butt around did not help my condition. I moved my hips forward against her and my cock slid between her thighs. It felt so hot there. I slowly moved my hips back and forth rubbing my cock against the inside of her thighs. The feeling was so intense. This was so much better than my hand. I felt I would explode any second. I had to slow down. I wanted this feeling to last a while. I rolled a bit off my side so I was partially on my back and slowly pulled one of Susan’s legs over mine so it bent at the knee. Her legs were spread fairly wide now. I reached over and found my cock between her legs and started rubbing it back and forth against her crotch.
I was really enjoying the feeling when I felt Susan stir. In a sleepy voice she asked, “What are you doing”? I froze. Now what do I do. She’s going to get mad at me.
“Don’t stop. That feels good”.
With her encouragement I once again began rubbing the head of my cock around. Then suddenly something weird happened. I pushed the head a little harder against her and instead of just the pressure of being pushed against her I felt her skin give and the head of my cock suddenly disappeared inside of her.
Now I know what you are thinking. I have been living with naked girls for several years now. I should have known what was going on. But I’m a guy. I was clueless.
When I entered Susan she let out a gasp. I thought I had hurt her and I quickly pulled out.
“No. Put it back”. She pleaded. “That feels really good. Put it back in”.
I pushed with my fingers again and the head slipped back into her. It felt so hot and tight. It made me thrust my hips forward and I sank deeper into her. I felt her move back against me and heard her moan. I moved my hands around her and cupped each of her breasts. I gave them a gentle squeeze and then began rubbing my palms in circles on her nipples. She moaned louder and arched her back. This resulted in her butt jamming harder into me. Now my cock was buried up to the hilt in her. It only took a few more thrusts before I was squirting over and over inside of her. I stopped moving against her. Susan turned her head and asked, “Why are you stopping”?
“My cock squirted and it is getting soft now” I explained.
Susan reached between her legs, took my now limp cock in her hand and started rubbing it against her. It was just a minute or so before I noticed I was getting hard again. She then got a good grip on me and continued rubbing herself between her legs with my cock as the tool while I took the opportunity to really get to know her breasts. I noticed that sometimes when I gently squeezed both of her nipples at the same time she would arch her back strongly against me and moan rather loudly. I had to caution her a couple of times to be quiet or mom might hear and come in.
After several minutes of this, Susan was really jerking back against me and rubbing my now rock hard cock against her in a very fast side-to-side motion. Suddenly she tensed, arched her back against me and cried out, “Danny, unhhhhh”. She was holding my cock tightly in her fist and jerked it around a couple of times. It took me a second to realize she was trying to stick it back into her. I obliged by reaching down, moving her hand and then aligning myself and easily sliding back into her right up to the hilt. I could feel her pussy grabbing me like her hand had before. It sent this electric current up me. I started thrusting my hips against her and knew I was just a few strokes away before I was going to squirt in her again. She must have realized it also. She reached down, grabbed me and pulled me out. †˜No, put me back in”.
She just shook her head and began pumping my cock with her hand. Saying, “I want to watch it come out” she leaned forward so she had a good view. It took just a few more jerks of her hand and I was cumming again. Stream after stream of sperm shot out of me up onto her chest and stomach. A few drops landed on my hand where I still had it on one of her breasts. Susan gave a little laugh, “That is so cool”.
Once our breathing had returned to normal Susan lifted her leg off of mine and put it on top of her other leg still spooned against me. My cock was pinned between her thighs but I was in no mood to complain. After some gentle caressing we both drifted off to sleep.
The next morning we were still in the same position when I woke up. I felt Susan begin to stir and gradually pulled my cock back from between her thighs. When she was finally awake she turned around to face me. She was lying in bed a bit above me so I leaned forward and put my head on her shoulder. Even with what we had done the night before I had not touched her very much. I reached out with my hand and put it on her stomach. I slowly began moving it around her stomach and then up to her ribcage below her breasts. After making several passes back and forth I moved higher to the underside of her breasts. Susan sucked in her breath as I moved from the bottom of her breast to her nipples. She leaned in towards me pushing her left breast into my face. I moved my head slightly so I could take her nipple into my mouth and began sucking on it gently and running my tongue around it. After a little bit I put my hands under her shoulders and pulled her over onto me so I could reach both breasts with my mouth. She moved her legs around so she was sitting on me with my cock flat against my stomach and her sitting on top of it.
I continued running my tongue around her nipples just moving from one breast to the other. Susan shivered. “Yes, more”. After several more passes Susan finally spoke again. “Danny. That feels so good. Maybe you would like the same treatment”. What did she that mean? My nipples were not very sensitive. Susan then slid off of me to one side and crouched down, facing towards my feet, by my waist. Since I could no longer reach her breasts with my mouth I moved one hand to each breast and slowly caressed them, lightly running my palms over her nipples. Then suddenly the most incredible feeling came over my cock. It was as though I had stuck it in an oven. It was hot. There was this swirling sensation going all around the head. I looked down and saw Susan’s mouth engulfing my cock. My hips moved up to her. This was just incredible. I knew I could only last a few more seconds of this.
“What are you two doing? Susan Marie, Daniel Aaron, stop that this instant!” We were so preoccupied we had not heard mom call us or come in the room. She stood there while Susan jumped up and ran out of the room. Mom turned to me and gave me that LOOK as I got up. We knew we were in trouble. Mom used our middle names.
I was having a difficult time because my cock was sticking out and waving around as I moved. “What did we do wrong? You never told us that this was something we should not do”.
Mom just stood in the doorway with her hands on her hips and said “Go take a shower and get breakfast. You have a lot of work to do today. I’ll talk to you tonight”.
When we got down to breakfast, Megan, Shelly and Terri looked at us like “What did you guys do? Why is mom so mad?” We just kept quite and ate our breakfast. After breakfast I went outside and worked my way down to the barn. Last summer I had felled several trees to work on to repair the damaged portion of our home. For the first couple of hours I was distracted thinking about what mom wanted to talk about tonight. Why was she so upset? We were just doing something that felt good. After those first couple of hours I just forgot myself working. I was able to finish up several logs that we would use in the spring to rebuild the wall damaged by the tree.
As the sun began to set mom called out that it was dinnertime. All through dinner it was very quite. No one really talked other than pass me this and that. After dinner we all went in the family room to read and play some board games. It remained pretty quite. Once it got to our normal bedtime mom got up and said she had some changes to make. “Terri is getting older and she is going to move into Susan’s bedroom. We do not have a regular bedroom for Danny until we finish the repairs. It is too cold for him to sleep out here on the sofa so he will share my bedroom until the west bedrooms are finished”.
Well that is going to be the end of our fun. Mom must really not like what we did. We all drifted off to our bedrooms. I followed mom. I looked around her bedroom. She had the biggest bedroom and bed because she used to share it with dad. I did not know what to expect so I took the blanket and pillow I had brought from my old bedroom and started to make a place on the floor. Mom said, “What are you doing? You can have the left side of the bed. It is big enough for the both of us”.
I got back up and slid into the left side of the bed. Mom moved around the room, closing the door, putting things away. Taking off the few clothes she wore. I lay there watching her, sneaking peeks. I had not really thought of mom physically before but my experiences with Susan had me thinking differently now. Mom’s breasts were much larger than Susan’s and her nipples stuck out more. Her legs were long and I kept being drawn to that space between her thighs. I had always wondered about the differences between my sister’s bodies and mine. My recent experience with Susan had given me a good idea of what to do with those differences. And now watching mom I was reliving last night with Susan remembering the feeling of sliding in and out of her. Then I remembered what she had been doing when mom came in. Where did she learn about that? I have to stop thinking like this! I’m getting an erection. No, not getting, have an erection. I have to think about something else. Think about milking cows, feeding chickens. I turned on my side, pointing my cock away from her so she would not see it and get me in deeper trouble.
Mom turned off the light and got in bed. It was winter now so it was really dark at night. I could not see anything when the light was turned off. That made it easier to talk about this when I could not see her face. “Mom, what did we do wrong? We were just doing something that felt good”.
I felt her turn on her side towards me, “Yes dear, I know. It does feel good but it is something you do not do with your sister”.
“Why not”?
“Well it is just the way things are. It is the way we were brought up. I really don’t want to talk more about it right now”.
“Ok. Goodnight”.
“Goodnight son”.
We went on like this for a few weeks before the dreams started. Get up. Get breakfast. Go out and work. Come in and have dinner. Go to bed. All the while mom kept a watchful eye on Susan and me. Mom did not have us work on projects together.
Then one night I had the dream. Susan and I were in bed. We were lying next to each other and she was holding on to my cock and rubbing it up and down. She then pulled me by the cock over on top of her. I could feel her breasts under my chest, her nipples poking into me. Her legs slowly spread and I settled between them, my cock pushing up towards her. Then…I woke up. I had a huge hard-on and the hand holding it was mine. I needed some relief but did not want to wake mom. I turned over and did my best to think of other things until it went away and I went back to sleep.
A couple of nights later I had the same dream. I would get up to the point of lying on top of her then wake up with a hard-on. A couple of times the dream would have her taking me in her mouth. It was such an intense dream that a couple of times when I woke up I would find my stomach wet from cuming on myself. Mom was always asleep so at least I had not woken her up and got caught.
One night about two months after I moved into mom’s bedroom I woke up from the dream but something was different. Mom was moving around a bit. Her legs would spread wide then close. Then she would lift her knees up and spread them. At first I thought I had woken her up but then I realized she was having a dream herself. I could hear her say a few words every now and then. Most of the time it was just moaning and I thought maybe it was a bad dream and she was in pain. Then I heard her say “Yes” several times and “David”. Then I finally caught on. She was having a dream about dad. I could see the covers moving around her waist and guessed she was touching herself in the dream. I stayed very still and after a few minutes she sighed and the movement stopped. I turned over and tried to go to sleep. It took a while as I now saw my mom in a completely different light.
Spring approached and my dreams were getting more frequent and intense. It was very frustrating. The dreams were so repetitive I could almost just lie there and know exactly what would happen next. Right up to the time I would move on top of Susan and then wake up. Then one night the dream changed. I moved on top of her and she still held my cock. She slowly moved it in a circle around her opening. It felt so wet and warm there. I was not waking up. Finally the dream would have a conclusion. I could feel her arch her back as she rubbed my cock against her in one spot. She began rubbing the spot again and again. The feeling was so intense. I propped myself up on my arms and dropped my head down and began kissing her breasts. As I reached her nipple I felt it grow between my lips. I passed my tongue back and forth over her nipple. Then she pulled my cock harder toward her. I began to thrust my hips forward. Her hand slid down to the base of my cock and I felt myself slide inside her. It was unbelievable. Susan felt so good. She moved her hand out and wrapped her arms around me pulling me tight. I pushed the rest of my cock into her, grinding my pelvis against hers. “Yes David. Harder”. With that I thrust harder feeling myself go in even deeper. Her knees rose up outside my hips and I slid another inch deeper. “Yes David. Again! I moved back until I thought I was going to fall out of her then slowly pushed back into her. Over and over I again I would move back, then back in. She then began squeezing my cock with her muscles. It became a steady rhythm. Every time she squeezed me I would thrust into her. “Yes David. Yes! Fuck me. Faster. Fuck me!”.
Why was she calling me David? That was my dad’s name. Her heels began pushing into my butt making me thrust harder into her. “Danny!” It was so intense now. I knew this is where I should have been squirting all that time. “Danny. STOP”. My cock would get squeezed and I would thrust. “Danny. STOP! It’s your mother”.
“What?”
“Danny, you are on top of me. You need to stop and get off”.
This isn’t Susan? It’s Mom? What’s happening? Oh, yes that feels so good. Every time she squeezes me it makes me move deeper into her. “I can’t stop when you are squeezing me like that”.
“I can’t stop squeezing when you keep fucking my pussy. You need to stop before you cum”.
“I can’t help it mom. Every time you squeeze me it makes me push harder”.
“Well you have to try”.
I had not really noticed but I had one hand on her breast and was gently massaging it. I had just taken her nipple between two of my fingers and was rolling in back and forth when she said, “Honey, you have to stop doing that”. Then she arched her back and a loud moan came from her. She grabbed my butt and dug her nails in, pulling me deeper into her. “Oh, ho…. Oh, honey you need to….”. Her body spasmed several times and she squeezed me really hard. She then gradually relaxed and lay flatter on the bed. She put her mouth close to my ear and said “Ok, honey. You can go ahead and finish”. With that she grabbed my butt and began pulling me with each thrust into her. I was so close at that point that it only took a few more thrusts before I was cumming inside her. Squirt after squirt until it seemed like it would never stop.
As we lie there, breathing hard, she finally looked at me and said, “We should not have done that.
“But mom, you started it”.
“What?”
“You pulled me on top of you”.
“I’m sorry Danny. I was dreaming of your father and got carried away”.
“That’s ok” I said. “It was really nice”.
Mom looked up at me and said “Yes. It was. But we should not be doing that with each other. Mothers don’t let their sons fuck them”.
“Well you didn’t really let me. You were dreaming when it started”. Mom sighed and said “Yes, but we should not do that again. You had better get off me now”.
I rolled off mom and moved over to my side. I could not get the feelings out of my mind. I kept replaying it over and over. My cock sliding in and out of her, how hot and wet, tight and smooth it felt inside of her. The sensation of caressing her breasts and squirting my sperm into her. I want to do this again. I want to do this over and over again. At some point I finally fell asleep.
When I awoke it was just barely light outside. Mom was lying against me with an arm across my chest. She was still asleep. I looked down and I could see one breast lying on my chest. I moved my hand up and gently rubbed her nipple. She stirred a bit so I stopped, but not before her nipple got hard. I noticed I was in the same condition. I reached over, lifted mom’s hand off my chest and moved it down and laid it on my cock. Her fingers instinctively wrapped around it. Then I waited for her to wake up.
After several minutes she did not stir. I’m going to have to speed this up. I reached up again and began gently rubbing her nipple again. After about 30 seconds I she stirred again and I felt her push her crotch against my thigh and give my cock a squeeze. With that encouragement I squeezed her breast. I turned to her ear and whispered, “That feels really good mom. Don’t stop”.
Mom was not quite awake and just gave me a “unhhhhh”, but she did not move her hand and continued squeezing my cock.
I reached around to grab her around the waist and pulled her over on top of me. As she came up she released my cock. I reached down and pulled her knees up so her legs bent on either side of my thighs. With sleep still in her voice she asked, “What are you doing”?
I needed to act quickly now. Her pussy was wet and I entered her easily. It must be the sperm left over from last night. With a good stroke I was completely buried inside of her. It felt just as good as last night.
“Danny, what are you doing? We should not do this again”?
That did it. I started pumping into her faster. She said “We should not”, not “can’t”. She likes this. She wants it. She just doesn’t want me to know.
Mom began meeting my thrusts into her with her own back against me. Every minute or so I could her say “yes” very softly. I reached down and grabbed her butt and pulled her against me as I continued ramming into her. We kept this up with no variation for what had to have been twenty minutes. Finally she began moaning, “Oh, Danny. Just a little slower”.
I slowed down and gave her steady long strokes. She lifted herself up into a sitting position on me and pushed hard back against me in sharp hard thrusts. She then arched her back and cried out. Her pussy seemed to pulsate around my cock and that did me in.
I could not hold it back any longer. “Mom, I’m cumming”. I knew I was buried up to the hilt in her but I pushed up trying to get in another six inches and shot sperm into her until I was dry.
Mom laid back down on me and wrapped her hands on my shoulder. Once our breathing had returned to normal some of my blood returned to my head and I could think again. “Mom, thanks for waking me up that way. That felt so good”.
“I’m not sure what I did but you are welcome”. She paused a minute and added, “I guess we aren’t going to stop right now”.
“You know best, mom”. Mom gave out a little laugh. “What’s so funny”, I asked.
“Before you were born there was a TV show called †˜Father knows best’. I don’t think this episode would have gotten past the censors”.
I had no idea what she was talking about. Over the next few weeks our routine continued like this. Almost every night we would make love. We wanted to be careful and not let the girls know what was going on so we had to skip mornings when we did not wake up early enough. But I was an early riser.
End chapter 1.
It started with China attempting to reclaim Taiwan in June of that year. The USA sent warships to Taiwan to discourage China because we had a treaty to protect Taiwan. China responded by sending nuclear submarines to the sea surrounding Taiwan. We enlisted the support of NATO. North Korea sent their small war fleet down the coast and anchored nearby. Britain sent their fleet in for support. A large portion of the Chinese army approached the coast across the sea from Taiwan. It was like a a little snowball starting down the hill. It started innocently enough but as it reached the bottom it was too big to stop. By the beginning of July Dad said things looked very scary.
At this point my father had our family move to some property we had in the Northern California Mountains. He had always been something of a survivalist and had spent quite a bit of time fixing up the property in case something happened and we would need some place to go to for safety. We had a large rambling ranch house there with five bedrooms. It was high enough in the mountains to be away from everyone yet low enough so that we could grow food if necessary. The house had solar panels and a wind turbine for power. We were way too far from everyone to have power lines or even a telephone. With solar power and satellite cable we were able to watch TV and keep up with everything. The house was well stocked with canned and dry goods plus we had all the tools we would need if we ever had to grow anything. The area was well stocked with wildlife so we would have no problem hunting for game.
When we arrived we settled down pretty quickly. A tree had fallen on one wing of the house damaging two of the bedrooms. It was going to take some time to repair so we had to do some doubling up in the bedrooms. My parents took the master bedroom with my baby sister. My two older sisters, Megan and Shelly, took a second bedroom while my younger sister, Susan and I ended up in a third bedroom.
As I said, I was seven. My younger sister was six, my two older sisters were nine and ten and baby Teri was just four. Our parents were not much older than us. Mom was just 26 and Dad was 28. Mom got pregnant while in high school and dropped out at 16. As soon as she had Megan she began going to night classes to finish high school. She did very well and then went on to become a nurse. My dad was always something of a geek and became a pretty successful computer security consultant. Even though he was fairly young he did very well and could take good care of our large family.
When we usually went to the ranch as soon as we got there we would run all over the place to see if what had changed. There was a stream that ran through the property with some good slow deep pools. If it were summer we would strip and go swimming. This time we just went to the living room and turned on the TV to watch the news.
Then it happened. Even I was paying attention to the news by that point. One of our destroyers had a collision with one of China's nuclear subs. The sub's 16 hydrogen missiles were accidentally, so they said, launched against their targets in the USA. We responded within minutes, while the missiles were still in the air, with a retaliatory strike with 16 of our own missiles against China. We later found out that frantic calls were going back and forth between all the major heads of state around the world to try and prevent this from escalating. While they were successful in preventing any further launches it eventually did not matter. One of our missiles targeted for Shanghai missed and landed one hundred or so miles away. When tens of thousands of people began dying in the next week or so news slowly leaked out that the missile strike had damaged a weapons bio-lab and a virus was released.
By the end of July almost no news reports were coming out of China. Their radio and TV stations were just dead air. Then people began dying in the neighboring countries. Europe and the Americas closed their borders. All airlines were grounded in an attempt to stop the spread of the virus. It did not help. By the second week of August Europe was being decimated and we saw the first deaths begin in the USA. As we switched channels around on our cable we would see stations we used to watch leave the air and go dark. Sometimes we would find a channel where we would just see an empty set. It was as though the station was left on and everyone went away.
It took only two weeks for the virus to spread across the entire USA. By the end of August we could not find any stations, TV or radio, still broadcasting. It looked like we were the only ones left in the world. How we escaped harm I don't know. I guess it was our remote location. The road to our property was a dead-end at our place. There was no reason for anyone to even come out there and we had not seen anyone since the first week we arrived. One family from town that we knew came out to welcome us but my mom and dad, while very friendly with them, did not encourage them to repeat the visit.
There is a small town of a few thousand people, or there were a few thousand people, about 25 miles from us. My dad would drive over every couple of months on an ATV and watch the town from a ridge. Each time he would report no movement, just dead bodies in the streets. He would stay a couple of days watching the houses and roads for movement but saw nothing. From another ridge he could see into the central California valley where I-5, the main north/south freeway passed. Not a single car traveled on it.
It was on one of these trips, about a year after we arrived, that dad had his accident. When he did not return after a week I followed his route and found him. From the tracks it looked like a bear surprised him, or he surprised it, on the dirt road while returning and his ATV went off the road into a ravine. I had to bury him there. The ATV was destroyed and I had no way to get his body home.
As I said it has been seven years. I'm now 14. My sisters are 11, 13, 16 and 19. We have all grown up a lot. We have had to work awfully hard these seven years. It has been easy to get game to last us through the winter; I had gotten pretty good with my bow. But it takes a lot of work to put aside enough fruit and veggies. We tend to get up early and work in the fields, take it easy during the heat of the afternoon and then put in a few more hours in the late afternoon before calling it a day.
It had been a long day and I was tired. My sisters were laying around in the family room watching an old movie on the VCR after dinner while I sat on the sofa reading a book. We did not have much left in the way of clothes because we have all grown up so much nothing fit us any more. Mom was the only one who usually was fairly dressed. When she joined us swimming even she would strip down.
For some reason I was really beginning to enjoy watching my sisters naked. If my mother had explained sex to us I would have understood what was going on but she was alone now and probably did not really think it was that important since we were all family. Now I wasn’t stupid. We had animals, and we all saw them mating on occasion, but seeing two animals going at it and then relating that to my sisters was just too big of a leap at my age.
The problem for me was I would watch them running around naked and end up with an erection. This had happened last summer when we were all skinny-dipping. I started watching my sisters while they were lying in the sun, their breasts sticking up in the air. They would spread their legs so their inner thighs would also get tanned. Megan saw my cock sticking up in the air and pointed it out to the other girls. “Hey, look at Danny. He has a boner”. They all began teasing me. I have been careful to avoid letting that happen again. I am over 6 ft, and the tallest of them is only 5’ 8” but they still treat me like a little brother and can tease me a lot.
As I read I would occasionally look at them over my book. Megan and Shelly physically looked almost identical to mom now. They were very slender and had nice full breasts with nipples that stuck. Susan looked pretty much the same but with smaller breasts and she had just a little bit of hair between her legs. As I watched them I could feel myself stirring. I had better get to bed before it was too late. All I needed was for my cock to start waving around like a weathervane.
I nonchalantly held the open book in front of me while I got up and left the room for my bedroom. Susan would be busy for another hour watching the movie so I would have some time to get rid of this erection. I couple of years ago I had discovered how much fun it was rubbing my cock when it got hard. It had been quite a surprise when that white stuff shot out of it. Later in my reading I found out it was sperm but the book did not really tell me much other than putting a name to it. I knew there was a connection between getting hard and seeing my naked sisters but I was pretty ignorant about connecting any further dots.
I lay down on the bed, closed my eyes and thought of my sisters laying naked out in the living room. Now I was rock hard. I grabbed my cock and slowly began pumping my hand up and down.
“Danny. What are you doing?” I was so focused I had not heard Susan open the door. How long had she been standing there? I quickly let go of my cock and pulled the covers up to my waist. “Nothing”.
Susan was not going be put off so easily, “No. Really, what were you doing?”
There was no point in hiding it now. We had always shared everything. If I did not tell her she would just keep after me making my life a living hell until I gave in. “I was just making myself feel good.”
“What do you mean?”
“Sometimes I get hard….”
“Yes I know. I’ve seen you”.
“Come on. If you want me to tell you don’t interrupt”.
“Ok. Go ahead”.
“Well, sometimes I get hard and if I don’t do something it hurts real bad”.
“What do you mean, do something, and what hurts? Why does it hurt?”
“You’re asking too many questions. My balls hurt and I don’t know why”.
“Well what do you do to make it stop?”
“If I rub it with my hand for a while it feels really good and then some white stuff shoots out the end and then it won’t hurt”.
“Really? You mean you pee?”
“No. It’s something different”.
“Can I see it? She had moved closer and was now sitting on my bed trying to lift up the covers.
“I don’t think so”. Now I was embarrassed. We had seen each other naked for years. We even slept together naked for the warmth many times during the winter. Our room was at the far end of the house and it could get very cold.
“Oh, Please?
It was hard to say no to her when she put that little pout on her face.
“Oh, all right, but just for a little bit. This is just between you and me. Ok? You know how Megan and Shelly tease me”.
“Sure. Now let’s see”. She then pulled down the covers. When Susan first surprised me I had quickly wilted but while we had been talking I had gotten hard again. I lay back down on my bed while she got up and sat down by my hips. I wrapped my hand around the middle of my cock and slowly started pumping up and down.
“Wow. I don’t think I have ever seen you this big before”. I was having trouble thinking of anything to say. I was watching her head get closer to my cock. She reached out and put her fingers around the head of my cock. Oh. That felt so good. “Let me do it”. Her fingers slowly moved down my cock replacing mine. She grabbed me tightly and moved her hand up and down my cock squeezing as she did so.
“Hey, I’m not a cow. You don’t have to milk me”.
With a laugh she replied, “I don’t know about that. You said white stuff comes out”. But she did change her stroke and continued the up and down movement without the extra milking squeeze. “It feels so hard but your skin is so soft”.
I could not talk. I could feel it building up in me. “You have to stop or it is going to start squirting! †˜.
“I want to see it”. She started moving her hand faster. My hips started lifting up off the bed. “Come on Danny. Do it!” Finally I could not take it any more and the white stuff started squirting a couple of feet up in the air. “Cool! That is neat. That has to be sperm. That is what mom said comes out of the bull’s penis when he is mounting the cows”.
My heart finally was slowing down from its’ pounding. “I was going to ask mom about it one time but couldn’t. It feels so good and if it is something bad she would make me stop”.
“Well I won’t tell. Can we do this again sometime? I did it right didn’t I?”
“Yes. You did it very well”.
Then mom’s voice from out in the hall caught our attention. “Hey you kids. It’s time to go to bed. Turn the lights out. We have a busy day tomorrow”.
Susan jumped up off my bed. “Ok mom”. She turned out the lights and then came back to my bed. She scooted up with her back to me. I tentatively put my arm across her hips with my hand on her stomach. She took my hand and slid it up to her breasts. I could feel a nipple getting bigger under my fingers. Her breast felt nice. She had never done this before. She was not near as big as mom, or Megan and Shelly, but it was big enough for me.
“Next time I’ll show you what makes me feel good”. As I drifted off to sleep my last thoughts were, “What did she mean by that? She did not have a cock”.
The next couple of days we did not have a chance for a repeat performance. We were in the middle of winter and it looked like a snowstorm was headed our way. We had to get out and get our cattle and other livestock taken care of. We also needed to move enough wood in to last a few weeks if it ended up being a serious storm. You never knew how long a storm might last. We were dead tired each night and just went to straight to sleep.
One night, a few days after the storm passed, I had gone to bed early. I was busy entertaining myself when Susan came in. She was really tired and did not notice what I was doing. She just got in my bed, backed up against me and went to sleep.
In her sleep she kind of snuggled her butt up against me. I still had a hard-on and the head of my cock was very wet and slippery. Her moving her butt around did not help my condition. I moved my hips forward against her and my cock slid between her thighs. It felt so hot there. I slowly moved my hips back and forth rubbing my cock against the inside of her thighs. The feeling was so intense. This was so much better than my hand. I felt I would explode any second. I had to slow down. I wanted this feeling to last a while. I rolled a bit off my side so I was partially on my back and slowly pulled one of Susan’s legs over mine so it bent at the knee. Her legs were spread fairly wide now. I reached over and found my cock between her legs and started rubbing it back and forth against her crotch.
I was really enjoying the feeling when I felt Susan stir. In a sleepy voice she asked, “What are you doing”? I froze. Now what do I do. She’s going to get mad at me.
“Don’t stop. That feels good”.
With her encouragement I once again began rubbing the head of my cock around. Then suddenly something weird happened. I pushed the head a little harder against her and instead of just the pressure of being pushed against her I felt her skin give and the head of my cock suddenly disappeared inside of her.
Now I know what you are thinking. I have been living with naked girls for several years now. I should have known what was going on. But I’m a guy. I was clueless.
When I entered Susan she let out a gasp. I thought I had hurt her and I quickly pulled out.
“No. Put it back”. She pleaded. “That feels really good. Put it back in”.
I pushed with my fingers again and the head slipped back into her. It felt so hot and tight. It made me thrust my hips forward and I sank deeper into her. I felt her move back against me and heard her moan. I moved my hands around her and cupped each of her breasts. I gave them a gentle squeeze and then began rubbing my palms in circles on her nipples. She moaned louder and arched her back. This resulted in her butt jamming harder into me. Now my cock was buried up to the hilt in her. It only took a few more thrusts before I was squirting over and over inside of her. I stopped moving against her. Susan turned her head and asked, “Why are you stopping”?
“My cock squirted and it is getting soft now” I explained.
Susan reached between her legs, took my now limp cock in her hand and started rubbing it against her. It was just a minute or so before I noticed I was getting hard again. She then got a good grip on me and continued rubbing herself between her legs with my cock as the tool while I took the opportunity to really get to know her breasts. I noticed that sometimes when I gently squeezed both of her nipples at the same time she would arch her back strongly against me and moan rather loudly. I had to caution her a couple of times to be quiet or mom might hear and come in.
After several minutes of this, Susan was really jerking back against me and rubbing my now rock hard cock against her in a very fast side-to-side motion. Suddenly she tensed, arched her back against me and cried out, “Danny, unhhhhh”. She was holding my cock tightly in her fist and jerked it around a couple of times. It took me a second to realize she was trying to stick it back into her. I obliged by reaching down, moving her hand and then aligning myself and easily sliding back into her right up to the hilt. I could feel her pussy grabbing me like her hand had before. It sent this electric current up me. I started thrusting my hips against her and knew I was just a few strokes away before I was going to squirt in her again. She must have realized it also. She reached down, grabbed me and pulled me out. †˜No, put me back in”.
She just shook her head and began pumping my cock with her hand. Saying, “I want to watch it come out” she leaned forward so she had a good view. It took just a few more jerks of her hand and I was cumming again. Stream after stream of sperm shot out of me up onto her chest and stomach. A few drops landed on my hand where I still had it on one of her breasts. Susan gave a little laugh, “That is so cool”.
Once our breathing had returned to normal Susan lifted her leg off of mine and put it on top of her other leg still spooned against me. My cock was pinned between her thighs but I was in no mood to complain. After some gentle caressing we both drifted off to sleep.
The next morning we were still in the same position when I woke up. I felt Susan begin to stir and gradually pulled my cock back from between her thighs. When she was finally awake she turned around to face me. She was lying in bed a bit above me so I leaned forward and put my head on her shoulder. Even with what we had done the night before I had not touched her very much. I reached out with my hand and put it on her stomach. I slowly began moving it around her stomach and then up to her ribcage below her breasts. After making several passes back and forth I moved higher to the underside of her breasts. Susan sucked in her breath as I moved from the bottom of her breast to her nipples. She leaned in towards me pushing her left breast into my face. I moved my head slightly so I could take her nipple into my mouth and began sucking on it gently and running my tongue around it. After a little bit I put my hands under her shoulders and pulled her over onto me so I could reach both breasts with my mouth. She moved her legs around so she was sitting on me with my cock flat against my stomach and her sitting on top of it.
I continued running my tongue around her nipples just moving from one breast to the other. Susan shivered. “Yes, more”. After several more passes Susan finally spoke again. “Danny. That feels so good. Maybe you would like the same treatment”. What did she that mean? My nipples were not very sensitive. Susan then slid off of me to one side and crouched down, facing towards my feet, by my waist. Since I could no longer reach her breasts with my mouth I moved one hand to each breast and slowly caressed them, lightly running my palms over her nipples. Then suddenly the most incredible feeling came over my cock. It was as though I had stuck it in an oven. It was hot. There was this swirling sensation going all around the head. I looked down and saw Susan’s mouth engulfing my cock. My hips moved up to her. This was just incredible. I knew I could only last a few more seconds of this.
“What are you two doing? Susan Marie, Daniel Aaron, stop that this instant!” We were so preoccupied we had not heard mom call us or come in the room. She stood there while Susan jumped up and ran out of the room. Mom turned to me and gave me that LOOK as I got up. We knew we were in trouble. Mom used our middle names.
I was having a difficult time because my cock was sticking out and waving around as I moved. “What did we do wrong? You never told us that this was something we should not do”.
Mom just stood in the doorway with her hands on her hips and said “Go take a shower and get breakfast. You have a lot of work to do today. I’ll talk to you tonight”.
When we got down to breakfast, Megan, Shelly and Terri looked at us like “What did you guys do? Why is mom so mad?” We just kept quite and ate our breakfast. After breakfast I went outside and worked my way down to the barn. Last summer I had felled several trees to work on to repair the damaged portion of our home. For the first couple of hours I was distracted thinking about what mom wanted to talk about tonight. Why was she so upset? We were just doing something that felt good. After those first couple of hours I just forgot myself working. I was able to finish up several logs that we would use in the spring to rebuild the wall damaged by the tree.
As the sun began to set mom called out that it was dinnertime. All through dinner it was very quite. No one really talked other than pass me this and that. After dinner we all went in the family room to read and play some board games. It remained pretty quite. Once it got to our normal bedtime mom got up and said she had some changes to make. “Terri is getting older and she is going to move into Susan’s bedroom. We do not have a regular bedroom for Danny until we finish the repairs. It is too cold for him to sleep out here on the sofa so he will share my bedroom until the west bedrooms are finished”.
Well that is going to be the end of our fun. Mom must really not like what we did. We all drifted off to our bedrooms. I followed mom. I looked around her bedroom. She had the biggest bedroom and bed because she used to share it with dad. I did not know what to expect so I took the blanket and pillow I had brought from my old bedroom and started to make a place on the floor. Mom said, “What are you doing? You can have the left side of the bed. It is big enough for the both of us”.
I got back up and slid into the left side of the bed. Mom moved around the room, closing the door, putting things away. Taking off the few clothes she wore. I lay there watching her, sneaking peeks. I had not really thought of mom physically before but my experiences with Susan had me thinking differently now. Mom’s breasts were much larger than Susan’s and her nipples stuck out more. Her legs were long and I kept being drawn to that space between her thighs. I had always wondered about the differences between my sister’s bodies and mine. My recent experience with Susan had given me a good idea of what to do with those differences. And now watching mom I was reliving last night with Susan remembering the feeling of sliding in and out of her. Then I remembered what she had been doing when mom came in. Where did she learn about that? I have to stop thinking like this! I’m getting an erection. No, not getting, have an erection. I have to think about something else. Think about milking cows, feeding chickens. I turned on my side, pointing my cock away from her so she would not see it and get me in deeper trouble.
Mom turned off the light and got in bed. It was winter now so it was really dark at night. I could not see anything when the light was turned off. That made it easier to talk about this when I could not see her face. “Mom, what did we do wrong? We were just doing something that felt good”.
I felt her turn on her side towards me, “Yes dear, I know. It does feel good but it is something you do not do with your sister”.
“Why not”?
“Well it is just the way things are. It is the way we were brought up. I really don’t want to talk more about it right now”.
“Ok. Goodnight”.
“Goodnight son”.
We went on like this for a few weeks before the dreams started. Get up. Get breakfast. Go out and work. Come in and have dinner. Go to bed. All the while mom kept a watchful eye on Susan and me. Mom did not have us work on projects together.
Then one night I had the dream. Susan and I were in bed. We were lying next to each other and she was holding on to my cock and rubbing it up and down. She then pulled me by the cock over on top of her. I could feel her breasts under my chest, her nipples poking into me. Her legs slowly spread and I settled between them, my cock pushing up towards her. Then…I woke up. I had a huge hard-on and the hand holding it was mine. I needed some relief but did not want to wake mom. I turned over and did my best to think of other things until it went away and I went back to sleep.
A couple of nights later I had the same dream. I would get up to the point of lying on top of her then wake up with a hard-on. A couple of times the dream would have her taking me in her mouth. It was such an intense dream that a couple of times when I woke up I would find my stomach wet from cuming on myself. Mom was always asleep so at least I had not woken her up and got caught.
One night about two months after I moved into mom’s bedroom I woke up from the dream but something was different. Mom was moving around a bit. Her legs would spread wide then close. Then she would lift her knees up and spread them. At first I thought I had woken her up but then I realized she was having a dream herself. I could hear her say a few words every now and then. Most of the time it was just moaning and I thought maybe it was a bad dream and she was in pain. Then I heard her say “Yes” several times and “David”. Then I finally caught on. She was having a dream about dad. I could see the covers moving around her waist and guessed she was touching herself in the dream. I stayed very still and after a few minutes she sighed and the movement stopped. I turned over and tried to go to sleep. It took a while as I now saw my mom in a completely different light.
Spring approached and my dreams were getting more frequent and intense. It was very frustrating. The dreams were so repetitive I could almost just lie there and know exactly what would happen next. Right up to the time I would move on top of Susan and then wake up. Then one night the dream changed. I moved on top of her and she still held my cock. She slowly moved it in a circle around her opening. It felt so wet and warm there. I was not waking up. Finally the dream would have a conclusion. I could feel her arch her back as she rubbed my cock against her in one spot. She began rubbing the spot again and again. The feeling was so intense. I propped myself up on my arms and dropped my head down and began kissing her breasts. As I reached her nipple I felt it grow between my lips. I passed my tongue back and forth over her nipple. Then she pulled my cock harder toward her. I began to thrust my hips forward. Her hand slid down to the base of my cock and I felt myself slide inside her. It was unbelievable. Susan felt so good. She moved her hand out and wrapped her arms around me pulling me tight. I pushed the rest of my cock into her, grinding my pelvis against hers. “Yes David. Harder”. With that I thrust harder feeling myself go in even deeper. Her knees rose up outside my hips and I slid another inch deeper. “Yes David. Again! I moved back until I thought I was going to fall out of her then slowly pushed back into her. Over and over I again I would move back, then back in. She then began squeezing my cock with her muscles. It became a steady rhythm. Every time she squeezed me I would thrust into her. “Yes David. Yes! Fuck me. Faster. Fuck me!”.
Why was she calling me David? That was my dad’s name. Her heels began pushing into my butt making me thrust harder into her. “Danny!” It was so intense now. I knew this is where I should have been squirting all that time. “Danny. STOP”. My cock would get squeezed and I would thrust. “Danny. STOP! It’s your mother”.
“What?”
“Danny, you are on top of me. You need to stop and get off”.
This isn’t Susan? It’s Mom? What’s happening? Oh, yes that feels so good. Every time she squeezes me it makes me move deeper into her. “I can’t stop when you are squeezing me like that”.
“I can’t stop squeezing when you keep fucking my pussy. You need to stop before you cum”.
“I can’t help it mom. Every time you squeeze me it makes me push harder”.
“Well you have to try”.
I had not really noticed but I had one hand on her breast and was gently massaging it. I had just taken her nipple between two of my fingers and was rolling in back and forth when she said, “Honey, you have to stop doing that”. Then she arched her back and a loud moan came from her. She grabbed my butt and dug her nails in, pulling me deeper into her. “Oh, ho…. Oh, honey you need to….”. Her body spasmed several times and she squeezed me really hard. She then gradually relaxed and lay flatter on the bed. She put her mouth close to my ear and said “Ok, honey. You can go ahead and finish”. With that she grabbed my butt and began pulling me with each thrust into her. I was so close at that point that it only took a few more thrusts before I was cumming inside her. Squirt after squirt until it seemed like it would never stop.
As we lie there, breathing hard, she finally looked at me and said, “We should not have done that.
“But mom, you started it”.
“What?”
“You pulled me on top of you”.
“I’m sorry Danny. I was dreaming of your father and got carried away”.
“That’s ok” I said. “It was really nice”.
Mom looked up at me and said “Yes. It was. But we should not be doing that with each other. Mothers don’t let their sons fuck them”.
“Well you didn’t really let me. You were dreaming when it started”. Mom sighed and said “Yes, but we should not do that again. You had better get off me now”.
I rolled off mom and moved over to my side. I could not get the feelings out of my mind. I kept replaying it over and over. My cock sliding in and out of her, how hot and wet, tight and smooth it felt inside of her. The sensation of caressing her breasts and squirting my sperm into her. I want to do this again. I want to do this over and over again. At some point I finally fell asleep.
When I awoke it was just barely light outside. Mom was lying against me with an arm across my chest. She was still asleep. I looked down and I could see one breast lying on my chest. I moved my hand up and gently rubbed her nipple. She stirred a bit so I stopped, but not before her nipple got hard. I noticed I was in the same condition. I reached over, lifted mom’s hand off my chest and moved it down and laid it on my cock. Her fingers instinctively wrapped around it. Then I waited for her to wake up.
After several minutes she did not stir. I’m going to have to speed this up. I reached up again and began gently rubbing her nipple again. After about 30 seconds I she stirred again and I felt her push her crotch against my thigh and give my cock a squeeze. With that encouragement I squeezed her breast. I turned to her ear and whispered, “That feels really good mom. Don’t stop”.
Mom was not quite awake and just gave me a “unhhhhh”, but she did not move her hand and continued squeezing my cock.
I reached around to grab her around the waist and pulled her over on top of me. As she came up she released my cock. I reached down and pulled her knees up so her legs bent on either side of my thighs. With sleep still in her voice she asked, “What are you doing”?
I needed to act quickly now. Her pussy was wet and I entered her easily. It must be the sperm left over from last night. With a good stroke I was completely buried inside of her. It felt just as good as last night.
“Danny, what are you doing? We should not do this again”?
That did it. I started pumping into her faster. She said “We should not”, not “can’t”. She likes this. She wants it. She just doesn’t want me to know.
Mom began meeting my thrusts into her with her own back against me. Every minute or so I could her say “yes” very softly. I reached down and grabbed her butt and pulled her against me as I continued ramming into her. We kept this up with no variation for what had to have been twenty minutes. Finally she began moaning, “Oh, Danny. Just a little slower”.
I slowed down and gave her steady long strokes. She lifted herself up into a sitting position on me and pushed hard back against me in sharp hard thrusts. She then arched her back and cried out. Her pussy seemed to pulsate around my cock and that did me in.
I could not hold it back any longer. “Mom, I’m cumming”. I knew I was buried up to the hilt in her but I pushed up trying to get in another six inches and shot sperm into her until I was dry.
Mom laid back down on me and wrapped her hands on my shoulder. Once our breathing had returned to normal some of my blood returned to my head and I could think again. “Mom, thanks for waking me up that way. That felt so good”.
“I’m not sure what I did but you are welcome”. She paused a minute and added, “I guess we aren’t going to stop right now”.
“You know best, mom”. Mom gave out a little laugh. “What’s so funny”, I asked.
“Before you were born there was a TV show called †˜Father knows best’. I don’t think this episode would have gotten past the censors”.
I had no idea what she was talking about. Over the next few weeks our routine continued like this. Almost every night we would make love. We wanted to be careful and not let the girls know what was going on so we had to skip mornings when we did not wake up early enough. But I was an early riser.
End chapter 1.
Chapter 2
Spoiler:
When I woke up, even before I opened my eyes, I could smell the coffee from downstairs. That’s nice. The kids are making breakfast. Then I smelled the cooking ham and my stomach bolted. I jumped out of bed and ran to the bathroom. I made it just in time to lift the lid and then dumped the contents of my stomach. After another minute I was left with the dry heaves. Finally, when I seemed finished, I rose and flushed the toilet. I cleaned myself up and got into the shower. I wonder what it was that I ate last night that has gone bad. I’ll need to take a look and warn the kids.
I was sitting in front of the mirror brushing my hair when my brain finally turned on. You don’t have food poisoning, you idiot, you’re pregnant! Shit! I’ve been so careful and it happened anyway. Now what do I do. Do I keep it? Can I even find the right drugs here if I want to abort. If I keep it, how do I explain this to the kids? What do I say to Danny? We have been having sex almost every day for three weeks. How could I be so stupid? I’m not some silly teenager that thinks it can’t happen to her. I’ve had five kids.
When I got downstairs the kids were all gathered around the kitchen table talking. They had finished breakfast earlier but had saved some for me. Susan started dishing out some scrambled eggs and ham. “No Honey. I’m not really hungry right now. I’ll just have some coffee if you don’t mind. Maybe I’ll have some food later”. Susan got me some coffee and then returned to their conversation. I just sat there, sipping my coffee, staring off into space thinking.
The kids must have been trying to get my attention for a while. When I finally noticed their calling me they were all staring at me expectantly. “Mom, anybody home? We have been calling you for a while now. You seem to be a million miles away”.
“I’m sorry kids. I’m just thinking of all things we have to do this summer before winter comes around again. We need to finish the repairs to the house and the new fences. We need to plant more fruit and vegetables for canning. I guess my mind was off making all those plans”. They seemed fine with my explanation. “What did you want”?
Danny spoke up, “Susan and I have not worked together in a while. We thought it would be nice if we could work on the roof repair together. You want those bedrooms fixed soon and Susan is the best carpenter of the girls”.
When he finished I could see from the expression on his face he really did not expect me to allow the two of them to be alone together. Susan must have egged him into asking. Of course, with what Danny and I have been doing the last few months, it seems a bit hypocritical of me to say no, especially now with his baby in me. “I guess it would be okay”. They both smiled at each other. After a bit more joshing around everyone got up and started cleaning up the remains of breakfast.
I went to the closet and got a sweater and started putting it on. “Hey, kids. I’ve got some things I need to think about. I’m going out to Daddy’s spot for a while. Give me some alone time while I’m out there”.
Without waiting for any acknowledgement I opened the door and went outside. About 200 yards out from the house there was a small rise with several shade trees at the top. While we did not have my husband’s body, we still made a stone and marked a spot for him. I would sometimes come out and talk to him when I got depressed and was missing him. And I certainly needed to talk this out.
This would be our family plot, as we grew older. Then what I just thought hit me, “As we grew older”. There are only six of us now, maybe seven. When we are gone, that’s it. What happens to my kids when I’m gone? What happens to the world when we’re gone? We have not seen any sign of anyone in years now. We monitor the radio at least twice a week for a couple of hours and it was still silent. What happens if we get sick? We are bound to have the occasional accident. We have virtually no medicine and no doctors. Sure, I’m a nurse, and I know a lot, but I have huge limitations. Our numbers will gradually be reduced. I need to start teaching someone for when I am gone.
As I looked down at his marker I found it difficult to picture his face. Danny looked so much like his dad that I saw his face instead. “Honey, I’m sorry. I was weak. I’ve missed you and our sex together. It has been so many years and I just gave in”. I sat down in front of the marker where his body would have been if we had been able to recover it. “I’m going to keep the baby. It will be part of our family”.
For the next couple of hours I sat there thinking. It was still pretty chilly so I finally moved out so the sun could warm me. It took a couple more hours of thinking before I finally accepted what must happen and began my planning. It was lunch time when I finally returned to the house. Susan and Danny were in the kitchen making lunch for everyone. I pulled Danny aside to the living room. “Son, I know it is still a bit early in the spring but I want you to take a quick hunting trip around to the other side of the mountain”. I knew this would take him about three days at the minimum, one to get there, one to find something and then another to return.
“Mom, you are right, it’s pretty early. It will be hard to find anything, plus there won’t be as much meat on whatever I get as if we wait a couple of months”.
“I know. But I was looking at what we have and I would feel more comfortable if we could add a bit to it now”.
He nodded his head, “Ok. When do you want me to go”?
“I think tomorrow morning”. I wanted him to be away from the house as soon as possible so I could have a meeting with the girls. Things had to be decided before Danny could be included.
That night I helped Danny get everything ready. He checked his bow, got a couple of extra strings, made sure his quiver was full and then filled his backpack with some extra clothes and food. We had several guns in the house but my husband had always used the bow and now his son did the same. The guns were just there as an insurance policy in case they were necessary. Originally we thought they might be needed for safety.
When I went upstairs he was already in bed. I was feeling pretty guilty sending him off on an unnecessary trip, but I needed the time with the girls without him around. I quickly undressed and got into bed. As I slipped into bed beside him I got an idea that would ease my guilty conscience. It was also made easier by the decision I had come to earlier today.
“I know you don’t want to go on this hunt right now but perhaps this would help”. I pulled the covers down off him exposing his nude body. Then I slid down sideways in the bed facing his chest. I reached down with one hand, put in on his knee, and then slowly began softly moving it up to the crease at the top of his thigh and then back down again with a caressing touch. I moved up so my head was above his chest, I leaned down and kissed his chest and then moved over to the nipple closest to me and ran my tongue around it before sucking it into my mouth and flicking it with my tongue.
I could tell I was having the right effect on him as he began squirming around in bed. “Mom, do you want to get on top of me”?
“No, I have something else in mind”. I began moving down his chest kissing him lightly. When I reached his belly button I first ran my tongue around it and then vigorously thrust my tongue into it. He obviously liked it. His hips bucked up and something hard and wet bumped into my ear. I moved the hand that was caressing his thigh over and, with a thumb and forefinger, encircled the base of his cock and squeezed. He definitely likes this. I cupped his balls with my palm and fingers and his hips lifted off the bed and the head of his cock popped right up into my face. I turned around to look at him and he had his eyes closed. Well this should open them. I slid down a few inches so my head was poised right in front of the head of his cock. Even in the semi dark I could tell the head was glistening with lubricant. His hips were now moving up and down with my hand firmly gripped around him. I opened my mouth. The next time his hips lifted his cock up to me I just leaned forward and took him into my mouth just past the head of his cock.
A long groan escaped him. “Oh, mom. What are you doing”?
I did not say anything, just began moving my tongue around the head of his cock. I had rarely had oral sex with my husband. He was not a big proponent and I would rather have him in me. But I was really getting off on the reaction my son was having. His hips were really bouncing up and down now. He had put his hands on the back of my head and was pushing my head down his cock. I pulled back and turned to him. “Now I want you to try and not move too much. Just lay back and enjoy the sensations. And keep in mind that my mouth is not like my pussy. You can’t just stuff your cock all the way in it”.
“I’m sorry mom. It just feels so good. If you keep doing that I’m going to cum any minute now”.
“That’s okay. This is just for you. Cum anytime you feel like it”. With that I moved my hand away from the base of his cock so it was just my mouth and tongue that he could feel. I wanted him to concentrate just on the head of his cock.
His hips began thrusting up again. I knew he was getting close. “Mom, I’m going to cum. You need to move your head”. His voice sounded a bit frantic. How sweet, he was concerned I might not want him to cum in my mouth. I did not say a word. I just kept my head bobbing up and down and running my tongue over his cock. With one last grunt, he lifted his hips and held them. His cock seemed to grow even bigger and harder in my mouth. As I moved my tongue to the tip of the head, streams of hot liquid erupted from him into my mouth. The first hit the roof of my mouth and then covered my tongue. The streams kept coming. My mouth was already full with his cock, there was not much room for cum. I had to swallow. That gave me some relief. The jerks of his body became less intense and the streams smaller. When he was finally finished I gave his cock one last suck, in case he had any sperm left, and then cleaned him off with my tongue and swallowed one last time. I let his cock fall with a soft plop on his stomach and then turned towards him. He looked up at my face and touched the side of his mouth with a finger. I touched the side of my mouth and realized I had a line of cum from my mouth down to my chin. I stuck my tongue out to the side and licked off as much as I could reach. He watched with a small grin on his face. He put his arm out to the side. I reached down, pulled the covers up and then moved up alongside him and put my head on his shoulder and my arm across his chest.
He turned to look at me, “Mom, is there anything I can do for you now”?
I gave my head a small shake, “No Honey. I just wanted to do something special for you before you left”.
“Well that was certainly special”. He turned a bit on his side towards me and put his other arm around me. We were both coming down off the high and were beginning to drift off.
“I want you to be careful out there. You have a lot to return to back here”.
He gave me a sleepy “Huh”?
“Just be careful out there”.
He did not reply as he was already asleep. Just like a man. Shoots his sperm into a woman’s mouth and then falls asleep. I reached up and ran my fingers lightly over his face and then went to sleep myself.
The next morning when I woke, Danny was already gone. He had to have left before dawn as it was just getting light now. I got up and began my morning routine. Thank god no nausea this morning. When I got downstairs I made some coffee. I noticed we were almost out. Our supply has lasted quite a long time but not much longer. I took my cup and sat at the kitchen table to go over what I wanted to say to the girls one last time.
After about an hour and a couple more cups, I heard the sounds of the girls beginning to get up. I got up and began moving around the kitchen getting breakfast ready for them. Susan and Terri arrived first and began setting the table. Once Megan and Shelly arrived I began putting the food on the table.
Susan looked around and then asked, “Should I go get Danny”?
I tried to answer casually, “Danny won’t be here for a couple of days. He’s out hunting to restock our supply of meat”.
“Isn’t it awfully early for hunting? There is still snow on the ground a little higher up”.
“Well, it was a sudden decision. He wanted to get out for a while”. With a laugh I added, “Probably too much estrogen in the air around here for him”.
Susan still had a questioning look on her face, “He did not say anything about going out to me”.
“Well, like I said, it was a sudden decision. He made up his mind just last night”. To try and change the subject I added, “Come on, let’s eat before it gets cold”.
Everyone began digging in. I just sat and sipped my coffee, listened to the girls chatter, and in my mind I again ran over what I wanted to say. My thoughts were interrupted when Terri asked, “Mom, aren’t you going to eat”?
I smiled at her and replied, “I’m not really hungry this morning”.
When they were finished eating and had the dishes cleared I gathered up my nerve and spoke up, “Girls, I have a couple of things we need to talk about”. I motioned them to sit down at the table again. Once I had their attention I began, “You all know we have been monitoring the radio and TV to see if there is anyone out there. And Danny has been going over to watch the freeway in the valley. All these years we have been watching, and no sign of anyone. I think we have to accept the idea that there might not be anyone out there. We might be it”. I stopped to let it sink in.
Shelly spoke up first. “You think we might be the only ones left? When we’re gone that’s it”?
Susan broke in, “There must be people somewhere”.
“Girls, we have been listening on the radio and watching for seven years now. We have been broadcasting an †˜anybody out there?’ during that whole time with no response. I think if there was anyone out there we would have heard by now”.
The group got quiet. Megan finally spoke up, “What can we do”?
That was the question I was waiting for. “Well I have been thinking about that for the last few days. I think we are going to have to grow our family. We can start the repopulating here”.
All the girls were quiet. I could see they were thinking this through to its logical conclusion. The girls looked at each other and at me with a questioning look on their faces.
Finally Megan spoke what they must be thinking, “But Danny is the only boy”.
“Yes he is. He is the only one we have. We are five women and one man. For this to work he is our man”.
Looking at the girls faces I could see that Susan was not objecting, no surprise there. I could not tell what Shelly and Terri were thinking. They seemed to be neutral at this point. Looking at Megan’s face I could see she was not sold on the idea yet.
Megan looked at her sisters and then me, “Mom, Danny is our brother. I changed his diapers. I’m not going to jump into bed and do it with him”.
Susan jumped in, “If someone has to I will”.
Terri, not to be left out, “If Susan is I will”.
“Girls, if we are going to do this I think it should be everyone and we should go by age. And Terri, you are still too young”.
Terri folded her arms and sat back in her chair, “What do you mean I’m too young? You are always telling me I’m too young”.
“Well you are too young for this. You are still thirteen. I think you should be at least thirteen, maybe older”.
“You say I’m too young for everything”.
I needed to get control again, “And take a look at your brother. He is not a boy any longer. He’s now as big as your father was. Have you noticed how hard he works outside”?
But Megan was not being distracted, “You said by age. I’m the oldest. I don’t want to get pregnant first. I don’t want to get pregnant at all”.
This is going to take some work, “I understand. You still see Danny as a little boy you played with, teased, and yes, changed his diapers. But you have to look at the bigger issue here. I think we are all that is left. We have an obligation to rebuild and there is only one way to do that. There are no other options. And I think this is something that we should all do. But I am not going to decide this for you. I think you girls should vote on this. Majority wins. I will cast a vote only if there is a tie. Is that okay with everyone? Okay. I’m going to the next room for a few minutes so you all can discuss this among yourselves”.
As I got up the girls looked around at each other. I could see that Megan was trying hard to sway Shelly to her point of view. I pored my 6th cup of coffee and went into the front room. Once I was finished I returned to the kitchen. I looked around at the girls waiting for someone to say something. “Ready for a vote”? Everyone but Megan nodded their head. “In favor”? Terri, Susan and Shelly slowly raised their hands. After several seconds Megan raised her hand a few inches.
“Okay. Here is what we….”
Megan interrupted me, “Does Danny know this? Have you already talked to him”?
“No. I have not talked to him yet”.
“What if he does not want to, you know, do it with us”?
“I don’t think that will be a problem. He is your brother, but he’s also a guy. They don’t always think with the big head”.
“Okay. Here is what we are going to do: We are almost finished with the repairs on one of the bedrooms. As soon as that is finished Danny will move into it. Starting with Megan, one of you will move in with him and stay with him for three months. That should be enough time to get pregnant. After three months you can move back to your own bedroom and the next sister gets to move in for her turn”.
Terri raised her hand.
I smiled when I saw that, “Terri, just speak up. You don’t have to raise your hand”.
She lowered her hand sheepishly, “Why three months? That seems like an awfully long time for each of us”.
“Well, contrary to some of the books you have read here and some of the movies we have, girls do not always get pregnant the first time they have sex. Sometimes it takes a long time. The three months will give us time to be sure. It will also space things out. We do not want to have everybody pregnant at the same time. We have a lot of work to do around here and now we will have even more. We will need to add on to the house so we will have room for the babies. Our lives will be changing quite a bit in the next few years”.
Megan had been looking at the floor for the last few minutes. While the other girls seemed agreeable I was sure she still had reservations. “Do any of you have any questions”?
Terri, Susan and Shelly all shook their heads. Terri leaned over and whispered to Susan and Susan’s face blushed.
I looked back to Megan, “Megan? Do you have any questions”?
With the sound of protest still in her voice she began, “I understand what you are saying, but I don’t see why the oldest has to go first. I don’t want to be the first to get pregnant”.
Okay, here’s the moment. I said, “Megan, you aren’t the oldest”, then I hesitated. I was having trouble finding the words to tell them that I had slept with their brother and was already pregnant. Well not exactly slept. That was my problem.
Megan interrupted me before I could go on, “Yes I am. Only you are older than I am”.
I nodded, “That’s my point. You will not be the first”. Then I just blurted it out, “I am already pregnant”.
I thought everyone’s jaw was going to hit the floor. They all began talking at once. “When”? “How”? I could see Susan was mad.
I held up my hand to get them to quiet down so I could explain. “It was an accident when it happened. We were in the same bed and I was having a dream about your father and I just got carried away. It is not Danny’s fault. It’s mine. But looking back on it now, this was something that had to happen. I will be in this with you”.
Then the girls all jumped up and came over to me all excited asking questions. Even Susan seemed over her anger and was asking questions with the rest of her sisters; “What was it like? When would the baby be born? Does Danny know”? And a hundred more like that.
I smiled at them. “It was nice. I’m about one month along and no, Danny does not know yet. So when he comes home do not say anything. Let me tell him. It can be pretty tough on a guy when he finds out he got a girl pregnant for the first time”.
Susan then asked, “So who wants to come help me with some fix-up on Danny’s bedroom? We can get a bunch of small stuff done before Danny gets back”.
As she looked around at her sisters they all nodded their heads yes, even Megan. They then all jumped up and ran off to get to work. I remained sitting. That was much easier than I had expected. I had expected something from semi acceptance to full-blown refusal. I had ended up with so much more. It appears I have willing participation from three and a half.
Okay, Danny. It’s time for you to come home now.
I was sitting in front of the mirror brushing my hair when my brain finally turned on. You don’t have food poisoning, you idiot, you’re pregnant! Shit! I’ve been so careful and it happened anyway. Now what do I do. Do I keep it? Can I even find the right drugs here if I want to abort. If I keep it, how do I explain this to the kids? What do I say to Danny? We have been having sex almost every day for three weeks. How could I be so stupid? I’m not some silly teenager that thinks it can’t happen to her. I’ve had five kids.
When I got downstairs the kids were all gathered around the kitchen table talking. They had finished breakfast earlier but had saved some for me. Susan started dishing out some scrambled eggs and ham. “No Honey. I’m not really hungry right now. I’ll just have some coffee if you don’t mind. Maybe I’ll have some food later”. Susan got me some coffee and then returned to their conversation. I just sat there, sipping my coffee, staring off into space thinking.
The kids must have been trying to get my attention for a while. When I finally noticed their calling me they were all staring at me expectantly. “Mom, anybody home? We have been calling you for a while now. You seem to be a million miles away”.
“I’m sorry kids. I’m just thinking of all things we have to do this summer before winter comes around again. We need to finish the repairs to the house and the new fences. We need to plant more fruit and vegetables for canning. I guess my mind was off making all those plans”. They seemed fine with my explanation. “What did you want”?
Danny spoke up, “Susan and I have not worked together in a while. We thought it would be nice if we could work on the roof repair together. You want those bedrooms fixed soon and Susan is the best carpenter of the girls”.
When he finished I could see from the expression on his face he really did not expect me to allow the two of them to be alone together. Susan must have egged him into asking. Of course, with what Danny and I have been doing the last few months, it seems a bit hypocritical of me to say no, especially now with his baby in me. “I guess it would be okay”. They both smiled at each other. After a bit more joshing around everyone got up and started cleaning up the remains of breakfast.
I went to the closet and got a sweater and started putting it on. “Hey, kids. I’ve got some things I need to think about. I’m going out to Daddy’s spot for a while. Give me some alone time while I’m out there”.
Without waiting for any acknowledgement I opened the door and went outside. About 200 yards out from the house there was a small rise with several shade trees at the top. While we did not have my husband’s body, we still made a stone and marked a spot for him. I would sometimes come out and talk to him when I got depressed and was missing him. And I certainly needed to talk this out.
This would be our family plot, as we grew older. Then what I just thought hit me, “As we grew older”. There are only six of us now, maybe seven. When we are gone, that’s it. What happens to my kids when I’m gone? What happens to the world when we’re gone? We have not seen any sign of anyone in years now. We monitor the radio at least twice a week for a couple of hours and it was still silent. What happens if we get sick? We are bound to have the occasional accident. We have virtually no medicine and no doctors. Sure, I’m a nurse, and I know a lot, but I have huge limitations. Our numbers will gradually be reduced. I need to start teaching someone for when I am gone.
As I looked down at his marker I found it difficult to picture his face. Danny looked so much like his dad that I saw his face instead. “Honey, I’m sorry. I was weak. I’ve missed you and our sex together. It has been so many years and I just gave in”. I sat down in front of the marker where his body would have been if we had been able to recover it. “I’m going to keep the baby. It will be part of our family”.
For the next couple of hours I sat there thinking. It was still pretty chilly so I finally moved out so the sun could warm me. It took a couple more hours of thinking before I finally accepted what must happen and began my planning. It was lunch time when I finally returned to the house. Susan and Danny were in the kitchen making lunch for everyone. I pulled Danny aside to the living room. “Son, I know it is still a bit early in the spring but I want you to take a quick hunting trip around to the other side of the mountain”. I knew this would take him about three days at the minimum, one to get there, one to find something and then another to return.
“Mom, you are right, it’s pretty early. It will be hard to find anything, plus there won’t be as much meat on whatever I get as if we wait a couple of months”.
“I know. But I was looking at what we have and I would feel more comfortable if we could add a bit to it now”.
He nodded his head, “Ok. When do you want me to go”?
“I think tomorrow morning”. I wanted him to be away from the house as soon as possible so I could have a meeting with the girls. Things had to be decided before Danny could be included.
That night I helped Danny get everything ready. He checked his bow, got a couple of extra strings, made sure his quiver was full and then filled his backpack with some extra clothes and food. We had several guns in the house but my husband had always used the bow and now his son did the same. The guns were just there as an insurance policy in case they were necessary. Originally we thought they might be needed for safety.
When I went upstairs he was already in bed. I was feeling pretty guilty sending him off on an unnecessary trip, but I needed the time with the girls without him around. I quickly undressed and got into bed. As I slipped into bed beside him I got an idea that would ease my guilty conscience. It was also made easier by the decision I had come to earlier today.
“I know you don’t want to go on this hunt right now but perhaps this would help”. I pulled the covers down off him exposing his nude body. Then I slid down sideways in the bed facing his chest. I reached down with one hand, put in on his knee, and then slowly began softly moving it up to the crease at the top of his thigh and then back down again with a caressing touch. I moved up so my head was above his chest, I leaned down and kissed his chest and then moved over to the nipple closest to me and ran my tongue around it before sucking it into my mouth and flicking it with my tongue.
I could tell I was having the right effect on him as he began squirming around in bed. “Mom, do you want to get on top of me”?
“No, I have something else in mind”. I began moving down his chest kissing him lightly. When I reached his belly button I first ran my tongue around it and then vigorously thrust my tongue into it. He obviously liked it. His hips bucked up and something hard and wet bumped into my ear. I moved the hand that was caressing his thigh over and, with a thumb and forefinger, encircled the base of his cock and squeezed. He definitely likes this. I cupped his balls with my palm and fingers and his hips lifted off the bed and the head of his cock popped right up into my face. I turned around to look at him and he had his eyes closed. Well this should open them. I slid down a few inches so my head was poised right in front of the head of his cock. Even in the semi dark I could tell the head was glistening with lubricant. His hips were now moving up and down with my hand firmly gripped around him. I opened my mouth. The next time his hips lifted his cock up to me I just leaned forward and took him into my mouth just past the head of his cock.
A long groan escaped him. “Oh, mom. What are you doing”?
I did not say anything, just began moving my tongue around the head of his cock. I had rarely had oral sex with my husband. He was not a big proponent and I would rather have him in me. But I was really getting off on the reaction my son was having. His hips were really bouncing up and down now. He had put his hands on the back of my head and was pushing my head down his cock. I pulled back and turned to him. “Now I want you to try and not move too much. Just lay back and enjoy the sensations. And keep in mind that my mouth is not like my pussy. You can’t just stuff your cock all the way in it”.
“I’m sorry mom. It just feels so good. If you keep doing that I’m going to cum any minute now”.
“That’s okay. This is just for you. Cum anytime you feel like it”. With that I moved my hand away from the base of his cock so it was just my mouth and tongue that he could feel. I wanted him to concentrate just on the head of his cock.
His hips began thrusting up again. I knew he was getting close. “Mom, I’m going to cum. You need to move your head”. His voice sounded a bit frantic. How sweet, he was concerned I might not want him to cum in my mouth. I did not say a word. I just kept my head bobbing up and down and running my tongue over his cock. With one last grunt, he lifted his hips and held them. His cock seemed to grow even bigger and harder in my mouth. As I moved my tongue to the tip of the head, streams of hot liquid erupted from him into my mouth. The first hit the roof of my mouth and then covered my tongue. The streams kept coming. My mouth was already full with his cock, there was not much room for cum. I had to swallow. That gave me some relief. The jerks of his body became less intense and the streams smaller. When he was finally finished I gave his cock one last suck, in case he had any sperm left, and then cleaned him off with my tongue and swallowed one last time. I let his cock fall with a soft plop on his stomach and then turned towards him. He looked up at my face and touched the side of his mouth with a finger. I touched the side of my mouth and realized I had a line of cum from my mouth down to my chin. I stuck my tongue out to the side and licked off as much as I could reach. He watched with a small grin on his face. He put his arm out to the side. I reached down, pulled the covers up and then moved up alongside him and put my head on his shoulder and my arm across his chest.
He turned to look at me, “Mom, is there anything I can do for you now”?
I gave my head a small shake, “No Honey. I just wanted to do something special for you before you left”.
“Well that was certainly special”. He turned a bit on his side towards me and put his other arm around me. We were both coming down off the high and were beginning to drift off.
“I want you to be careful out there. You have a lot to return to back here”.
He gave me a sleepy “Huh”?
“Just be careful out there”.
He did not reply as he was already asleep. Just like a man. Shoots his sperm into a woman’s mouth and then falls asleep. I reached up and ran my fingers lightly over his face and then went to sleep myself.
The next morning when I woke, Danny was already gone. He had to have left before dawn as it was just getting light now. I got up and began my morning routine. Thank god no nausea this morning. When I got downstairs I made some coffee. I noticed we were almost out. Our supply has lasted quite a long time but not much longer. I took my cup and sat at the kitchen table to go over what I wanted to say to the girls one last time.
After about an hour and a couple more cups, I heard the sounds of the girls beginning to get up. I got up and began moving around the kitchen getting breakfast ready for them. Susan and Terri arrived first and began setting the table. Once Megan and Shelly arrived I began putting the food on the table.
Susan looked around and then asked, “Should I go get Danny”?
I tried to answer casually, “Danny won’t be here for a couple of days. He’s out hunting to restock our supply of meat”.
“Isn’t it awfully early for hunting? There is still snow on the ground a little higher up”.
“Well, it was a sudden decision. He wanted to get out for a while”. With a laugh I added, “Probably too much estrogen in the air around here for him”.
Susan still had a questioning look on her face, “He did not say anything about going out to me”.
“Well, like I said, it was a sudden decision. He made up his mind just last night”. To try and change the subject I added, “Come on, let’s eat before it gets cold”.
Everyone began digging in. I just sat and sipped my coffee, listened to the girls chatter, and in my mind I again ran over what I wanted to say. My thoughts were interrupted when Terri asked, “Mom, aren’t you going to eat”?
I smiled at her and replied, “I’m not really hungry this morning”.
When they were finished eating and had the dishes cleared I gathered up my nerve and spoke up, “Girls, I have a couple of things we need to talk about”. I motioned them to sit down at the table again. Once I had their attention I began, “You all know we have been monitoring the radio and TV to see if there is anyone out there. And Danny has been going over to watch the freeway in the valley. All these years we have been watching, and no sign of anyone. I think we have to accept the idea that there might not be anyone out there. We might be it”. I stopped to let it sink in.
Shelly spoke up first. “You think we might be the only ones left? When we’re gone that’s it”?
Susan broke in, “There must be people somewhere”.
“Girls, we have been listening on the radio and watching for seven years now. We have been broadcasting an †˜anybody out there?’ during that whole time with no response. I think if there was anyone out there we would have heard by now”.
The group got quiet. Megan finally spoke up, “What can we do”?
That was the question I was waiting for. “Well I have been thinking about that for the last few days. I think we are going to have to grow our family. We can start the repopulating here”.
All the girls were quiet. I could see they were thinking this through to its logical conclusion. The girls looked at each other and at me with a questioning look on their faces.
Finally Megan spoke what they must be thinking, “But Danny is the only boy”.
“Yes he is. He is the only one we have. We are five women and one man. For this to work he is our man”.
Looking at the girls faces I could see that Susan was not objecting, no surprise there. I could not tell what Shelly and Terri were thinking. They seemed to be neutral at this point. Looking at Megan’s face I could see she was not sold on the idea yet.
Megan looked at her sisters and then me, “Mom, Danny is our brother. I changed his diapers. I’m not going to jump into bed and do it with him”.
Susan jumped in, “If someone has to I will”.
Terri, not to be left out, “If Susan is I will”.
“Girls, if we are going to do this I think it should be everyone and we should go by age. And Terri, you are still too young”.
Terri folded her arms and sat back in her chair, “What do you mean I’m too young? You are always telling me I’m too young”.
“Well you are too young for this. You are still thirteen. I think you should be at least thirteen, maybe older”.
“You say I’m too young for everything”.
I needed to get control again, “And take a look at your brother. He is not a boy any longer. He’s now as big as your father was. Have you noticed how hard he works outside”?
But Megan was not being distracted, “You said by age. I’m the oldest. I don’t want to get pregnant first. I don’t want to get pregnant at all”.
This is going to take some work, “I understand. You still see Danny as a little boy you played with, teased, and yes, changed his diapers. But you have to look at the bigger issue here. I think we are all that is left. We have an obligation to rebuild and there is only one way to do that. There are no other options. And I think this is something that we should all do. But I am not going to decide this for you. I think you girls should vote on this. Majority wins. I will cast a vote only if there is a tie. Is that okay with everyone? Okay. I’m going to the next room for a few minutes so you all can discuss this among yourselves”.
As I got up the girls looked around at each other. I could see that Megan was trying hard to sway Shelly to her point of view. I pored my 6th cup of coffee and went into the front room. Once I was finished I returned to the kitchen. I looked around at the girls waiting for someone to say something. “Ready for a vote”? Everyone but Megan nodded their head. “In favor”? Terri, Susan and Shelly slowly raised their hands. After several seconds Megan raised her hand a few inches.
“Okay. Here is what we….”
Megan interrupted me, “Does Danny know this? Have you already talked to him”?
“No. I have not talked to him yet”.
“What if he does not want to, you know, do it with us”?
“I don’t think that will be a problem. He is your brother, but he’s also a guy. They don’t always think with the big head”.
“Okay. Here is what we are going to do: We are almost finished with the repairs on one of the bedrooms. As soon as that is finished Danny will move into it. Starting with Megan, one of you will move in with him and stay with him for three months. That should be enough time to get pregnant. After three months you can move back to your own bedroom and the next sister gets to move in for her turn”.
Terri raised her hand.
I smiled when I saw that, “Terri, just speak up. You don’t have to raise your hand”.
She lowered her hand sheepishly, “Why three months? That seems like an awfully long time for each of us”.
“Well, contrary to some of the books you have read here and some of the movies we have, girls do not always get pregnant the first time they have sex. Sometimes it takes a long time. The three months will give us time to be sure. It will also space things out. We do not want to have everybody pregnant at the same time. We have a lot of work to do around here and now we will have even more. We will need to add on to the house so we will have room for the babies. Our lives will be changing quite a bit in the next few years”.
Megan had been looking at the floor for the last few minutes. While the other girls seemed agreeable I was sure she still had reservations. “Do any of you have any questions”?
Terri, Susan and Shelly all shook their heads. Terri leaned over and whispered to Susan and Susan’s face blushed.
I looked back to Megan, “Megan? Do you have any questions”?
With the sound of protest still in her voice she began, “I understand what you are saying, but I don’t see why the oldest has to go first. I don’t want to be the first to get pregnant”.
Okay, here’s the moment. I said, “Megan, you aren’t the oldest”, then I hesitated. I was having trouble finding the words to tell them that I had slept with their brother and was already pregnant. Well not exactly slept. That was my problem.
Megan interrupted me before I could go on, “Yes I am. Only you are older than I am”.
I nodded, “That’s my point. You will not be the first”. Then I just blurted it out, “I am already pregnant”.
I thought everyone’s jaw was going to hit the floor. They all began talking at once. “When”? “How”? I could see Susan was mad.
I held up my hand to get them to quiet down so I could explain. “It was an accident when it happened. We were in the same bed and I was having a dream about your father and I just got carried away. It is not Danny’s fault. It’s mine. But looking back on it now, this was something that had to happen. I will be in this with you”.
Then the girls all jumped up and came over to me all excited asking questions. Even Susan seemed over her anger and was asking questions with the rest of her sisters; “What was it like? When would the baby be born? Does Danny know”? And a hundred more like that.
I smiled at them. “It was nice. I’m about one month along and no, Danny does not know yet. So when he comes home do not say anything. Let me tell him. It can be pretty tough on a guy when he finds out he got a girl pregnant for the first time”.
Susan then asked, “So who wants to come help me with some fix-up on Danny’s bedroom? We can get a bunch of small stuff done before Danny gets back”.
As she looked around at her sisters they all nodded their heads yes, even Megan. They then all jumped up and ran off to get to work. I remained sitting. That was much easier than I had expected. I had expected something from semi acceptance to full-blown refusal. I had ended up with so much more. It appears I have willing participation from three and a half.
Okay, Danny. It’s time for you to come home now.
Chapter 3[B/]
Spoiler:
It had been a tough hunt. It was just too early in the year for this. The snow line was still low. It took me a hard day, even following an old logging trail, to get around the mountain to where I wanted to be. Once I got there it was dusk, so I set up my tent, got something to eat and settled into my sleeping bag. I was so beat I immediately fell asleep.
In the morning I had some dried meat and some water. I cleaned up the camp a bit, left the tent and bag there and set out to where I had a deer blind. It was a good spot overlooking a meadow with lots of grass and a small spring off to one side. I had a spot between a couple of trees where I could stay unseen back in the shadows but still had a good field of vision. I have fashioned a kind of high bench where I could rest my weight on my butt and lean back against a tree as I waited.
It was a long day. When I was little and went out with my dad we would just see a single deer or two in a few days. Now, with almost no hunting these past years, I would see small herds grazing. But in the first day everything I saw was too lean from the winter. I decided to stay an extra day hoping to get something that would make the long walk worthwhile.
That night I made a small fire and warmed up my dinner. Sitting with my back to a tree I relived my last night back at home. Susan had taken my cock into her mouth months ago, and that had felt good, but nothing like what mom had done. And I thought she would get mad when I came in her mouth. I tried to warn her but she did not move. She knew what I was going to do and just let me and then swallowed my sperm. I’m heading back tomorrow whether I get something good or not. I checked my strings to be sure they were okay, and then got in the bag and went to sleep with visions of a head bobbing up and down at my waist.
The next day followed the same pattern as the last. Everything I saw was just too thin. Late in the afternoon, just before I was ready to give up, a buck walked out from between two trees and stopped. He looked my way but I wasn’t worried. I knew I was well hidden. He looked around a bit and then moved out into the meadow and began grazing. He had been eating well. He looked to be somewhere between 150 and 175 lbs. That meant if I’m lucky, I’ll have to pack around 125 lbs home on my back.
Moving very slowly, I carefully pulled two arrows from my quiver. If I missed with the first I would probably not have a chance for a second but it’s best to be prepared. I leaned forward off my seat and notched the arrow. I drew the string back, aimed carefully and let it fly. The deer must have heard some sound I made. He looked up in my direction. I watched him gather himself, ready to bolt, when my arrow hit him right behind the front shoulder. He leapt into the air, landed on his feet several feet away, staggered a few feet and then fell on the ground and did not move. As I walked towards him I felt some regret. He was a beautiful animal. I thought the Indians I had read about had a good idea. They thanked the animal for giving his life that they might eat. As I stood there I gave my thanks and then began to field dress him.
When I was finished I made a pack to carry the meat and went back to my camp. It was still light. I packed up the camp and started on my way home. I had been out an extra day and wanted to get home. I knew mom would be worried. She had made a point of asking me to be careful this time. Whatever distance I can get through today is that much less to cover tomorrow.
The next day I needed several rest breaks along the way. It was late afternoon before I was in sight of home. When I was close enough to make out details it looked like mom was on the porch in her rocking chair. She must have been waiting for me. When she caught sight of me she stood and waved. After I waved back she sat down to wait for me. When I was still around 200 yards out I saw movement on the west wing roof. It looked like Susan and Shelly were up on the roof replacing some of the damaged pieces I had been working on.
Mom must have yelled to them as they first looked at her and then in my direction. When they saw me they both yelled and waved to me. As I waved back I saw Terri and Megan’s heads pop up through the large hole in the roof and wave to me. They must be helping fix up the bedrooms also. That was nice. It had been pretty much just my project all this time.
Before going to the house I stopped at our ice house where we stored the game. I hung it up and then walked on to the house. When I got there everyone was on the porch waiting for me. Before I could get into the house everyone came up and hugged me, even Megan. Mom leaned over the top of the group and gave me a kiss on the cheek. “Hey girls, what’s going on? I’ve only been gone a couple of days”.
I was looking at Megan right in front of me so she replied, “You were supposed to be back yesterday. We…They were getting worried. We are just glad you are back safe”.
It was nice being the center of attention. I might have to stay out an extra day more often. I finally was able to break away when I pointed out that I was dirty, smelly and needed a shower.
When I got to my room I quickly stripped and got in the shower. I was washing my hair when I heard the shower door open. I turned towards the door but my eyes were closed to keep the soap out. I was surprised mom would come in the shower with me so early in the day and with all of the kids still up. Just the thought of her in her with me was causing me to rise to the occasion. I continued washing my hair and waited for her to do something. One of her hands grabbed me and squeezed me. Her other hand began rubbing up and down my shaft and I realized she had the soap in her hand and was washing me. I had finished my hair and now was just standing there with my eyes closed enjoying the sensations. I had been away from mom for just four days but it felt like four weeks. I was ready to get out of the shower, throw her on the bed and jump on top of her.
After making sure my cock was sparkling, she took the soap and began working up my stomach and chest. I was so hard that when she moved closer to reach up my chest I was poking her in the stomach. She swayed back and forth pushing my cock around with her stomach. I finally could not take any more and reached for the soap. I lathered my hands and then reached out to where her breasts should be. I began rubbing my hands in circles around her breasts, over her breasts. My hands were slick from the soap and just glided around her body. It only took a few seconds to realize something was wrong. Mom had nice breasts but she had five kids. Her breasts did not stick out like these. I opened my eyes and was surprised to see Susan. She looked up at me with a big smile, “Welcome home Danny”.
She looked great. If anything she had developed more since I had last seen her naked. Her breasts were larger now. “This is nice but you need to get out of here before mom catches you and we both get grounded”. But even while I said this my hands were still soaping her breasts. They had to be clean enough to eat off by now. And she still had me in hand which had a direct bearing on my thinking processes, or lack of.
“Don’t worry about mom. She is busy with dinner. I thought I would come up and give you my own welcome. I have a few minutes before anyone notices I’m gone, and no way is Megan going to be first”.
I did not quite hear her, “What”?
She pushed my cock down and moved forward so it slipped between her thighs. “I said I have a few minutes, let’s use them wisely”. Because she was so much shorter than me my cock was angled down. She rose up on her tip-toes trying to get my cock angled up but was not having any success. I bent my knees, trying to lower myself to her but the height difference was just too great. I finally put my hands around her waist and lifted her up in the air. She gave a squeal and wrapped her legs around my waist and her arms around my neck. I leaned forward until her back was against the shower wall. She gave a much louder squeal followed by, “The walls cold”.
“Shhh, it won’t be for long”. I carefully lowered her, an inch at a time until I felt my cock begin to push the lips of her pussy apart. I thrust up with my hips as I lowered her some more and slid halfway into her. “Oh Danny, that feels so good”. She felt so tight around me. It was like her pussy was half the size of mom’s. I lifted her up a bit, getting ready to let her down on me even harder when she cried out, “No Danny, don’t stop. Put it back in”.
I pushed my weight against her body and then plunged back into her. I loosened my grip around her waist and her body sagged down so that I was fully imbedded in her. I held it for a moment and then began stroking in and out of her picking up speed. Each stroke in brought a little grunt from her. She moved her mouth over to my ear, “As good as this feels, we need to stop pretty soon. Mom will wonder where we are”. I nodded my head but I did not stop stroking into her. Susan whispered in my ear, “Maybe this will help”. She then turned her head a bit towards me and took my entire ear in her mouth. She ran her tongue around the outside of my ear and then the inside. It was like a switch had been turned on. I thrust as deep as I could into her. She gasped and then began plunging the tip of her tongue in and out of my ear. That was the final straw. I grabbed her butt and pulled her tight against me trying to get deeper into her and began filling her pussy with my sperm. I was sure she had not cum but I just could not take it any longer.
It was another minute before I could move. I leaned back pulling her away from the wall. She gradually lowered her legs then we both began laughing. Her feet were swinging around trying to reach the floor and I was still buried deep in her. As I lowered her some more I finally popped out of her. She looked down at my still semi-erect, though quickly deflating, cock. She reached out and hit me with a finger and I bounced up and down. With some mock indignation I said, “Hey, show some respect”.
She just laughed and grabbed the soap again and began cleaning me a second time. “I’m not sure I should do this. He did not stay clean the last time”. When she was finished she handed me the soap, opened the door and stepped out of the shower. She waved to me saying, “I’ll see you at dinner”.
When I stepped out of the shower there were clothes laid out on the bed for me. As I put them on I kept eying the bed. I was so tired, it looked awfully inviting. I was tempted to lie down and shut my eyes for five minutes when I got a whiff of dinner. Roast, my favorite. I made my way downstairs and went into the kitchen. Everyone was already there. No one was eating, they had been waiting for me. They must have heard me coming as my plate was already filled. I sat down and took a bite. “Delicious mom”.
“Thanks son but I didn’t cook it”. She pointed all the girls. “You need to thank them. They fixed everything, dessert too”. Mom looked at me a bit longer then added, “You might want to take shorter showers though. I think you used all the hot water we have until tomorrow”. Then she looked from me to Susan. I looked over at Susan and noticed her hair was wet. Uh oh, busted. But mom did not say anything.
I looked around at them, “I’m sorry mom. Thanks everyone. The food looks great. I guess I need to stay out more often”.
After some small talk we all dug in and began eating. Every now and then I would look up and catch one or more of the girls looking at me. They would smile and then look down and resume eating. I even caught Megan looking at me funny. Is it just that I’m too tired or is there something going on here? Finally I had to ask, “What’s going on with you all? Why do you keep looking at me like that”?
They looked around at each other. Finally Shelly looked at me and stroked her chin with her fingers. “Are you growing a beard? We were just wondering if you were growing a beard”.
“Am I what”? I reached up to my chin and realized my stubble had grown quite a bit. “No I’m not. I’ve just been out in the woods for several days. I could not shave out there”.
They all just chorused, “Oh” and everyone looked down and continued eating. After a few minutes we were all pretty much finished. Susan got up, went over to the kitchen counter and returned with a large chocolate cake. “This is my contribution”.
All I could think was †˜wow’. We had not had cake in a long time. “That looks good enough to eat”. It was quickly passed around and disappeared in no time at all.
Everything tasted so good but I was beat. I needed to go to bed. I gave my apologies for leaving so early. They all said good night and I went upstairs while they remained sitting around the table. As I climbed up the stairs I could hear some giggling from the kitchen. I wonder what’s up with them. And Megan most of all. She has been really nice to me tonight and she has tormented me for years. What’s with that?
As I was getting into bed the door opened and mom walked in. “Honey, I need to talk to you before you go to sleep”.
I turned over to face her, “Can’t it wait until morning? I’m really tired”.
Without speaking she quickly undressed and got into bed. She moved over to my side and put an arm over me. “Mom, I’m really tired. I’ll be able to do a much better job if we wait until morning”. After the long walk, and mostly after Susan, I did not have much left.
“No Honey. That’s not what I want right now. I need to talk to about something and I need to get it out now”.
“Okay, but give me a shake if I fall asleep”.
“Have you thought about the possibility that we might be the only people left”?
Oh no, we are going to get philosophical. I’m too tired for that. I tried to stifle a yawn but was unsuccessful. “Sure mom. I’ve thought of that. I’m the one that has been out looking for signs of people. I’ve been watching the town, the freeway and local roads. No one. No sign of fires, even in winter. No answer on the radio when we broadcast and we don’t hear anything from anyone else and we have a huge range. Yes, I think about it”.
Mom’s face brightened up. “I’ve really given this a lot of thought while you were gone. I think we need to do something about this. We have been really lucky so far. We have all been healthy and safe from accidents but we cannot count on that forever. Attrition will take its toll on us at some point. Sickness and accidents are bound to happen. We have very limited medicine and no doctors”.
“I try not to think about that. What are you getting at mom”?
“How long can we last? When we are gone that will be it”. She looked down for a moment and then back up at me. “We need to help this situation, change were we are headed”.
“What do you mean? I don’t know anything about medicine. We could try and go down to the town and see what is there. I don’t know if it would still be good after all this time, and the big question is, is the virus still there”?
“Honey that is not what I meant. There is going to be seven of us. We need more people”.
“How are we going to get more people? I’ve been watching and I’ve seen no one”. What did she say? “What do you mean seven of us? There are only six of us”.
“Well that is one of the things that I wanted to talk to you about. I’m pregnant”.
My jaw dropped. “You’re what? How did that happen”?
Mom smiled and tilted her head a bit and just looked at me.
“Oh yeh. I forgot”. How could I be so stupid. “That is so cool”. Then I remembered. “What are the girls going to say”?
“Let’s not worry about that right now. We still have something else to talk about”. She seemed really nervous. Before I could say anything she continued, “We need more people or we are going to die out. My getting pregnant gave me the answer”.
Now maybe if I had not been walking all day I would have caught on quicker. So I just went ahead and stepped in, “That increases us by one but I don’t see how that helps much”.
“You are right Danny. Adding one every year or so does not help us much”. I could see mom was giving me time to figure this out but I was just not up to the task. The news of mom being pregnant had given me a shot of adrenaline but it was long past now. My brain was in a very low gear.
Seeing I was not connecting the dots mom continued, “Danny, there are five of us. We can grow our numbers pretty quickly with FIVE of us”.
The light finally turned on. “You want me to get everyone pregnant! They won’t go for that. Especially Megan. She treats me like worm food. And Terri is too little”.
Mom reached out and rubbed the hair on my cheek and chin. “I guess you are ready for my final surprise. I already talked about this with the girls”. She waited for me to say something.
“No way. I can see…I mean, no way Megan would go for this. And like I said Terri is too little”.
“Megan questioned it at first but she is willing. And yes, Terri is still young, but remember, she is only two years younger than you. When it comes to her turn she will be old enough”.
“What do you mean, her turn”?
“Here is the plan. As soon as we finish the repairs on one of the bedrooms in the west wing you will move to that bedroom”. She held up her hand as I began to protest. I did not want to move from her bedroom. I was fully enjoying my time here. “Then, beginning with Megan,” she held up her hand as I started to protest, “Beginning with Megan, one of your sisters will move into your bedroom and sleep with you for three months. That should be enough time to get pregnant. Then that sister will move back to her own bedroom and another sister will move in. Megan, Shelly and Susan will take nine months. By then Terri should be old enough”.
Mom saw the frown on my face and added, “By then she will be about the same age you were when you started having sex”.
I did not have an answer for that. I reached out and rubbed my hand around on her stomach. “Wow”.
Mom put her hand over mine. “How long do you think it will take to finish one of the bedrooms”?
I answered quickly, “I think I can do it in two days”.
Mom gave me a long look, “I thought you said you still had a few weeks of work to do”.
“Nope, two days”.
Mom snuggled up to me, “Well I guess you are a bit more focused now”.
We laid there holding each other. After a while I noticed mom’s breathing had slowed down. She had drifted off. As tired as I was before, I could not go to sleep now. All I could think of was; the roof needed to be finished, before that I still had a bit of work left on the rafters, the damage to the floor can be sanded and finished later, and….at that point I finally fell asleep.
I was up before the sun and slipped out of bed without waking mom. I threw some clothes on, grabbed a bite and quickly got over to the west wing. When I walked into the first bedroom I saw that the girls had been working while I was gone. The floors had been sanded and just needed a coat of finish. The two walls that needed new paneling had been repaired. I had been there for around an hour when Susan and Terri showed up. “You guys did a lot of work while I was gone”.
They both grabbed hammers and climbed up the ladder to help me, “We wanted to help. Megan and Shelly helped too”.
“That is so hard to believe of Megan”. I was still having trouble with that idea.
Terri looked like she was going to explode, “Has mom talked to you”?
“Yeh, I’ve talked to mom”.
Terri, moved up in front of me. Susan stopped what she was doing and watched us. “So what do you think”?
“About what”?
Terri, looked like she wanted to pound me, “About your getting her pregnant stupid”. And then a big smile broke out on her face, “And getting us pregnant too”.
How do you answer that? I was fumbling for words and all I was able to get out was “unnhh”.
Terri laughed, “You don’t sound too bright. I’m not sure I want anyone stupid to get me pregnant”. Susan started laughing also, “Yeh, we don’t want stupid babies”.
Before I could come up with a snappy return Megan and Shelly walked in below us. “Well where do we start”?
I welcomed the distraction, “I think we should concentrate on the roof”. If we get that finished it will be dry and warm in here and I can move in. The rest were little things and could be taken care of later.
I was wrong about the two days. It actually took three. Three long days, from before daylight to long after dark. One the evening of the third day I took my things from Mom’s bedroom and moved it to my new bedroom. It was rather stark. No pictures or other personal touches. I wasn’t sure what would happen now. No one had talked about mom’s plan other than Terri’s comment about getting her pregnant and that was three days ago. Megan was supposed to be first but I was still apprehensive about her. Years of being teased by your big sister do not fade easily.
After an hour of waiting I finally decided this was all a joke on me and I fell for it. Everyone was in on it and they got me. When I go down to breakfast tomorrow they will all have a good laugh on me. I was trying to think of some way to turn this around on them when the door opened. It was dark so I could not see who it was. I was afraid this might be part of the joke so I kept quiet. Whoever it was moved over by the closet and dropped something light on the floor. I could hear some rustling and then feet moved towards the bed. It must be mom. We have not been together in a week. She could not let me get too embarrassed with this joke and has come over to sleep with me. The bed moved as she got in and moved under the covers. I was just about to say something when Megan’s voice totally surprised me.
“Well, are we going to do it or what”?
It sounded like her old mood. The erection I started to have, thinking mom was here, was now rapidly leaving the station. “I don’t know Megan. Maybe this is not such a good idea”. I knew somehow I was going to end up with her laughing and making fun of me.
“Danny, you are supposed to fuck me. What is mom going to say? What will my sisters say? If we don’t, I won’t get pregnant, and then everyone will laugh at me”.
She is afraid they will laugh at her? “Well I guess we can try”.
I could feel Megan move closer to me, “You have done this before. What do we do now? Do you want me to do anything”?
I reached over to her and put my hand on her stomach. She gave a little start but did not move away or push my hand away. I moved my hand around her stomach not quite touching her breasts and down to just below her belly button. I just wanted her to get used to my touch. I turned on my side, stretched my right arm out and put it under her head. I then pulled her around so she was on her side with her back to me and her head on my arm. I continued rubbing gently, almost a caress, around on her stomach. With my other hand I cupped one of her breasts. I heard her take a deep breath. I moved my hand from one breast to the other, gently squeezing them, cupping them, running my fingers around her nipples, rolling her nipples between my thumb and forefinger, followed by firmly squeezing her breasts. When I squeezed them hard she arched her back into me and I could hear her groan. The erection I had lost before was back. When she moved back against me it was pushed against her back. She must have felt it. She reached around with her left hand between us and wrapped her fingers around me. That made me push my hips against her. As she moved her fingers around me, squeezing me, I moved my left hand lower and began moving it through her pubic hair and down between her legs. At first she squeezed her thighs together trapping my fingers.
“Danny, I don’t know”.
I did not say anything. I pulled my hand from between her thighs and moved my body back just a bit so I could pull her so she was at more of an angle towards me. I took her left leg and pulled it so it bent at the knee over my leg. Her thighs were now spread apart with plenty of room for my hand. I ran it around her pubic hair again and then dipped below so my fingers covered her pussy. She gasped, “Oh, Danny, you shouldn’t”. But she made no effort to stop me or move away. They were just words she thought she should say. I rubbed her pussy lightly for a while, it was damp now, and then moved my hand up so that both hands covered her breasts. Each time I squeezed her breasts she would squeeze my cock. She pushed her head back into my neck and I could hear low moans coming from her. “I did not know it would feel like this. I’ve touched myself but it feels so much better when someone else does it”.
I moved back a little more and pulled her over on her back. I could not see her face in the dark so I could not tell what she was thinking. “Are we going to do it now”?
I nodded, forgetting for a moment she could not see me. “Yes we are”.
“What do you want me to do? Do we do it like the bull does with the cows”?
I smiled at that and kissed one of her nipples and then the other. She reached up with her hands and held my head there so I sucked one nipple into my mouth. She let go of my head and laid her arms back on the bed. I moved over to the other nipple, when I sucked it into my mouth she arched her back pushing her breast up at me. It was like having a pillow pushed in my face. I finally answered her, “Well I could be like the bull but I think you might like this better”. I lifted myself up and moved over above her so my knees were between her spread legs. “Take my cock with your hand and rub it against your pussy”.
She reached down and wrapped her fingers around my cock and as quickly let go. “The end is all wet”.
“That is so it will slide into you easily. See”. I lowered my hips so the head of my cock was poised right at the entrance and pushed forward. The head slide right into her with no resistance. I stopped there and started to pull back so she could have some foreplay. I wanted to take it very slow with her and not scare her. Just as I was about to pop out she reached with her hands to grab my butt. “No, don’t pull out. That feels so good”.
I pushed forward so I was about half way into her. Her hands slowly slid up past the small of my back until she reached my shoulders. She tried to pull me down on her. I let myself lower until my chest was just touching her erect nipples. With my weight still on my hands I moved my chest from side to side just barely brushing against her nipples. I let my chest drop down and rubbed it across her breasts harder. She arched her back, held it there and let out a long groan. “That feels so good”. Her stomach was pushed against mine. Her body felt so hot. When she straightened I let my body drop down with hers. I was lying on top of her now. I turned my head, kissing first her shoulder and then worked my way up to her ear. When I stuck my tongue in her ear she pushed her pelvis up against me. “Can you go in any deeper?” she asked in a hoarse whisper. I answered by plunging the rest of my cock into her until I was pushed firmly against her. I pulled back and plunged in again.
Her legs had been laying flat on the bed but now she lifted her knees until they were along side me and her feet were up in the air. That allowed me to sink even deeper in her. I paused on a deep stroke. I was just enjoying the feeling of being buried in her. She had moved both of her hands back to my butt and was pulling on me trying to get me to begin thrusting into her again. “Come on. Don’t stop”. I smiled at that. Megan was the one I was most worried about; the one who had tormented me as a kid. She moved her mouth close to my ear “Is this how you fucked mom”? I nodded my head against her. “Is this how you got her pregnant”? I nodded my head again. “Well it’s my turn now”.
I almost lost it in her then. She wants to fuck me. She wants me to get her pregnant. Maybe it’s her turn for a treat. She has been so much nicer than what I expected. Maybe I can do something nice for her. I slowed down the pounding I had been giving her.
“No don’t stop. That feels good”. She was still grabbing me, pulling me, trying to get me to thrust into her harder.
“Don’t worry, I’m not. But this will feel even better”. Instead of just thrusting in and out of her I began grinding my pelvis against hers, rubbing that special spot. It was only moments before Megan began groaning and pushing up against me. After about a minute of this she thrust up hard against me several times and then her thighs tightened against my hips. A loud cry escaped her and I could feel her pussy pulse around my cock. That was it for me as I exploded in her. All the cum I had been saving up for the last three days shot out into her pussy. We both continued small thrusts against each other as the feeling gradually died away. She relaxed her thighs and her knees fell back to the bed.
I wrapped my arms around under her and then rolled over, bringing her with me until I was on my back and she was lying on top of me. She laid her head on my shoulder and I put one hand on her head and let the other roam around on her back. We just lay there catching our breath. When we had rolled over I was still partially in her but now I had softened and slipped out of her. She giggled, “He did not say please before leaving”. She sighed, “I did not know it was going to feel so good. Mom said I would like it but how do you know”. I did not say anything, just kept lightly rubbing her back. “I’m sorry I’ve been so mean to you. I don’t know why I did it”.
“Forget about it. We are okay now aren’t we”?
She nodded her head. “Do you think I’m pregnant now”?
“I don’t know. I think it took several times for mom”.
She lifted herself up a bit on her arms. The moon had risen so we had just enough light in the room so we could see each other now. She looked down at me with a wry smile on her face. “Maybe if we did it again it would help”.
I looked from her face down to her breasts where they were lying against my chest. “That sounds like an excellent idea but I think I need some recovery time”. I pushed my hips up so my limp cock flopped a bit between her thighs. “Well I don’t, but I think he does”.
She got a bigger smile on her face. “I think I might be able to help. Susan had a talk with me earlier tonight and she gave me some instructions for fixing this situation if it should arise, or not rise”.
She rose up on her hands and knees and turned around to face my feet. As it turned out Susan had given her the correct instructions and Megan followed them perfectly.
Two weeks later Megan missed her period. Mom said don’t make too much out of this yet. Megan had been late before and had even missed a period before. Mom said we should just continue on as normal. Now the positive side of missing a period is that you can continue on as normal. And our normal continued every night and every morning.
Over the next month any doubt that she was pregnant was laid to rest. Megan had a brief bout with morning sickness and was positive she was going to die, and her breasts began to get super sensitive. Sensitive to the point that anytime my hands got close to them they got a good slap. Though upon further reflection, that might have been her general reaction to getting pregnant.
It was the middle of summer and the three months went by fast. We finished the repairs on the house so now we had a couple more bedrooms to spread around in. That is until babies began to arrive. Mom was getting pretty fat, though I had to be careful not to say that around her. Apparently women react negatively to insightful comments like that. Megan was also beginning to show. We also spent quite a bit of time at the swimming hole. It was cool there in the shade and mom liked to float in the water. It took all the weight off her feet.
After swimming for a while on one particularly hot day, mom called us all together in the shade. “It is too late this year, but next spring we need to start a major building project on the house. I don’t know if anyone has thought through what we are doing but we are going to be adding three or four children to our family every year. We will run out of room in the house very quickly. It will take us quite a while to add space. We need to start the planning and begin preparing some wood now”.
She was right. None of us had given a thought to the space the new kids would need. Susan and I started talking about what kind of structure would work. We decided that the easiest route would be just to extend the house in a log cabin fashion. We did not have the tools to try and make the lumber used to build the house we have. We then started talking about which trees to fell and when. I could hear mom, Terri, Shelly and Megan talking about where the additions should be made and what the additions to be used for. When we got back together as a group I found that they had decided that we should make the house look something like a capital letter E. The first phase was to extend the house to make it a bit longer and then over the next few years, add three wings coming off it. After that we could then cap off the end of the wings with a long wing like our current house.
After kicking around ideas for a while we began drifting back to the house. I left first but I had not gone far when Shelly caught up to me. I looked over at her. She had grown in the last year. She was now almost as tall I am. She must be around 5’ 11”. Her body had kept up with her also. She had large breasts with small nipples. Her skin was really tanned. She was out in the sun all the time and like the rest of us almost never wore clothes in the heat of the summer.
She walked silently by my side for a while before finally saying, “It’s my turn now”.
Ever the quick one I quickly responded, “Uh”?
“It’s been three months. It’s my turn”.
“Wow, three months have gone by already”?
Shelly’s face dropped. “You don’t want to have turn with me? You want to stay with Megan”?
“No. That’s not what I meant. I want my turn with you. I just meant that the summer has gone by so fast. We have been so busy with the house and everything that it just flew by”.
I looked over at her and her face brightened back up. As we continued to the house Shelly reached over and put her hand in mine. Once we got to the house she left me for her room saying she would see me later. When I got to my room I could see that all of Megan’s things were gone. It left me with a strange feeling. We had been sleeping together for three months. She was pregnant with my baby. Before we had been brother and sister with all the things siblings share and the conflicts. Now we were different. Really more like lovers, or, as it came to me, more like husband and wife.
I was also feeling some guilt. While I was sad that Megan would not be sleeping with me tonight I was getting excited over the thought of Shelly. I was actually getting the beginnings of an erection. And of course that is the moment Shelly chose to come in with an armful of her things. Before I could turn around she was standing in front of me, looking down. She had a big smile on her face, “I don’t know if I’m supposed to hug him or salute him”. She put her things down on a chair, walked over and pushed the door shut and then turned to me. When she had turned I sat down on the bed thinking that possibly I could hide this thing. No such luck. Sticking out like a flagpole. It’s not that I was embarrassed to have an erection; it was just that normally you do not indicate your interest in a girl by sticking said erection out at her.
Shelly came over to the bed and sat next to me. I looked at her and her eyes were fixed on my lap. “I’ve never seen it this close. Can I touch it”? Without waiting for me to say anything she reached out with a finger and pushed it to one side. When she moved her finger away I just swayed back and forth until I came back to attention, pointing straight up. She giggled and then reached out again and wrapped her fingers around me. “It is much harder than I expected”. I just kept my mouth shut and let her explore. She gripped my firmly and began sliding her hand up and down. “Megan says you like this”.
Megan was right. “What else did she say”?
Playing coy she answered, “Oh, a little of this and a little of that”.
I decided two could play at this game. I reached around her with my right hand and put my hand on her hipbone. I slowly moved it up her side and then cupped the underside of her breast in my hand and gave her a little squeeze. I moved one finger over the breast and brushed it back and forth over her nipple. It also rose to attention though it did not reach the height of mine. “Did she happen to mention this”?
Shelly had stopped moving her hand on my cock when I grabbed her breast. She let go of me and turned to face me. She put a hand on my chest and pushed me back on the bed. As she started to climb over my legs I said, “Wait, it’s going to be dinner soon”?
She was now kneeling on the bed, with her pussy positioned directly above me. She took me in her hand again and pointed me at her pussy. “I’m not very hungry”. She squatted down just a bit and I felt myself enter her just an inch or so. I was dying to thrust my hips up. I wanted to be deep inside her. I closed my eyes for a moment, “I’m not so hungry either”.
She let go of me and put both hands on my chest. She began pushing back at me and then pulling back up. Repeating it over and over, just letting me go in an inch and then pulling back. I strained to push up at her, to meet one of her pushes at me. She dug her nails into my chest. “No, let me”. I went with the flow. This is her first time. Let her do what she wants. I reached up with both hands and cupped her breasts. I alternated light rubbing with firmly squeezing and then brushing her nipples with my fingers.
After several minutes of this I noticed she was pushing me deeper in her. Finally with a hard thrust she completely impaled herself on me. She then changed her movement. She began rocking her pelvis forwards and backwards on me. I realized she is rubbing her clitoris on me. Megan must have told her about this. She could not have come up with this on her own, the very first time she has sex.
She just sat on me, with her eyes closed and continued rocking back and forth. A funny thought hit me. She barely knows I’m here. Well that is not entirely true. I do have something sticking up inside her, but I think that is the only part she is aware of right now. When I recognized the signs that she was close to an orgasm I tried to help her along, rubbing her stomach up to her breasts, rubbing her nipples. When it hit her she arched her back and let out a loud cry. As I reached for her hips and pulled her tight against me the thought ran through my head, “Well everybody knows our three months have started”.
When she finally collapsed on me she was breathing so hard she could not speak. I wrapped my arms around her and waited for her to catch her breath. When her breathing returned to normal I moved my hands down to her butt and pulled her tight against me. With her tight against me I thrust up hard into her. She sucked her breath in, “Oh yes, do it again”.
I was happy to oblige. I repeated the hard thrust into her. I relaxed a bit, pulling back partway out of her and then thrust back hard and deep into her again. I began moving faster, picking up speed until it was a continuous motion, just constant plunging into her. The tingle began building in my balls. I was just seconds away. Shelly quickly wrapped her arms around my neck, hugging me tightly. I pushed down on her butt hard, trying to get as deep into her as I could, and finally exploded in her. Stream after stream erupted from me, filling her. I kept thrusting up against her with each eruption until finally I was drained. We lay there for another half hour, her on top of me, wrapped in each others arms until finally she gave a little cough. The squeeze of her muscles with her cough popped me right out. We both laughed and I added, “Well I know when I’m not wanted”.
She took my head in her hands and kissed my on the cheek and then turned my head and kissed me on the mouth several times. “Oh no, you are very wanted. That was fantastic. I did not know it would feel like that. If it was not dinner time now I would show you just how wanted”.
As a response I caressed her back, from her shoulders down to her butt, back and forth with both hands. After a few minutes we got up and straightened out the bed. Shelly, nude as usual, started to walk out the door to help in the kitchen.
“Shelly, do you really want to go out like that”?
“Why not, it’s hot”.
“Megan might have left one thing out when she told you about †˜this and that’. Shelly, with the open door in her hand looked back at me with a frown. “You are kind of filled with sperm right now. A lot of it is going to leak out when you go out there”.
Shelly looked down, and sure enough, she saw something wet slowly running down the inside of her thigh. “What am I going to do”?
“Well you need to wear some shorts or something”.
Her face turned bright red. “But they will know what we were doing”.
“Well it is either that or a big wet spot on the chair. I’ll let you pick”.
She scowled at me, “This is not fair. You get to just wipe off and go on like nothing happened”.
I just smiled back. She scooted out the door. When I saw her next she was in the kitchen wearing a t-shirt and shorts. It was obvious from the looks of everyone they knew what had happened earlier and had been teasing her over it.
When dinner was finished mom walked out of the kitchen with me while the rest of the girls began cleaning up. “You need to do a few hunting trips soon. According to the almanac this looks to be a rough winter. I want us to set for a long hard winter soon”.
I nodded. “How about I take one in three days? That will give me some time to finish a project”.
Mom smiled, “Yes, a project. I think I saw the results of your project earlier”.
Now it was my turn to blush. I stammered, “That wasn’t what I meant. Well, not all of it anyway”.
Mom continued, “I want you to take Terri with you. You have taught her to be a pretty good shot with that rifle. She needs to take the next step using it. Just shooting at targets is not real life. If it is ever necessary to use it I want to know she will not freeze”.
I looked up sharply, “Do you think….”?
“No, I don’t think there is any one out there. I truly think we are alone. It just pays to be prepared”.
Three days later Terri and I were up at dawn preparing to set out. Shelly had woken me an hour earlier to show me what I was going to be missing over the next few days. She had been very enthusiastic and now after my good night’s sleep I was tired again and she had promptly gone back to sleep.
Mom had risen also and fixed us a good breakfast. As we readied to go out the front door I gave mom a hug and a kiss. I rubbed her swollen tummy and gave it a kiss for good luck. As Terri was giving mom a hug I saw Megan walking towards me. She hugged me and kissed me goodbye. I gave her tummy a rub and a kiss also. She looked like she was going to cry so I gave her another hug. Through some tears she said, “Damn hormones. You come back safe or I’ll kick your butt all over the place”.
Terri and I put our packs on and started our walk. It was going to take most of the day to get there so we needed to get going. We would have looked pretty funny to anyone that could have seen us. We both wore shirts because of the packs and we wore shoes for the walking and that was all. We had been pretty lucky all this time. None of the clothes us kids had brought here fit us but mom and dad had brought plenty. Dad’s clothes fit me perfectly and the girls could wear moms.
We did not say a lot as we walked. I pointed out some places and told some stories about previous hunts. I took one detour and we walked down a ridge until we could see the nearby town. It was miles in the distance but you could see the entire length of the town and many farms around it. I had not watched it yet this summer and thought we could take the time now. Nothing. No sign of any life. Trees had broken up some of the streets. Everything was overgrown. When I saw something move I grabbed the binoculars out of the pack and zeroed in on it, a deer. Then behind it I saw a few more deer feeding. That further confirmed my observation. Deer would not be walking around where there were people.
Our detour had delayed us a bit so it was early evening before we reached where I wanted to camp. It looked like a summer storm was fast coming in so we quickly pitched our tent and fixed dinner. There were dark clouds coming over and I could feel the temperature dropping rapidly. I now wished we had worn more clothing, or at least had brought some with us. Because I knew we would be carrying a full load back I had deliberately packed light.
Just as we finished eating the first drops began to fall. Terri took our sleeping bags into the tent while I gathered our gear. It was not a big tent so we were going to be packed. Usually I was alone and the gear could stay outside. When I crawled in I was surprised to see how the sleeping bags set out. Each was fully open, one on the top of the other. I caught Terri’s eye with a questioning look on my face. She just gave me that “Well think it through stupid”, look. “We don’t have enough room in here with all our stuff to lay out two sleeping bags. We will fit in better this way. Besides I’m cold. It will be warmer sleeping next to you”.
Well, she was right about that. But I was uncomfortable. For the last six months or so I had been sleeping with three different women and having sex with them day and night. I had not really paid much attention to Terri in that time. She was my little sister but she was developing into a beautiful girl. She was still a bit on the small side compared to her sisters. She was only around 5’ 4” and could not have weighed over 100 lbs. But those 100 lbs had been put in all the best places. Her breasts were best described as “perky”. She was going to be fourteen in another month. That meant it was her turn after Susan.
Just thinking about this was starting to get me hard. I was still on my hands and knees on top of the sleeping bag. I looked over at Terri. She was sitting cross-legged on the edge of the bag. She started pulling her t-shirt over her head but was having some difficulty with it because the top of the tent was so low. I took the opportunity provided by her t-shirt difficulties to take a good look at my littlest sister. I was wrong, her breasts weren’t just perky, they were perfect. I looked farther down and saw that I could see the lips of her pussy. I’m so hard. I have to stop this. As I lifted my eyes back to her breasts I realized that she had her t-shirt off now and was looking at me. She caught me. I could feel the heat building in my face. I mumbled something about it being time to go to sleep, pulled the top bag up so I could get in, and quickly turned over away from her.
She did not say anything. In a minute or so I felt the bag move as she got in. She moved up behind me and put an arm around me. Her hand ended up on my stomach. I was afraid she might move it an inch or so and bump into my erection. I took her hand in one of mine and moved it up a bit and held it.
We laid there for a minute before she finally spoke, “Danny? Am I ugly”?
“No Terri, what ever gave you that idea? You are really pretty”.
“You looked at me and then just turned away with a funny look on your face. I thought maybe I was ugly”.
“No, like I said, you are really pretty”.
She was quite for a while. “It is still early and I am not sleepy. Can we talk for a while”?
I nodded my head but stayed where I was. I still had a massive hard-on and did not want to turn over. “Could you turn around so I can talk to you”?
Oh, great. Maybe she won’t notice. I turned over on my back. I glanced down and saw the bag sticking up.
“What is sex like? I have talked to Megan and Shelly but they say I’m too young and to go away. But I’m almost fourteen and in a few months we will be sleeping together and I don’t know much. I don’t want to be bad at it”.
I was speechless. She was talking about sleeping with me as if it was playing tag. No embarrassment, no nervousness. I’m the nervous one.
She pulled the bag down and scooted up a bit. Her left breast was now lying right on my arm. “My breasts are too small. I wish I had bigger ones like Shelly and Megan. You probably will not even want to have sex with me because I’m too little”.
Dead if I do and dead if I don’t. “You are not too small. You are a perfect size. Bigger is not better. It is just bigger. Your breasts are perfect for you”.
She had a disbelieving look on her face, “You are just saying that. You have to because I’m your sister. You would not even want to touch mine because they are so small”.
Before I could even think about the consequences I reached out to her, “See that is not true”. I cupped her breast in my hand. Her skin felt so smooth. I could feel her nipple get hard in the middle of my palm. I moved my hand caressing her breast.
She rose up a bit so the other appeared. “What about the other one? Isn’t it too small”?
I reached to it and gave it the same attention. I knew I had to stop but just couldn’t. If I got any harder I was going to break through the bag.
Earlier when I turned over on my back my right arm was along my side. When Terri moved closer to me I had left it there. When she rose for me to touch her breasts she had moved her body so that her mound was pushed against the back of my hand. As she pushed it slightly against me I could not help myself and pushed back gently against her.
I don’t know if she even realized she was grinding it against my hand ever so slowly.
She pulled the bag covering me down to my waist and traced a finger around my nipples. When I did not say anything she said, “That does not do the same thing for you that it does to me”?
“No. I guess guy’s nipples are not as sensitive as girls”.
Her fingers moved down to my belly button. She looked lower and saw the bag sticking up. “Am I doing that to you”? Without waiting for me to say anything she grabbed the bag and pulled it off me. The sudden movement of the bag made my cock wave around.
She laughed and grabbed it to make it stop. “I have not seen it this big in a long time”.
I felt like that time I had a cold and a high temperature and I could not think right. My head was all foggy. She had a hold of my cock and I just wanted to turn over and fuck her. But what would mom say? This is not what she planned. Here I was with a beautiful girl who wanted to know more about sex and had a vise grip on my cock. I did the only thing I could think of, I closed my eyes and let out a long groan.
Then I wondered, “What do you mean, †˜this big in a long time’”?
“I saw you and mommy one time. That time before you went on a hunting trip and she talked to us while you were gone. I went to your bedroom to ask mom a question. I guess you did not hear me knock. When I opened the door mommy had her mouth on your penis and was sucking it. Does that feel good”? Without even waiting for me to answer she continued, “What am I saying, of course it feels good. I saw the look on your face. It seems like a funny thing to do but I know you liked it”.
Then with no warning at all she leaned over and put my cock in her mouth. I almost levitated off the bed. She must have watched mom pretty closely. She began to move her head up and down sucking on my cock with slurping sounds. I was finally able to get out, “Like a lollipop”.
She pulled my cock out of her mouth, “Huh”?
“Remember the tootsie rolls we used to have”?
“Oh yeh”. She closed her mouth back over my cock and I could feel her tongue begin to swirl around the head. I turned my hand around and found I could now reach between her legs. I started moving my hand up and down the inside of her thigh. I moved down near her knee and then slowly back up until the top of my thumb was pushed against her pussy. I rubbed in small circles and then went down the other thigh. I kept repeating this until her pussy was very wet. I positioned my hand so that part of it was pushed against her clitoris and then slid one finger in her pussy. I began rubbing my hand against her clitoris while moving the finger around in small circles in her pussy. It was so small and tight I briefly wondered if I would even fit. She pulled my cock out of her mouth and laid her head down on my stomach. “That feels so good. It’s much better when someone else does it”.
She started to put my cock back in her mouth but I put my hand out to stop her. “Any more and I’ll be squirting all over the place”.
She immediately jumped up and lay on top of me. “That would be a waste. The only place you are going to squirt is in me”.
“I don’t think that would be such a good idea”. But I made no effort at all to move her away. She was holding herself up on her arms above me and her breasts were right in front of my face. Her sisters must have told her a bit more because she lowered herself just enough that one of her nipples brushed against my lips, back and forth. Then she moved farther to the side so that the other nipple took its place. I parted my lips and her nipple slipped between them. I ran my tongue around and over it and then sucked more of her breast into my mouth. “Oh Danny, that feels so good”.
She rocked back on me and her pelvic bone slid right over the top of my cock. I reached up to caress her breasts. When my hands touched her she leaned into my hands letting me hold her up. She lifted up off me a bit, reached down for my cock, positioned it where she wanted it and then began moving back until the swollen head was pushed against her pussy. We were both so wet that the head slid right in but that is where it stopped. It was so tight in her. It felt tight when I put a finger in her and this was no finger. “Danny, what do I do? I want you in me so bad but it is so big. I don’t know if it will fit. You fucked everyone else, why doesn’t it fit in me”? She sounded just a bit scared but very determined.
I was no longer thinking about anything but how to bury myself deeper in her. “Just go very slow and let your body get used to it. You will gradually stretch and I will fit”.
I pulled back just an inch and then pushed back in. After doing this several times I felt like I was sliding in just a bit further. Terri was hugging me so tight and really breathing hard. “Yes Danny. That feels much better. Don’t stop”. Now every time I pushed into her she was pushing back. After a few strokes she began pushing harder. I stopped my thrusting and she continued. Looking down I could see her sliding up and down on my shaft. After a few minutes of this I was only halfway into her. She began moaning while dropping harder on me, driving me deeper into her. Finally I could no longer see my cock. When I was completely buried in her she stopped moving. “What do I do now? Do I keep moving up and down”?
“Do what feels good. You can keep moving up and down or you could do this”. I pushed her up higher so she was sitting on me and I could move my hands. I reached down to her hips and rocked them back and forth. “Or you might like this”. Holding her hips, I then moved her in a circling motion on me, letting her grind her pelvis against mine. I reached up to cup her breasts again with the intention of rubbing her nipples, but she leaned forward again, resting her weight on my hands. She closed her eyes, let her arms dangle down and began experimenting with the three methods I had shown her. She first began bouncing up and down again really fast. She was so tight on me it was like I was jerking off. I was ready to cum now. After a while she stopped and began grinding her pelvis in a circle against mine. Her breath became a bit ragged. When she finally began thrusting back and forth against me really hard I knew she was getting close. Her eyes were closed, her mouth was hanging open and she had this dreamy look on her face. Finally she reached the breaking point, “Danny, it’s too tight”. I had no idea what she meant by that but I began to make my own sharp, hard thrusts into her. I had been holding back as long as I could. When her pussy began clenching me I finally let go, shooting long streams of cum into her. As the intensity of the orgasm slowly passed for both of us we continued very slowly pushing at each other. I was deep in her and wanted to stay that way for a while. Just the sensation of sliding back and forth in her felt so good. She had collapsed on me earlier and as I pushed very slowly up into her she would respond by pushing back to meet me. Every few strokes she would let out an “mmmmm”.
When we finally stopped moving and had caught our breath, we just laid there. I could hear a heavy rain falling outside. I wondered when that had started. The last sound I remember was just a few drops falling on the tent. The wind was also really picking up. It was a good thing we had staked the tent down really well. I had been unconsciously rubbing my hands on Terri’s back and I finally noticed her making kind of a purring sound. “You like that”?
“Yes, don’t stop”. She turned her head and kissed me on the neck and then laid her head back on my chest. “That was so much better than I expected. Thank you”.
I was curious. “What did you expect”?
“I don’t know. The girls said I would like it but how do you know. I’ve seen our animals do it but the male just jumps on the female and then it is over. It never looks like either of them really enjoys it”. She stopped for a minute and then added, “Will I be pregnant now”?
“Well first, I’m glad you enjoyed it. Second, I don’t know. Sometimes I guess it takes just once, sometimes more. From what mom said I think it also has a lot to do with when your period is”.
Terri turned her head again and nuzzled my neck. “If it takes more than once, maybe we should do it again”.
I would have loved to but I was beat, literally, “Your brother is getting old. I need my rest. We have a lot of work tomorrow. You should be going to sleep also”.
“Okay, but I bet you will be rested in the morning”.
“We’ll see”. But I was sure I would be.
Terri, slid off me, turned on her side, pulled my arm out so she could us it as a pillow and moved back against me. “Put your arm around me. I’m getting cold”. I did as I was told and we both quickly fell asleep.
When we woke the next morning Terri won her bet, I was completely rested. Though as it turned out, I was pretty exhausted by the time we had breakfast. The hunt went really well. Terri spotted and shot two very nice sized deer within just hours of our starting. Mom should have no worries about her shooting skill or her willingness.
The next morning as we lay naked against each other, I was thinking about our reception at home. Mom was going to be upset and Shelly would probably be hurt. It was supposed to be her time and her I am out in the woods fucking Terri instead of her.
Terri did not seem concerned at all. “Don’t worry about mom. I know what to say to her. When you see Shelly, tell her that you love her, pick her up and carry her off to the bedroom and show her”.
When we got home that night everything turned out exactly as Terri had predicted. As soon as I saw Shelly, I picked her up, told her I loved her and missed her and took her to our bedroom to prove it.
Later that night I went into the kitchen to get something to eat. I found Terri and mom there talking in candle light. "Why the candles"?
Mom looked up, "I was just telling Terri. While the two of you were gone we had a storm".
"We had a good taste of it out there. Some really good wind and a lot of rain. It got really cold".
"We did not see a lot of rain but the wind blew a branch into our solar panels. Several of them are damaged. We have enough power for the refrigerator but too much of anything else drains the batteries too fast. Movies are going to be a luxury now".
"Can we repair them"?
"We have the manuals but I don't think we have the skills or the technical knowledge to do much".
Everyone was quiet for a while and I dug into a sandwich.
Terri broke the silence, “Mom, I’m pregnant”.
I choked on my food.
Mom’s face clouded over. She looked at me and I was thankful the guns were all locked away. But I was also puzzled, why is she so upset when we would be sleeping together in just a few months anyway?
“What makes you think you are pregnant? When did….Where….Why…” She was having a problem finishing her sentence. She stopped for a moment, collected her thoughts and then calmly asked, “I'm sorry. To me you are still my baby. When did this happen”?
Terri, equally calm, replied, “On our hunting trip”.
“You have only been gone a couple of days. What makes you think you are pregnant? Having sex one time does not always get you pregnant”?
“I just know I’m pregnant". And with a big smile she added, "And it wasn't just once. It is just a feeling I have. I know I'm pregnant. And before you say anything, I know it was not my turn yet. But I have been thinking about that. I don’t think we should have these long, three month turns. If we do that a couple of us will be pregnant every year during the summer. That is right when we are needed most for work. Plus it means we are pregnant during the heat of the summer. Of course I’ve never been pregnant before, but looking at you, that does not seem like a great idea”.
Mom just looked back at Terri. I could see she was impressed with what Terri had said and was thinking about it. I was pretty much forgotten. “I see you have given this some pretty good thought”. After a pause she added, “And after listening to you I think you are right”.
I thought this would be a good time to forget about eating and just go back to bed. As I moved to get up mom turned to me. “I have not forgotten about you. You know you were not supposed to sleep with Terri until her birthday. I hope you have not hurt Shelly’s feelings with this”.
Terri then surprised me, “Mom. It’s not his fault. It’s mine. I seduced him. He really did not have a chance”.
What?
Mom looked back at her, “You have always been pretty good at getting what you want. I bet it was not too hard either”.
Terri smiled, “No, he was pretty easy”.
Hey, I’m right here. I can hear you. I knew there was no way I was going to win any points so I made the best of the situation. I said my goodnights and went back to bed with Shelly.
As it turned out Terri was right. She was pregnant. A few months later mom had a baby girl. It was a big occasion. We had all seen births in the barn but there is a big difference when it is your mom. A few months later Megan had her baby, another baby girl. Another few months and Terri, followed by Shelly just a couple of weeks later, both had baby girls. When Susan completed the picture with her baby girl it seemed like our entire plan was doomed to failure. No one spoke much about it but I know mom worried about it. She said that my sperm determines the sex and that some men do not produce sperm that makes boys. It looks like I’m one.
The second year we changed our sleeping pattern. The girls would decide when they wanted to give birth and time sex with me accordingly. Sometimes it would be a different person each night. Other times one of my sisters, or my mother, would stay with me several days. But our luck with the births did not change. Everyone had girls the second year also.
It was not until the third year that we three boys and two girls. Finally, this might work. There was hope down the line. In the sixth year mom finally said “no more baby factory”. She continued having sex with me on a somewhat infrequent basis, but she had decided she was too old to keep having children and that was it for her.
After five years we had really grown as a family. There were now twenty three kids running around creating havoc; sixteen girls and seven boys. The house had changed a lot in that time also. It had to. We needed the space for all the kids. I could see that in the next couple of years we were going to have to spread out. We needed more space for living and for growing food.
I was thinking about this one morning before breakfast. I had gone outside and was standing by a fence watching one of our bulls mate with a cow. After he was done he moved on to a second and then a third before the mood must have left him. He was standing there eating some grass when another female came up and presented herself. He ignored her and continued eating. After a minute the female turned around and butted him with her head. With less than his earlier enthusiasm he finally acquiesced, mounted her, and when he was finished, resumed eating. I smiled at the sight, “I feel your pain”.
“Daddy, breakfast is ready”.
I had not heard Mary come up. She was Megan’s oldest. She took my hand and we walked back to the house.
I had just finished eating and had pushed my chair back from the table. I was just sitting there watching everyone, listening to the conversations, enjoying the company when Janice ran up and jumped in my lap. “Can I go out and talk to the people”?
In the morning I had some dried meat and some water. I cleaned up the camp a bit, left the tent and bag there and set out to where I had a deer blind. It was a good spot overlooking a meadow with lots of grass and a small spring off to one side. I had a spot between a couple of trees where I could stay unseen back in the shadows but still had a good field of vision. I have fashioned a kind of high bench where I could rest my weight on my butt and lean back against a tree as I waited.
It was a long day. When I was little and went out with my dad we would just see a single deer or two in a few days. Now, with almost no hunting these past years, I would see small herds grazing. But in the first day everything I saw was too lean from the winter. I decided to stay an extra day hoping to get something that would make the long walk worthwhile.
That night I made a small fire and warmed up my dinner. Sitting with my back to a tree I relived my last night back at home. Susan had taken my cock into her mouth months ago, and that had felt good, but nothing like what mom had done. And I thought she would get mad when I came in her mouth. I tried to warn her but she did not move. She knew what I was going to do and just let me and then swallowed my sperm. I’m heading back tomorrow whether I get something good or not. I checked my strings to be sure they were okay, and then got in the bag and went to sleep with visions of a head bobbing up and down at my waist.
The next day followed the same pattern as the last. Everything I saw was just too thin. Late in the afternoon, just before I was ready to give up, a buck walked out from between two trees and stopped. He looked my way but I wasn’t worried. I knew I was well hidden. He looked around a bit and then moved out into the meadow and began grazing. He had been eating well. He looked to be somewhere between 150 and 175 lbs. That meant if I’m lucky, I’ll have to pack around 125 lbs home on my back.
Moving very slowly, I carefully pulled two arrows from my quiver. If I missed with the first I would probably not have a chance for a second but it’s best to be prepared. I leaned forward off my seat and notched the arrow. I drew the string back, aimed carefully and let it fly. The deer must have heard some sound I made. He looked up in my direction. I watched him gather himself, ready to bolt, when my arrow hit him right behind the front shoulder. He leapt into the air, landed on his feet several feet away, staggered a few feet and then fell on the ground and did not move. As I walked towards him I felt some regret. He was a beautiful animal. I thought the Indians I had read about had a good idea. They thanked the animal for giving his life that they might eat. As I stood there I gave my thanks and then began to field dress him.
When I was finished I made a pack to carry the meat and went back to my camp. It was still light. I packed up the camp and started on my way home. I had been out an extra day and wanted to get home. I knew mom would be worried. She had made a point of asking me to be careful this time. Whatever distance I can get through today is that much less to cover tomorrow.
The next day I needed several rest breaks along the way. It was late afternoon before I was in sight of home. When I was close enough to make out details it looked like mom was on the porch in her rocking chair. She must have been waiting for me. When she caught sight of me she stood and waved. After I waved back she sat down to wait for me. When I was still around 200 yards out I saw movement on the west wing roof. It looked like Susan and Shelly were up on the roof replacing some of the damaged pieces I had been working on.
Mom must have yelled to them as they first looked at her and then in my direction. When they saw me they both yelled and waved to me. As I waved back I saw Terri and Megan’s heads pop up through the large hole in the roof and wave to me. They must be helping fix up the bedrooms also. That was nice. It had been pretty much just my project all this time.
Before going to the house I stopped at our ice house where we stored the game. I hung it up and then walked on to the house. When I got there everyone was on the porch waiting for me. Before I could get into the house everyone came up and hugged me, even Megan. Mom leaned over the top of the group and gave me a kiss on the cheek. “Hey girls, what’s going on? I’ve only been gone a couple of days”.
I was looking at Megan right in front of me so she replied, “You were supposed to be back yesterday. We…They were getting worried. We are just glad you are back safe”.
It was nice being the center of attention. I might have to stay out an extra day more often. I finally was able to break away when I pointed out that I was dirty, smelly and needed a shower.
When I got to my room I quickly stripped and got in the shower. I was washing my hair when I heard the shower door open. I turned towards the door but my eyes were closed to keep the soap out. I was surprised mom would come in the shower with me so early in the day and with all of the kids still up. Just the thought of her in her with me was causing me to rise to the occasion. I continued washing my hair and waited for her to do something. One of her hands grabbed me and squeezed me. Her other hand began rubbing up and down my shaft and I realized she had the soap in her hand and was washing me. I had finished my hair and now was just standing there with my eyes closed enjoying the sensations. I had been away from mom for just four days but it felt like four weeks. I was ready to get out of the shower, throw her on the bed and jump on top of her.
After making sure my cock was sparkling, she took the soap and began working up my stomach and chest. I was so hard that when she moved closer to reach up my chest I was poking her in the stomach. She swayed back and forth pushing my cock around with her stomach. I finally could not take any more and reached for the soap. I lathered my hands and then reached out to where her breasts should be. I began rubbing my hands in circles around her breasts, over her breasts. My hands were slick from the soap and just glided around her body. It only took a few seconds to realize something was wrong. Mom had nice breasts but she had five kids. Her breasts did not stick out like these. I opened my eyes and was surprised to see Susan. She looked up at me with a big smile, “Welcome home Danny”.
She looked great. If anything she had developed more since I had last seen her naked. Her breasts were larger now. “This is nice but you need to get out of here before mom catches you and we both get grounded”. But even while I said this my hands were still soaping her breasts. They had to be clean enough to eat off by now. And she still had me in hand which had a direct bearing on my thinking processes, or lack of.
“Don’t worry about mom. She is busy with dinner. I thought I would come up and give you my own welcome. I have a few minutes before anyone notices I’m gone, and no way is Megan going to be first”.
I did not quite hear her, “What”?
She pushed my cock down and moved forward so it slipped between her thighs. “I said I have a few minutes, let’s use them wisely”. Because she was so much shorter than me my cock was angled down. She rose up on her tip-toes trying to get my cock angled up but was not having any success. I bent my knees, trying to lower myself to her but the height difference was just too great. I finally put my hands around her waist and lifted her up in the air. She gave a squeal and wrapped her legs around my waist and her arms around my neck. I leaned forward until her back was against the shower wall. She gave a much louder squeal followed by, “The walls cold”.
“Shhh, it won’t be for long”. I carefully lowered her, an inch at a time until I felt my cock begin to push the lips of her pussy apart. I thrust up with my hips as I lowered her some more and slid halfway into her. “Oh Danny, that feels so good”. She felt so tight around me. It was like her pussy was half the size of mom’s. I lifted her up a bit, getting ready to let her down on me even harder when she cried out, “No Danny, don’t stop. Put it back in”.
I pushed my weight against her body and then plunged back into her. I loosened my grip around her waist and her body sagged down so that I was fully imbedded in her. I held it for a moment and then began stroking in and out of her picking up speed. Each stroke in brought a little grunt from her. She moved her mouth over to my ear, “As good as this feels, we need to stop pretty soon. Mom will wonder where we are”. I nodded my head but I did not stop stroking into her. Susan whispered in my ear, “Maybe this will help”. She then turned her head a bit towards me and took my entire ear in her mouth. She ran her tongue around the outside of my ear and then the inside. It was like a switch had been turned on. I thrust as deep as I could into her. She gasped and then began plunging the tip of her tongue in and out of my ear. That was the final straw. I grabbed her butt and pulled her tight against me trying to get deeper into her and began filling her pussy with my sperm. I was sure she had not cum but I just could not take it any longer.
It was another minute before I could move. I leaned back pulling her away from the wall. She gradually lowered her legs then we both began laughing. Her feet were swinging around trying to reach the floor and I was still buried deep in her. As I lowered her some more I finally popped out of her. She looked down at my still semi-erect, though quickly deflating, cock. She reached out and hit me with a finger and I bounced up and down. With some mock indignation I said, “Hey, show some respect”.
She just laughed and grabbed the soap again and began cleaning me a second time. “I’m not sure I should do this. He did not stay clean the last time”. When she was finished she handed me the soap, opened the door and stepped out of the shower. She waved to me saying, “I’ll see you at dinner”.
When I stepped out of the shower there were clothes laid out on the bed for me. As I put them on I kept eying the bed. I was so tired, it looked awfully inviting. I was tempted to lie down and shut my eyes for five minutes when I got a whiff of dinner. Roast, my favorite. I made my way downstairs and went into the kitchen. Everyone was already there. No one was eating, they had been waiting for me. They must have heard me coming as my plate was already filled. I sat down and took a bite. “Delicious mom”.
“Thanks son but I didn’t cook it”. She pointed all the girls. “You need to thank them. They fixed everything, dessert too”. Mom looked at me a bit longer then added, “You might want to take shorter showers though. I think you used all the hot water we have until tomorrow”. Then she looked from me to Susan. I looked over at Susan and noticed her hair was wet. Uh oh, busted. But mom did not say anything.
I looked around at them, “I’m sorry mom. Thanks everyone. The food looks great. I guess I need to stay out more often”.
After some small talk we all dug in and began eating. Every now and then I would look up and catch one or more of the girls looking at me. They would smile and then look down and resume eating. I even caught Megan looking at me funny. Is it just that I’m too tired or is there something going on here? Finally I had to ask, “What’s going on with you all? Why do you keep looking at me like that”?
They looked around at each other. Finally Shelly looked at me and stroked her chin with her fingers. “Are you growing a beard? We were just wondering if you were growing a beard”.
“Am I what”? I reached up to my chin and realized my stubble had grown quite a bit. “No I’m not. I’ve just been out in the woods for several days. I could not shave out there”.
They all just chorused, “Oh” and everyone looked down and continued eating. After a few minutes we were all pretty much finished. Susan got up, went over to the kitchen counter and returned with a large chocolate cake. “This is my contribution”.
All I could think was †˜wow’. We had not had cake in a long time. “That looks good enough to eat”. It was quickly passed around and disappeared in no time at all.
Everything tasted so good but I was beat. I needed to go to bed. I gave my apologies for leaving so early. They all said good night and I went upstairs while they remained sitting around the table. As I climbed up the stairs I could hear some giggling from the kitchen. I wonder what’s up with them. And Megan most of all. She has been really nice to me tonight and she has tormented me for years. What’s with that?
As I was getting into bed the door opened and mom walked in. “Honey, I need to talk to you before you go to sleep”.
I turned over to face her, “Can’t it wait until morning? I’m really tired”.
Without speaking she quickly undressed and got into bed. She moved over to my side and put an arm over me. “Mom, I’m really tired. I’ll be able to do a much better job if we wait until morning”. After the long walk, and mostly after Susan, I did not have much left.
“No Honey. That’s not what I want right now. I need to talk to about something and I need to get it out now”.
“Okay, but give me a shake if I fall asleep”.
“Have you thought about the possibility that we might be the only people left”?
Oh no, we are going to get philosophical. I’m too tired for that. I tried to stifle a yawn but was unsuccessful. “Sure mom. I’ve thought of that. I’m the one that has been out looking for signs of people. I’ve been watching the town, the freeway and local roads. No one. No sign of fires, even in winter. No answer on the radio when we broadcast and we don’t hear anything from anyone else and we have a huge range. Yes, I think about it”.
Mom’s face brightened up. “I’ve really given this a lot of thought while you were gone. I think we need to do something about this. We have been really lucky so far. We have all been healthy and safe from accidents but we cannot count on that forever. Attrition will take its toll on us at some point. Sickness and accidents are bound to happen. We have very limited medicine and no doctors”.
“I try not to think about that. What are you getting at mom”?
“How long can we last? When we are gone that will be it”. She looked down for a moment and then back up at me. “We need to help this situation, change were we are headed”.
“What do you mean? I don’t know anything about medicine. We could try and go down to the town and see what is there. I don’t know if it would still be good after all this time, and the big question is, is the virus still there”?
“Honey that is not what I meant. There is going to be seven of us. We need more people”.
“How are we going to get more people? I’ve been watching and I’ve seen no one”. What did she say? “What do you mean seven of us? There are only six of us”.
“Well that is one of the things that I wanted to talk to you about. I’m pregnant”.
My jaw dropped. “You’re what? How did that happen”?
Mom smiled and tilted her head a bit and just looked at me.
“Oh yeh. I forgot”. How could I be so stupid. “That is so cool”. Then I remembered. “What are the girls going to say”?
“Let’s not worry about that right now. We still have something else to talk about”. She seemed really nervous. Before I could say anything she continued, “We need more people or we are going to die out. My getting pregnant gave me the answer”.
Now maybe if I had not been walking all day I would have caught on quicker. So I just went ahead and stepped in, “That increases us by one but I don’t see how that helps much”.
“You are right Danny. Adding one every year or so does not help us much”. I could see mom was giving me time to figure this out but I was just not up to the task. The news of mom being pregnant had given me a shot of adrenaline but it was long past now. My brain was in a very low gear.
Seeing I was not connecting the dots mom continued, “Danny, there are five of us. We can grow our numbers pretty quickly with FIVE of us”.
The light finally turned on. “You want me to get everyone pregnant! They won’t go for that. Especially Megan. She treats me like worm food. And Terri is too little”.
Mom reached out and rubbed the hair on my cheek and chin. “I guess you are ready for my final surprise. I already talked about this with the girls”. She waited for me to say something.
“No way. I can see…I mean, no way Megan would go for this. And like I said Terri is too little”.
“Megan questioned it at first but she is willing. And yes, Terri is still young, but remember, she is only two years younger than you. When it comes to her turn she will be old enough”.
“What do you mean, her turn”?
“Here is the plan. As soon as we finish the repairs on one of the bedrooms in the west wing you will move to that bedroom”. She held up her hand as I began to protest. I did not want to move from her bedroom. I was fully enjoying my time here. “Then, beginning with Megan,” she held up her hand as I started to protest, “Beginning with Megan, one of your sisters will move into your bedroom and sleep with you for three months. That should be enough time to get pregnant. Then that sister will move back to her own bedroom and another sister will move in. Megan, Shelly and Susan will take nine months. By then Terri should be old enough”.
Mom saw the frown on my face and added, “By then she will be about the same age you were when you started having sex”.
I did not have an answer for that. I reached out and rubbed my hand around on her stomach. “Wow”.
Mom put her hand over mine. “How long do you think it will take to finish one of the bedrooms”?
I answered quickly, “I think I can do it in two days”.
Mom gave me a long look, “I thought you said you still had a few weeks of work to do”.
“Nope, two days”.
Mom snuggled up to me, “Well I guess you are a bit more focused now”.
We laid there holding each other. After a while I noticed mom’s breathing had slowed down. She had drifted off. As tired as I was before, I could not go to sleep now. All I could think of was; the roof needed to be finished, before that I still had a bit of work left on the rafters, the damage to the floor can be sanded and finished later, and….at that point I finally fell asleep.
I was up before the sun and slipped out of bed without waking mom. I threw some clothes on, grabbed a bite and quickly got over to the west wing. When I walked into the first bedroom I saw that the girls had been working while I was gone. The floors had been sanded and just needed a coat of finish. The two walls that needed new paneling had been repaired. I had been there for around an hour when Susan and Terri showed up. “You guys did a lot of work while I was gone”.
They both grabbed hammers and climbed up the ladder to help me, “We wanted to help. Megan and Shelly helped too”.
“That is so hard to believe of Megan”. I was still having trouble with that idea.
Terri looked like she was going to explode, “Has mom talked to you”?
“Yeh, I’ve talked to mom”.
Terri, moved up in front of me. Susan stopped what she was doing and watched us. “So what do you think”?
“About what”?
Terri, looked like she wanted to pound me, “About your getting her pregnant stupid”. And then a big smile broke out on her face, “And getting us pregnant too”.
How do you answer that? I was fumbling for words and all I was able to get out was “unnhh”.
Terri laughed, “You don’t sound too bright. I’m not sure I want anyone stupid to get me pregnant”. Susan started laughing also, “Yeh, we don’t want stupid babies”.
Before I could come up with a snappy return Megan and Shelly walked in below us. “Well where do we start”?
I welcomed the distraction, “I think we should concentrate on the roof”. If we get that finished it will be dry and warm in here and I can move in. The rest were little things and could be taken care of later.
I was wrong about the two days. It actually took three. Three long days, from before daylight to long after dark. One the evening of the third day I took my things from Mom’s bedroom and moved it to my new bedroom. It was rather stark. No pictures or other personal touches. I wasn’t sure what would happen now. No one had talked about mom’s plan other than Terri’s comment about getting her pregnant and that was three days ago. Megan was supposed to be first but I was still apprehensive about her. Years of being teased by your big sister do not fade easily.
After an hour of waiting I finally decided this was all a joke on me and I fell for it. Everyone was in on it and they got me. When I go down to breakfast tomorrow they will all have a good laugh on me. I was trying to think of some way to turn this around on them when the door opened. It was dark so I could not see who it was. I was afraid this might be part of the joke so I kept quiet. Whoever it was moved over by the closet and dropped something light on the floor. I could hear some rustling and then feet moved towards the bed. It must be mom. We have not been together in a week. She could not let me get too embarrassed with this joke and has come over to sleep with me. The bed moved as she got in and moved under the covers. I was just about to say something when Megan’s voice totally surprised me.
“Well, are we going to do it or what”?
It sounded like her old mood. The erection I started to have, thinking mom was here, was now rapidly leaving the station. “I don’t know Megan. Maybe this is not such a good idea”. I knew somehow I was going to end up with her laughing and making fun of me.
“Danny, you are supposed to fuck me. What is mom going to say? What will my sisters say? If we don’t, I won’t get pregnant, and then everyone will laugh at me”.
She is afraid they will laugh at her? “Well I guess we can try”.
I could feel Megan move closer to me, “You have done this before. What do we do now? Do you want me to do anything”?
I reached over to her and put my hand on her stomach. She gave a little start but did not move away or push my hand away. I moved my hand around her stomach not quite touching her breasts and down to just below her belly button. I just wanted her to get used to my touch. I turned on my side, stretched my right arm out and put it under her head. I then pulled her around so she was on her side with her back to me and her head on my arm. I continued rubbing gently, almost a caress, around on her stomach. With my other hand I cupped one of her breasts. I heard her take a deep breath. I moved my hand from one breast to the other, gently squeezing them, cupping them, running my fingers around her nipples, rolling her nipples between my thumb and forefinger, followed by firmly squeezing her breasts. When I squeezed them hard she arched her back into me and I could hear her groan. The erection I had lost before was back. When she moved back against me it was pushed against her back. She must have felt it. She reached around with her left hand between us and wrapped her fingers around me. That made me push my hips against her. As she moved her fingers around me, squeezing me, I moved my left hand lower and began moving it through her pubic hair and down between her legs. At first she squeezed her thighs together trapping my fingers.
“Danny, I don’t know”.
I did not say anything. I pulled my hand from between her thighs and moved my body back just a bit so I could pull her so she was at more of an angle towards me. I took her left leg and pulled it so it bent at the knee over my leg. Her thighs were now spread apart with plenty of room for my hand. I ran it around her pubic hair again and then dipped below so my fingers covered her pussy. She gasped, “Oh, Danny, you shouldn’t”. But she made no effort to stop me or move away. They were just words she thought she should say. I rubbed her pussy lightly for a while, it was damp now, and then moved my hand up so that both hands covered her breasts. Each time I squeezed her breasts she would squeeze my cock. She pushed her head back into my neck and I could hear low moans coming from her. “I did not know it would feel like this. I’ve touched myself but it feels so much better when someone else does it”.
I moved back a little more and pulled her over on her back. I could not see her face in the dark so I could not tell what she was thinking. “Are we going to do it now”?
I nodded, forgetting for a moment she could not see me. “Yes we are”.
“What do you want me to do? Do we do it like the bull does with the cows”?
I smiled at that and kissed one of her nipples and then the other. She reached up with her hands and held my head there so I sucked one nipple into my mouth. She let go of my head and laid her arms back on the bed. I moved over to the other nipple, when I sucked it into my mouth she arched her back pushing her breast up at me. It was like having a pillow pushed in my face. I finally answered her, “Well I could be like the bull but I think you might like this better”. I lifted myself up and moved over above her so my knees were between her spread legs. “Take my cock with your hand and rub it against your pussy”.
She reached down and wrapped her fingers around my cock and as quickly let go. “The end is all wet”.
“That is so it will slide into you easily. See”. I lowered my hips so the head of my cock was poised right at the entrance and pushed forward. The head slide right into her with no resistance. I stopped there and started to pull back so she could have some foreplay. I wanted to take it very slow with her and not scare her. Just as I was about to pop out she reached with her hands to grab my butt. “No, don’t pull out. That feels so good”.
I pushed forward so I was about half way into her. Her hands slowly slid up past the small of my back until she reached my shoulders. She tried to pull me down on her. I let myself lower until my chest was just touching her erect nipples. With my weight still on my hands I moved my chest from side to side just barely brushing against her nipples. I let my chest drop down and rubbed it across her breasts harder. She arched her back, held it there and let out a long groan. “That feels so good”. Her stomach was pushed against mine. Her body felt so hot. When she straightened I let my body drop down with hers. I was lying on top of her now. I turned my head, kissing first her shoulder and then worked my way up to her ear. When I stuck my tongue in her ear she pushed her pelvis up against me. “Can you go in any deeper?” she asked in a hoarse whisper. I answered by plunging the rest of my cock into her until I was pushed firmly against her. I pulled back and plunged in again.
Her legs had been laying flat on the bed but now she lifted her knees until they were along side me and her feet were up in the air. That allowed me to sink even deeper in her. I paused on a deep stroke. I was just enjoying the feeling of being buried in her. She had moved both of her hands back to my butt and was pulling on me trying to get me to begin thrusting into her again. “Come on. Don’t stop”. I smiled at that. Megan was the one I was most worried about; the one who had tormented me as a kid. She moved her mouth close to my ear “Is this how you fucked mom”? I nodded my head against her. “Is this how you got her pregnant”? I nodded my head again. “Well it’s my turn now”.
I almost lost it in her then. She wants to fuck me. She wants me to get her pregnant. Maybe it’s her turn for a treat. She has been so much nicer than what I expected. Maybe I can do something nice for her. I slowed down the pounding I had been giving her.
“No don’t stop. That feels good”. She was still grabbing me, pulling me, trying to get me to thrust into her harder.
“Don’t worry, I’m not. But this will feel even better”. Instead of just thrusting in and out of her I began grinding my pelvis against hers, rubbing that special spot. It was only moments before Megan began groaning and pushing up against me. After about a minute of this she thrust up hard against me several times and then her thighs tightened against my hips. A loud cry escaped her and I could feel her pussy pulse around my cock. That was it for me as I exploded in her. All the cum I had been saving up for the last three days shot out into her pussy. We both continued small thrusts against each other as the feeling gradually died away. She relaxed her thighs and her knees fell back to the bed.
I wrapped my arms around under her and then rolled over, bringing her with me until I was on my back and she was lying on top of me. She laid her head on my shoulder and I put one hand on her head and let the other roam around on her back. We just lay there catching our breath. When we had rolled over I was still partially in her but now I had softened and slipped out of her. She giggled, “He did not say please before leaving”. She sighed, “I did not know it was going to feel so good. Mom said I would like it but how do you know”. I did not say anything, just kept lightly rubbing her back. “I’m sorry I’ve been so mean to you. I don’t know why I did it”.
“Forget about it. We are okay now aren’t we”?
She nodded her head. “Do you think I’m pregnant now”?
“I don’t know. I think it took several times for mom”.
She lifted herself up a bit on her arms. The moon had risen so we had just enough light in the room so we could see each other now. She looked down at me with a wry smile on her face. “Maybe if we did it again it would help”.
I looked from her face down to her breasts where they were lying against my chest. “That sounds like an excellent idea but I think I need some recovery time”. I pushed my hips up so my limp cock flopped a bit between her thighs. “Well I don’t, but I think he does”.
She got a bigger smile on her face. “I think I might be able to help. Susan had a talk with me earlier tonight and she gave me some instructions for fixing this situation if it should arise, or not rise”.
She rose up on her hands and knees and turned around to face my feet. As it turned out Susan had given her the correct instructions and Megan followed them perfectly.
Two weeks later Megan missed her period. Mom said don’t make too much out of this yet. Megan had been late before and had even missed a period before. Mom said we should just continue on as normal. Now the positive side of missing a period is that you can continue on as normal. And our normal continued every night and every morning.
Over the next month any doubt that she was pregnant was laid to rest. Megan had a brief bout with morning sickness and was positive she was going to die, and her breasts began to get super sensitive. Sensitive to the point that anytime my hands got close to them they got a good slap. Though upon further reflection, that might have been her general reaction to getting pregnant.
It was the middle of summer and the three months went by fast. We finished the repairs on the house so now we had a couple more bedrooms to spread around in. That is until babies began to arrive. Mom was getting pretty fat, though I had to be careful not to say that around her. Apparently women react negatively to insightful comments like that. Megan was also beginning to show. We also spent quite a bit of time at the swimming hole. It was cool there in the shade and mom liked to float in the water. It took all the weight off her feet.
After swimming for a while on one particularly hot day, mom called us all together in the shade. “It is too late this year, but next spring we need to start a major building project on the house. I don’t know if anyone has thought through what we are doing but we are going to be adding three or four children to our family every year. We will run out of room in the house very quickly. It will take us quite a while to add space. We need to start the planning and begin preparing some wood now”.
She was right. None of us had given a thought to the space the new kids would need. Susan and I started talking about what kind of structure would work. We decided that the easiest route would be just to extend the house in a log cabin fashion. We did not have the tools to try and make the lumber used to build the house we have. We then started talking about which trees to fell and when. I could hear mom, Terri, Shelly and Megan talking about where the additions should be made and what the additions to be used for. When we got back together as a group I found that they had decided that we should make the house look something like a capital letter E. The first phase was to extend the house to make it a bit longer and then over the next few years, add three wings coming off it. After that we could then cap off the end of the wings with a long wing like our current house.
After kicking around ideas for a while we began drifting back to the house. I left first but I had not gone far when Shelly caught up to me. I looked over at her. She had grown in the last year. She was now almost as tall I am. She must be around 5’ 11”. Her body had kept up with her also. She had large breasts with small nipples. Her skin was really tanned. She was out in the sun all the time and like the rest of us almost never wore clothes in the heat of the summer.
She walked silently by my side for a while before finally saying, “It’s my turn now”.
Ever the quick one I quickly responded, “Uh”?
“It’s been three months. It’s my turn”.
“Wow, three months have gone by already”?
Shelly’s face dropped. “You don’t want to have turn with me? You want to stay with Megan”?
“No. That’s not what I meant. I want my turn with you. I just meant that the summer has gone by so fast. We have been so busy with the house and everything that it just flew by”.
I looked over at her and her face brightened back up. As we continued to the house Shelly reached over and put her hand in mine. Once we got to the house she left me for her room saying she would see me later. When I got to my room I could see that all of Megan’s things were gone. It left me with a strange feeling. We had been sleeping together for three months. She was pregnant with my baby. Before we had been brother and sister with all the things siblings share and the conflicts. Now we were different. Really more like lovers, or, as it came to me, more like husband and wife.
I was also feeling some guilt. While I was sad that Megan would not be sleeping with me tonight I was getting excited over the thought of Shelly. I was actually getting the beginnings of an erection. And of course that is the moment Shelly chose to come in with an armful of her things. Before I could turn around she was standing in front of me, looking down. She had a big smile on her face, “I don’t know if I’m supposed to hug him or salute him”. She put her things down on a chair, walked over and pushed the door shut and then turned to me. When she had turned I sat down on the bed thinking that possibly I could hide this thing. No such luck. Sticking out like a flagpole. It’s not that I was embarrassed to have an erection; it was just that normally you do not indicate your interest in a girl by sticking said erection out at her.
Shelly came over to the bed and sat next to me. I looked at her and her eyes were fixed on my lap. “I’ve never seen it this close. Can I touch it”? Without waiting for me to say anything she reached out with a finger and pushed it to one side. When she moved her finger away I just swayed back and forth until I came back to attention, pointing straight up. She giggled and then reached out again and wrapped her fingers around me. “It is much harder than I expected”. I just kept my mouth shut and let her explore. She gripped my firmly and began sliding her hand up and down. “Megan says you like this”.
Megan was right. “What else did she say”?
Playing coy she answered, “Oh, a little of this and a little of that”.
I decided two could play at this game. I reached around her with my right hand and put my hand on her hipbone. I slowly moved it up her side and then cupped the underside of her breast in my hand and gave her a little squeeze. I moved one finger over the breast and brushed it back and forth over her nipple. It also rose to attention though it did not reach the height of mine. “Did she happen to mention this”?
Shelly had stopped moving her hand on my cock when I grabbed her breast. She let go of me and turned to face me. She put a hand on my chest and pushed me back on the bed. As she started to climb over my legs I said, “Wait, it’s going to be dinner soon”?
She was now kneeling on the bed, with her pussy positioned directly above me. She took me in her hand again and pointed me at her pussy. “I’m not very hungry”. She squatted down just a bit and I felt myself enter her just an inch or so. I was dying to thrust my hips up. I wanted to be deep inside her. I closed my eyes for a moment, “I’m not so hungry either”.
She let go of me and put both hands on my chest. She began pushing back at me and then pulling back up. Repeating it over and over, just letting me go in an inch and then pulling back. I strained to push up at her, to meet one of her pushes at me. She dug her nails into my chest. “No, let me”. I went with the flow. This is her first time. Let her do what she wants. I reached up with both hands and cupped her breasts. I alternated light rubbing with firmly squeezing and then brushing her nipples with my fingers.
After several minutes of this I noticed she was pushing me deeper in her. Finally with a hard thrust she completely impaled herself on me. She then changed her movement. She began rocking her pelvis forwards and backwards on me. I realized she is rubbing her clitoris on me. Megan must have told her about this. She could not have come up with this on her own, the very first time she has sex.
She just sat on me, with her eyes closed and continued rocking back and forth. A funny thought hit me. She barely knows I’m here. Well that is not entirely true. I do have something sticking up inside her, but I think that is the only part she is aware of right now. When I recognized the signs that she was close to an orgasm I tried to help her along, rubbing her stomach up to her breasts, rubbing her nipples. When it hit her she arched her back and let out a loud cry. As I reached for her hips and pulled her tight against me the thought ran through my head, “Well everybody knows our three months have started”.
When she finally collapsed on me she was breathing so hard she could not speak. I wrapped my arms around her and waited for her to catch her breath. When her breathing returned to normal I moved my hands down to her butt and pulled her tight against me. With her tight against me I thrust up hard into her. She sucked her breath in, “Oh yes, do it again”.
I was happy to oblige. I repeated the hard thrust into her. I relaxed a bit, pulling back partway out of her and then thrust back hard and deep into her again. I began moving faster, picking up speed until it was a continuous motion, just constant plunging into her. The tingle began building in my balls. I was just seconds away. Shelly quickly wrapped her arms around my neck, hugging me tightly. I pushed down on her butt hard, trying to get as deep into her as I could, and finally exploded in her. Stream after stream erupted from me, filling her. I kept thrusting up against her with each eruption until finally I was drained. We lay there for another half hour, her on top of me, wrapped in each others arms until finally she gave a little cough. The squeeze of her muscles with her cough popped me right out. We both laughed and I added, “Well I know when I’m not wanted”.
She took my head in her hands and kissed my on the cheek and then turned my head and kissed me on the mouth several times. “Oh no, you are very wanted. That was fantastic. I did not know it would feel like that. If it was not dinner time now I would show you just how wanted”.
As a response I caressed her back, from her shoulders down to her butt, back and forth with both hands. After a few minutes we got up and straightened out the bed. Shelly, nude as usual, started to walk out the door to help in the kitchen.
“Shelly, do you really want to go out like that”?
“Why not, it’s hot”.
“Megan might have left one thing out when she told you about †˜this and that’. Shelly, with the open door in her hand looked back at me with a frown. “You are kind of filled with sperm right now. A lot of it is going to leak out when you go out there”.
Shelly looked down, and sure enough, she saw something wet slowly running down the inside of her thigh. “What am I going to do”?
“Well you need to wear some shorts or something”.
Her face turned bright red. “But they will know what we were doing”.
“Well it is either that or a big wet spot on the chair. I’ll let you pick”.
She scowled at me, “This is not fair. You get to just wipe off and go on like nothing happened”.
I just smiled back. She scooted out the door. When I saw her next she was in the kitchen wearing a t-shirt and shorts. It was obvious from the looks of everyone they knew what had happened earlier and had been teasing her over it.
When dinner was finished mom walked out of the kitchen with me while the rest of the girls began cleaning up. “You need to do a few hunting trips soon. According to the almanac this looks to be a rough winter. I want us to set for a long hard winter soon”.
I nodded. “How about I take one in three days? That will give me some time to finish a project”.
Mom smiled, “Yes, a project. I think I saw the results of your project earlier”.
Now it was my turn to blush. I stammered, “That wasn’t what I meant. Well, not all of it anyway”.
Mom continued, “I want you to take Terri with you. You have taught her to be a pretty good shot with that rifle. She needs to take the next step using it. Just shooting at targets is not real life. If it is ever necessary to use it I want to know she will not freeze”.
I looked up sharply, “Do you think….”?
“No, I don’t think there is any one out there. I truly think we are alone. It just pays to be prepared”.
Three days later Terri and I were up at dawn preparing to set out. Shelly had woken me an hour earlier to show me what I was going to be missing over the next few days. She had been very enthusiastic and now after my good night’s sleep I was tired again and she had promptly gone back to sleep.
Mom had risen also and fixed us a good breakfast. As we readied to go out the front door I gave mom a hug and a kiss. I rubbed her swollen tummy and gave it a kiss for good luck. As Terri was giving mom a hug I saw Megan walking towards me. She hugged me and kissed me goodbye. I gave her tummy a rub and a kiss also. She looked like she was going to cry so I gave her another hug. Through some tears she said, “Damn hormones. You come back safe or I’ll kick your butt all over the place”.
Terri and I put our packs on and started our walk. It was going to take most of the day to get there so we needed to get going. We would have looked pretty funny to anyone that could have seen us. We both wore shirts because of the packs and we wore shoes for the walking and that was all. We had been pretty lucky all this time. None of the clothes us kids had brought here fit us but mom and dad had brought plenty. Dad’s clothes fit me perfectly and the girls could wear moms.
We did not say a lot as we walked. I pointed out some places and told some stories about previous hunts. I took one detour and we walked down a ridge until we could see the nearby town. It was miles in the distance but you could see the entire length of the town and many farms around it. I had not watched it yet this summer and thought we could take the time now. Nothing. No sign of any life. Trees had broken up some of the streets. Everything was overgrown. When I saw something move I grabbed the binoculars out of the pack and zeroed in on it, a deer. Then behind it I saw a few more deer feeding. That further confirmed my observation. Deer would not be walking around where there were people.
Our detour had delayed us a bit so it was early evening before we reached where I wanted to camp. It looked like a summer storm was fast coming in so we quickly pitched our tent and fixed dinner. There were dark clouds coming over and I could feel the temperature dropping rapidly. I now wished we had worn more clothing, or at least had brought some with us. Because I knew we would be carrying a full load back I had deliberately packed light.
Just as we finished eating the first drops began to fall. Terri took our sleeping bags into the tent while I gathered our gear. It was not a big tent so we were going to be packed. Usually I was alone and the gear could stay outside. When I crawled in I was surprised to see how the sleeping bags set out. Each was fully open, one on the top of the other. I caught Terri’s eye with a questioning look on my face. She just gave me that “Well think it through stupid”, look. “We don’t have enough room in here with all our stuff to lay out two sleeping bags. We will fit in better this way. Besides I’m cold. It will be warmer sleeping next to you”.
Well, she was right about that. But I was uncomfortable. For the last six months or so I had been sleeping with three different women and having sex with them day and night. I had not really paid much attention to Terri in that time. She was my little sister but she was developing into a beautiful girl. She was still a bit on the small side compared to her sisters. She was only around 5’ 4” and could not have weighed over 100 lbs. But those 100 lbs had been put in all the best places. Her breasts were best described as “perky”. She was going to be fourteen in another month. That meant it was her turn after Susan.
Just thinking about this was starting to get me hard. I was still on my hands and knees on top of the sleeping bag. I looked over at Terri. She was sitting cross-legged on the edge of the bag. She started pulling her t-shirt over her head but was having some difficulty with it because the top of the tent was so low. I took the opportunity provided by her t-shirt difficulties to take a good look at my littlest sister. I was wrong, her breasts weren’t just perky, they were perfect. I looked farther down and saw that I could see the lips of her pussy. I’m so hard. I have to stop this. As I lifted my eyes back to her breasts I realized that she had her t-shirt off now and was looking at me. She caught me. I could feel the heat building in my face. I mumbled something about it being time to go to sleep, pulled the top bag up so I could get in, and quickly turned over away from her.
She did not say anything. In a minute or so I felt the bag move as she got in. She moved up behind me and put an arm around me. Her hand ended up on my stomach. I was afraid she might move it an inch or so and bump into my erection. I took her hand in one of mine and moved it up a bit and held it.
We laid there for a minute before she finally spoke, “Danny? Am I ugly”?
“No Terri, what ever gave you that idea? You are really pretty”.
“You looked at me and then just turned away with a funny look on your face. I thought maybe I was ugly”.
“No, like I said, you are really pretty”.
She was quite for a while. “It is still early and I am not sleepy. Can we talk for a while”?
I nodded my head but stayed where I was. I still had a massive hard-on and did not want to turn over. “Could you turn around so I can talk to you”?
Oh, great. Maybe she won’t notice. I turned over on my back. I glanced down and saw the bag sticking up.
“What is sex like? I have talked to Megan and Shelly but they say I’m too young and to go away. But I’m almost fourteen and in a few months we will be sleeping together and I don’t know much. I don’t want to be bad at it”.
I was speechless. She was talking about sleeping with me as if it was playing tag. No embarrassment, no nervousness. I’m the nervous one.
She pulled the bag down and scooted up a bit. Her left breast was now lying right on my arm. “My breasts are too small. I wish I had bigger ones like Shelly and Megan. You probably will not even want to have sex with me because I’m too little”.
Dead if I do and dead if I don’t. “You are not too small. You are a perfect size. Bigger is not better. It is just bigger. Your breasts are perfect for you”.
She had a disbelieving look on her face, “You are just saying that. You have to because I’m your sister. You would not even want to touch mine because they are so small”.
Before I could even think about the consequences I reached out to her, “See that is not true”. I cupped her breast in my hand. Her skin felt so smooth. I could feel her nipple get hard in the middle of my palm. I moved my hand caressing her breast.
She rose up a bit so the other appeared. “What about the other one? Isn’t it too small”?
I reached to it and gave it the same attention. I knew I had to stop but just couldn’t. If I got any harder I was going to break through the bag.
Earlier when I turned over on my back my right arm was along my side. When Terri moved closer to me I had left it there. When she rose for me to touch her breasts she had moved her body so that her mound was pushed against the back of my hand. As she pushed it slightly against me I could not help myself and pushed back gently against her.
I don’t know if she even realized she was grinding it against my hand ever so slowly.
She pulled the bag covering me down to my waist and traced a finger around my nipples. When I did not say anything she said, “That does not do the same thing for you that it does to me”?
“No. I guess guy’s nipples are not as sensitive as girls”.
Her fingers moved down to my belly button. She looked lower and saw the bag sticking up. “Am I doing that to you”? Without waiting for me to say anything she grabbed the bag and pulled it off me. The sudden movement of the bag made my cock wave around.
She laughed and grabbed it to make it stop. “I have not seen it this big in a long time”.
I felt like that time I had a cold and a high temperature and I could not think right. My head was all foggy. She had a hold of my cock and I just wanted to turn over and fuck her. But what would mom say? This is not what she planned. Here I was with a beautiful girl who wanted to know more about sex and had a vise grip on my cock. I did the only thing I could think of, I closed my eyes and let out a long groan.
Then I wondered, “What do you mean, †˜this big in a long time’”?
“I saw you and mommy one time. That time before you went on a hunting trip and she talked to us while you were gone. I went to your bedroom to ask mom a question. I guess you did not hear me knock. When I opened the door mommy had her mouth on your penis and was sucking it. Does that feel good”? Without even waiting for me to answer she continued, “What am I saying, of course it feels good. I saw the look on your face. It seems like a funny thing to do but I know you liked it”.
Then with no warning at all she leaned over and put my cock in her mouth. I almost levitated off the bed. She must have watched mom pretty closely. She began to move her head up and down sucking on my cock with slurping sounds. I was finally able to get out, “Like a lollipop”.
She pulled my cock out of her mouth, “Huh”?
“Remember the tootsie rolls we used to have”?
“Oh yeh”. She closed her mouth back over my cock and I could feel her tongue begin to swirl around the head. I turned my hand around and found I could now reach between her legs. I started moving my hand up and down the inside of her thigh. I moved down near her knee and then slowly back up until the top of my thumb was pushed against her pussy. I rubbed in small circles and then went down the other thigh. I kept repeating this until her pussy was very wet. I positioned my hand so that part of it was pushed against her clitoris and then slid one finger in her pussy. I began rubbing my hand against her clitoris while moving the finger around in small circles in her pussy. It was so small and tight I briefly wondered if I would even fit. She pulled my cock out of her mouth and laid her head down on my stomach. “That feels so good. It’s much better when someone else does it”.
She started to put my cock back in her mouth but I put my hand out to stop her. “Any more and I’ll be squirting all over the place”.
She immediately jumped up and lay on top of me. “That would be a waste. The only place you are going to squirt is in me”.
“I don’t think that would be such a good idea”. But I made no effort at all to move her away. She was holding herself up on her arms above me and her breasts were right in front of my face. Her sisters must have told her a bit more because she lowered herself just enough that one of her nipples brushed against my lips, back and forth. Then she moved farther to the side so that the other nipple took its place. I parted my lips and her nipple slipped between them. I ran my tongue around and over it and then sucked more of her breast into my mouth. “Oh Danny, that feels so good”.
She rocked back on me and her pelvic bone slid right over the top of my cock. I reached up to caress her breasts. When my hands touched her she leaned into my hands letting me hold her up. She lifted up off me a bit, reached down for my cock, positioned it where she wanted it and then began moving back until the swollen head was pushed against her pussy. We were both so wet that the head slid right in but that is where it stopped. It was so tight in her. It felt tight when I put a finger in her and this was no finger. “Danny, what do I do? I want you in me so bad but it is so big. I don’t know if it will fit. You fucked everyone else, why doesn’t it fit in me”? She sounded just a bit scared but very determined.
I was no longer thinking about anything but how to bury myself deeper in her. “Just go very slow and let your body get used to it. You will gradually stretch and I will fit”.
I pulled back just an inch and then pushed back in. After doing this several times I felt like I was sliding in just a bit further. Terri was hugging me so tight and really breathing hard. “Yes Danny. That feels much better. Don’t stop”. Now every time I pushed into her she was pushing back. After a few strokes she began pushing harder. I stopped my thrusting and she continued. Looking down I could see her sliding up and down on my shaft. After a few minutes of this I was only halfway into her. She began moaning while dropping harder on me, driving me deeper into her. Finally I could no longer see my cock. When I was completely buried in her she stopped moving. “What do I do now? Do I keep moving up and down”?
“Do what feels good. You can keep moving up and down or you could do this”. I pushed her up higher so she was sitting on me and I could move my hands. I reached down to her hips and rocked them back and forth. “Or you might like this”. Holding her hips, I then moved her in a circling motion on me, letting her grind her pelvis against mine. I reached up to cup her breasts again with the intention of rubbing her nipples, but she leaned forward again, resting her weight on my hands. She closed her eyes, let her arms dangle down and began experimenting with the three methods I had shown her. She first began bouncing up and down again really fast. She was so tight on me it was like I was jerking off. I was ready to cum now. After a while she stopped and began grinding her pelvis in a circle against mine. Her breath became a bit ragged. When she finally began thrusting back and forth against me really hard I knew she was getting close. Her eyes were closed, her mouth was hanging open and she had this dreamy look on her face. Finally she reached the breaking point, “Danny, it’s too tight”. I had no idea what she meant by that but I began to make my own sharp, hard thrusts into her. I had been holding back as long as I could. When her pussy began clenching me I finally let go, shooting long streams of cum into her. As the intensity of the orgasm slowly passed for both of us we continued very slowly pushing at each other. I was deep in her and wanted to stay that way for a while. Just the sensation of sliding back and forth in her felt so good. She had collapsed on me earlier and as I pushed very slowly up into her she would respond by pushing back to meet me. Every few strokes she would let out an “mmmmm”.
When we finally stopped moving and had caught our breath, we just laid there. I could hear a heavy rain falling outside. I wondered when that had started. The last sound I remember was just a few drops falling on the tent. The wind was also really picking up. It was a good thing we had staked the tent down really well. I had been unconsciously rubbing my hands on Terri’s back and I finally noticed her making kind of a purring sound. “You like that”?
“Yes, don’t stop”. She turned her head and kissed me on the neck and then laid her head back on my chest. “That was so much better than I expected. Thank you”.
I was curious. “What did you expect”?
“I don’t know. The girls said I would like it but how do you know. I’ve seen our animals do it but the male just jumps on the female and then it is over. It never looks like either of them really enjoys it”. She stopped for a minute and then added, “Will I be pregnant now”?
“Well first, I’m glad you enjoyed it. Second, I don’t know. Sometimes I guess it takes just once, sometimes more. From what mom said I think it also has a lot to do with when your period is”.
Terri turned her head again and nuzzled my neck. “If it takes more than once, maybe we should do it again”.
I would have loved to but I was beat, literally, “Your brother is getting old. I need my rest. We have a lot of work tomorrow. You should be going to sleep also”.
“Okay, but I bet you will be rested in the morning”.
“We’ll see”. But I was sure I would be.
Terri, slid off me, turned on her side, pulled my arm out so she could us it as a pillow and moved back against me. “Put your arm around me. I’m getting cold”. I did as I was told and we both quickly fell asleep.
When we woke the next morning Terri won her bet, I was completely rested. Though as it turned out, I was pretty exhausted by the time we had breakfast. The hunt went really well. Terri spotted and shot two very nice sized deer within just hours of our starting. Mom should have no worries about her shooting skill or her willingness.
The next morning as we lay naked against each other, I was thinking about our reception at home. Mom was going to be upset and Shelly would probably be hurt. It was supposed to be her time and her I am out in the woods fucking Terri instead of her.
Terri did not seem concerned at all. “Don’t worry about mom. I know what to say to her. When you see Shelly, tell her that you love her, pick her up and carry her off to the bedroom and show her”.
When we got home that night everything turned out exactly as Terri had predicted. As soon as I saw Shelly, I picked her up, told her I loved her and missed her and took her to our bedroom to prove it.
Later that night I went into the kitchen to get something to eat. I found Terri and mom there talking in candle light. "Why the candles"?
Mom looked up, "I was just telling Terri. While the two of you were gone we had a storm".
"We had a good taste of it out there. Some really good wind and a lot of rain. It got really cold".
"We did not see a lot of rain but the wind blew a branch into our solar panels. Several of them are damaged. We have enough power for the refrigerator but too much of anything else drains the batteries too fast. Movies are going to be a luxury now".
"Can we repair them"?
"We have the manuals but I don't think we have the skills or the technical knowledge to do much".
Everyone was quiet for a while and I dug into a sandwich.
Terri broke the silence, “Mom, I’m pregnant”.
I choked on my food.
Mom’s face clouded over. She looked at me and I was thankful the guns were all locked away. But I was also puzzled, why is she so upset when we would be sleeping together in just a few months anyway?
“What makes you think you are pregnant? When did….Where….Why…” She was having a problem finishing her sentence. She stopped for a moment, collected her thoughts and then calmly asked, “I'm sorry. To me you are still my baby. When did this happen”?
Terri, equally calm, replied, “On our hunting trip”.
“You have only been gone a couple of days. What makes you think you are pregnant? Having sex one time does not always get you pregnant”?
“I just know I’m pregnant". And with a big smile she added, "And it wasn't just once. It is just a feeling I have. I know I'm pregnant. And before you say anything, I know it was not my turn yet. But I have been thinking about that. I don’t think we should have these long, three month turns. If we do that a couple of us will be pregnant every year during the summer. That is right when we are needed most for work. Plus it means we are pregnant during the heat of the summer. Of course I’ve never been pregnant before, but looking at you, that does not seem like a great idea”.
Mom just looked back at Terri. I could see she was impressed with what Terri had said and was thinking about it. I was pretty much forgotten. “I see you have given this some pretty good thought”. After a pause she added, “And after listening to you I think you are right”.
I thought this would be a good time to forget about eating and just go back to bed. As I moved to get up mom turned to me. “I have not forgotten about you. You know you were not supposed to sleep with Terri until her birthday. I hope you have not hurt Shelly’s feelings with this”.
Terri then surprised me, “Mom. It’s not his fault. It’s mine. I seduced him. He really did not have a chance”.
What?
Mom looked back at her, “You have always been pretty good at getting what you want. I bet it was not too hard either”.
Terri smiled, “No, he was pretty easy”.
Hey, I’m right here. I can hear you. I knew there was no way I was going to win any points so I made the best of the situation. I said my goodnights and went back to bed with Shelly.
As it turned out Terri was right. She was pregnant. A few months later mom had a baby girl. It was a big occasion. We had all seen births in the barn but there is a big difference when it is your mom. A few months later Megan had her baby, another baby girl. Another few months and Terri, followed by Shelly just a couple of weeks later, both had baby girls. When Susan completed the picture with her baby girl it seemed like our entire plan was doomed to failure. No one spoke much about it but I know mom worried about it. She said that my sperm determines the sex and that some men do not produce sperm that makes boys. It looks like I’m one.
The second year we changed our sleeping pattern. The girls would decide when they wanted to give birth and time sex with me accordingly. Sometimes it would be a different person each night. Other times one of my sisters, or my mother, would stay with me several days. But our luck with the births did not change. Everyone had girls the second year also.
It was not until the third year that we three boys and two girls. Finally, this might work. There was hope down the line. In the sixth year mom finally said “no more baby factory”. She continued having sex with me on a somewhat infrequent basis, but she had decided she was too old to keep having children and that was it for her.
After five years we had really grown as a family. There were now twenty three kids running around creating havoc; sixteen girls and seven boys. The house had changed a lot in that time also. It had to. We needed the space for all the kids. I could see that in the next couple of years we were going to have to spread out. We needed more space for living and for growing food.
I was thinking about this one morning before breakfast. I had gone outside and was standing by a fence watching one of our bulls mate with a cow. After he was done he moved on to a second and then a third before the mood must have left him. He was standing there eating some grass when another female came up and presented herself. He ignored her and continued eating. After a minute the female turned around and butted him with her head. With less than his earlier enthusiasm he finally acquiesced, mounted her, and when he was finished, resumed eating. I smiled at the sight, “I feel your pain”.
“Daddy, breakfast is ready”.
I had not heard Mary come up. She was Megan’s oldest. She took my hand and we walked back to the house.
I had just finished eating and had pushed my chair back from the table. I was just sitting there watching everyone, listening to the conversations, enjoying the company when Janice ran up and jumped in my lap. “Can I go out and talk to the people”?
[b]Chapter 4
Spoiler:
When Mary, my oldest daughter, ran into the kitchen and asked if she could go out and see the people, I sat there trying to figure out what game she was playing. It never occurred to me that she might be talking about real people. We had been alone here for so many years. I had not even thought about other people in several years.
I just sat there speechless for the longest time. What could she be talking about? What people? Was this just a kid’s game with imaginary players? Just as I was about to ask her about it, another of the children, Janice, ran in shouting, “There are people out by the barn”.
I got up and went to the window followed by mom. Everyone else crowded around behind us. Sure enough, there were four people over by the barn. They were just standing there in a group watching the house. There were two kids and a woman standing in front, and a man standing behind them. They were not making any attempt to hide. They just stood there, watching, waiting. The man appeared to be forty or so, around mom’s age. I guessed the woman might be thirty. She definitely looked younger than my mom. The other two were young teenage girls and were probably thirteen or fourteen.
The man was white and very stocky, about the same height as me. The woman was a light skinned black and very slender. She reminded me of someone I had seen on one of our movies but I could not remember the name. I guessed one of the girls might be her daughter. She had the same shade of skin and body type. The other girl was Asian. I thought they were a pretty odd group to be together. They did not seem a very likely family.
They were all wearing clothes; shirts, pants and shoes. Except for winter we pretty much never wore clothes. It was late spring, and already warm, so we were all naked. I could also see that the man had a rifle that he held close to his leg. If I had not looked close I would have missed it. They also had backpacks, and a few yards behind them I spotted a cart that had bags and boxes stacked in it. The man put one hand to his mouth, “Hello the house”.
I started to turn to get out of the pack by the window, “I guess I should go out and see what they want”.
Mom took my arm and pulled me back. “Dan. We need to be careful here. He is armed”, she had seen the rifle. “We don’t know where they came from or what they want. But our biggest problem is what if they carry the virus? One touch from them could wipe us all out”.
I looked back at the man, and then at the rifle. “I’ll go out and see what he wants”.
Mom stopped me again, “Just go on the porch. Don’t let them approach you. They need to stay a good distance away. I just hope that is enough”. She turned to Terri, “Terri. You are the best shot here. I want you to take a rifle, go out the back door and around behind the woodpile. If you can don’t let them see you. I want you to cover Dan. If the man makes a threatening move I want you to shoot him”.
Terri, still looking out the window said, “I don’t like him”.
I almost laughed. “How can you say that? We don’t know anything about them”.
She looked back at me. “Look how they are standing”.
I looked back at the group. “You don’t like him because how he stands”?
She looked at me a bit exasperated, “No, not how he stands, it’s where he is standing. The women are in front. He is behind them, like he is using them as a shield”.
I looked back out. “I see what you mean. But it might not mean anything”. I did not want to make a big point of it in front of the others but she had something there. Terri was pretty sharp.
Terri looked back at me, “Don’t worry Dan. I won’t let him do anything”. Then Terri went over to the gun closet, pulled her rifle out, made sure it was loaded and walked to the backdoor. She stood there waiting for me to go out. “Give me a minute to get in position before you go out”.
When I got to the door I stopped and looked back around the room. All the kids and my sisters were at the windows staring at the strangers. This was huge for the kids. They had never seen another person outside of the family. Hell, we did not know there was another person outside the family.
Just as I was about to open the door mom touched my arm to stop me. “When you are talking to them, we are your wives, not your mother and sisters”. I must have had a hurt look on my face, that was how I felt, because she immediately said, “No, I’m not ashamed. If you think about it, we are your wives. But anyway, I want him to see us as yours. We are an intact family. I don’t know what his intentions are. I don’t want him to think there might be opportunities for him here”.
I opened the door and stepped outside, mom followed me. Before I could stop them, Megan and Shelly stepped outside also. I motioned for them to go back in but they both shook their heads and stayed. Both mom and Shelly were pregnant and almost ready to deliver. I did not think it was the safest place for them but I had to admit, he certainly could not miss the fact that we were a family.
They had not moved. I raised a hand in a greeting and the man waved back but stayed where he was. I remained silent. I wanted him to begin. After a few seconds he began, “Hello. We saw your smoke. At first we thought there was a fire but we should check it out. We have not seen another person in so many years. Can we come in”? As he said that he reached forward and nudged the kids and they took a step forward. I immediately held up my hand and they stopped. “Okay, would you happen to have some extra food you can spare”?
I finally spoke up for the first time, “Yes, we have some food. Where are you from”?
“Thanks. We are from Virginia. We have been slowly walking across country for years now. We explored and looked for people all the way but we never saw a soul. For the first few years all we saw was bodies. Now we don’t even see that. My family lived down there in the valley. We stopped there. I hoped, but they are gone too. How did you all escape the virus”?
It was the crux of the matter, what we both wanted to know. “We were up here before it happened. We stayed here and did not see anyone until everything was over. We have never visited another farm and we’ve never gone down to the town below”. I waited for a moment and then asked, “And you”?
The woman started to answer but the man grabbed her arm and she stopped. Then he replied, “Kind of the same thing as you. We were all in a wilderness retreat. We were the only ones there. We did not even know what was happening until it was all over”.
I was curious about one thing, “You have been walking through towns and have had no problems”?
“You mean the virus? No, it must be over now. I guess that explains the lack of clothes on you people. I mean, you’re staying here and not visiting a town”.
The four of us had been standing there talking with them in the nude.
“Can we come up to the house now”?
Mom spoke up for the first time, “No. We need to talk first”.
We turned around to face each other. “The fact that they are here does not mean the virus is gone. They could be carriers. That is, they could have the virus but do not get sick. They just pass it on to others”. Mom had a good point.
“But how can we tell”?
“One of use needs to spend time with them. It works fast. Two days should be enough time to tell”.
Megan turned to mom, “You mean one of us could die if they have the virus”.
She nodded. “Our choices are limited. Either we send them away or we have to test to see if it is safe. The only way we have of testing is to expose someone”.
I spoke up, “I’ll go”. It did not seem right to have one of the girls go. The man should protect them. It also seemed unreasonable to send away the first people we encounter.
Megan then put up a hand to stop me. “No. It should be me”. Before any of us could say anything she continued, “Mom, you and Shelly are both about to deliver. It would not be fair to the babies if something happened to you. And Dan, don’t be such a guy. You are the only man we have, and you are the father to all those kids back there. It can’t be Susan. She is the one mom has been teaching to be a nurse. And Terri is the one with the gun over there covering us. And we certainly cannot send one of our babies out there. It has to be me”.
I could not think of a single point to refute but I felt bad about not being the one to protect them instead of the other way around. I finally just nodded. Mom told her to go and get several days worth of food packed. We turned around to the group waiting for us. “What are your names”?
“I’m John, this is Sharon and the two kids are Janelle and Myoku. And you are”?
“I’m Dan. This is” and I had to stop and think. I had not heard mom’s name since dad had used it, what, fifteen years ago or so. With the slight pause I added “Meredith, and this is Shelly and that was Megan who went back inside”.
They started to walk towards us and I held up my hand to stop them a second time. “We still have a concern about the virus. You might be carriers. We have talked it over and the plan is to have one of us stay with you for a couple of days to be sure there is no problem, a quarantine of sorts”.
If a few minutes Megan returned. She gave each of us a long hug and then we watched as Megan joined them. They pulled a tent out of their cart, set it up and then sat around on the ground and talked. We gave stern warnings to the kids that they were off limits for a couple of days. After a while the novelty of just watching them wore off. Terri had rejoined us earlier and we sat around in the kitchen and discussed what to do. After some heated discussion it was decided that if they were not carrying the virus they could stay here with us for a while. Take some time to see if they were compatible with our group. If not they would be asked to move on. Terri, who had disliked the man from the start, argued to have them move on now.
After a couple of days Terri was showing no sign of the virus infection. From what we saw on news reports from when we were little, we knew it took about a day after first exposure before you knew you were infected. Blood vessels throughout your body would simple fall apart. You would turn black from all the internal bleeding. You had total organ failure. After three days we decided it was safe and they came up to the house to meet us. While the adults met in the kitchen to talk, all the kids were out on the porch talking with Janelle and Myoku. It took about fifteen minutes for the kids to begin calling Myoku, Mikey. Our kids had never seen anyone with different skin color outside of a book so they were constantly touching the new girl’s skin.
In the kitchen we decided they could use a bunkhouse we had out past the barn. It had several bunk beds in it and a wood stove that could be used for heat and cooking. Future plans could be worked on later. At the worst they could stay through the summer and winter and then move on. I thought it might be a good idea if they stayed with us. It would give us some genetic diversity plus it would be good for mom. There would be two people she could relate to, one her age and the other close to her age.
Later that night, after the kids had been put down, it was just my sisters, mom and I seated around the kitchen table. We had been bugging Megan for more information about them and she had been putting us off until later. Later had finally arrived.
“Here is what I remember, and a few things that I read between the lines. Sharon was married to a man who was much older than her”.
Several of us interrupted asking where the husband was.
“If you will all be quiet I’ll get to that. Janelle and Myoku were foster kids of his. They went on a trip into this wilderness area and that is where they met John. He hired out as a guide and he took them up to this small lodge that was way out in the middle of nowhere. They were the only people there. Food had been stocked there for guests. The guests were expected to hunt for meat.
They had a radio but hardly ever used it. When they got there they knew about the problems in Asia but they were out of touch when the virus took over. The radio was a hit and miss thing because they were out in the middle of the mountains.
When they finally heard about the virus spreading it was pretty much all over everywhere. They decided to wait it out there. Then it was like it was for us. They just did not hear anything on the radio anymore. Then something happened to Sharon’s husband and he died. They did not say much about it, John changed the subject whenever I asked. I’m guessing that he does not like having the subject of her husband brought up because she is with him now”.
I wanted to know, “What happened to the husband? How did he die”?
“From what Sharon said before John stopped her, I think he and John were on a hunting trip and he had an accident”.
The mystery somewhat explained, we moved on. Everyone seemed to like the girls. We were all undecided about John. He was not very friendly or outgoing. We probably just had to get used to him.
Over the next few weeks, life slowly settled back to normal. Mom and Shelly delivered their babies, both healthy boys. John and Sharon joined in our work. Janelle and Mikey joined in with my sisters though they spent most of their time with Terri. That seemed only natural since they were the closest in age.
Since Terri walked around nude all the time Janelle and Mikey started doing the same. You could see they were shy about it at first, especially around me but in a few days they were over it. John and Sharon were a bit more conservative. The best they could do was to drop down to shorts and shoes. Sharon began going around topless. It was obvious she had not had children. While all my women showed the signs of repeated breastfeeding, Sharon’s breasts, while full, rode high on her and really stuck out. Several times she had caught me staring at them. She would frown, look towards John if he was around, and shake her head. It had me a bit confused. Was she saying, not while he was around, or don’t, because he won’t like it. I finally got over it. I had enough breasts around me day and night to keep me satisfied. But I’m a guy. I had to look.
I was out mending a fence about a month after they arrived when Terri came up behind me. “What are you doing”?
If I had been wearing shoes I would have jumped out of them. “Don’t do that. You are the quietest person I know. I ought to but a bell around your neck”.
She was not amused. “John makes me nervous”.
“What do you mean”?
“He is always watching me. I’ll be working and find him looking at me. And he looks up and down my body. I don’t like it. I would put on clothes but I don’t like the idea of having to do that just because of him”.
“Are you sure you’re not reading too much into this? You did not like him from the beginning”.
“No it’s not that. I’ve talked to my sisters and he does not hang around them. Sometimes I go and swim alone. Afterwards I’ll lie out in the sun for a while. Several times now I’ve seen him up behind some trees watching me. I had on sunglasses so I don’t think he knows I saw him”.
“Do you want me to talk to him”?
“No. I think you should let me shoot him”.
I laughed.
“I’m serious. If I don’t now, I will just have to do it later”.
“Come on Terri. You can’t just shoot him. If this gets worse we’ll ask them to leave. In the meantime give me a day or so to figure out how to handle this. I’ll talk to him. I just need some time to figure out what to say”.
“Okay. He’s up with Megan and Susan working in the corn. I’ll go take my swim now while he’s out of the way. I’ll work on just staying away from him”.
With and “Okay” she left and I decided to go to my workshop in the barn. I wanted to get away from everyone and give this some thought. About a year ago I found I needed a retreat where I could get away from everyone for short periods. As much as I loved the girls and my kids, sometimes I needed some time to my self. God help me, with twenty three kids, I really needed some time. So I had made a room for myself out of the workshop in the barn. I had a small bed and a couple of chairs in there. Every now and then I would just sack out there. The girls knew when I was there that I wanted to be alone and they respected it.
When I got there I went over to the bed and lay down. This was going to be a thorny problem. Could it be fixed or should we have them leave? Was it possible to fix it? John was a difficult person. He did not mix with us much. Sharon and the girls were great. We would miss them if they left.
As I was running possible scenarios through my head, the door opened. Janelle and Mikey walked in. What do they want? Of course they don’t know the rules about this room. Before I could get up, they walked right up to the bed and sat on each side facing me near my feet. “What are you girls doing here? Do you need something”?
Janelle smiled at me, “Yes we do need something”. She put a hand out and lightly ran it up my thigh from my knee to my hip and then back down. “And I see you have it”.
I about swallowed my heart. It was obvious what she wanted. I looked over at Mikey, and while she was not as forward as Janelle, she was smiling also. “I think you girls had better go before John comes around”.
Mikey answered, “Oh we don’t have to worry about him. He sent us over”. Then she put her hand out and laid it on the middle of my thigh with her fingers laying tantalizingly down the inside of my thigh. “Oh look, it moved!”
I didn’t have to look. I knew what moved. My cock had been laying off at a 90 degree angle. Now it was 45 degrees. Both girls moved their heads closer to watch for any further developments. I wanted to distract them but they both looked so beautiful. They both looked so different from what I had grown used to. Mikey with her small breasts and Asian features and Janelle with her large breasts and dark skin.
“Look it’s big”. I looked down and I was now fully erect. I was now pointing straight at me and up off my stomach. Janelle reached out with a hand and grabbed me near the head. That gave Mikey the courage to reach out. She grabbed me at the base and with her other hand began pushing my balls around.
For a moment I just sighed and lay back in the bed and enjoyed the moment. Then I remembered John. He could get violent if he found us. These were his women. “You girls have to stop before John finds us”.
“We told you. John sent us over. He wanted us to be friendly with you”.
“I don’t think this is what he meant be being friendly”.
“He did not tell us not to”.
I did not need much persuasion. That was good enough for me. I had two girls running their hands all over my legs and up to my chest while keeping a firm grip on my cock. I had lost quite a bit of blood flow to my brain so I might be forgiven if I was not thinking to clearly at the moment.
As I was lying there I heard Mikey say “I’ve seen Mom do this to John”. The bed shifted as she moved. The hand on the top of my cock left and was then replaced with a warm, wet mouth. I looked up and saw Mikey’s head going up and down on me. Whatever reluctance I had with the girls was now officially gone. I was theirs to do with as they wished. She began running her tongue around the head and moved her mouth up and down as she did it. I heard Janelle say with some anger in her voice, “John tried to get me to do that one night after Mom went to sleep but Mom woke up and stopped him”.
Janelle turned and moved up closer to me. I reached out to her and cupped her breasts with my hands. When I touched her she pushed herself hard against my hands. She closed her eyes, “That feels so nice”.
I let one hand trail down her stomach until I reached between her legs. She moved up closer so I could reach better and ended up with her breasts in my face. While I sucked a nipple into my mouth I began moving my fingers around on her pussy. She gasped, “Oh god. Maybe I should have let him”. She was getting very wet. I was torn between letting Mikey finish me and having Janelle slide down so I could slide into her. I then realized I could also reach Mikey with my other hand. She was facing away from me still bobbing up and down on my cock. As I reached out to rub Mikey’s pussy Janelle whispered, “Are you going to fuck me”?
“In a little bit”. My hand reached Mikey’s knee. I slowly caressed my way up from her knee until it reached her pussy. I moved it around her sparse pubic hair and then made my way to the lips of her pussy. She was as wet as Janelle. I pushed my finger against her lips and they parted. I put a finger inside her. It was so hot and tight. I had been making love to women these last several years that had all had multiple births. A really tight pussy was a distant memory, until now. She moaned and pushed back against my finger. I almost laughed as a thought flashed through my mind. It was something like a saying my mom used sometimes. Something about two bushes in the hand worth one bird.
I was trying to decide which girl should be fucked first when that familiar boiling and tingling feeling began in my balls. “I’m going to cum”.
Janelle moved down quickly to Mikey saying, “I want to see. Move your mouth”.
I thought, “Oh, please don’t move your mouth”.
Mikey moved her mouth away but continued moving her hand up and down my cock. It was just a few seconds longer before I felt the cum launching out of me. Both girls gave a squeal as the first stream shot up into the air. Mikey was leaning too far out and it hit her in the forehead and a second hit her in the cheek. Janelle laughed at her so Mikey pointed me at Janelle. A stream caught her in her in her mouth while she was laughing and another got her on the nose. Now Mikey was also laughing.
I watched as Janelle moved her tongue around in her mouth tasting my cum. Mikey, with cum dripping down her face, asked, “What does it taste like”?
“I don’t know how to describe it. It’s just different. Not bad. See for yourself. You have some on your lip”.
The cum had dripped down from her forehead to her lips. The shot that hit her cheek was now dripping down in a long cum rope to her breasts. Mikey stuck her tongue out and licked her lips and then sucked it into her mouth. I watched as she swished it around in her mouth and then swallowed.
They both moved up in the bed so that they were laying next to me. Janelle moved her hand very gently around in circles on my chest. “Terri said you first fucked her when she was thirteen. We are both fifteen. So we are old enough. Who do you want to fuck first? Mikey already got you to cum so I think it should be me”?
As I was trying to think of my answer the door swung open, “Janelle, Myoku, are you in here”? Sharon stepped into the room. Both girls jumped up leaving me flat on the bed with a semi-erect dick. My heart fell as I looked up. Both girls still had cum dripping down on their faces.
“What are you doing in here”? It must have been obvious what we had been doing. “Oh no. John is going to be so angry. How could you do this to me? You know he takes these things out on me”.
“It’s okay mom. John sent us over”.
“What do you mean he sent you over”?
“He said he had some things to do and told us to come over and be nice to Dan. He said we could learn some things”.
Sharon turned to me. Fortunately I was completely deflated by now. “Dan. Where is Terri”?
Why would she be asking about Terri? “I think she went swimming a while ago. Why”?
“I think you should go check on her”.
“I’m sure she is fine. She swims alone all the time. We all do”.
“Dan. That’s not the point. I think you should go check on her”.
Then it hit me. “Where’s John”?
“Go check on her”.
I jumped up and started to jog towards our swimming hole. I went just a few steps when I stopped and then ran up to the house. The gun closet was always kept locked now with so many kids around. It took me a minute to unlock it. I grabbed a revolver, checked to be sure it was loaded, relocked the cabinet and then started running for the swimming hole. As I got close I could hear yelling. I could not tell what was being said but it sounded like Terri and it was intense.
As I reached the rise above our spot I slowed down and then walked through the trees to where I could see. I wanted to know what I was walking in on. I could now hear Terri’s voice fairly clearly. “John. Stop! Get out of me”!
When I stepped around the last tree I could see them on the ground with their feet towards me. John was naked and on top of her. He was holding both of her arms stretched out with his and he had her body pinned to the ground with his. Terri had her legs up in the air and was trying to kick him while his hips were moving up and down driving his cock into her. I could hear him grunting as he rammed into her. He was raping her!
I quickly walked down and approached them from behind. As I got behind him Terri saw me but did not say anything. I put the barrel of the gun against the back of his neck and pulled the hammer back. With the click he froze.
“Get off her”.
He let go of her hands and rolled off to a side. Terri jumped up. I could see tears in her eyes but her face was cold. She reached out to me. “Give me the gun”.
“Go on back to the house”.
“Give me the gun. I told you I would have to kill him”.
“Go back and see mom”.
She looked down at John. “Don’t come near me again. If I see you again I will have a gun and I will kill you. Ask Dan if you don’t believe me”. Then she walked away.
I squatted down out of arms reach of him. The gun was still cocked. He looked very anxious. I was not sure of what I was going to do. “You know, I should have let her. The only reason I didn’t is that you have a family to take care of, though they might be better off without you. But that is not my decision to make”.
“Dan. I’m so sorry. I don’t know what came over me. It’s just that you have all these kids. We have been trying to have kids for this whole time and nothing. She is barren. She tells me the two kids are still too young and I have to wait. And then I see you here with all these…”. And then his voice trailed off. “I’m sorry. We’ll go”.
“No. It is too late for you to go right now. We thought you might settle in the valley here, be our neighbors, but now I thing it would be a good idea for you to move on much farther away. You will not have the time right now. Winter comes pretty quick here. You will stay around the bunkhouse. Sharon and the girls can work with us but you need to stay away. She meant it when she said she’d kill you. She is an excellent shot, better than I am and much more cold-blooded. You want to stay far away from her”.
I could see anger flare in his face and just as quickly pass. I’ll need to watch him. He does not like being told what to do. “Okay. That sounds like a good idea. We should move on as soon as the weather is good. We had not really planned on staying in this area anyway”.
I stood and took a couple of steps back. I looked at him for a few seconds trying to assess what was going through his mind but his face was blank. I turned and left him there, tapping the ground with one hand.
When I got back to the house Terri was in Mom’s bedroom; she was comforting Terri.
“They will be staying here through winter and then be leaving. They won’t be settling in the valley. I thought it would be best if they completely left the area”.
Mom nodded. “It’s too bad about the girls though. They would be welcome. I hate to think what it must be like living with him. I’ll miss Sharon. It was nice having someone around who knows the old world, someone to talk to about stuff”.
I left them there and returned to the workshop. When I walked in I could still detect the odor of sex in the air. The bed remained askew. I kept thinking back to Janelle’s question, “Who do you want to fuck first”? I wasn’t sure then. Now I knew it could not happen. They would be leaving in the spring.
The next two months were very tense. I saw little of John and avoided him when I did see him. Terri walked around everywhere. I suspected she was deliberately trying to have an encounter with John. She always carried a small bag with her. I had no doubt about what was in the bag. John had his meals with Sharon in their quarters in the bunkhouse. Janelle and Mikey came around to the barn a couple of times when they knew I was there and John was too far away to catch them. I gave them a brief hello and sent them on their way. It was not easy, as every time I saw them some very pleasurable memories would return. Unfortunately for me, it also brought back all the guilt I felt over my getting a blowjob while Terri was getting raped. Plus, the only reason for the blowjob was to give him the opportunity.
The two girls were very much like Terri in that they could be very quiet. They were always sneaking up on me. If I did not see them coming, my first clue they were even nearby would be Mikey or Janelle rubbing their breasts against my back.
“Whatcha doin”? They had done it again. I was sharpening our scythes and I almost cut myself when they startled me. I could feel Mikey behind me, or rather; I could feel her two nipples poking me in the back. I stepped forward to put some distance between us and then turned around. I had learned my lesson earlier about just turning around. The first time I had done that, I found Mikey in front of me pushing forward so that her breasts were right in my hands. She was not a tall girl. I knew she was somewhere under five feet. She was not that much taller than my oldest children.
“I’m just sharpening some tools. They get dull fast. You need to leave. I have told you too many times you cannot come in here with me. If your Dad sees you with me you know your mother has a hard time with him”. As I finished, I motioned that she should leave.
Her face turned dark, “Don’t call him my dad. He is not my dad”. She just looked at me and then turned and left without saying anything else. Boy, I hit a nerve there.
I stepped over to the door, staying in the shadows and watched her butt sway as she walked away. Thank god this erection did not start while we were back in the barn together. I might not have been able to get her to leave, or worse, I might not have let her leave.
When she was out of sight I returned and slowly worked through all the tools that needed sharpening. It was pretty much an excuse to be away from everyone. I knew the tension with John was spilling over to how I was reacting with my family. I had been short with several of the kids over the last week.
Just as it started getting dark Terri brought out some dinner for me. It was Saturday and our “guests” always came up to the house to eat with us on Saturdays. This gave her a good excuse not to be there when John arrived. She sat and tried to draw me out in conversation but I was not in the mood so she finally left. For the next hour I sat there and thought about the situation; how can it be resolved? I finally decided that since he is going to be here for a few more months maybe I should break the ice with him and we can make the best of a bad situation. I’ll try tomorrow.
It was long after dinner when I left the barn for the house. In the dark I thought I saw someone outside by the bunkhouse but it was hard to see. Thinking it might be John, I decided to go over and just say hello. Maybe that can be the first step to our being at least civil.
As I approached the building I could see there was no one outside. There were lights on inside but curtains covered the windows so I could not see anyone. I was just turning to leave when I heard a sharp sound from inside followed by a cry. It sounded like a hand slapping skin. I turned back around and stepped closer to the window. It was open because of the heat and I could hear low voices coming through it.
“I told you to stay away him”. It was John and I could hear the anger in his voice. He must have seen Mikey enter or leave the barn this afternoon. “I just wanted to talk to him”. It was Mikey. “No, Please”. I heard the slapping again followed by Mikey beginning to cry. “If you just wanted to talk then why were you naked”? I did not hear Mikey reply. She finally choked out “We all go around like that now. I didn’t do it for him”.
I heard a noise some distance behind me. When I turned around I saw Sharon and Janelle walking towards me. It was dark and I was far enough away that I did not think they saw me. I stepped behind a tree and waited for them to pass me and go inside.
When the door closed I started to walk away. I stopped when I heard Sharon exclaim, “Why did you hit this girl”? There were some low sounds that I could not make out then Sharon spoke up again, “Don’t raise your hand to me. You hit me again and I’ll never sleep with you again. And you’ll never get to sleep with these girls either”.
When I got to the house I kept what I had heard that night to myself. I said goodnight to the kids that were still up and then went into my bedroom. When I opened the door I could see someone in my bed. As I got closer I saw it was Terri. She had fallen asleep waiting for me. It was a bit of a surprise. She had not slept with me since John attacked her. I thought perhaps she was now put off by men, me included. I was also afraid she had found out about the diversion I had fallen for and blamed me. When I got in bed she turned over and put her arms around me. With a very sleepy voice she said, “I’ve missed you. It’s time for me to get pregnant but I’m tired. Do you mind if we wait until morning”?
I was relieved. She was not mad at me. “No, it’s fine. I’m just glad to have you here”. She quickly fell back asleep. With her head on my shoulder, I followed her a few minutes later.
The next morning she kept her promise. We made love very slowly. It started with us laying on our sides with her back to me. When I entered her she reached down and pushed me deeper into her with the flat of her hand. Once I was buried in her she gently grabbed my balls and pulled them towards her with each stroke. I had my arms around her and was caressing her from her breasts down into her pubic hair. While I was lightly running my fingers in her hair she reached up, took my hand and moved it lower. With her fingers on top of mine she pushed my fingers against her clitoris. It was plain that she did not want me to move my fingers. She wanted to move my fingers for me. As my fingers were moved around I could also feel my shaft against them, slowly sliding in and out of her. As the feeling was building up in me I wanted to speed up but I held back. I knew she needed this. The slow easy lovemaking was helping her.
A while later she turned over and then pulled at me to get on top of her. “I think you are ready now. I know I am. Give me a good fucking. I want to remember only you ever being on top of me”.
As I lifted up to get on top of her she pulled her feet up the bed towards her butt, bending her knees. She then spread her knees out until they were almost flat on the bed. I was still in a bit of a tender mood so I was moving slowly. I was finally on top of her but I had not entered her yet. My cock was right at the entrance. I could feel her pelvis straining to get down to me. With frustration in her voice she asked, “Did you not understand me? I said I wanted a good fucking. Now fuck me”.
I needed no further words of encouragement. I pushed forward and ran into her right up to the hilt. She gave a loud gasp. “That’s what I need. That feels so good. Not only did he make me mad, he has a little dick”.
I began thrusting faster in and out of her. She had both arms around me and was pulling me down tight against her on the bed. Each time I reached bottom she let out a gasp. I could feel her head move up on the bed as each stoke hit her. After another stroke I heard her say “Harder”.
I almost laughed. “I can’t get any harder”.
“I know. I’m the one down here. I meant fuck me harder”.
I picked up speed slamming hard into her. She had hooked her legs around my waist so she was tight against me as I pushed her down into the bed. The springs were really earning their pay. “Yes. That’s it Danny. More. More. Right……there”. She arched her body hard against mine and she dug her nails into my back. And then her pussy clamped down on me. That was all I could take. I pushed as deep as I could in her, and I did not so much release the sperm in her as it just all shot out of me into her. It was like one long continuous ejaculation.
We were both spent and just laid there trying to catch our breath. Finally she smiled and pushed at me. “Hey you need to get off of me. Remember I’m the little kid sister. You are squashing me”.
I let my weight sag down a bit. I was not above rising to the bait with my little sister. Even if I was on top of her with my cock still buried in her. But I was really happy to see that her sense of humor had returned.
“Hey, you are squashing me, I can’t breathe”.
But being the nice big brother I am, I lifted my weight off of her and then rolled over to the side. She followed me and put one leg up on mine and an arm across my chest. “That was very nice. I would let you do it to me again if I thought we would survive”.
Over the next few weeks, as summer was coming to an end, my bedroom became a case of musical chairs with Terri, Megan and Susan. They were all trying to get pregnant quickly so that they could deliver before summer began again. They had all learned that the heat of summer was not a great time to be walking around with a swollen belly. Mom and Shelly had delivered just a few months ago and wanted a break. I did not mind at all. Just the three women kept me busy day and night. I also learned to check the bed before I got in. On a couple of different occasions I found either Janelle or Mikey, naked in my bed, waiting for me. It took some real willpower to send them off. It is not easy to pull the covers back on your bed, find a beautiful naked, extremely willing, young girl, and then send her away.
The weather had just started to turn cooler when mom approached me and said I needed to get a few hunting trips in. I had not given it much thought during the summer. The arrival of our new people, and all the work we had this summer had completely occupied my mind. Mom suggested I take John. She said they could use the meat when they left and it would get him away for a while. That would allow Janelle, Mikey and Sharon to relax with the rest of our family before they had to leave.
I told her I would ask, but I didn’t know if he would take me up on it. We were not exactly hunting buddies. Since I was not so keen on the idea I did not search him out for a few days. When I finally explained mom’s idea to him, leaving out the part about the girls relaxing without him, he surprised me by saying “That’s a great idea. And she is right. We could use the meat when we leave. When do you want to go”?
I was not ready for that question. I had so firmly believed he would not be interested I had not given it any thought. “Well, I will have several trips this fall so it should be pretty soon”.
“How about we leave tomorrow”?
I did not really have any reason not to so I said, “Okay. I travel light. Change of clothes, sometimes we have bad weather this time of year. A pup tent. Food for a couple of days. We will leave around 5AM tomorrow. It will take us almost all day to get where I hunt. I use a bow by the way”.
He gave me a funny look. “I’ve never used a bow so I’ll just take my rifle. I’m pretty good with it. I’ll see you by the barn in the morning”. He left, walking towards the bunkhouse.
In the morning, as I began to get out of bed, Terri rolled over and gave me a hug. “Are you sure you don’t want me to shoot him now? It could save you a lot of trouble”.
I hugged her back. “No, if he needs shooting I’ll do it for you”.
She turned back over and with a very sleepy voice said, “Don’t take all my fun away”. I kissed her on the forehead and she was already back asleep.
It was going to be cold in the mountains so I dressed appropriately. When I left I found John sitting by the barn waiting for me. It looked like he had everything he needed in a backpack. As I walked up I said, “It looks like you’re ready. Lets’ hit the trail”.
Little was said as we walked. Daylight found us miles from home. As we walked around one ridge I pointed out a couple of roads John’s family would take on their way to the San Joaquin Valley. It was where he said they would be going come spring.
It was evening when we finally arrived where I usually camped. We made some dinner, put up our tents and I immediately went to sleep. The next morning I found John already up. “While you were sleeping this morning I saw a large herd of deer move across that side of the mountain over there and then go over the top. There were several really good sized deer in it. Now you are probably better with that bow than I am with this rifle,” though the look on his face said otherwise, “but since some of this meat is for us I would like to be responsible for getting a couple of the deer”.
It sounded reasonable to me. Any man would want to be responsible for providing for his family. “How do you want to do it”?
“Well I’ve been thinking about that for the last hour, waiting for you to wake”. He pointed over to where the deer had moved through. “It has not been very long. I bet they are on the other side of that ridge feeding. There is a technique that has worked really well for me in Virginia. There is a deer trail over there”. He pointed behind me. “I want you to follow it. I think it will take you right around to the other side of this mountain.
While you are doing that I’m going to move over to where the deer moved up. I’ll be positioned about fifty yards below that ridge. It should take you about an hour to get there. When you do, just start walking up the mountain making noise. The deer will hear you and flush out in front of you. When they break over the top I’ll pick a couple of good ones and drop them”.
I could not find any fault with his plan. It seemed very reasonable. I picked up my bow and quiver and took a step towards the deer trail. “Do you need those”? I stopped and turned. He was pointing at my bow.
“Yes. You never know what you’ll meet here. I lost my dad years ago to a bear. Plus, I might get a chance for something after you get yours. If they cross back over the ridge I might drop something”. He nodded and I turned and began following the trail.
It was a rough trail in parts but he was right, it seemed to be working its way horizontally around the mountain. If it stayed this way I should end up right where he wanted me. It took me almost exactly an hour to reach a point that I thought was equal to where he would be waiting on the other side. I began walking up, not trying to be quiet. I was not deliberately making noise but I knew I was being loud enough to flush any deer. It was very rough going on this side except for one part that flattened out. There was even a pretty deep stream that ran down the mountain. I was lucky I did not have to cross it to get where I wanted. The stream had steep sides and there was one waterfall drop that I could see where it fell onto rocks below. It looked rough but it was pretty.
As I continued making my way up I hoped I was moving the deer up. I had not seen anything or heard anything but this side was pretty heavily wooded. With my luck they probably moved sideways around the mountain instead of going back over the top. I had reached a point about sixty yards from the top when I stopped and leaned against a tree for a breather. The steep climb had really tired me out. I was just getting ready to push off and resume my climb when suddenly the tree I was leaning against exploded next to my face. My face was peppered with bark as I fell backwards on the ground. Just a moment later the sound of the rifle shot rolled down to me. Damn. He’s not a hunter. He shoots at any movement. What is he doing on this side? Did I take too long climbing up?
I was trying to blink pieces of bark out of my eyes when I heard his voice, “Dan? Are you okay? Where are you”?
Laying on my back I called out to him, “You dumb shit! That was not a deer. You almost hit me”. I was almost able to see again. I began rolling over so I could get up.
His voice seemed closer now as he called out to me, “Are you okay? I thought I saw a deer. I didn’t hit you did I? Stand up so I can see you”?
I stood up and looked up the hill to see where he was. “No, you did not hit me. I’m okay. I just got hit with some bark”. I knew he was not too far away by the sound of his voice earlier, but I could not see him walking down towards me. As I scanned above me I saw something flash to one side. I looked closer and I spotted John standing against a tree. Then I saw what flashed. He had the rifle up pointed at me. It was the sun reflecting off the scope that I saw. I jumped towards the tree and actually heard the shot pass right next to my cheek. As the sound of the shot came to me I was moving from tree to tree working my way back downhill. I took a chance after about twenty five yards and looked back to see him working his way downhill after me. When he saw me stop and look back he quickly raised the rifle but I moved into some dense trees so he did not have a clear shot.
A couple of times the trees thinned out and he took a quick shot at me. I heard the shell hit trees but I was lucky so far. He must have lost me a couple of times as he would call out to me to try and get me to reveal where I was. The last time he was really close to me. “Dan, you might as well come out. I’ll get you eventually. If you come out now and don’t make me work too hard I’ll make it easy on you. One shot. You won’t even feel it. You make me run you down this mountain and it will just make me mad. Don’t be like Frank. He made me work. I was not very nice to him in the end. I’ll put a couple in your legs and arms. Then I’ll gut shoot you and just leave you here. You might even meet that bear that got your father”.
Who the hell is Frank? Then I remembered Terri’s story. John had gone hunting with Sharon’s husband and he did not return.
Very quietly I began moving down again. From the sound I knew I was near the stream. Maybe it would give me a way out. When I reached it I saw that it would be no help. The chasm was too wide to jump across and the sides were too steep to get down. Then an idea came to me. I took the quiver off my belt. I took most the arrows out and spread them around on the ground like they had fallen. I kept five of the arrows and dropped the quiver on the ground. Looking up and down the stream I picked the high side as having the best field of view. I walked up slowly making sure I was not leaving tracks. I found a spot between two trees that shielded me pretty well but still left me with a good view of where I had dropped the arrows.
When I heard the first twig break I took a step back between the trees, notched an arrow and pulled the string back to my cheek. I knew I would have to hold it until he showed himself. I could not risk him seeing any movement. After a minute there was no sign of him. My arms were beginning to burn. He must have gone another way and is not coming here at all. Just as I was about to lower the bow John stepped out from behind a tree. How long had he been standing there? He walked over to the side of the stream and looked down. He stepped back, picked up a couple of arrows and then tossed them over the side down into the water. “Well Dan, you should have listened to me. I told you I would have given you an easier way out. A fall down into those rocks couldn’t have been much fun”. And then he laughed.
I was not totally sure I could do it until he laughed. I took careful aim. It was a level shot, no wind and I had his side towards me. It was a tight shot but I was pretty good. He had stepped back from the edge and was now pissing on a tree. The arrow took him through the neck and buried itself deep in the tree. I notched another arrow and stepped out from the trees. He must have heard me because he was trying to turn his head to see me. However the arrow through his neck would not let him. I let another go and it took him deep in the side. He sagged with that hit, the arrow through his neck broke and he fell into a sitting position against the tree.
When I got up to him his eyes followed me but he was unable to talk. I was fine with that. There was nothing he had to say that I was interested in. His eyes began to sink down. “John. John, look at me”. His eyes rose slowly back up to mine. “I just wanted you to know something before you die. The first arrow was for me. The second was for Terri. And I have to tell you. She is going to be pretty mad at me when I get back home and she finds out she is not going to get to shoot you after all”.
I squatted down in front of him and waited. It did not take long. It was less than a minute before the life faded out of his eyes. I picked up my quiver, replaced the arrows and began working my way back to camp. I slept well that night. The next day I got a deer the first thing in the morning and then started home.
When I was in sight of the house it was the kids that saw me first. A bunch came out and tackled me, taking me to the ground in their welcome home. After some wrestling I had them take the meat over to the meat house to be put away. When I got to the porch I found Mom and Terri sitting in their rocking chairs. They started to say hello as I approached, but they must have seen something in my face and they stopped. They looked around me and Mom finally asked, “John”?
I said simply, “He didn’t make it”.
Terri smiled. Mom did not say anything for a while, she just looked at me. Finally she must have decided I was okay. “Come on inside. Sharon and the girls are in the kitchen canning fruit to take with them next spring. Let’s let them know they won’t be leaving after all”.
I just sat there speechless for the longest time. What could she be talking about? What people? Was this just a kid’s game with imaginary players? Just as I was about to ask her about it, another of the children, Janice, ran in shouting, “There are people out by the barn”.
I got up and went to the window followed by mom. Everyone else crowded around behind us. Sure enough, there were four people over by the barn. They were just standing there in a group watching the house. There were two kids and a woman standing in front, and a man standing behind them. They were not making any attempt to hide. They just stood there, watching, waiting. The man appeared to be forty or so, around mom’s age. I guessed the woman might be thirty. She definitely looked younger than my mom. The other two were young teenage girls and were probably thirteen or fourteen.
The man was white and very stocky, about the same height as me. The woman was a light skinned black and very slender. She reminded me of someone I had seen on one of our movies but I could not remember the name. I guessed one of the girls might be her daughter. She had the same shade of skin and body type. The other girl was Asian. I thought they were a pretty odd group to be together. They did not seem a very likely family.
They were all wearing clothes; shirts, pants and shoes. Except for winter we pretty much never wore clothes. It was late spring, and already warm, so we were all naked. I could also see that the man had a rifle that he held close to his leg. If I had not looked close I would have missed it. They also had backpacks, and a few yards behind them I spotted a cart that had bags and boxes stacked in it. The man put one hand to his mouth, “Hello the house”.
I started to turn to get out of the pack by the window, “I guess I should go out and see what they want”.
Mom took my arm and pulled me back. “Dan. We need to be careful here. He is armed”, she had seen the rifle. “We don’t know where they came from or what they want. But our biggest problem is what if they carry the virus? One touch from them could wipe us all out”.
I looked back at the man, and then at the rifle. “I’ll go out and see what he wants”.
Mom stopped me again, “Just go on the porch. Don’t let them approach you. They need to stay a good distance away. I just hope that is enough”. She turned to Terri, “Terri. You are the best shot here. I want you to take a rifle, go out the back door and around behind the woodpile. If you can don’t let them see you. I want you to cover Dan. If the man makes a threatening move I want you to shoot him”.
Terri, still looking out the window said, “I don’t like him”.
I almost laughed. “How can you say that? We don’t know anything about them”.
She looked back at me. “Look how they are standing”.
I looked back at the group. “You don’t like him because how he stands”?
She looked at me a bit exasperated, “No, not how he stands, it’s where he is standing. The women are in front. He is behind them, like he is using them as a shield”.
I looked back out. “I see what you mean. But it might not mean anything”. I did not want to make a big point of it in front of the others but she had something there. Terri was pretty sharp.
Terri looked back at me, “Don’t worry Dan. I won’t let him do anything”. Then Terri went over to the gun closet, pulled her rifle out, made sure it was loaded and walked to the backdoor. She stood there waiting for me to go out. “Give me a minute to get in position before you go out”.
When I got to the door I stopped and looked back around the room. All the kids and my sisters were at the windows staring at the strangers. This was huge for the kids. They had never seen another person outside of the family. Hell, we did not know there was another person outside the family.
Just as I was about to open the door mom touched my arm to stop me. “When you are talking to them, we are your wives, not your mother and sisters”. I must have had a hurt look on my face, that was how I felt, because she immediately said, “No, I’m not ashamed. If you think about it, we are your wives. But anyway, I want him to see us as yours. We are an intact family. I don’t know what his intentions are. I don’t want him to think there might be opportunities for him here”.
I opened the door and stepped outside, mom followed me. Before I could stop them, Megan and Shelly stepped outside also. I motioned for them to go back in but they both shook their heads and stayed. Both mom and Shelly were pregnant and almost ready to deliver. I did not think it was the safest place for them but I had to admit, he certainly could not miss the fact that we were a family.
They had not moved. I raised a hand in a greeting and the man waved back but stayed where he was. I remained silent. I wanted him to begin. After a few seconds he began, “Hello. We saw your smoke. At first we thought there was a fire but we should check it out. We have not seen another person in so many years. Can we come in”? As he said that he reached forward and nudged the kids and they took a step forward. I immediately held up my hand and they stopped. “Okay, would you happen to have some extra food you can spare”?
I finally spoke up for the first time, “Yes, we have some food. Where are you from”?
“Thanks. We are from Virginia. We have been slowly walking across country for years now. We explored and looked for people all the way but we never saw a soul. For the first few years all we saw was bodies. Now we don’t even see that. My family lived down there in the valley. We stopped there. I hoped, but they are gone too. How did you all escape the virus”?
It was the crux of the matter, what we both wanted to know. “We were up here before it happened. We stayed here and did not see anyone until everything was over. We have never visited another farm and we’ve never gone down to the town below”. I waited for a moment and then asked, “And you”?
The woman started to answer but the man grabbed her arm and she stopped. Then he replied, “Kind of the same thing as you. We were all in a wilderness retreat. We were the only ones there. We did not even know what was happening until it was all over”.
I was curious about one thing, “You have been walking through towns and have had no problems”?
“You mean the virus? No, it must be over now. I guess that explains the lack of clothes on you people. I mean, you’re staying here and not visiting a town”.
The four of us had been standing there talking with them in the nude.
“Can we come up to the house now”?
Mom spoke up for the first time, “No. We need to talk first”.
We turned around to face each other. “The fact that they are here does not mean the virus is gone. They could be carriers. That is, they could have the virus but do not get sick. They just pass it on to others”. Mom had a good point.
“But how can we tell”?
“One of use needs to spend time with them. It works fast. Two days should be enough time to tell”.
Megan turned to mom, “You mean one of us could die if they have the virus”.
She nodded. “Our choices are limited. Either we send them away or we have to test to see if it is safe. The only way we have of testing is to expose someone”.
I spoke up, “I’ll go”. It did not seem right to have one of the girls go. The man should protect them. It also seemed unreasonable to send away the first people we encounter.
Megan then put up a hand to stop me. “No. It should be me”. Before any of us could say anything she continued, “Mom, you and Shelly are both about to deliver. It would not be fair to the babies if something happened to you. And Dan, don’t be such a guy. You are the only man we have, and you are the father to all those kids back there. It can’t be Susan. She is the one mom has been teaching to be a nurse. And Terri is the one with the gun over there covering us. And we certainly cannot send one of our babies out there. It has to be me”.
I could not think of a single point to refute but I felt bad about not being the one to protect them instead of the other way around. I finally just nodded. Mom told her to go and get several days worth of food packed. We turned around to the group waiting for us. “What are your names”?
“I’m John, this is Sharon and the two kids are Janelle and Myoku. And you are”?
“I’m Dan. This is” and I had to stop and think. I had not heard mom’s name since dad had used it, what, fifteen years ago or so. With the slight pause I added “Meredith, and this is Shelly and that was Megan who went back inside”.
They started to walk towards us and I held up my hand to stop them a second time. “We still have a concern about the virus. You might be carriers. We have talked it over and the plan is to have one of us stay with you for a couple of days to be sure there is no problem, a quarantine of sorts”.
If a few minutes Megan returned. She gave each of us a long hug and then we watched as Megan joined them. They pulled a tent out of their cart, set it up and then sat around on the ground and talked. We gave stern warnings to the kids that they were off limits for a couple of days. After a while the novelty of just watching them wore off. Terri had rejoined us earlier and we sat around in the kitchen and discussed what to do. After some heated discussion it was decided that if they were not carrying the virus they could stay here with us for a while. Take some time to see if they were compatible with our group. If not they would be asked to move on. Terri, who had disliked the man from the start, argued to have them move on now.
After a couple of days Terri was showing no sign of the virus infection. From what we saw on news reports from when we were little, we knew it took about a day after first exposure before you knew you were infected. Blood vessels throughout your body would simple fall apart. You would turn black from all the internal bleeding. You had total organ failure. After three days we decided it was safe and they came up to the house to meet us. While the adults met in the kitchen to talk, all the kids were out on the porch talking with Janelle and Myoku. It took about fifteen minutes for the kids to begin calling Myoku, Mikey. Our kids had never seen anyone with different skin color outside of a book so they were constantly touching the new girl’s skin.
In the kitchen we decided they could use a bunkhouse we had out past the barn. It had several bunk beds in it and a wood stove that could be used for heat and cooking. Future plans could be worked on later. At the worst they could stay through the summer and winter and then move on. I thought it might be a good idea if they stayed with us. It would give us some genetic diversity plus it would be good for mom. There would be two people she could relate to, one her age and the other close to her age.
Later that night, after the kids had been put down, it was just my sisters, mom and I seated around the kitchen table. We had been bugging Megan for more information about them and she had been putting us off until later. Later had finally arrived.
“Here is what I remember, and a few things that I read between the lines. Sharon was married to a man who was much older than her”.
Several of us interrupted asking where the husband was.
“If you will all be quiet I’ll get to that. Janelle and Myoku were foster kids of his. They went on a trip into this wilderness area and that is where they met John. He hired out as a guide and he took them up to this small lodge that was way out in the middle of nowhere. They were the only people there. Food had been stocked there for guests. The guests were expected to hunt for meat.
They had a radio but hardly ever used it. When they got there they knew about the problems in Asia but they were out of touch when the virus took over. The radio was a hit and miss thing because they were out in the middle of the mountains.
When they finally heard about the virus spreading it was pretty much all over everywhere. They decided to wait it out there. Then it was like it was for us. They just did not hear anything on the radio anymore. Then something happened to Sharon’s husband and he died. They did not say much about it, John changed the subject whenever I asked. I’m guessing that he does not like having the subject of her husband brought up because she is with him now”.
I wanted to know, “What happened to the husband? How did he die”?
“From what Sharon said before John stopped her, I think he and John were on a hunting trip and he had an accident”.
The mystery somewhat explained, we moved on. Everyone seemed to like the girls. We were all undecided about John. He was not very friendly or outgoing. We probably just had to get used to him.
Over the next few weeks, life slowly settled back to normal. Mom and Shelly delivered their babies, both healthy boys. John and Sharon joined in our work. Janelle and Mikey joined in with my sisters though they spent most of their time with Terri. That seemed only natural since they were the closest in age.
Since Terri walked around nude all the time Janelle and Mikey started doing the same. You could see they were shy about it at first, especially around me but in a few days they were over it. John and Sharon were a bit more conservative. The best they could do was to drop down to shorts and shoes. Sharon began going around topless. It was obvious she had not had children. While all my women showed the signs of repeated breastfeeding, Sharon’s breasts, while full, rode high on her and really stuck out. Several times she had caught me staring at them. She would frown, look towards John if he was around, and shake her head. It had me a bit confused. Was she saying, not while he was around, or don’t, because he won’t like it. I finally got over it. I had enough breasts around me day and night to keep me satisfied. But I’m a guy. I had to look.
I was out mending a fence about a month after they arrived when Terri came up behind me. “What are you doing”?
If I had been wearing shoes I would have jumped out of them. “Don’t do that. You are the quietest person I know. I ought to but a bell around your neck”.
She was not amused. “John makes me nervous”.
“What do you mean”?
“He is always watching me. I’ll be working and find him looking at me. And he looks up and down my body. I don’t like it. I would put on clothes but I don’t like the idea of having to do that just because of him”.
“Are you sure you’re not reading too much into this? You did not like him from the beginning”.
“No it’s not that. I’ve talked to my sisters and he does not hang around them. Sometimes I go and swim alone. Afterwards I’ll lie out in the sun for a while. Several times now I’ve seen him up behind some trees watching me. I had on sunglasses so I don’t think he knows I saw him”.
“Do you want me to talk to him”?
“No. I think you should let me shoot him”.
I laughed.
“I’m serious. If I don’t now, I will just have to do it later”.
“Come on Terri. You can’t just shoot him. If this gets worse we’ll ask them to leave. In the meantime give me a day or so to figure out how to handle this. I’ll talk to him. I just need some time to figure out what to say”.
“Okay. He’s up with Megan and Susan working in the corn. I’ll go take my swim now while he’s out of the way. I’ll work on just staying away from him”.
With and “Okay” she left and I decided to go to my workshop in the barn. I wanted to get away from everyone and give this some thought. About a year ago I found I needed a retreat where I could get away from everyone for short periods. As much as I loved the girls and my kids, sometimes I needed some time to my self. God help me, with twenty three kids, I really needed some time. So I had made a room for myself out of the workshop in the barn. I had a small bed and a couple of chairs in there. Every now and then I would just sack out there. The girls knew when I was there that I wanted to be alone and they respected it.
When I got there I went over to the bed and lay down. This was going to be a thorny problem. Could it be fixed or should we have them leave? Was it possible to fix it? John was a difficult person. He did not mix with us much. Sharon and the girls were great. We would miss them if they left.
As I was running possible scenarios through my head, the door opened. Janelle and Mikey walked in. What do they want? Of course they don’t know the rules about this room. Before I could get up, they walked right up to the bed and sat on each side facing me near my feet. “What are you girls doing here? Do you need something”?
Janelle smiled at me, “Yes we do need something”. She put a hand out and lightly ran it up my thigh from my knee to my hip and then back down. “And I see you have it”.
I about swallowed my heart. It was obvious what she wanted. I looked over at Mikey, and while she was not as forward as Janelle, she was smiling also. “I think you girls had better go before John comes around”.
Mikey answered, “Oh we don’t have to worry about him. He sent us over”. Then she put her hand out and laid it on the middle of my thigh with her fingers laying tantalizingly down the inside of my thigh. “Oh look, it moved!”
I didn’t have to look. I knew what moved. My cock had been laying off at a 90 degree angle. Now it was 45 degrees. Both girls moved their heads closer to watch for any further developments. I wanted to distract them but they both looked so beautiful. They both looked so different from what I had grown used to. Mikey with her small breasts and Asian features and Janelle with her large breasts and dark skin.
“Look it’s big”. I looked down and I was now fully erect. I was now pointing straight at me and up off my stomach. Janelle reached out with a hand and grabbed me near the head. That gave Mikey the courage to reach out. She grabbed me at the base and with her other hand began pushing my balls around.
For a moment I just sighed and lay back in the bed and enjoyed the moment. Then I remembered John. He could get violent if he found us. These were his women. “You girls have to stop before John finds us”.
“We told you. John sent us over. He wanted us to be friendly with you”.
“I don’t think this is what he meant be being friendly”.
“He did not tell us not to”.
I did not need much persuasion. That was good enough for me. I had two girls running their hands all over my legs and up to my chest while keeping a firm grip on my cock. I had lost quite a bit of blood flow to my brain so I might be forgiven if I was not thinking to clearly at the moment.
As I was lying there I heard Mikey say “I’ve seen Mom do this to John”. The bed shifted as she moved. The hand on the top of my cock left and was then replaced with a warm, wet mouth. I looked up and saw Mikey’s head going up and down on me. Whatever reluctance I had with the girls was now officially gone. I was theirs to do with as they wished. She began running her tongue around the head and moved her mouth up and down as she did it. I heard Janelle say with some anger in her voice, “John tried to get me to do that one night after Mom went to sleep but Mom woke up and stopped him”.
Janelle turned and moved up closer to me. I reached out to her and cupped her breasts with my hands. When I touched her she pushed herself hard against my hands. She closed her eyes, “That feels so nice”.
I let one hand trail down her stomach until I reached between her legs. She moved up closer so I could reach better and ended up with her breasts in my face. While I sucked a nipple into my mouth I began moving my fingers around on her pussy. She gasped, “Oh god. Maybe I should have let him”. She was getting very wet. I was torn between letting Mikey finish me and having Janelle slide down so I could slide into her. I then realized I could also reach Mikey with my other hand. She was facing away from me still bobbing up and down on my cock. As I reached out to rub Mikey’s pussy Janelle whispered, “Are you going to fuck me”?
“In a little bit”. My hand reached Mikey’s knee. I slowly caressed my way up from her knee until it reached her pussy. I moved it around her sparse pubic hair and then made my way to the lips of her pussy. She was as wet as Janelle. I pushed my finger against her lips and they parted. I put a finger inside her. It was so hot and tight. I had been making love to women these last several years that had all had multiple births. A really tight pussy was a distant memory, until now. She moaned and pushed back against my finger. I almost laughed as a thought flashed through my mind. It was something like a saying my mom used sometimes. Something about two bushes in the hand worth one bird.
I was trying to decide which girl should be fucked first when that familiar boiling and tingling feeling began in my balls. “I’m going to cum”.
Janelle moved down quickly to Mikey saying, “I want to see. Move your mouth”.
I thought, “Oh, please don’t move your mouth”.
Mikey moved her mouth away but continued moving her hand up and down my cock. It was just a few seconds longer before I felt the cum launching out of me. Both girls gave a squeal as the first stream shot up into the air. Mikey was leaning too far out and it hit her in the forehead and a second hit her in the cheek. Janelle laughed at her so Mikey pointed me at Janelle. A stream caught her in her in her mouth while she was laughing and another got her on the nose. Now Mikey was also laughing.
I watched as Janelle moved her tongue around in her mouth tasting my cum. Mikey, with cum dripping down her face, asked, “What does it taste like”?
“I don’t know how to describe it. It’s just different. Not bad. See for yourself. You have some on your lip”.
The cum had dripped down from her forehead to her lips. The shot that hit her cheek was now dripping down in a long cum rope to her breasts. Mikey stuck her tongue out and licked her lips and then sucked it into her mouth. I watched as she swished it around in her mouth and then swallowed.
They both moved up in the bed so that they were laying next to me. Janelle moved her hand very gently around in circles on my chest. “Terri said you first fucked her when she was thirteen. We are both fifteen. So we are old enough. Who do you want to fuck first? Mikey already got you to cum so I think it should be me”?
As I was trying to think of my answer the door swung open, “Janelle, Myoku, are you in here”? Sharon stepped into the room. Both girls jumped up leaving me flat on the bed with a semi-erect dick. My heart fell as I looked up. Both girls still had cum dripping down on their faces.
“What are you doing in here”? It must have been obvious what we had been doing. “Oh no. John is going to be so angry. How could you do this to me? You know he takes these things out on me”.
“It’s okay mom. John sent us over”.
“What do you mean he sent you over”?
“He said he had some things to do and told us to come over and be nice to Dan. He said we could learn some things”.
Sharon turned to me. Fortunately I was completely deflated by now. “Dan. Where is Terri”?
Why would she be asking about Terri? “I think she went swimming a while ago. Why”?
“I think you should go check on her”.
“I’m sure she is fine. She swims alone all the time. We all do”.
“Dan. That’s not the point. I think you should go check on her”.
Then it hit me. “Where’s John”?
“Go check on her”.
I jumped up and started to jog towards our swimming hole. I went just a few steps when I stopped and then ran up to the house. The gun closet was always kept locked now with so many kids around. It took me a minute to unlock it. I grabbed a revolver, checked to be sure it was loaded, relocked the cabinet and then started running for the swimming hole. As I got close I could hear yelling. I could not tell what was being said but it sounded like Terri and it was intense.
As I reached the rise above our spot I slowed down and then walked through the trees to where I could see. I wanted to know what I was walking in on. I could now hear Terri’s voice fairly clearly. “John. Stop! Get out of me”!
When I stepped around the last tree I could see them on the ground with their feet towards me. John was naked and on top of her. He was holding both of her arms stretched out with his and he had her body pinned to the ground with his. Terri had her legs up in the air and was trying to kick him while his hips were moving up and down driving his cock into her. I could hear him grunting as he rammed into her. He was raping her!
I quickly walked down and approached them from behind. As I got behind him Terri saw me but did not say anything. I put the barrel of the gun against the back of his neck and pulled the hammer back. With the click he froze.
“Get off her”.
He let go of her hands and rolled off to a side. Terri jumped up. I could see tears in her eyes but her face was cold. She reached out to me. “Give me the gun”.
“Go on back to the house”.
“Give me the gun. I told you I would have to kill him”.
“Go back and see mom”.
She looked down at John. “Don’t come near me again. If I see you again I will have a gun and I will kill you. Ask Dan if you don’t believe me”. Then she walked away.
I squatted down out of arms reach of him. The gun was still cocked. He looked very anxious. I was not sure of what I was going to do. “You know, I should have let her. The only reason I didn’t is that you have a family to take care of, though they might be better off without you. But that is not my decision to make”.
“Dan. I’m so sorry. I don’t know what came over me. It’s just that you have all these kids. We have been trying to have kids for this whole time and nothing. She is barren. She tells me the two kids are still too young and I have to wait. And then I see you here with all these…”. And then his voice trailed off. “I’m sorry. We’ll go”.
“No. It is too late for you to go right now. We thought you might settle in the valley here, be our neighbors, but now I thing it would be a good idea for you to move on much farther away. You will not have the time right now. Winter comes pretty quick here. You will stay around the bunkhouse. Sharon and the girls can work with us but you need to stay away. She meant it when she said she’d kill you. She is an excellent shot, better than I am and much more cold-blooded. You want to stay far away from her”.
I could see anger flare in his face and just as quickly pass. I’ll need to watch him. He does not like being told what to do. “Okay. That sounds like a good idea. We should move on as soon as the weather is good. We had not really planned on staying in this area anyway”.
I stood and took a couple of steps back. I looked at him for a few seconds trying to assess what was going through his mind but his face was blank. I turned and left him there, tapping the ground with one hand.
When I got back to the house Terri was in Mom’s bedroom; she was comforting Terri.
“They will be staying here through winter and then be leaving. They won’t be settling in the valley. I thought it would be best if they completely left the area”.
Mom nodded. “It’s too bad about the girls though. They would be welcome. I hate to think what it must be like living with him. I’ll miss Sharon. It was nice having someone around who knows the old world, someone to talk to about stuff”.
I left them there and returned to the workshop. When I walked in I could still detect the odor of sex in the air. The bed remained askew. I kept thinking back to Janelle’s question, “Who do you want to fuck first”? I wasn’t sure then. Now I knew it could not happen. They would be leaving in the spring.
The next two months were very tense. I saw little of John and avoided him when I did see him. Terri walked around everywhere. I suspected she was deliberately trying to have an encounter with John. She always carried a small bag with her. I had no doubt about what was in the bag. John had his meals with Sharon in their quarters in the bunkhouse. Janelle and Mikey came around to the barn a couple of times when they knew I was there and John was too far away to catch them. I gave them a brief hello and sent them on their way. It was not easy, as every time I saw them some very pleasurable memories would return. Unfortunately for me, it also brought back all the guilt I felt over my getting a blowjob while Terri was getting raped. Plus, the only reason for the blowjob was to give him the opportunity.
The two girls were very much like Terri in that they could be very quiet. They were always sneaking up on me. If I did not see them coming, my first clue they were even nearby would be Mikey or Janelle rubbing their breasts against my back.
“Whatcha doin”? They had done it again. I was sharpening our scythes and I almost cut myself when they startled me. I could feel Mikey behind me, or rather; I could feel her two nipples poking me in the back. I stepped forward to put some distance between us and then turned around. I had learned my lesson earlier about just turning around. The first time I had done that, I found Mikey in front of me pushing forward so that her breasts were right in my hands. She was not a tall girl. I knew she was somewhere under five feet. She was not that much taller than my oldest children.
“I’m just sharpening some tools. They get dull fast. You need to leave. I have told you too many times you cannot come in here with me. If your Dad sees you with me you know your mother has a hard time with him”. As I finished, I motioned that she should leave.
Her face turned dark, “Don’t call him my dad. He is not my dad”. She just looked at me and then turned and left without saying anything else. Boy, I hit a nerve there.
I stepped over to the door, staying in the shadows and watched her butt sway as she walked away. Thank god this erection did not start while we were back in the barn together. I might not have been able to get her to leave, or worse, I might not have let her leave.
When she was out of sight I returned and slowly worked through all the tools that needed sharpening. It was pretty much an excuse to be away from everyone. I knew the tension with John was spilling over to how I was reacting with my family. I had been short with several of the kids over the last week.
Just as it started getting dark Terri brought out some dinner for me. It was Saturday and our “guests” always came up to the house to eat with us on Saturdays. This gave her a good excuse not to be there when John arrived. She sat and tried to draw me out in conversation but I was not in the mood so she finally left. For the next hour I sat there and thought about the situation; how can it be resolved? I finally decided that since he is going to be here for a few more months maybe I should break the ice with him and we can make the best of a bad situation. I’ll try tomorrow.
It was long after dinner when I left the barn for the house. In the dark I thought I saw someone outside by the bunkhouse but it was hard to see. Thinking it might be John, I decided to go over and just say hello. Maybe that can be the first step to our being at least civil.
As I approached the building I could see there was no one outside. There were lights on inside but curtains covered the windows so I could not see anyone. I was just turning to leave when I heard a sharp sound from inside followed by a cry. It sounded like a hand slapping skin. I turned back around and stepped closer to the window. It was open because of the heat and I could hear low voices coming through it.
“I told you to stay away him”. It was John and I could hear the anger in his voice. He must have seen Mikey enter or leave the barn this afternoon. “I just wanted to talk to him”. It was Mikey. “No, Please”. I heard the slapping again followed by Mikey beginning to cry. “If you just wanted to talk then why were you naked”? I did not hear Mikey reply. She finally choked out “We all go around like that now. I didn’t do it for him”.
I heard a noise some distance behind me. When I turned around I saw Sharon and Janelle walking towards me. It was dark and I was far enough away that I did not think they saw me. I stepped behind a tree and waited for them to pass me and go inside.
When the door closed I started to walk away. I stopped when I heard Sharon exclaim, “Why did you hit this girl”? There were some low sounds that I could not make out then Sharon spoke up again, “Don’t raise your hand to me. You hit me again and I’ll never sleep with you again. And you’ll never get to sleep with these girls either”.
When I got to the house I kept what I had heard that night to myself. I said goodnight to the kids that were still up and then went into my bedroom. When I opened the door I could see someone in my bed. As I got closer I saw it was Terri. She had fallen asleep waiting for me. It was a bit of a surprise. She had not slept with me since John attacked her. I thought perhaps she was now put off by men, me included. I was also afraid she had found out about the diversion I had fallen for and blamed me. When I got in bed she turned over and put her arms around me. With a very sleepy voice she said, “I’ve missed you. It’s time for me to get pregnant but I’m tired. Do you mind if we wait until morning”?
I was relieved. She was not mad at me. “No, it’s fine. I’m just glad to have you here”. She quickly fell back asleep. With her head on my shoulder, I followed her a few minutes later.
The next morning she kept her promise. We made love very slowly. It started with us laying on our sides with her back to me. When I entered her she reached down and pushed me deeper into her with the flat of her hand. Once I was buried in her she gently grabbed my balls and pulled them towards her with each stroke. I had my arms around her and was caressing her from her breasts down into her pubic hair. While I was lightly running my fingers in her hair she reached up, took my hand and moved it lower. With her fingers on top of mine she pushed my fingers against her clitoris. It was plain that she did not want me to move my fingers. She wanted to move my fingers for me. As my fingers were moved around I could also feel my shaft against them, slowly sliding in and out of her. As the feeling was building up in me I wanted to speed up but I held back. I knew she needed this. The slow easy lovemaking was helping her.
A while later she turned over and then pulled at me to get on top of her. “I think you are ready now. I know I am. Give me a good fucking. I want to remember only you ever being on top of me”.
As I lifted up to get on top of her she pulled her feet up the bed towards her butt, bending her knees. She then spread her knees out until they were almost flat on the bed. I was still in a bit of a tender mood so I was moving slowly. I was finally on top of her but I had not entered her yet. My cock was right at the entrance. I could feel her pelvis straining to get down to me. With frustration in her voice she asked, “Did you not understand me? I said I wanted a good fucking. Now fuck me”.
I needed no further words of encouragement. I pushed forward and ran into her right up to the hilt. She gave a loud gasp. “That’s what I need. That feels so good. Not only did he make me mad, he has a little dick”.
I began thrusting faster in and out of her. She had both arms around me and was pulling me down tight against her on the bed. Each time I reached bottom she let out a gasp. I could feel her head move up on the bed as each stoke hit her. After another stroke I heard her say “Harder”.
I almost laughed. “I can’t get any harder”.
“I know. I’m the one down here. I meant fuck me harder”.
I picked up speed slamming hard into her. She had hooked her legs around my waist so she was tight against me as I pushed her down into the bed. The springs were really earning their pay. “Yes. That’s it Danny. More. More. Right……there”. She arched her body hard against mine and she dug her nails into my back. And then her pussy clamped down on me. That was all I could take. I pushed as deep as I could in her, and I did not so much release the sperm in her as it just all shot out of me into her. It was like one long continuous ejaculation.
We were both spent and just laid there trying to catch our breath. Finally she smiled and pushed at me. “Hey you need to get off of me. Remember I’m the little kid sister. You are squashing me”.
I let my weight sag down a bit. I was not above rising to the bait with my little sister. Even if I was on top of her with my cock still buried in her. But I was really happy to see that her sense of humor had returned.
“Hey, you are squashing me, I can’t breathe”.
But being the nice big brother I am, I lifted my weight off of her and then rolled over to the side. She followed me and put one leg up on mine and an arm across my chest. “That was very nice. I would let you do it to me again if I thought we would survive”.
Over the next few weeks, as summer was coming to an end, my bedroom became a case of musical chairs with Terri, Megan and Susan. They were all trying to get pregnant quickly so that they could deliver before summer began again. They had all learned that the heat of summer was not a great time to be walking around with a swollen belly. Mom and Shelly had delivered just a few months ago and wanted a break. I did not mind at all. Just the three women kept me busy day and night. I also learned to check the bed before I got in. On a couple of different occasions I found either Janelle or Mikey, naked in my bed, waiting for me. It took some real willpower to send them off. It is not easy to pull the covers back on your bed, find a beautiful naked, extremely willing, young girl, and then send her away.
The weather had just started to turn cooler when mom approached me and said I needed to get a few hunting trips in. I had not given it much thought during the summer. The arrival of our new people, and all the work we had this summer had completely occupied my mind. Mom suggested I take John. She said they could use the meat when they left and it would get him away for a while. That would allow Janelle, Mikey and Sharon to relax with the rest of our family before they had to leave.
I told her I would ask, but I didn’t know if he would take me up on it. We were not exactly hunting buddies. Since I was not so keen on the idea I did not search him out for a few days. When I finally explained mom’s idea to him, leaving out the part about the girls relaxing without him, he surprised me by saying “That’s a great idea. And she is right. We could use the meat when we leave. When do you want to go”?
I was not ready for that question. I had so firmly believed he would not be interested I had not given it any thought. “Well, I will have several trips this fall so it should be pretty soon”.
“How about we leave tomorrow”?
I did not really have any reason not to so I said, “Okay. I travel light. Change of clothes, sometimes we have bad weather this time of year. A pup tent. Food for a couple of days. We will leave around 5AM tomorrow. It will take us almost all day to get where I hunt. I use a bow by the way”.
He gave me a funny look. “I’ve never used a bow so I’ll just take my rifle. I’m pretty good with it. I’ll see you by the barn in the morning”. He left, walking towards the bunkhouse.
In the morning, as I began to get out of bed, Terri rolled over and gave me a hug. “Are you sure you don’t want me to shoot him now? It could save you a lot of trouble”.
I hugged her back. “No, if he needs shooting I’ll do it for you”.
She turned back over and with a very sleepy voice said, “Don’t take all my fun away”. I kissed her on the forehead and she was already back asleep.
It was going to be cold in the mountains so I dressed appropriately. When I left I found John sitting by the barn waiting for me. It looked like he had everything he needed in a backpack. As I walked up I said, “It looks like you’re ready. Lets’ hit the trail”.
Little was said as we walked. Daylight found us miles from home. As we walked around one ridge I pointed out a couple of roads John’s family would take on their way to the San Joaquin Valley. It was where he said they would be going come spring.
It was evening when we finally arrived where I usually camped. We made some dinner, put up our tents and I immediately went to sleep. The next morning I found John already up. “While you were sleeping this morning I saw a large herd of deer move across that side of the mountain over there and then go over the top. There were several really good sized deer in it. Now you are probably better with that bow than I am with this rifle,” though the look on his face said otherwise, “but since some of this meat is for us I would like to be responsible for getting a couple of the deer”.
It sounded reasonable to me. Any man would want to be responsible for providing for his family. “How do you want to do it”?
“Well I’ve been thinking about that for the last hour, waiting for you to wake”. He pointed over to where the deer had moved through. “It has not been very long. I bet they are on the other side of that ridge feeding. There is a technique that has worked really well for me in Virginia. There is a deer trail over there”. He pointed behind me. “I want you to follow it. I think it will take you right around to the other side of this mountain.
While you are doing that I’m going to move over to where the deer moved up. I’ll be positioned about fifty yards below that ridge. It should take you about an hour to get there. When you do, just start walking up the mountain making noise. The deer will hear you and flush out in front of you. When they break over the top I’ll pick a couple of good ones and drop them”.
I could not find any fault with his plan. It seemed very reasonable. I picked up my bow and quiver and took a step towards the deer trail. “Do you need those”? I stopped and turned. He was pointing at my bow.
“Yes. You never know what you’ll meet here. I lost my dad years ago to a bear. Plus, I might get a chance for something after you get yours. If they cross back over the ridge I might drop something”. He nodded and I turned and began following the trail.
It was a rough trail in parts but he was right, it seemed to be working its way horizontally around the mountain. If it stayed this way I should end up right where he wanted me. It took me almost exactly an hour to reach a point that I thought was equal to where he would be waiting on the other side. I began walking up, not trying to be quiet. I was not deliberately making noise but I knew I was being loud enough to flush any deer. It was very rough going on this side except for one part that flattened out. There was even a pretty deep stream that ran down the mountain. I was lucky I did not have to cross it to get where I wanted. The stream had steep sides and there was one waterfall drop that I could see where it fell onto rocks below. It looked rough but it was pretty.
As I continued making my way up I hoped I was moving the deer up. I had not seen anything or heard anything but this side was pretty heavily wooded. With my luck they probably moved sideways around the mountain instead of going back over the top. I had reached a point about sixty yards from the top when I stopped and leaned against a tree for a breather. The steep climb had really tired me out. I was just getting ready to push off and resume my climb when suddenly the tree I was leaning against exploded next to my face. My face was peppered with bark as I fell backwards on the ground. Just a moment later the sound of the rifle shot rolled down to me. Damn. He’s not a hunter. He shoots at any movement. What is he doing on this side? Did I take too long climbing up?
I was trying to blink pieces of bark out of my eyes when I heard his voice, “Dan? Are you okay? Where are you”?
Laying on my back I called out to him, “You dumb shit! That was not a deer. You almost hit me”. I was almost able to see again. I began rolling over so I could get up.
His voice seemed closer now as he called out to me, “Are you okay? I thought I saw a deer. I didn’t hit you did I? Stand up so I can see you”?
I stood up and looked up the hill to see where he was. “No, you did not hit me. I’m okay. I just got hit with some bark”. I knew he was not too far away by the sound of his voice earlier, but I could not see him walking down towards me. As I scanned above me I saw something flash to one side. I looked closer and I spotted John standing against a tree. Then I saw what flashed. He had the rifle up pointed at me. It was the sun reflecting off the scope that I saw. I jumped towards the tree and actually heard the shot pass right next to my cheek. As the sound of the shot came to me I was moving from tree to tree working my way back downhill. I took a chance after about twenty five yards and looked back to see him working his way downhill after me. When he saw me stop and look back he quickly raised the rifle but I moved into some dense trees so he did not have a clear shot.
A couple of times the trees thinned out and he took a quick shot at me. I heard the shell hit trees but I was lucky so far. He must have lost me a couple of times as he would call out to me to try and get me to reveal where I was. The last time he was really close to me. “Dan, you might as well come out. I’ll get you eventually. If you come out now and don’t make me work too hard I’ll make it easy on you. One shot. You won’t even feel it. You make me run you down this mountain and it will just make me mad. Don’t be like Frank. He made me work. I was not very nice to him in the end. I’ll put a couple in your legs and arms. Then I’ll gut shoot you and just leave you here. You might even meet that bear that got your father”.
Who the hell is Frank? Then I remembered Terri’s story. John had gone hunting with Sharon’s husband and he did not return.
Very quietly I began moving down again. From the sound I knew I was near the stream. Maybe it would give me a way out. When I reached it I saw that it would be no help. The chasm was too wide to jump across and the sides were too steep to get down. Then an idea came to me. I took the quiver off my belt. I took most the arrows out and spread them around on the ground like they had fallen. I kept five of the arrows and dropped the quiver on the ground. Looking up and down the stream I picked the high side as having the best field of view. I walked up slowly making sure I was not leaving tracks. I found a spot between two trees that shielded me pretty well but still left me with a good view of where I had dropped the arrows.
When I heard the first twig break I took a step back between the trees, notched an arrow and pulled the string back to my cheek. I knew I would have to hold it until he showed himself. I could not risk him seeing any movement. After a minute there was no sign of him. My arms were beginning to burn. He must have gone another way and is not coming here at all. Just as I was about to lower the bow John stepped out from behind a tree. How long had he been standing there? He walked over to the side of the stream and looked down. He stepped back, picked up a couple of arrows and then tossed them over the side down into the water. “Well Dan, you should have listened to me. I told you I would have given you an easier way out. A fall down into those rocks couldn’t have been much fun”. And then he laughed.
I was not totally sure I could do it until he laughed. I took careful aim. It was a level shot, no wind and I had his side towards me. It was a tight shot but I was pretty good. He had stepped back from the edge and was now pissing on a tree. The arrow took him through the neck and buried itself deep in the tree. I notched another arrow and stepped out from the trees. He must have heard me because he was trying to turn his head to see me. However the arrow through his neck would not let him. I let another go and it took him deep in the side. He sagged with that hit, the arrow through his neck broke and he fell into a sitting position against the tree.
When I got up to him his eyes followed me but he was unable to talk. I was fine with that. There was nothing he had to say that I was interested in. His eyes began to sink down. “John. John, look at me”. His eyes rose slowly back up to mine. “I just wanted you to know something before you die. The first arrow was for me. The second was for Terri. And I have to tell you. She is going to be pretty mad at me when I get back home and she finds out she is not going to get to shoot you after all”.
I squatted down in front of him and waited. It did not take long. It was less than a minute before the life faded out of his eyes. I picked up my quiver, replaced the arrows and began working my way back to camp. I slept well that night. The next day I got a deer the first thing in the morning and then started home.
When I was in sight of the house it was the kids that saw me first. A bunch came out and tackled me, taking me to the ground in their welcome home. After some wrestling I had them take the meat over to the meat house to be put away. When I got to the porch I found Mom and Terri sitting in their rocking chairs. They started to say hello as I approached, but they must have seen something in my face and they stopped. They looked around me and Mom finally asked, “John”?
I said simply, “He didn’t make it”.
Terri smiled. Mom did not say anything for a while, she just looked at me. Finally she must have decided I was okay. “Come on inside. Sharon and the girls are in the kitchen canning fruit to take with them next spring. Let’s let them know they won’t be leaving after all”.
Chapter 5
Spoiler:
Mom reached out to open the door so we could go in and talk to Sharon and her girls. I reached out and stopped her. “Shouldn’t we talk to our family first? See if they are agreeable”?
Mom looked back and shook her head, “Over the last few weeks the girls and I have discussed the possibility of their staying and they were all agreeable. That even included John. I think without him the girls would insist they stay”. A smile tugged at mom’s mouth, “In fact Terri had offered several times to help John with an accident. She has been quite inventive with some possible scenarios. You look pretty tired. You might want to avoid her for a day so you can rest. She is bound to want to show you her appreciation”.
When we entered the kitchen, Sharon was sitting there with several of the young children cutting apple slices for them. I was hit with a sudden swarm of hugs and a chorus of “Daddy’s home”. After quite a bit of horsy-back rides, their mothers shoed them off to get ready for bed.
Sharon also got up saying, “I should go see how John is. He does not like it when I’m up here and he is alone back at the bunkhouse”.
Mom stopped her before she could get up, “We did not want to say anything while the kids were still here”. She turned to look at me and waited for me to continue.
I walked over and stood next to where Sharon was sitting. “I’m sorry but John had an accident out there. He did not make it back”.
Sharon was looking up at me but I could not read her face. She looked down at her hands and the silence stretched out. Finally she looked back up at me, “Is he hurt? Is he still out there?
Well, John is still out there, but he is past hurt. He won’t be coming back”.
She looked puzzled, “I don’t understand”.
I really did not want to relate the entire story, “He had an accident out there. He did not make it. I thought it best to leave him there”.
She just looked at me for a while and then slowly nodded her head. “Karma”.
I was not sure I heard her right, “Karma”?
“It means something like †˜What goes around comes around’, or †˜you reap what you sow’. My husband once went out hunting with John. He did not make it back either”.
She was getting the wrong idea, “Wait, I did not…”.
She held her hand up to my lips to stop me. “That is not what I meant. I meant just that you were luckier or more capable. John was not a very honorable man”.
Then she saw the side of my face. “And what happened to your face”? She stood up and touched my cheek I had forgotten about the scrapes. “It’s nothing; I just scraped it on some bark”.
She gave me a hug, whispered †˜thank you’ in my ear, and then said, “I should go and tell the girls. They would want to know”.
Before she could leave, mom gestured for her to sit back down, “There is something else we should talk about”. Mom waited for her to sit and then mom continued, “We would like for you and the girls to stay here with us if you have no other plans, become part of our family”.
A big smile grew on Sharon’s face. “We would love to. I know the girls would want to also”. Then the smile died. “There is a problem though. I have talked to your daughters. I know what part of what you are doing here; the children and all. I won’t fit in”.
I could not imagine how she couldn’t fit in. “What are you talking about”?
“John has been, uh, well, fucking me for years now. I have no children. I’m sterile. I can’t contribute to the family”.
Mom laughed, “That does not matter. We are not inviting your uterus to join us. We would like you to be part of our family”.
Sharon leaned over and hugged mom. “Of course I would like to join you. I should go and tell the girls now”.
Just before she went out the door she stopped, “Before I forget, John told me not to tell you this before. I was an electrical engineer. You are having a problem with your solar panels. I took a look at them. I think I can fix them”.
Once she had gone I was ready to go take a shower and fall in bed. It had been a long day and I was beat. But mom was not finished. “Irregardless of her having children, I think the two of you should sleep together for the next month”. I started to protest but she held up her hand. “Effectively, you are the husband to all the adult women in our family. I want Sharon to feel that she is an integral part of the family. If her position is not the same as the rest of us I think she will not feel as much a part of the family”.
“What if that is not what she wants? John has been pretty rough on her. She might not like the idea of being passed on to another man”.
Then she smiled at me, “I have seen her give you looks when you were not watching. I will ask her, but I don’t think that will be a problem. And I have seen you look at her when you think she is not looking. I don’t think this will be any great hardship on you”.
I gave her a kind of sheepish shrug. Before I could say anything she sent me off to bed.
“And don’t forget to shower first, you smell something horrible”.
The next morning I did not wake until the sun was well up. Usually I am awake at dawn but I did not sleep well last night, bad dreams. I was hoping I had not missed breakfast and was just tossing the sheet off me when the door flew open with a bang and Janelle and Mikey flew across the room and jumped on me. Janelle had come at me sideways and was now lying across my chest, pinning me to the bed. Later, when I thought about it, and I did frequently, I suspected that Mikey had planned her attack a bit better. She came at me from the foot of the bed and ended up sitting right on top of my cock. Fortunately it was limp and a lying off to the side under her. “We both want to thank you. We are so glad he is gone”.
Before I could say anything Janelle lifted up and planted a kiss right on my lips. That would have been fine but as she moved up to kiss me, both of her nipples trailed across my chest. That by it self might have been okay but when I looked over Janelle I saw Mikey sitting there on me. I found I was focused on her chest. While her breasts were a bit on the small side, her nipples were really large, bigger than any of my sisters. I had to stop looking at their breasts. I could feel the effect it was having on me. I was no longer completely limp and I was definitely straightening out. I knew my cock was slowly moving against Mikey. I looked up at her and she gave me this impish smile.
Janelle propped her head up on her hands and began talking to me. It was hard to concentrate on what she was saying because Mikey was moving around. By now, with two naked girls, four naked boobies, and I could feel one naked pussy being lined up with my cock, I was as hard as I could get. I was moving around a bit myself trying to keep the head of my cock away from the entrance to her pussy.
Janelle took my head in both of her hands, “Danny, you did not answer me”.
“What? What did you say”?
“I was saying that we get to stay, we don’t have to leave anymore. Our mom talked to us last night and your mom talked to us this morning. We get to stay and be part of your family. Isn’t that neat”?
I got a glimpse of Mikey over Janelle’s head. Her eyes were closed and her mouth was open. She was rubbing herself against me and was really close to….too late. I slipped into her. Her eyes opened wide and she had that smile again on her face as she looked at me. I was trying to shift my pelvis down so I could get out of her but she was ahead of me. She tilted back and I slid deeper into her.
“Danny, you are not paying attention again”.
“What”? She had no idea what her sister was doing to me. I was certainly paying attention, it just was not to Janelle.
“I was asking you what you did to John. Mom said he had an accident and died. I don’t believe it. I think you killed him. Don’t you think so Mikey”?
Mikey just responded with an “mmmmm”. I wanted to say the same.
As Janelle started to turn around to see what was going on with Mikey, we heard Sharon calling them from somewhere in the house. Mikey rose up off of me. Now I was sticking up in the air. By the time Janelle had slid off the bed Mikey had moved off the foot of the bed. Janelle forgot about Mikey when she saw my cock sticking up in the air. “I think you are glad to see us. Maybe we should come back later”.
Mikey handed me the sheet and I pulled it over me. It did not help much since part of it was sticking up in the air. “Why don’t you two go and see what your mom wants”?
After they were gone I lay there thinking about Janelle and Mikey. Before, I had avoiding them because of John. But there was no reason to now. Oh yes. But what would Sharon say, not to mention my sisters?
I was just about to get up when Mikey and Janelle came back into the room. Mikey had a bit of a pout on her face, “I don’t think it is fair. We saw you first”. They walked over and sat on the edge of the bed. Mikey saw that my erection was still there and began to run a finger round, playing with it.
What are they talking about, “You don’t think what is fair”?
Janelle seemed to do more talking while Mikey was easily distracted, “Mom gets to come and sleep with you”. But then she brightened, “But we are next”.
I was having a problem concentrating again, “We”?
“That’s right. We are next. Something you don’t know. We have the same birthday. We have always been together. We do everything together. We are a package. When you get one of us, you get both of us”. She saw what Mikey was doing and moved over and grabbed my sheet covered cock. With a quick glance back at me she lowered her head and engulfed me. After a few seconds she moved her mouth away. “I want to be sure you don’t forget us”. They both got up and bounced out the door.
Since Sharon’s arrival, we had decided that it should be safe for us to go down to the town and forage for things we could use, tool, clothes, etc. It was still warm out but winter was fast approaching and we could especially use any clothing we could find. There were so many of us now that the spare clothing we had when we first arrived had either pretty much worn out or just was not enough. It was decided that Sharon, since she had been through the area, me and Sharon’s girls would make the trip. My kids were much too young and my sisters were either pregnant or still breastfeeding and could not leave.
The night before we left, the girls fixed a special dinner for everyone. For those of us leaving, it was all our favorites. We even had ice cream, a special treat. Afterwards I spent several hours in the living room playing with my kids. There were so many now that it was hard to give all of them the attention they deserved. After the last one had been shoed off to bed, I made the rounds of their bedrooms so I could be sure I said goodnight to everyone.
When I finally arrived at my bedroom door I was beat. It was going to be a long trip tomorrow. I wished I had gone to bed a few hours earlier. As I stepped into my bedroom I thought I could see the outline of someone in my bed from the little bit of light coming in from the hall. Whomever it was lying on their side and looked to be asleep. When I closed the door it was completely dark and I could not see them at all. I bet it is Terri finally coming to say thank you.
I guess I did take too long to get to bed. I was tired enough that I was not really in the mood but maybe a little touchy-feely might change my mind. Please god, don’t let it be Mikey, I do not have enough energy left tonight to fend her off.
I got in bed she was on her side facing away from me. I moved over behind her. When I tried to slide my arm under her head, she lifted it for me and then laid her head back on my arm. Her breathing never changed. She is still asleep. I was curious who it was. I moved my body up against her back. It was just cool enough tonight that it felt nice snuggled up with someone. I put my hand on her hip and that did not give me a clue. I slid my hand farther around under her arm and onto her stomach. The only thing that told me was she’s not pregnant. But it was a nice flat stomach. I was a bit more interested now and moved my hand up her stomach and between her breasts until it was on the front of her shoulder. Her breathing changed. She is awake. She leaned back against me. Well, maybe I could stay up a bit longer.
I slowly moved my hand down until it passed over her one of her breasts. When I reached the bottom I cupped it in my hand. Who ever this is has large breasts. I ran through everyone in my mind, mentally holding their breasts in my hands, no, these are bigger. Who could…Oh no. It’s Sharon. I jerked my hand up off her breast but my arm was under one of hers. The movement woke her. She held her arm against me so I could not pull mine out without jerking it hard. “I’m sorry Sharon. I did not know it was you. I thought it was one of my, one of the others”.
Sharon reached down for my hand and pulled it back up to her breast and then put her hand over mine, holding it there. “Dan, relax. Your mother, yes I know she is your mother and the others are your sisters, suggested that I should move into your bedroom tonight. She thought it might help our relationship and working together. I’m sorry I fell asleep. I did not expect you to stay up so late. Do you want me to turn over? I’m awake now and you can, you know, if you want to”.
I remembered how John had treated her. I did not want her to think of me the same way. And, †˜you can if you want to’ was not the right beginning for us if there was going to be one. I brought my left arm around and gave her a hug. “No, we are both tired and we have a long day tomorrow. Lets go to sleep if you don’t mind”. She did not say anything, just nodded her head. After several minutes I felt her body relax as she went back to sleep. My last thought before falling asleep was, †˜those are nice breasts’.
Mom came in at 5 AM, turned on a light, and woke us. She found me on my back. In the night Sharon had turned over and was now lying against me with her head on my shoulder and one leg bent up over mine. My left arm was still wrapped around her. The light woke Sharon and she quickly got out of bed and disappeared into the bathroom.
Since the night I had returned without John, Sharon had begun dressing like the rest of us, which meant, no dressing at all. When she got up I could see her face blush. She was embarrassed to be found in bed, naked with me, by mom.
When we got to the kitchen we found Mikey and Janelle already there and waiting. Sharon and I had breakfast while Mikey and Janelle went out and hitched up a team to an old wagon. The girls had packed it with one of our large tents, some clothes for everyone in case it got cool and some food last night. We normally used it to haul hay around for livestock but it would be perfect for this trip.
We said our few goodbyes and were out on the road just as it was getting light. The trip was smooth but slow. At our three to four miles an hour it was going to take us most of the day to get there. One thing we did not have to worry about was traffic.
The sun had reached straight up and was getting pretty hot so we stopped in the shade under a few trees along side the road. We laid out a few blankets and ate some of the food mom had packed for us. We were on a bit of a rise and could see for several miles in three directions. We were used to not seeing people but it seemed so eerie. We could see many ranch houses spread around in the distance, quite a lot of horses and cattle, but no people.
We decided to wait here in the shade and nap through the hottest part of the day before continuing. I was in the middle of the blanket, so when I laid down, Mikey and Janelle lay on the left side of me and Sharon lay on the other. Sharon turned on her side towards me, raised her head until I put my arm out, and then used it as a pillow. Mikey and Janelle lay facing each other talking low while Sharon and I both fell asleep.
I woke about an hour later. It had cooled down a bit. I was still lying on my back and Sharon had not moved. Sharon’s hand, which had been on my chest when I fell asleep, had drifted south and was now resting right at the edge of my pubic hair. I could feel her fingers twitch every now-and-again in her sleep. Unfortunately that was causing my own twitching. I was rapidly coming to attention. It was just seconds before I felt the head bump into something. It had to be her fingers. Her fingers twitched again and then stretched out a bit and settled on the head of my cock.
I glanced over at the girls. Thank god, they were both still asleep. Mikey was lying on her back also. I looked down her body from her nipples to the small triangle of her pubic hair. There was just a little bit. Just looking at her was making me harder. What is wrong with me? I have one naked woman hanging on one side of my and I’m staring at her naked girls on the other.
Then Sharon’s hand moved a bit farther down and wrapped around my shaft. If I was not completely erect before, I sure was now. It felt so good. I let out a sigh that was a bit louder than I intended. I looked quickly over at the girls again and found Mikey looking at me. She was looking at Sharon’s hand and she had a big smile on her face. Oh, great, now what? She turned back over and a few seconds later I saw Janelle’s head poke up over Mikey. She looked at my face and then quickly looked down my body. A big smile formed on her face also before she dropped back down out of sight. Mikey turned her back to me. It was just a few seconds before I could hear giggling coming from them.
I reached down and tried to gently move Sharon’s hand without waking her. No such luck, as soon as I pulled a finger away her head moved on my shoulder. “What? Is it time”? And then she realized where her hand was and jerked away from me and got up.
From the look on her face I could see she was going to start blurting out apologies but that would only serve to focus the girls attention on what had happened so I quickly pointed at them and she held her tongue.
I got up and quickly walked over to the far side of the wagon and began rummaging around in a box. I needed to buy some time so that this flagpole would go down. I looked up and saw Sharon standing there watching me. She looked so nice. I remember there were black kids of all shades when I was in school but it had been so long since we had been around anyone. She seemed very exotic with the natural light brown skin instead of the tanned skin of my sisters. Where the areoles around my sister’s nipples were pink, hers were brown. I shook my head. You need to stop this or you are never going to go down.
We quickly packed everything away and got back on the road. I had Mikey and Janelle sit up front so I could ride in the back. That way I could avoid most of their knowing glances and smiles at me plus give them experience with the team.
We were now passing houses along the road. Everything was so overgrown. Roofs were falling down. Occasionally we would encounter cars stopped right in the middle of the road, their tires flat. Usually we could work our way around them. A couple of times we had to tie a rope to the car and the wagon and use our horses to pull it to the side. We would have made quite a sight if there had been anyone to see us, four nudists, wearing nothing but hats, riding in a horse-pulled wagon.
We passed one house that had a tattered flag atop a flagpole out by a circular driveway. Mikey looked back over her shoulder and asked, “If we find a flag in town, could we take it home to put up our flagpole”?
What do we want a flag for? I looked over at the flag. It did not look very impressive all ripped like that, but why not. “Sure, I don’t know why not”. I did not know what good it could do. We don’t even have a flagp..oh, yeh. I looked up to see Mikey smiling back over her shoulder at me. She leaned over to Janelle and they both started giggling again.
When we reached the edge of town the sun was already headed down. We passed a sign that said we were in Redding, population 61,101. That really brought it home to me, all dead. Towns like this all across the USA, empty, and other countries too.
It was pretty depressing. I could tell from the others faces that they felt pretty much the same. We did little talking. Mikey and Janelle were not joking any longer. But then they had seen all this before. We just kept passing houses and then businesses with no one around. Small trees were growing up in the cracks in the sidewalk making even bigger cracks.
It had taken all day to get here and it was starting to get dark. “Why don’t we find a spot where we can camp for the night and then we can look around the town tomorrow and see what we can find”? After another half hour we came to a small creek that ran through the middle of the town. We found a grassy area alongside of it and unhitched the horses and let them graze. Sharon and I set about putting the big tent up; there would be room for all of us in it, while the girls began getting some dinner ready. Across the creek we could see some really nice houses. I wondered what happened to those people. They had to have had a lot of money to afford those houses in this nice area and it did not make a difference. They ended up the same as those on the edge of town in the one-room shacks.
We made a small fire for the chill and had some dinner. We were all just a bit spooked with the tall buildings around us and the silence so once dinner was finished we quickly got in the tent and got ready for bed. Once again I was in the middle. We had piled our sleeping bags together so the bed would be softer but it had the effect of our huddling together to be under the blanket. Sharon was once again lying on her side with her back to me. I could feel Mikey and Sharon snuggled up against my back. It did keep us quite warm.
The girls went to sleep pretty quickly. Mikey had turned over and was now sleeping on her back. I was having trouble falling asleep. All the empty buildings weighed on my mind; the huge loss. I had not noticed it at first but my hand was once again on one of Sharon’s breasts. I had been idly moving my hand around, giving her breast soft squeezes, running my fingers around her nipple, pushing it one way and then another. I realized what I was doing when Sharon pushed her butt back against me. That was when I noticed I was hard. She felt it too. She lifted her right leg and hooked her knee over my leg. She turned her head and whispered, “Are the girls asleep”?
I looked around and they were both sound asleep. I whispered back, “Yes”.
Sharon lifted her body up just enough so that my cock was no longer pinned between us. As it straightened out it slid between her legs with the shaft lying against her pussy. I could feel the heat of her body on it. She stretched forward and I felt her hand grab me. She began running her fingers around the head of my cock. After about a minute I could feel her rubbing me against her pussy. My left arm was still under her head but I brought my hand up and was able to reach her other breast. I was now caressing them both. Every now and again I would take my hands rub down her chest to her stomach and then back up. She moved her hips forward a bit and then tilted them back at me. She then pushed hard on the head of my cock against her and with a sudden stab I sank halfway into her.
A long, low moan escaped her. I could tell she was trying to suppress it so as to not wake the girls. I was ready for my own moan. It was so hot inside of her. She had fantastic muscle control. I could feel her pussy just pulsate around my cock, squeezing, letting go and then squeezing me again. Trying not to be too active I began slow thrusts in and out of her. She began pushing back at me with each of my thrusts. I could feel her fingertips brushing against my cock where I entered her. It took me a moment to realize she was rubbing her clitoris. Her breath became ragged and she pushed back against me with sharp, hard thrusts. I pushed back trying to get as deep in her as I could. She suddenly stopped rubbing herself and cupped my balls in her hand and pulled up trying to get me deeper in her. She bent forward and let out a long, low cry. When her pussy clamped down on me I could not take it anymore and cum began shooting out of me into her. With each stream I thrust as hard as I could into her, pushing her forward on our makeshift bed.
When we both had finished we lay there trying to catch our breath without making too much noise. She had let go of my balls but was now tracing a finger from my balls up the bit of shaft that was not inside of her and then back down. Each time she reached my balls she would give them the gentlest squeeze. Each time she did I would have a little involuntary thrust back into her. She finally pulled her leg off me. I started to pull back out of her but she quickly pushed back against me, “No, please stay there for a while”.
“Okay”. I pushed back in as well as I could. I knew I could not stay long but was happy to comply. It was certainly no hardship.
She pulled my hand back up to her breasts and held it there. “Thank you. That was nice. It has been a very long time since I enjoyed sex”.
I kissed her neck, “The pleasure was all mine”.
She let out a little laugh, “Oh, don’t you believe it”.
I pulled her tight against me and then we both drifted off to sleep.
I was still asleep when Sharon woke. When she nudged me awake, light was just beginning to come into the tent. I started to get up but she stopped me with a hand, “We passed a music store yesterday. It is just a block back. Why don’t you get a bit more sleep while I go check it out? When I first went to college I was going to be a music teacher. I think the kids would like some instruments to play with”.
“Do you want to wait while I get ready”?
“No, there is nothing to worry about out there. And besides, the girls are still sleeping. Why don’t you get a little more and I’ll see you in an hour or so”.
With that said she left the tent and I drifted off again. It was that limbo sleep where you are not quite fully asleep but not awake either. My mind was just floating around. When my cock began tingling, my find filled in with a dream about Sharon. In my dream I looked down and I could see her head going up and down on me as her tongue swirled around me. Then the image changed and it was mom, she lifted her head and smiled at me and then lowered her mouth back over me. In my dream I kept watching her, her head bobbing up and down, pulling me out of her mouth and then flicking her tongue back and forth across the head of my cock, lowering her mouth and sucking on just the head of it.
When she raised her head again it was not mom but Mikey. That made me jump and she bit me. And that made me open my eyes. Janelle was crouched on one side of my hips holding my cock in her hand. Mikey was crouched on the other side looking at me, “I’m sorry. I did not mean to bite you. You moved. Here, let me kiss it and make it better”.
Before I could say anything she lowered her head and kissed the head of my cock very gently. “He seems to be better now. Maybe he forgave me. Lets see”. She lowered her head and took me into her mouth again. Oh, yes. Forgiveness was complete.
I had not said a word up to now. I just lowered my head back down and felt the sensations run over me. While Mikey was going up and down on me with her tongue, Janelle was running her hand around my shaft and down to my balls. It felt so good. But I had to stop them. I was going to cum any minute at this rate. What would Sharon say if she came back and caught us?
Janelle shifted and began kissing me across my chest, up to my neck and then on my mouth. After a minute of resistance I enthusiastically joined in, our tongues darting in and out of each others mouth, fencing with each others tongue. She pulled away from my mouth and moved higher so her breasts were in my face. Even though Sharon was not her real mother the two looked alike. They were both black but with very light skin. Janelle’s breasts were also on the large size and they both had that slender long-legged body type. I took one of her nipples in my mouth and my hand searched and found the other breast. I was so preoccupied with Janelle’s nipple in my mouth that I did not notice that Mikey had moved until she sat down on my cock and it slid about halfway inside her. It was like an electric current had been turned on in me. She was very tight, so tight that it seemed like I could not fit inside her. She sat there for what seemed like a minute, lifted up a few inches and lowered herself back down on me again. I was still just half in her. She very slowly repeated it over and over, lifting up and then lowering herself. It felt so good in her I had lost my concentration and was no longer playing with Janelle’s nipples. I was just enjoying the sensation of moving slowly inside Mikey.
Janelle certainly noticed though, “Danny, why did you stop”? She moved her breast around my face trying to get my attention. I just lay there with my eyes closed with a low groan escaping me each time Mikey lowered herself on me. She had managed to get another inch of my inside of her. Janelle felt the movement of my body and turned around as Mikey lowered herself on me again. “Oh wow. You are so little, is it going to fit”?
Mikey’s eyes opened and she smiled at Janelle, “It feels like someone’s arm is inside me. Yes it’s going to fit. It might take a while but I’m getting fucked right now. I’m not waiting any longer”. She continued moving up and down on me and was making progress. There were just a couple of inches left now. It felt like my cock was in an oven, it was so hot in her.
Janelle reached out to Mikey’s breasts. “Maybe this will help”. She began lightly rubbing Mikey’s breasts. She then leaned forward and sucked a nipple in her mouth and worked one hand down Mikey’s chest and across her stomach. When it reached Mikey’s crotch her hand bumped into my cock. She gave what she could reach a little squeeze and then moved back a bit and began rubbing Mikey’s clitoris. Mikey closed her eyes, raised up so that Janelle had better access and held there for a minute. She gave a little shudder, and then sat down hard on me, trapping Janelle’s hand between us as she completely impaled herself on me. Janelle pulled her fingers out and Mikey began rocking back and forth on me.
Janelle was still kissing and licking Mikey’s breasts but she was now on her hands and knees with her butt up near me. I reached over between her legs and began rubbing her pussy. She was so wet that I easily slipped a finger in her. Janelle moaned and lowered her head onto my stomach. Mikey did not even notice. She kept rocking back and forth on me.
I kept rubbing her pussy and teasing her clitoris by passing a finger around it every few passes. My other hand moved up to move back and forth from breast to breast. But once again my focus on Janelle was lost as Mikey began moving very insistently on me. It was driving me right to the edge. She began thrusting back hard, holding her body against me, then quickly moving forward and thrusting back hard again. I knew she was about to cum any moment. I had been fighting my own orgasm ever since she began thrusting hard on me. Finally she let out a loud cry, hunched over on Janelle, who was still lying on my stomach, and pushed back against me one last time. I reached up over Janelle to hug Mikey against us and pushed as deep into her as I could and let go. Mikey’s pussy was so tight around me it felt like she was sucking the streams of sperm right out of me. It gave new meaning to being drained.
We lay there for a few minutes recovering until Janelle finally began pulling herself out from between us. Mikey rose up to a sitting position. Janelle sat up in front of her. “What did it feel like? Did it hurt”?
Mikey had kind of a dreamy look on her face, “It felt really good. It did not hurt but it was real tight for the longest time. It felt like he was never going to fit. Then it was like I was real slippery inside and he moved in and out of me really easy”.
“I thought it hurt because you had a really bad look on your face at the end”.
“No, the feeling was just so intense then. I think it was the orgasm that mom told us about. It was like I was having cramps and my stomach and pussy were on fire at the same time. The feeling was so intense that I wanted to just squeeze him so hard”.
“Hey girls, I’m right here. I can hear you”.
They both looked at me. Janelle spoke up, “I have not forgotten. Move over Mikey, it’s my turn”. Mikey reluctantly lifted up a bit off of me, but she was moving very slowly. I finally fell out of her with a plop on my stomach.
As Janelle was lifting a leg over me I stopped her. “I don’t think he is in any condition for seconds, maybe another time”.
Janelle looked at me with that impish smile that Mikey usually had, “We told you we are a package. You get one, you get the other. That also goes with fucking”. After a pause she added, “Especially with fucking”.
But she did look down at the offending member. She lifted me up with her hand and let me fall back to my stomach. It did not look encouraging. She looked back at Mikey, “I think we need to do what mom had to do with John. I bet it will be twice as fast with two”. They both moved their heads around near my cock. Mikey lifted my cock up and sucked it into her mouth, swirling her tongue around the head. After a few seconds she pulled it out and pointed it towards Janelle. She repeated the process, sucking the head into her mouth, running her tongue around me for a while before passing me back to Mikey.
I don’t care how far a man is gone, or how tired he is, put two fifteen year-old mouths on a man’s cock and he will rise to the occasion. And it did. When Janelle moved around and got on top of me, Mikey held my cock up and Janelle backed up and I slid right into her. She was not the little Asian Doll like Mikey. Even at fifteen she was more like a full-grown woman. She rose up on her arms above me and let her breasts rub across my chest, her nipples growing hard again. Mikey was behind her and I could feel her rubbing her hand on my balls and then running a finger or two up my shaft as I would pull back and then thrust back into Janelle.
Having just cum once I knew I was in no danger of disappointing Janelle by cumming first. I just let her enjoy herself on me. She was moving around on me like she had seen Mikey do, finding what gave her the most pleasure. Mikey had moved around in front of Janelle and was now returning the favor by playing with Janelle’s breasts. After several minutes Mikey moved and lay down along side me and just watched us. I reached up and took Janelle’s breasts in my hands and pushed them together so that her nipples were right next to each other. I pulled her down to me and began licking and sucking on both of her nipples at the same time. She let out a little cry and began slamming down harder on me. After a few seconds I pushed her back up. She let her arms dangle with just me holding up her weight, rocking her hips back and forth on me.
Janelle was starting to pick up speed. Her mouth was open and she had begun breathing hard. As she started to thrust harder on me I squeezed her breasts, and with a finger began stimulating her nipples. Then suddenly she arched her back until she was sitting straight up on me. She was grinding her pelvis against me in little circles. “Oh, that, feels, so, good”. She said it slowly, like it was hard to get each word out. Then she collapsed onto my chest. I wrapped my arms around her and held her.
After about thirty seconds she must have noticed I was still hard and moving very slowly in and out of her. “Daddy, you don’t mind if I call you daddy do you? We are part of your family now”.
“No that is fine. You can call me that if you want to”.
“Daddy, did you cum in me”?
“No, not yet”.
“Don’t you want to? You will won’t you”?
I hugged her tightly to me, “Oh, yes. I want to”. I moved my hands down to her butt and pulled her tight against me as I began driving into her harder, gradually picking up speed. I could feel her head bounce up on my shoulder each time I bottomed out in her.
I could feel myself getting closer, the sperm boiling up in my balls. Holding her butt tight against me I began short, hard strokes into her, barely pulling back before slamming back into her. It was just moments before I let out a hard grunt and was once again cumming. I could feel the streams shooting out of me and did not know where they came from. How could I have had any left?
When I was finished Janelle turned her head to me and gave me a very pleased, “Thank you”. Mikey was on her side, tight against the two of us. I still had my arms around Janelle and could feel one of Mikey’s arms hugging her as well.
We were all exhausted. We just lay there trying to recover. We might have even fallen asleep but just then the tent flapped opened and light poured in. I could see Sharon’s silhouette in the doorway. Janelle was still lying on top of me with my cock buried to the hilt in her. Since the doorway was at our feet it was pretty obvious what we had been doing. Janelle turned her head and looked at her mom. “Hi mom, where have you been”?
I expected her to start yelling but she didn’t. With a completely normal voice she replied, “I’ve been looking in a few nearby stores. I’ll fix some breakfast while you guys finish”. With that she shut the flap and I could hear noises of her getting food out.
Janelle turned her head to me, “Well I guess I have to get off of you now”. She gave me a good squeeze with her pussy. I had softened enough that she squeezed me right out of her. She pouted, “Oh, don’t go. Put him back”.
“I’m sorry but I think he is too far gone for that. You girls have completely tuckered him out. He is drained”.
“Well I guess we can wait. Just remember; mom gets you tonight but we get you again tomorrow morning”.
Janelle gave me a kiss and got up off of me. Mikey, who had been lying against my side, also got up and gave me a kiss. “Just be sure and go to bed early tonight. You need your rest. And I think you have earned a big breakfast”. With a big smile on her face she then jumped up and the two of them went outside.
I waited a few minutes before rising. I was puzzled by Sharon’s response. It was not at all what I had expected from the girls mother when she walked in and found her daughters being fucked.
When I got outside I found Sharon around our fire making breakfast for us. The girls were over by the wagon looking at things that Sharon had brought back. I started to explain, apologize I guess, but Sharon stopped me. “Dan, we are part of your family right”?
“Yes”.
“If we are to really feel like part of your family then we do everything that your family does”. She lifted her hand to point back at the tent, “And that includes that”.
The girls came back over, sat down and began eating with us. When we were finished Sharon went over to the wagon and came back with a bag that was new. She must have gotten it this morning. She pulled out some panties and shorts and tossed them to Mikey and Janelle. “You might want to wear these today. After this morning you are going to be leaking for a while”.
Mikey and Janelle both had questioning looks on their faces as they looked back up at Sharon. Sharon just pointed to the girls crotches. We all looked down. They were sitting cross-legged on the ground and I could see that their pussies were wet and so was the inside of their thighs for an inch or so around. Janelle looked up at me, “And after all that trouble to get it there”.
I thought to myself, it was no trouble at all.
Mikey gave me another of her impish smiles, “That’s okay. He can just put some more there”.
Sharon began picking up our utensils, “Okay girls. Let’s give the man a rest. He’s going to need it. Now give me a hand cleaning this up so we can be on our way”.
Once we had cleaned up our campsite we began looking for business that had what we were looking for. We found several large clothing stores and packed boxes of clothes for all ages. It was a bit bulky so we knew we would be back, probably next year for more. We found a huge store for home remodeling that had every tool we could need. Again we packed all we could find room for. We stopped at a grocery store and pulled out staples that we thought would still be good, spices, some cans, a case of wine, other things that we could test when we got home to see if they were still good. I even tossed in a solid chunk of sugar. If it is still good we can grind it down.
On our way out of town we passed a school. Sharon had me stop. “What do you want to do here”?
She pointed at the name, it was an elementary school. “We can take some books back for teaching the kids. That will be perfect for the winter time when we cannot do anything else. It is something your mother asked me to watch for”.
We were able to get enough books to cover all the ages of the kids. With some new packing we found room in the wagon for them.
It was just past midday before we were finally leaving town. We were all glad to be gone. It was still spooky to see all the buildings but no people. I was just beginning to realize that our trip home was going to take much longer than the trip out. We now had a loaded wagon and the trip home was uphill. While it took just one day to get here it looked like three days to get back.
But maybe that is not so bad. I looked at Sharon sitting next to me in her shorts. She saw me looking at her and smiled at me. The girls were seated on a bench right behind us and about a food higher than ours. Every so often Mikey would lean forward against my back and put her arms on my shoulders and then rest her head on one of her arms. This was just a new way of accomplishing something that she had been doing with me for the last couple of months; her nipples were now rubbing against my back. I should have put on some shorts also.
We had been on the road for about an hour when Sharon, who was sitting next to me, moved closer so that we were touching, side by side. She put her hand on the top of my thigh and let it rest there for a few minutes before slowly letting it slide down between my legs. She took my limp cock in her hand and gave it a little squeeze but then did not let go. Me being a guy, I did what guys do. I rose to the occasion. She showed her appreciation by slowly stroking me, running fingers up and down the length of my cock, giving me gentle and firm squeezes.
After a few minutes of this I leaned closer to her and whispered, “The girls are right behind us”.
She whispered back, “I know, do you want me to stop”.
When I did not say anything she continued slowly stroking me up and down. It was becoming difficult to just calmly sit there. I wanted to spread my legs, lay back and let her beat me off until I came. After several minutes of her soft stroking I finally could not contain it any longer and several streams shot out of me over the front of our wagon and down onto the road. I continued to dribble out a bit more and it slid down over Sharon’s fingers. She let go of me and raised her hand to her mouth and licked her fingers clean.
“Hey that’s cool”. I was so focused on what Sharon was doing I had not even noticed Mikey leaning forward on my shoulders. She had seen her mother jerking me off. I don’t even know how long she had been watching. “Can we have a turn”?
Sharon turned to her, “No. I think Daddy needs his rest. I was just thanking him for last night and this morning for us”.
Yes, two nights and two mornings. That might not be so bad after all.
Mom looked back and shook her head, “Over the last few weeks the girls and I have discussed the possibility of their staying and they were all agreeable. That even included John. I think without him the girls would insist they stay”. A smile tugged at mom’s mouth, “In fact Terri had offered several times to help John with an accident. She has been quite inventive with some possible scenarios. You look pretty tired. You might want to avoid her for a day so you can rest. She is bound to want to show you her appreciation”.
When we entered the kitchen, Sharon was sitting there with several of the young children cutting apple slices for them. I was hit with a sudden swarm of hugs and a chorus of “Daddy’s home”. After quite a bit of horsy-back rides, their mothers shoed them off to get ready for bed.
Sharon also got up saying, “I should go see how John is. He does not like it when I’m up here and he is alone back at the bunkhouse”.
Mom stopped her before she could get up, “We did not want to say anything while the kids were still here”. She turned to look at me and waited for me to continue.
I walked over and stood next to where Sharon was sitting. “I’m sorry but John had an accident out there. He did not make it back”.
Sharon was looking up at me but I could not read her face. She looked down at her hands and the silence stretched out. Finally she looked back up at me, “Is he hurt? Is he still out there?
Well, John is still out there, but he is past hurt. He won’t be coming back”.
She looked puzzled, “I don’t understand”.
I really did not want to relate the entire story, “He had an accident out there. He did not make it. I thought it best to leave him there”.
She just looked at me for a while and then slowly nodded her head. “Karma”.
I was not sure I heard her right, “Karma”?
“It means something like †˜What goes around comes around’, or †˜you reap what you sow’. My husband once went out hunting with John. He did not make it back either”.
She was getting the wrong idea, “Wait, I did not…”.
She held her hand up to my lips to stop me. “That is not what I meant. I meant just that you were luckier or more capable. John was not a very honorable man”.
Then she saw the side of my face. “And what happened to your face”? She stood up and touched my cheek I had forgotten about the scrapes. “It’s nothing; I just scraped it on some bark”.
She gave me a hug, whispered †˜thank you’ in my ear, and then said, “I should go and tell the girls. They would want to know”.
Before she could leave, mom gestured for her to sit back down, “There is something else we should talk about”. Mom waited for her to sit and then mom continued, “We would like for you and the girls to stay here with us if you have no other plans, become part of our family”.
A big smile grew on Sharon’s face. “We would love to. I know the girls would want to also”. Then the smile died. “There is a problem though. I have talked to your daughters. I know what part of what you are doing here; the children and all. I won’t fit in”.
I could not imagine how she couldn’t fit in. “What are you talking about”?
“John has been, uh, well, fucking me for years now. I have no children. I’m sterile. I can’t contribute to the family”.
Mom laughed, “That does not matter. We are not inviting your uterus to join us. We would like you to be part of our family”.
Sharon leaned over and hugged mom. “Of course I would like to join you. I should go and tell the girls now”.
Just before she went out the door she stopped, “Before I forget, John told me not to tell you this before. I was an electrical engineer. You are having a problem with your solar panels. I took a look at them. I think I can fix them”.
Once she had gone I was ready to go take a shower and fall in bed. It had been a long day and I was beat. But mom was not finished. “Irregardless of her having children, I think the two of you should sleep together for the next month”. I started to protest but she held up her hand. “Effectively, you are the husband to all the adult women in our family. I want Sharon to feel that she is an integral part of the family. If her position is not the same as the rest of us I think she will not feel as much a part of the family”.
“What if that is not what she wants? John has been pretty rough on her. She might not like the idea of being passed on to another man”.
Then she smiled at me, “I have seen her give you looks when you were not watching. I will ask her, but I don’t think that will be a problem. And I have seen you look at her when you think she is not looking. I don’t think this will be any great hardship on you”.
I gave her a kind of sheepish shrug. Before I could say anything she sent me off to bed.
“And don’t forget to shower first, you smell something horrible”.
The next morning I did not wake until the sun was well up. Usually I am awake at dawn but I did not sleep well last night, bad dreams. I was hoping I had not missed breakfast and was just tossing the sheet off me when the door flew open with a bang and Janelle and Mikey flew across the room and jumped on me. Janelle had come at me sideways and was now lying across my chest, pinning me to the bed. Later, when I thought about it, and I did frequently, I suspected that Mikey had planned her attack a bit better. She came at me from the foot of the bed and ended up sitting right on top of my cock. Fortunately it was limp and a lying off to the side under her. “We both want to thank you. We are so glad he is gone”.
Before I could say anything Janelle lifted up and planted a kiss right on my lips. That would have been fine but as she moved up to kiss me, both of her nipples trailed across my chest. That by it self might have been okay but when I looked over Janelle I saw Mikey sitting there on me. I found I was focused on her chest. While her breasts were a bit on the small side, her nipples were really large, bigger than any of my sisters. I had to stop looking at their breasts. I could feel the effect it was having on me. I was no longer completely limp and I was definitely straightening out. I knew my cock was slowly moving against Mikey. I looked up at her and she gave me this impish smile.
Janelle propped her head up on her hands and began talking to me. It was hard to concentrate on what she was saying because Mikey was moving around. By now, with two naked girls, four naked boobies, and I could feel one naked pussy being lined up with my cock, I was as hard as I could get. I was moving around a bit myself trying to keep the head of my cock away from the entrance to her pussy.
Janelle took my head in both of her hands, “Danny, you did not answer me”.
“What? What did you say”?
“I was saying that we get to stay, we don’t have to leave anymore. Our mom talked to us last night and your mom talked to us this morning. We get to stay and be part of your family. Isn’t that neat”?
I got a glimpse of Mikey over Janelle’s head. Her eyes were closed and her mouth was open. She was rubbing herself against me and was really close to….too late. I slipped into her. Her eyes opened wide and she had that smile again on her face as she looked at me. I was trying to shift my pelvis down so I could get out of her but she was ahead of me. She tilted back and I slid deeper into her.
“Danny, you are not paying attention again”.
“What”? She had no idea what her sister was doing to me. I was certainly paying attention, it just was not to Janelle.
“I was asking you what you did to John. Mom said he had an accident and died. I don’t believe it. I think you killed him. Don’t you think so Mikey”?
Mikey just responded with an “mmmmm”. I wanted to say the same.
As Janelle started to turn around to see what was going on with Mikey, we heard Sharon calling them from somewhere in the house. Mikey rose up off of me. Now I was sticking up in the air. By the time Janelle had slid off the bed Mikey had moved off the foot of the bed. Janelle forgot about Mikey when she saw my cock sticking up in the air. “I think you are glad to see us. Maybe we should come back later”.
Mikey handed me the sheet and I pulled it over me. It did not help much since part of it was sticking up in the air. “Why don’t you two go and see what your mom wants”?
After they were gone I lay there thinking about Janelle and Mikey. Before, I had avoiding them because of John. But there was no reason to now. Oh yes. But what would Sharon say, not to mention my sisters?
I was just about to get up when Mikey and Janelle came back into the room. Mikey had a bit of a pout on her face, “I don’t think it is fair. We saw you first”. They walked over and sat on the edge of the bed. Mikey saw that my erection was still there and began to run a finger round, playing with it.
What are they talking about, “You don’t think what is fair”?
Janelle seemed to do more talking while Mikey was easily distracted, “Mom gets to come and sleep with you”. But then she brightened, “But we are next”.
I was having a problem concentrating again, “We”?
“That’s right. We are next. Something you don’t know. We have the same birthday. We have always been together. We do everything together. We are a package. When you get one of us, you get both of us”. She saw what Mikey was doing and moved over and grabbed my sheet covered cock. With a quick glance back at me she lowered her head and engulfed me. After a few seconds she moved her mouth away. “I want to be sure you don’t forget us”. They both got up and bounced out the door.
Since Sharon’s arrival, we had decided that it should be safe for us to go down to the town and forage for things we could use, tool, clothes, etc. It was still warm out but winter was fast approaching and we could especially use any clothing we could find. There were so many of us now that the spare clothing we had when we first arrived had either pretty much worn out or just was not enough. It was decided that Sharon, since she had been through the area, me and Sharon’s girls would make the trip. My kids were much too young and my sisters were either pregnant or still breastfeeding and could not leave.
The night before we left, the girls fixed a special dinner for everyone. For those of us leaving, it was all our favorites. We even had ice cream, a special treat. Afterwards I spent several hours in the living room playing with my kids. There were so many now that it was hard to give all of them the attention they deserved. After the last one had been shoed off to bed, I made the rounds of their bedrooms so I could be sure I said goodnight to everyone.
When I finally arrived at my bedroom door I was beat. It was going to be a long trip tomorrow. I wished I had gone to bed a few hours earlier. As I stepped into my bedroom I thought I could see the outline of someone in my bed from the little bit of light coming in from the hall. Whomever it was lying on their side and looked to be asleep. When I closed the door it was completely dark and I could not see them at all. I bet it is Terri finally coming to say thank you.
I guess I did take too long to get to bed. I was tired enough that I was not really in the mood but maybe a little touchy-feely might change my mind. Please god, don’t let it be Mikey, I do not have enough energy left tonight to fend her off.
I got in bed she was on her side facing away from me. I moved over behind her. When I tried to slide my arm under her head, she lifted it for me and then laid her head back on my arm. Her breathing never changed. She is still asleep. I was curious who it was. I moved my body up against her back. It was just cool enough tonight that it felt nice snuggled up with someone. I put my hand on her hip and that did not give me a clue. I slid my hand farther around under her arm and onto her stomach. The only thing that told me was she’s not pregnant. But it was a nice flat stomach. I was a bit more interested now and moved my hand up her stomach and between her breasts until it was on the front of her shoulder. Her breathing changed. She is awake. She leaned back against me. Well, maybe I could stay up a bit longer.
I slowly moved my hand down until it passed over her one of her breasts. When I reached the bottom I cupped it in my hand. Who ever this is has large breasts. I ran through everyone in my mind, mentally holding their breasts in my hands, no, these are bigger. Who could…Oh no. It’s Sharon. I jerked my hand up off her breast but my arm was under one of hers. The movement woke her. She held her arm against me so I could not pull mine out without jerking it hard. “I’m sorry Sharon. I did not know it was you. I thought it was one of my, one of the others”.
Sharon reached down for my hand and pulled it back up to her breast and then put her hand over mine, holding it there. “Dan, relax. Your mother, yes I know she is your mother and the others are your sisters, suggested that I should move into your bedroom tonight. She thought it might help our relationship and working together. I’m sorry I fell asleep. I did not expect you to stay up so late. Do you want me to turn over? I’m awake now and you can, you know, if you want to”.
I remembered how John had treated her. I did not want her to think of me the same way. And, †˜you can if you want to’ was not the right beginning for us if there was going to be one. I brought my left arm around and gave her a hug. “No, we are both tired and we have a long day tomorrow. Lets go to sleep if you don’t mind”. She did not say anything, just nodded her head. After several minutes I felt her body relax as she went back to sleep. My last thought before falling asleep was, †˜those are nice breasts’.
Mom came in at 5 AM, turned on a light, and woke us. She found me on my back. In the night Sharon had turned over and was now lying against me with her head on my shoulder and one leg bent up over mine. My left arm was still wrapped around her. The light woke Sharon and she quickly got out of bed and disappeared into the bathroom.
Since the night I had returned without John, Sharon had begun dressing like the rest of us, which meant, no dressing at all. When she got up I could see her face blush. She was embarrassed to be found in bed, naked with me, by mom.
When we got to the kitchen we found Mikey and Janelle already there and waiting. Sharon and I had breakfast while Mikey and Janelle went out and hitched up a team to an old wagon. The girls had packed it with one of our large tents, some clothes for everyone in case it got cool and some food last night. We normally used it to haul hay around for livestock but it would be perfect for this trip.
We said our few goodbyes and were out on the road just as it was getting light. The trip was smooth but slow. At our three to four miles an hour it was going to take us most of the day to get there. One thing we did not have to worry about was traffic.
The sun had reached straight up and was getting pretty hot so we stopped in the shade under a few trees along side the road. We laid out a few blankets and ate some of the food mom had packed for us. We were on a bit of a rise and could see for several miles in three directions. We were used to not seeing people but it seemed so eerie. We could see many ranch houses spread around in the distance, quite a lot of horses and cattle, but no people.
We decided to wait here in the shade and nap through the hottest part of the day before continuing. I was in the middle of the blanket, so when I laid down, Mikey and Janelle lay on the left side of me and Sharon lay on the other. Sharon turned on her side towards me, raised her head until I put my arm out, and then used it as a pillow. Mikey and Janelle lay facing each other talking low while Sharon and I both fell asleep.
I woke about an hour later. It had cooled down a bit. I was still lying on my back and Sharon had not moved. Sharon’s hand, which had been on my chest when I fell asleep, had drifted south and was now resting right at the edge of my pubic hair. I could feel her fingers twitch every now-and-again in her sleep. Unfortunately that was causing my own twitching. I was rapidly coming to attention. It was just seconds before I felt the head bump into something. It had to be her fingers. Her fingers twitched again and then stretched out a bit and settled on the head of my cock.
I glanced over at the girls. Thank god, they were both still asleep. Mikey was lying on her back also. I looked down her body from her nipples to the small triangle of her pubic hair. There was just a little bit. Just looking at her was making me harder. What is wrong with me? I have one naked woman hanging on one side of my and I’m staring at her naked girls on the other.
Then Sharon’s hand moved a bit farther down and wrapped around my shaft. If I was not completely erect before, I sure was now. It felt so good. I let out a sigh that was a bit louder than I intended. I looked quickly over at the girls again and found Mikey looking at me. She was looking at Sharon’s hand and she had a big smile on her face. Oh, great, now what? She turned back over and a few seconds later I saw Janelle’s head poke up over Mikey. She looked at my face and then quickly looked down my body. A big smile formed on her face also before she dropped back down out of sight. Mikey turned her back to me. It was just a few seconds before I could hear giggling coming from them.
I reached down and tried to gently move Sharon’s hand without waking her. No such luck, as soon as I pulled a finger away her head moved on my shoulder. “What? Is it time”? And then she realized where her hand was and jerked away from me and got up.
From the look on her face I could see she was going to start blurting out apologies but that would only serve to focus the girls attention on what had happened so I quickly pointed at them and she held her tongue.
I got up and quickly walked over to the far side of the wagon and began rummaging around in a box. I needed to buy some time so that this flagpole would go down. I looked up and saw Sharon standing there watching me. She looked so nice. I remember there were black kids of all shades when I was in school but it had been so long since we had been around anyone. She seemed very exotic with the natural light brown skin instead of the tanned skin of my sisters. Where the areoles around my sister’s nipples were pink, hers were brown. I shook my head. You need to stop this or you are never going to go down.
We quickly packed everything away and got back on the road. I had Mikey and Janelle sit up front so I could ride in the back. That way I could avoid most of their knowing glances and smiles at me plus give them experience with the team.
We were now passing houses along the road. Everything was so overgrown. Roofs were falling down. Occasionally we would encounter cars stopped right in the middle of the road, their tires flat. Usually we could work our way around them. A couple of times we had to tie a rope to the car and the wagon and use our horses to pull it to the side. We would have made quite a sight if there had been anyone to see us, four nudists, wearing nothing but hats, riding in a horse-pulled wagon.
We passed one house that had a tattered flag atop a flagpole out by a circular driveway. Mikey looked back over her shoulder and asked, “If we find a flag in town, could we take it home to put up our flagpole”?
What do we want a flag for? I looked over at the flag. It did not look very impressive all ripped like that, but why not. “Sure, I don’t know why not”. I did not know what good it could do. We don’t even have a flagp..oh, yeh. I looked up to see Mikey smiling back over her shoulder at me. She leaned over to Janelle and they both started giggling again.
When we reached the edge of town the sun was already headed down. We passed a sign that said we were in Redding, population 61,101. That really brought it home to me, all dead. Towns like this all across the USA, empty, and other countries too.
It was pretty depressing. I could tell from the others faces that they felt pretty much the same. We did little talking. Mikey and Janelle were not joking any longer. But then they had seen all this before. We just kept passing houses and then businesses with no one around. Small trees were growing up in the cracks in the sidewalk making even bigger cracks.
It had taken all day to get here and it was starting to get dark. “Why don’t we find a spot where we can camp for the night and then we can look around the town tomorrow and see what we can find”? After another half hour we came to a small creek that ran through the middle of the town. We found a grassy area alongside of it and unhitched the horses and let them graze. Sharon and I set about putting the big tent up; there would be room for all of us in it, while the girls began getting some dinner ready. Across the creek we could see some really nice houses. I wondered what happened to those people. They had to have had a lot of money to afford those houses in this nice area and it did not make a difference. They ended up the same as those on the edge of town in the one-room shacks.
We made a small fire for the chill and had some dinner. We were all just a bit spooked with the tall buildings around us and the silence so once dinner was finished we quickly got in the tent and got ready for bed. Once again I was in the middle. We had piled our sleeping bags together so the bed would be softer but it had the effect of our huddling together to be under the blanket. Sharon was once again lying on her side with her back to me. I could feel Mikey and Sharon snuggled up against my back. It did keep us quite warm.
The girls went to sleep pretty quickly. Mikey had turned over and was now sleeping on her back. I was having trouble falling asleep. All the empty buildings weighed on my mind; the huge loss. I had not noticed it at first but my hand was once again on one of Sharon’s breasts. I had been idly moving my hand around, giving her breast soft squeezes, running my fingers around her nipple, pushing it one way and then another. I realized what I was doing when Sharon pushed her butt back against me. That was when I noticed I was hard. She felt it too. She lifted her right leg and hooked her knee over my leg. She turned her head and whispered, “Are the girls asleep”?
I looked around and they were both sound asleep. I whispered back, “Yes”.
Sharon lifted her body up just enough so that my cock was no longer pinned between us. As it straightened out it slid between her legs with the shaft lying against her pussy. I could feel the heat of her body on it. She stretched forward and I felt her hand grab me. She began running her fingers around the head of my cock. After about a minute I could feel her rubbing me against her pussy. My left arm was still under her head but I brought my hand up and was able to reach her other breast. I was now caressing them both. Every now and again I would take my hands rub down her chest to her stomach and then back up. She moved her hips forward a bit and then tilted them back at me. She then pushed hard on the head of my cock against her and with a sudden stab I sank halfway into her.
A long, low moan escaped her. I could tell she was trying to suppress it so as to not wake the girls. I was ready for my own moan. It was so hot inside of her. She had fantastic muscle control. I could feel her pussy just pulsate around my cock, squeezing, letting go and then squeezing me again. Trying not to be too active I began slow thrusts in and out of her. She began pushing back at me with each of my thrusts. I could feel her fingertips brushing against my cock where I entered her. It took me a moment to realize she was rubbing her clitoris. Her breath became ragged and she pushed back against me with sharp, hard thrusts. I pushed back trying to get as deep in her as I could. She suddenly stopped rubbing herself and cupped my balls in her hand and pulled up trying to get me deeper in her. She bent forward and let out a long, low cry. When her pussy clamped down on me I could not take it anymore and cum began shooting out of me into her. With each stream I thrust as hard as I could into her, pushing her forward on our makeshift bed.
When we both had finished we lay there trying to catch our breath without making too much noise. She had let go of my balls but was now tracing a finger from my balls up the bit of shaft that was not inside of her and then back down. Each time she reached my balls she would give them the gentlest squeeze. Each time she did I would have a little involuntary thrust back into her. She finally pulled her leg off me. I started to pull back out of her but she quickly pushed back against me, “No, please stay there for a while”.
“Okay”. I pushed back in as well as I could. I knew I could not stay long but was happy to comply. It was certainly no hardship.
She pulled my hand back up to her breasts and held it there. “Thank you. That was nice. It has been a very long time since I enjoyed sex”.
I kissed her neck, “The pleasure was all mine”.
She let out a little laugh, “Oh, don’t you believe it”.
I pulled her tight against me and then we both drifted off to sleep.
I was still asleep when Sharon woke. When she nudged me awake, light was just beginning to come into the tent. I started to get up but she stopped me with a hand, “We passed a music store yesterday. It is just a block back. Why don’t you get a bit more sleep while I go check it out? When I first went to college I was going to be a music teacher. I think the kids would like some instruments to play with”.
“Do you want to wait while I get ready”?
“No, there is nothing to worry about out there. And besides, the girls are still sleeping. Why don’t you get a little more and I’ll see you in an hour or so”.
With that said she left the tent and I drifted off again. It was that limbo sleep where you are not quite fully asleep but not awake either. My mind was just floating around. When my cock began tingling, my find filled in with a dream about Sharon. In my dream I looked down and I could see her head going up and down on me as her tongue swirled around me. Then the image changed and it was mom, she lifted her head and smiled at me and then lowered her mouth back over me. In my dream I kept watching her, her head bobbing up and down, pulling me out of her mouth and then flicking her tongue back and forth across the head of my cock, lowering her mouth and sucking on just the head of it.
When she raised her head again it was not mom but Mikey. That made me jump and she bit me. And that made me open my eyes. Janelle was crouched on one side of my hips holding my cock in her hand. Mikey was crouched on the other side looking at me, “I’m sorry. I did not mean to bite you. You moved. Here, let me kiss it and make it better”.
Before I could say anything she lowered her head and kissed the head of my cock very gently. “He seems to be better now. Maybe he forgave me. Lets see”. She lowered her head and took me into her mouth again. Oh, yes. Forgiveness was complete.
I had not said a word up to now. I just lowered my head back down and felt the sensations run over me. While Mikey was going up and down on me with her tongue, Janelle was running her hand around my shaft and down to my balls. It felt so good. But I had to stop them. I was going to cum any minute at this rate. What would Sharon say if she came back and caught us?
Janelle shifted and began kissing me across my chest, up to my neck and then on my mouth. After a minute of resistance I enthusiastically joined in, our tongues darting in and out of each others mouth, fencing with each others tongue. She pulled away from my mouth and moved higher so her breasts were in my face. Even though Sharon was not her real mother the two looked alike. They were both black but with very light skin. Janelle’s breasts were also on the large size and they both had that slender long-legged body type. I took one of her nipples in my mouth and my hand searched and found the other breast. I was so preoccupied with Janelle’s nipple in my mouth that I did not notice that Mikey had moved until she sat down on my cock and it slid about halfway inside her. It was like an electric current had been turned on in me. She was very tight, so tight that it seemed like I could not fit inside her. She sat there for what seemed like a minute, lifted up a few inches and lowered herself back down on me again. I was still just half in her. She very slowly repeated it over and over, lifting up and then lowering herself. It felt so good in her I had lost my concentration and was no longer playing with Janelle’s nipples. I was just enjoying the sensation of moving slowly inside Mikey.
Janelle certainly noticed though, “Danny, why did you stop”? She moved her breast around my face trying to get my attention. I just lay there with my eyes closed with a low groan escaping me each time Mikey lowered herself on me. She had managed to get another inch of my inside of her. Janelle felt the movement of my body and turned around as Mikey lowered herself on me again. “Oh wow. You are so little, is it going to fit”?
Mikey’s eyes opened and she smiled at Janelle, “It feels like someone’s arm is inside me. Yes it’s going to fit. It might take a while but I’m getting fucked right now. I’m not waiting any longer”. She continued moving up and down on me and was making progress. There were just a couple of inches left now. It felt like my cock was in an oven, it was so hot in her.
Janelle reached out to Mikey’s breasts. “Maybe this will help”. She began lightly rubbing Mikey’s breasts. She then leaned forward and sucked a nipple in her mouth and worked one hand down Mikey’s chest and across her stomach. When it reached Mikey’s crotch her hand bumped into my cock. She gave what she could reach a little squeeze and then moved back a bit and began rubbing Mikey’s clitoris. Mikey closed her eyes, raised up so that Janelle had better access and held there for a minute. She gave a little shudder, and then sat down hard on me, trapping Janelle’s hand between us as she completely impaled herself on me. Janelle pulled her fingers out and Mikey began rocking back and forth on me.
Janelle was still kissing and licking Mikey’s breasts but she was now on her hands and knees with her butt up near me. I reached over between her legs and began rubbing her pussy. She was so wet that I easily slipped a finger in her. Janelle moaned and lowered her head onto my stomach. Mikey did not even notice. She kept rocking back and forth on me.
I kept rubbing her pussy and teasing her clitoris by passing a finger around it every few passes. My other hand moved up to move back and forth from breast to breast. But once again my focus on Janelle was lost as Mikey began moving very insistently on me. It was driving me right to the edge. She began thrusting back hard, holding her body against me, then quickly moving forward and thrusting back hard again. I knew she was about to cum any moment. I had been fighting my own orgasm ever since she began thrusting hard on me. Finally she let out a loud cry, hunched over on Janelle, who was still lying on my stomach, and pushed back against me one last time. I reached up over Janelle to hug Mikey against us and pushed as deep into her as I could and let go. Mikey’s pussy was so tight around me it felt like she was sucking the streams of sperm right out of me. It gave new meaning to being drained.
We lay there for a few minutes recovering until Janelle finally began pulling herself out from between us. Mikey rose up to a sitting position. Janelle sat up in front of her. “What did it feel like? Did it hurt”?
Mikey had kind of a dreamy look on her face, “It felt really good. It did not hurt but it was real tight for the longest time. It felt like he was never going to fit. Then it was like I was real slippery inside and he moved in and out of me really easy”.
“I thought it hurt because you had a really bad look on your face at the end”.
“No, the feeling was just so intense then. I think it was the orgasm that mom told us about. It was like I was having cramps and my stomach and pussy were on fire at the same time. The feeling was so intense that I wanted to just squeeze him so hard”.
“Hey girls, I’m right here. I can hear you”.
They both looked at me. Janelle spoke up, “I have not forgotten. Move over Mikey, it’s my turn”. Mikey reluctantly lifted up a bit off of me, but she was moving very slowly. I finally fell out of her with a plop on my stomach.
As Janelle was lifting a leg over me I stopped her. “I don’t think he is in any condition for seconds, maybe another time”.
Janelle looked at me with that impish smile that Mikey usually had, “We told you we are a package. You get one, you get the other. That also goes with fucking”. After a pause she added, “Especially with fucking”.
But she did look down at the offending member. She lifted me up with her hand and let me fall back to my stomach. It did not look encouraging. She looked back at Mikey, “I think we need to do what mom had to do with John. I bet it will be twice as fast with two”. They both moved their heads around near my cock. Mikey lifted my cock up and sucked it into her mouth, swirling her tongue around the head. After a few seconds she pulled it out and pointed it towards Janelle. She repeated the process, sucking the head into her mouth, running her tongue around me for a while before passing me back to Mikey.
I don’t care how far a man is gone, or how tired he is, put two fifteen year-old mouths on a man’s cock and he will rise to the occasion. And it did. When Janelle moved around and got on top of me, Mikey held my cock up and Janelle backed up and I slid right into her. She was not the little Asian Doll like Mikey. Even at fifteen she was more like a full-grown woman. She rose up on her arms above me and let her breasts rub across my chest, her nipples growing hard again. Mikey was behind her and I could feel her rubbing her hand on my balls and then running a finger or two up my shaft as I would pull back and then thrust back into Janelle.
Having just cum once I knew I was in no danger of disappointing Janelle by cumming first. I just let her enjoy herself on me. She was moving around on me like she had seen Mikey do, finding what gave her the most pleasure. Mikey had moved around in front of Janelle and was now returning the favor by playing with Janelle’s breasts. After several minutes Mikey moved and lay down along side me and just watched us. I reached up and took Janelle’s breasts in my hands and pushed them together so that her nipples were right next to each other. I pulled her down to me and began licking and sucking on both of her nipples at the same time. She let out a little cry and began slamming down harder on me. After a few seconds I pushed her back up. She let her arms dangle with just me holding up her weight, rocking her hips back and forth on me.
Janelle was starting to pick up speed. Her mouth was open and she had begun breathing hard. As she started to thrust harder on me I squeezed her breasts, and with a finger began stimulating her nipples. Then suddenly she arched her back until she was sitting straight up on me. She was grinding her pelvis against me in little circles. “Oh, that, feels, so, good”. She said it slowly, like it was hard to get each word out. Then she collapsed onto my chest. I wrapped my arms around her and held her.
After about thirty seconds she must have noticed I was still hard and moving very slowly in and out of her. “Daddy, you don’t mind if I call you daddy do you? We are part of your family now”.
“No that is fine. You can call me that if you want to”.
“Daddy, did you cum in me”?
“No, not yet”.
“Don’t you want to? You will won’t you”?
I hugged her tightly to me, “Oh, yes. I want to”. I moved my hands down to her butt and pulled her tight against me as I began driving into her harder, gradually picking up speed. I could feel her head bounce up on my shoulder each time I bottomed out in her.
I could feel myself getting closer, the sperm boiling up in my balls. Holding her butt tight against me I began short, hard strokes into her, barely pulling back before slamming back into her. It was just moments before I let out a hard grunt and was once again cumming. I could feel the streams shooting out of me and did not know where they came from. How could I have had any left?
When I was finished Janelle turned her head to me and gave me a very pleased, “Thank you”. Mikey was on her side, tight against the two of us. I still had my arms around Janelle and could feel one of Mikey’s arms hugging her as well.
We were all exhausted. We just lay there trying to recover. We might have even fallen asleep but just then the tent flapped opened and light poured in. I could see Sharon’s silhouette in the doorway. Janelle was still lying on top of me with my cock buried to the hilt in her. Since the doorway was at our feet it was pretty obvious what we had been doing. Janelle turned her head and looked at her mom. “Hi mom, where have you been”?
I expected her to start yelling but she didn’t. With a completely normal voice she replied, “I’ve been looking in a few nearby stores. I’ll fix some breakfast while you guys finish”. With that she shut the flap and I could hear noises of her getting food out.
Janelle turned her head to me, “Well I guess I have to get off of you now”. She gave me a good squeeze with her pussy. I had softened enough that she squeezed me right out of her. She pouted, “Oh, don’t go. Put him back”.
“I’m sorry but I think he is too far gone for that. You girls have completely tuckered him out. He is drained”.
“Well I guess we can wait. Just remember; mom gets you tonight but we get you again tomorrow morning”.
Janelle gave me a kiss and got up off of me. Mikey, who had been lying against my side, also got up and gave me a kiss. “Just be sure and go to bed early tonight. You need your rest. And I think you have earned a big breakfast”. With a big smile on her face she then jumped up and the two of them went outside.
I waited a few minutes before rising. I was puzzled by Sharon’s response. It was not at all what I had expected from the girls mother when she walked in and found her daughters being fucked.
When I got outside I found Sharon around our fire making breakfast for us. The girls were over by the wagon looking at things that Sharon had brought back. I started to explain, apologize I guess, but Sharon stopped me. “Dan, we are part of your family right”?
“Yes”.
“If we are to really feel like part of your family then we do everything that your family does”. She lifted her hand to point back at the tent, “And that includes that”.
The girls came back over, sat down and began eating with us. When we were finished Sharon went over to the wagon and came back with a bag that was new. She must have gotten it this morning. She pulled out some panties and shorts and tossed them to Mikey and Janelle. “You might want to wear these today. After this morning you are going to be leaking for a while”.
Mikey and Janelle both had questioning looks on their faces as they looked back up at Sharon. Sharon just pointed to the girls crotches. We all looked down. They were sitting cross-legged on the ground and I could see that their pussies were wet and so was the inside of their thighs for an inch or so around. Janelle looked up at me, “And after all that trouble to get it there”.
I thought to myself, it was no trouble at all.
Mikey gave me another of her impish smiles, “That’s okay. He can just put some more there”.
Sharon began picking up our utensils, “Okay girls. Let’s give the man a rest. He’s going to need it. Now give me a hand cleaning this up so we can be on our way”.
Once we had cleaned up our campsite we began looking for business that had what we were looking for. We found several large clothing stores and packed boxes of clothes for all ages. It was a bit bulky so we knew we would be back, probably next year for more. We found a huge store for home remodeling that had every tool we could need. Again we packed all we could find room for. We stopped at a grocery store and pulled out staples that we thought would still be good, spices, some cans, a case of wine, other things that we could test when we got home to see if they were still good. I even tossed in a solid chunk of sugar. If it is still good we can grind it down.
On our way out of town we passed a school. Sharon had me stop. “What do you want to do here”?
She pointed at the name, it was an elementary school. “We can take some books back for teaching the kids. That will be perfect for the winter time when we cannot do anything else. It is something your mother asked me to watch for”.
We were able to get enough books to cover all the ages of the kids. With some new packing we found room in the wagon for them.
It was just past midday before we were finally leaving town. We were all glad to be gone. It was still spooky to see all the buildings but no people. I was just beginning to realize that our trip home was going to take much longer than the trip out. We now had a loaded wagon and the trip home was uphill. While it took just one day to get here it looked like three days to get back.
But maybe that is not so bad. I looked at Sharon sitting next to me in her shorts. She saw me looking at her and smiled at me. The girls were seated on a bench right behind us and about a food higher than ours. Every so often Mikey would lean forward against my back and put her arms on my shoulders and then rest her head on one of her arms. This was just a new way of accomplishing something that she had been doing with me for the last couple of months; her nipples were now rubbing against my back. I should have put on some shorts also.
We had been on the road for about an hour when Sharon, who was sitting next to me, moved closer so that we were touching, side by side. She put her hand on the top of my thigh and let it rest there for a few minutes before slowly letting it slide down between my legs. She took my limp cock in her hand and gave it a little squeeze but then did not let go. Me being a guy, I did what guys do. I rose to the occasion. She showed her appreciation by slowly stroking me, running fingers up and down the length of my cock, giving me gentle and firm squeezes.
After a few minutes of this I leaned closer to her and whispered, “The girls are right behind us”.
She whispered back, “I know, do you want me to stop”.
When I did not say anything she continued slowly stroking me up and down. It was becoming difficult to just calmly sit there. I wanted to spread my legs, lay back and let her beat me off until I came. After several minutes of her soft stroking I finally could not contain it any longer and several streams shot out of me over the front of our wagon and down onto the road. I continued to dribble out a bit more and it slid down over Sharon’s fingers. She let go of me and raised her hand to her mouth and licked her fingers clean.
“Hey that’s cool”. I was so focused on what Sharon was doing I had not even noticed Mikey leaning forward on my shoulders. She had seen her mother jerking me off. I don’t even know how long she had been watching. “Can we have a turn”?
Sharon turned to her, “No. I think Daddy needs his rest. I was just thanking him for last night and this morning for us”.
Yes, two nights and two mornings. That might not be so bad after all.
Chapter 6
Spoiler:
When we returned to the ranch the kids tore through the boxes of clothing. It was like Christmas for them. Sharon had packed the boxes with an eye towards winter so there were a lot of coats and jackets. Sharon took the musical instruments and began sharing them with the children who were interested. Megan, the one responsible for teaching the children, took the books and began making plans for classes for the children. I opened a big box on the bottom and was trying to figure out what a maxi-pad was, and why panties need liners, when Sharon took it from me saying that was just for the girls. So I left and got busy putting the tools I had brought back away in the barn.
It took a while to tell everyone what the town had been like. We tried but it was impossible to relate just how it felt being there. There were so many houses and buildings with no people around. It felt as if there were ghosts just sitting around watching you, not interfering.
After about a month everything pretty much returned to normal. Fall had arrived and we even had our first snow of the season. It was an early storm and the snow did not last but the kids had fun playing in it. The new clothes came in handy. Another month went by and the big news was that Sharon, Janelle and Mikey were all pregnant. Mom was right; it felt like they had always been part of our family. It did look a bit peculiar to everyone when all three of them delivered within 36 hours.
Over the next ten years we made many trips back to the city, sometimes several in the same year. Sharon was able to find supplies that repaired our solar panels and even added some new ones. We found all the materials that we needed to add wind-power to our grid. We now have lights on anytime we want, plus the kids can watch movies again and listen to music. We also brought back appliances, additional refrigerators and freezers. The girls even had hair dryers.
As the kids got older some of them joined us on the trips. With their help we were able to round up some livestock to bring back. We stopped at several farms along the way and found a couple more wagons.
We have quite a family now. Over the last ten years we had to build several new houses to hold everyone. There are over eighty children now. Even though there were different mothers, because I was the only father the kids all called each other brother and sister. Sometimes it was confusing figuring out whether they were really a brother or sister or just being called that. But I guess in the final analysis it really did not matter.
The sun was just starting to rise when Megan woke.
I turned over to look at Dan. It was hard to believe the thirty-year old man sleeping next to me was the little brother I used to tease so much. He was sleeping on his back so I thought it would be pretty easy to wake him. I reached over and ran my fingers up and down his cock. He certainly is not the “little” brother any more. Last night we went to bed and just fell asleep without any lovemaking. Maybe that is why I feel so horny this morning. When my light stroking did not wake him, at least not the big guy, the little guy was responding, I grabbed him with a firmer grip and began to move him around like a gearshift. It’s time to get into a higher gear Danny-boy.
Dan finally stirred. “What are you doing? It’s too early to get up”.
I waved his cock around to show him just how wrong he was, “I think you are wrong there, you’re already up”.
He reached over, grabbed me, and pulled me over on top of him. Once I was settled in on him, I rose up on my hands and let a nipple brush against his nose and then down into his waiting mouth. His tongue was giving me a real tingling between my legs. My pussy needed something to grab on to. I rocked back just a bit and my pussy found the perfect thing to grab onto. I had planned on teasing him a bit, sliding down on him slowly but it felt so good I pushed back until he was buried deep inside me.
His mouth could not reach my nipple any longer so he put his hands on the front of my shoulders and lifted me up so I sitting upright on him. If he went in me any deeper he would be popping out my mouth. I closed my eyes and began rocking back and forth on him. It was a perfect motion with direct pressure on my clitoris. It usually only took a few minutes for me to cum this way. But something was missing. I stopped rocking and reached down and brought his hands up to my breasts. That’s better. As I returned to my rocking he began rubbing my breasts. He gave both of them a big squeeze, and as I was about to reward him with my own squeeze he let out a yell. “Hey, stop that”.
I opened my eyes and looked around. I was sure he was talking to someone that had come in. When I did not see anyone I looked back at him and then had to laugh. His face was wet and I realized what had happened. I was still breast-feeding. He had given them a good squeeze and they had responded like they are supposed to. With a big smile I told him, “If you don’t want milk, don’t milk me”.
He held me up with one hand while he wiped his face with the other. “You squirted me”. He closed his eyes and put his hands on my hips and began pushing me back and forth on him. His tongue came out and licked a drop off his lip. “You don’t have chocolate in the other one do you”?
“You wish. I haven’t had chocolate since we were kids. You’ll have to try Janelle or Sharon. Maybe they have some”.
He laughed, “I already asked. They both said no. Janelle asked what chocolate milk was”.
I rocked back on him. “Besides, this is pay-back. You have been squirting me for years”. I had to add, “Don’t complain. I get milky white stuff if I squeeze you too much also”. I would have added more but the rocking was getting to me. I was finally ready to reward him with that squeeze when I heard one of the kids crying in the playground we have between the wings of the house. Just ignore it. Someone would come out and take care of him soon. But as the crying continued it was hard to ignore. The kids were my responsibility. Everyone had a major job in the family. The kids were mine. Maybe if I rock faster I can get this orgasm taken care of and then I can run out and see what the problem is.
If anything the crying was getting louder. It sounded like he was really hurt. Just one more minute, please. But it was not going to happen. The crying was too much of a distraction. “Dan, I have to go see what is wrong”.
As I rose to get off of him he lifted his hips trying to keep his cock inside of me. Once I was off of him his cock remained pointed in the air. “Don’t worry about me Megan; this will probably go down in an hour or so. There should not be any lasting medical problem”.
I gave his cock a playful slap and it waved back and forth. “You poor baby, I’ll be back if I can”.
I got up and put a t-shirt on and then went out the door and started down the hall. Just before I reached the end of the hall Mary, my oldest daughter, turned the corner and walked up to me. She was one of the reasons I had put on the t-shirt. It was not fair to be a mother in her thirties with a daughter that looked like her and who walked around naked. She had grown up to be a gorgeous young lady. Of course my breasts used to stick out like that before I had nine kids.
“Mom, I need help. I don’t know what to do”.
I had no idea what she was talking about, “What do you mean”?
“My fifteenth birthday was months ago. Grandma and you said that when I turned fourteen I would be ready for sex. Now I’m fifteen and still no sex. I’m ready but my oldest brother is thirteen and he is not the least bit interested”.
She was right. Jason showed no interest in girls yet. Hopefully all that meant was that he was a late bloomer. “You know girls mature earlier than boys. Have you tried anything with him”?
“Yes, but he just pokes my boobs with a finger, giggles, and then runs off to play with his brothers”.
“Well he is still a bit young. You might have to wait a couple of years for him or one of your other brothers to mature”.
“But it’s not fair. I’m old enough now, past old enough. I should not have to wait for them”.
Just then the child outside began wailing again. “Look, I have to go out and see what is wrong out there. Why don’t you go talk with your father? He is still in the bedroom. Maybe he knows something that can help you. I’ve got to run”. As I walked off I hoped Dan had pulled the covers up. That flagpole might scare a young girl. But then she has walked in on us a few times. It won’t be something she has not seen before.
As mom walked away, I thought what good could dad do? But then again, maybe if he knows what the problem is, there is something he could say to Jason to help. I walked on down and opened his bedroom door. I was surprised to see daddy lying in bed with an obvious erection sticking up in the air. Then I remembered mom just left. They must have been interrupted, poor dad.
As I walked up to the bed I noticed dad’s eyes were closed. I had never seen his whole cock this big before. I had walked in on him a couple of times while he was having sex with mom or one of my aunties but it was always inside of them and I could not see the whole thing. When he walked around it just kind of dangled. Now it looked really big and the end was kind of purple. I could see veins running up the sides. I was getting a tingle between my legs and my nipples were kind of itching just looking at it. I pushed my thighs together to try and satisfy the tingling; it helped but did nothing to satisfy it.
I leaned a bit against the bed to get a closer look. I was about to say something when he spoke first. “Oh good, you are back”. Huh? I looked down and saw his eyes were still closed, he did not know it was me. He thought mom had come back. He put his hand out like he wanted mine so I put my hand in his. He gave me a little tug to get me to climb in bed. I opened my mouth to tell him I’m not mom but hesitated and took another look at his cock. Then I remembered what mom had said, “Your dad can help you get pregnant”. Well, it was not exactly those words but I’m sure that is what she meant.
Dad started to reach out with his other hand to help guide me on top of him. I patted his hands away with mine and crawled across the bed on my knees until I was right next to him. I took one last look at his cock before lifting my leg to move over him so that I could straddle him. That is so big. I wondered how it would fit. My vagina did not seem anywhere near that big. But then, babies come out so that should be able to get in.
I reached down and grabbed his cock and put it right against the entrance. I let go and put my hands on his chest. I took a deep breath and then sat down just a bit so that it spread my lips and just barely went inside of me. It is too big. I could feel it stretching me. But it felt really good. Daddy reached up with his hands and cupped my breasts. He gave them a good squeeze and I felt his hips rise up, pushing his cock a couple more inches in me. I let out a gasp and daddy opened his eyes. He quickly pulled his hands away from my breasts and I fell forward until I got my hands on his chest, “Mary, what do you think you are doing?”
“I’m doing what mom said to do”. Even as I was talking I was slowly letting myself sink lower on daddy.
“What are you talking about? Your mother would certainly not tell you to come in and fu, uh, get in bed with your father”.
“Yes she did”. And I proceeded to tell him what I had told mom. That I’m fifteen now, I’m ready and no one was ready for me so mom had told me that daddy could help me get pregnant. I talked really fast trying to get everything out and the amazing thing was that he did not push me off of him.
“I don’t think your mother said that”.
“Yes she did. You can ask her later”. I put a bit of a pout on my face and went in from a different angle. “You just don’t think I’m pretty enough to have sex with. My breasts are not big like the others”. As I was talking I sat down on daddy a bit more. It did not feel quite as tight now. But the tingle was getting much worse. It was like an itch that you had to scratch. I wanted to move around on daddy to scratch it.
“Honey, that is not it at all. You are very pretty, and your breasts…..” Daddy’s voice trailed off.
“See I’m right. I don’t have nice breasts. You think they are tiny”.
That’s not true. You have very nice breasts. I just don’t think I’m supposed to be doing this with you”.
“Why not? You do it with grandma, mom and all my aunties and they are your sisters”? By this point I was sitting flush on dad. He was buried in me. Every so often I would feel his cock twitch in me. Whenever it happened I would squeeze my thighs against him. “And besides, mom said you could help me get pregnant so that means you are supposed to do it with me too”.
“Honey, I don’t think I’m…Oh please don’t do that”. When he had started talking I had pushed down and forward with my pelvis. If anything it pushed him even deeper in me and at the same time put pressure on that special spot. That tingle had spread from my pussy to my stomach. “I’m sorry daddy. It just feels so good”. I began slowly rocking back and forth on him. I could feel daddy pushing his hips up against me, lifting me in the air. I began moving faster on him.
Daddy had shut his eyes again, “Well, if your mother said I should help”.
“Daddy, would you touch my breasts again”. Daddy reached up and ran his fingers over and around both of my nipples. It was like they were on fire. Daddy let go of my hips and reached up to my shoulders and pulled me down towards him. I thought he wanted me to lie on him but as I got closer he raised his head up and took one of my nipples in his mouth and sucked on it. He moved his head back with my nipple still in his mouth, stretching it before letting go. It popped back to me, making my breast bounce. He then repeated it with the other nipple.
I had stopped rocking on him while he was doing this. The feeling in my breasts and between my legs was so intense. Daddy reached down to my hips and began pulling me forward and pushing me back, over and over. He was grinding that spot on me against him. Doing it to your self was nothing like this. That felt good but this was fantastic. Now I knew what I was missing. I needed something to grab onto when I had an orgasm. Then it hit me and I grabbed onto it. I could feel my thighs tightening against daddy, trying to squeeze him. I knew I was letting out this cry but I could not stop. It just felt too good. Daddy began pounding me. I could feel his cock slam into me, pull back, almost out of me and slam back again. He changed to shorter strokes, not pulling out so far, and was going faster and faster. After about thirty seconds daddy groaned, rammed into me hard and began jerking his hips against me. At first I did not know what he was doing. It was so different from before. Then I realized daddy is cumming in me. When he finished I lay down on him and put my head on his shoulder. He hugged me tight to him.
We lay there, covered with sweat, slowly catching our breath. Daddy was rubbing his hands up and down my back. It felt so nice. I could also feel him slowly getting soft in me and slipping out a bit. “Daddy, did you put your sperm in me”? Breathing hard he just nodded his head. “Daddy, am I pregnant now”?
“I don’t know honey. Sometimes once is enough. Sometimes it takes several times”.
I lay there thinking about that for a few minutes. “Well, just in case once does not do it, I think we should do it one more time”.
Dad gave a little laugh, “Mary, your dad is getting old. I don’t think he’s ready for another. You really tired me out. I may not be getting out of bed for a while”.
“Good, because I don’t want you to get out of bed yet”. Now daddy did not always close his bedroom door so I had learned a few things. A couple of times I saw one of my aunties go in the bedroom right after another had left. I had heard daddy utter these same words about being not ready and I saw what they did to him to change his mind.
I got up off of him and swung around. His cock was lying off to one side, limp. I lifted it up with my hand, straightened it out to point up his body, and let it drop with a plop.
Daddy sighed, “See honey. Your daddy is too pooped to pop”.
“We’ll see about that”. Now I was talking it up pretty good but I had no idea what to do now other than stick it in my mouth. I had watched mom and the others but I was clear over by the door. And I never had to nerve to go and ask mom, “What do you do with daddy’s cock when you have it in your mouth”?
I lifted his cock again, lowered my mouth right over the head and closed my lips around the shaft. I took my tongue and ran it around the head. Not really knowing if that was what I was supposed to do. I just wondered what it felt and tasted like. But as soon as I touched it with my tongue daddy’s hips lifted. I ran my tongue around and he moved again. I could also feel his cock expanding and getting harder. Apparently a warm, wet mouth and a tongue was all that was necessary for a guy.
I took him out of my mouth and kissed my way down his cock. When I got to the bottom of his shaft I could feel his balls. I tried to suck one into my mouth but they kept moving around. I moved my way back to the tip of his cock and put it in my mouth again. I started moving my mouth up and down on his cock like I had seen my mom do. After a few minutes of this daddy spoke up with a hoarse voice, “If you keep that up any longer you are going to waste a lot of sperm”.
I pulled his cock out of my mouth, “No way. I have plans for that sperm”. I moved around so that I was on my side next to him. He stayed where he was, waiting for me to get back on top of him. “Daddy, could you get on top of me this time”?
“Are you sure? I’m a lot bigger than you”.
“Please. I want you on top of me”.
Daddy moved back to the side of the bed. I moved into the middle and lay down on my back. Daddy got up and moved towards me, “Are you sure honey”?
“Daddy, don’t I look ready”? I did not know how I could look any more ready. I’m naked. My legs are spread out in front of him. “Come on daddy”. I put my arms out to him. As he moved around to get between my legs I could see his cock was back to its old glory. Yes, I’m ready. He moved between my legs and then up until his head reached my breasts. He gently kissed one and then the other. I could feel the head of his cock pushing against the inside of my thigh but missing my pussy. He shifted around and it bumped into my mound and slid through my pubic hair. “Here let me”. I reached down, grabbed him and pushed him down to my entrance. He pushed and immediately slid right in several inches. I moved my hand away and he lowered his body on mine. The weight of him on top of me, pushing me into the bed was really nice. I wrapped my arms around him. My legs did not feel right on the bed so I lifted them up in the air. That made my pelvis tilt up towards daddy’s body and he slid deeper in me. Daddy put his hands under my butt and began stroking into me, long, deep, steady strokes. I just lay there, holding him, enjoying the pleasure he was giving me.
While we were sweating away, my mom was in the kitchen with grandma taking care of Ben. Ben had fallen off the climbing bars in the playground and had broken his arm. Ben was one of Terri’s kids. When Terri walked in and saw his crooked arm she started crying. “Now Terri, he’s okay. He fell out of the playground bars. It’s a clean break. He’ll be fine in a few weeks. And he will have this great cast to show off”.
Terri came over wiping a tear away. “Ben, you know you are not supposed to climb those bars”.
I handed him to his mother. “Now if you will excuse me, Dan and I were busy, uh, talking about something”. She did not even notice as I walked away.
When I got to the bedroom door I could hear noises inside, pretty unmistakable noises. I was curious who had cut in line in front of me so I opened the door a bit and peaked in. I could see Dan was pretty occupied with whomever he was lying on top of but I could not see their face, it was on the far side, away from me. The legs sticking up in the air were much too slender to be mom or Susan or Shelly. It had to be Terri. She was the only one of us who had kept her girlish figure. The noises coming from Dan, and the vigorous pounding he was giving Terri, indicated he was cumming any moment. I should beat a quick retreat. My hand was on the door when the proverbial light bulb went off. Terri is in the kitchen with Ben. Who the hell is this?
Before I could move around to get a good look I saw Dan stroke in hard and hold it. Dan gave a loud grunt followed by, “I’m cumming”. Who ever it was moved their hands from his back down to his butt and they were pulling at him, like they were trying to pull him in deeper. When Dan was finished and had relaxed a bit I finally heard a small voice from under him, “Thank you daddy”.
What the hell? I know that voice. I almost shouted, “Mary? What are you doing”?
I quickly walked around to the far side of the bed. I could see her face now. Her body was completely covered by Dan, just her legs still sticking up in the air. She looked so little under him.
Dan was stammering. I could hear “I’s” and “Uh’s” and “We’s” but could not really understand anything. He was trying to get off Mary but she had a pretty good hold on him. Her legs were now wrapped around his waist and her arms were once again around his back.
Mary was very calm, “Mom. You said daddy could help me get pregnant. That is what we were doing”.
“What I said was, talk to your dad. I did not say anything about fucking him. I said he could help you with Jason or the other boys”.
Mary remained calm, “No. What you said was talk to dad. Maybe he knows something that can help you. And as you see, he does know something that can help me. You and my aunties have been fucking him for years. I’m old enough now, why can’t I”?
I was not sure why. I just felt that it was not right so I fell back on the parental standby, “Because I said so, that is why”.
“Mom, that is just stupid, †˜Because I said so’. You always say that when you don’t want us to do something but you do not have a good reason”.
I could see Dan squirming trying to get out of her but her legs had a pretty good grip on him. “Why don’t you let your dad go? We can talk about this later”.
She spread her legs wide allowing Dan to get up on his hands and knees. He then got out of bed and disappeared into the bathroom. Seeing her lying there, naked in bed with her legs spread out like that, I realized she was not my little baby any longer. Once Mary had left the room, I went over to the bathroom door and told Dan I would talk to him later. Then I left and went looking for mom and some advice.
Dan stayed in the shower for a pretty long time. Was what I did really wrong? Megan sure seemed to think so. But I have been having sex with my mother and sisters for years now. How is that different? Well for one thing, you never had sex before with someone you used to change a diaper on. But it sure felt good. Plus there is the excitement of being with someone new.
When I got downstairs I worked my way through the crowd to grab a bite. We have way too many kids. There are only nine adults but over eighty kids. It was hard to get an accurate count without paper and pen. Plus I was having a hard time remembering all the names. Too many times I was hearing things along the line of, “No Daddy, I’m not Timmy. He is over there. I’m Kenny”. There were so many of us we were stretching the resources of our land. We were going to have to address that pretty soon.
For the rest of the day I puttered around doing odd jobs. Now that we had a group of boys between twelve and fourteen I did not need to do all the hard work. They were more than capable. Jason, my oldest, had turned into a pretty good leader. Between him and Paul, the second oldest, they pretty much took care of all the routine tasks. It gave me time to do more planning. Right now my only planning was, what do I do about Mary?
During the day I kept an eye out for Megan and Mary. I thought one of them would show up for that “talk”. But throughout the day neither of them appeared. At dinner the oldest ones sat together. Mary, at fifteen, and a few of her sisters, were now in that group. When Mary made eye contact with me she would give me a little smile. Megan, while it did not seem like she was avoiding me, we did exchange a few †˜pass me this and that’s’, never really made lasting eye contact.
It had been an early dinner so afterwards most of the kids disappeared to the swimming hole. The remaining little ones made a run off to our playroom. It reminded me of a herd of deer running across the field. I went out on the porch and sat in one of the rocking chairs. It was one of those rare quiet moments. You had to grab them when you could. We had so many kids and they all needed and deserved attention. In the beginning I had no idea that things would turn out like this. Hey Dan, would you like to have sex all the time with five willing women? Scratch that, now eight willing women. Well duh. What guy would have followed that logic through to its natural conclusion, over eighty kids. Who am I kidding? I would still have said yes.
So here I am, enjoying a quiet moment rocking on the porch. The door opened and I looked up to see mom coming out to join me. She did not say anything, just sat in the chair next to me and began slowly rocking with me. I think she valued the quiet as much as I did. As always I marveled at what a fine looking woman she was. She was forty-eight now, I think, we did not pay a lot of attention to the calendar any more, and all the kids she had and she was still a fox. But then we had a lot of work here; it would be hard not to keep trim.
After about ten minutes she finally spoke, “I hear you have put a wrinkle in the sleeping arrangements”. I started to protest that I had not started it all but she put up a hand to stop me. “I know. I’ve talked with Megan and Mary. Mary takes the blame, though I think she really means the credit, for everything. And Megan is all right now. It just came as a shock to her at first. And Mary is right. We said she would be ready for sex when she turned fourteen and she is already past that now”.
“I don’t know mom. She just made sense when she was explaining it to me”.
“Yes she does, doesn’t she. Though I don’t think Jason is quite as innocent as she led you to believe. We can talk about that later”. That said mom rocked in quiet for a minute. I could not think of much to say after that so I kept my thoughts to myself.
Finally she turned towards me with a funny look on her face. Usually when I saw that look it was because the joke was on me. I wondered what’s coming.
“I don’t know if you have thought through the ramifications of this”.
I was not sure what she was getting at, “Ramifications of what”?
“Well it certainly is generous of you to help Mary get pregnant. I can see where you could be available for someone who is over fourteen”.
I just nodded my head, oblivious.
“So, have you thought about how many sisters Mary has who are over fourteen”?
“No, why”?
“Well, let see. If I count right she has nine sisters all over fourteen, and lest I forget, there are two more that turn fourteen later this year”.
I still did not see where she was going with this, “So”?
“What do you think Mary is doing right now”?
“She went swimming with the other kids”.
“That is not quite what I meant. What do you think she is talking about with her sisters while she is swimming”?
“I don’t know”. Then it finally hit me. “No, she wouldn’t”.
“Why wouldn’t she? She is a fifteen year-old girl who has just had sex for the first time and really good sex if I heard correctly. Why wouldn’t she be sharing with her sisters? And I think sharing is the right word for me to be using. They see their brothers as these dirty, nasty little bothersome toads that play tricks on them all the time, while you are the only man here. Their daddy, one they look up to”.
“Oh god, they are going to wear it off to a nub”.
Mom gave a small laugh, “Yep, I think they just might do that”. Then she added, “Now the good side to all this is that the rest of us women can either slow down or stop having babies all together, seeing as to how the new team is being sent in”.
I just did not know what to say. I just started rocking faster.
Several minutes had gone by before mom spoke up again, “I have my own confession to make. This is not easy so just be quiet and let me get it all out”.
She hesitated just long enough so that I thought she had changed her mind. She finally just blurted out, “I’m pregnant”.
“Mom, you can’t be”.
“I think I know if I’m pregnant or not. I’m about a month along”.
“But we have not slept together in months now”.
“That’s right, we, haven’t”.
I just looked at her with my mouth open. “Who”?
“About a month ago I had just gotten into bed when someone knocked on my door. It turned out to be Jason. He came in and asked if he could talk about something personal. I said sure and he came over and sat on the bed. It was pretty hot that day so I was under just a sheet and he was not wearing anything.
He said he was embarrassed and was having a hard time getting it out. I told him he could say anything he wanted. He said that Mary wanted to have sex with him but he did not know what to do. He asked if I could tell him some things, answer some questions. He said that Mary had made fun of him when he had fumbled around. He did not want it to happen again. I said I would do what I could. He asked what girls like boys to do, what they want them to do first. I told him girls like to be held, kissed, that before he tries to have sex with them he should touch them all over.
He asked if I meant their breasts. I told him yes, their breasts, but other places also. He asked how he should touch their breasts. Should it be soft, hard, fingers, hand? I just said yes, all of those, at different times. He wanted to know which one at what time. How will I know if I’m doing it right? Before I could answer, he asked if he could touch one of mine and would I tell him if he was doing it right. I did not know what to do. How do you let your grandson touch you? But then I wanted him to be a confident young man also. While I was thinking about what to do he took my silence as a yes. He reached up and pulled the sheet down to my waist. While I was still trying to figure out if I was saying yes or no he put a hand on top of one of my breasts. He asked if this is what he should do. I told him yes and that he should caress it. When he did it was much too hard. I gave a little yell. I then took my hand and showed him how to move it around a woman’s breast. I was about to tell him that he was doing fine, that he could stop, when he reached out with the other hand and began caressing my other breast.
It felt so good. I thought what is the harm? I had not been with you in a while so, it just felt so good, I did not say anything and just let him continue. After a minute or so I told him there were other areas that he should rub, †˜what were they’? I told him that a woman likes to have her stomach rubbed lightly, the inside of her thighs, I almost said more but stopped there.
I closed my eyes as he moved a hand down to my stomach. He moved it around in small circles and eventually I realized his hand was in my pubic hair, moving around feeling the hair. Every now and then his hand would move just a bit lower, closer to my pussy. I knew I was wet by now and would get embarrassed if he touched me and found out but I just could not help myself, I felt my legs move farther apart. I wanted him to touch me. He finally asked if he could look at my vagina, that he had never seen one up close. Again I did not say anything; I just moved my legs farther apart. As he moved down and between my legs I opened my eyes to watch him. He was on his knees between my legs. He touched me, spreading my lips and then ran his fingers around in circles over my lips. I new I should tell him to stop but I couldn’t. He looked up and saw me watching him. He put his hands on either side of me and began moving up. I could see his cock. It was completely erect and I knew what was going to happen. Once his head was up to mine I felt the head of his cock slide up along the inside of my thigh. He bumped around a bit like he was trying to find the entrance. I could not help myself, I moved so it was positioned right against my pussy. He looked down at me and smiled. He closed his eyes and then pushed right into me. He lay down on me and began thrusting at me. It took just a minute for him to finish. I had barely begun.
I could tell he felt bad. He said it’s not supposed to be that quick is it. That he did it all wrong. He asked if he could do it again and then get it right. I could feel his cock still hard in me. Well we’ve gone this far, why not. The second time he lasted a bit longer. Not long enough, but longer. He stayed in bed with me that night. The next morning was better yet. That night he came into my bedroom and without saying a word got in bed with me. He actually was quite good that night, both times”.
I had been listening in silence throughout her entire store. When she stopped for a moment, I finally said, “You are right, Jason is not quite so innocent. That makes me wonder about Mary. So now Jason is going to be a father”.
Mom got a funny look on her face and hemmed and hawed for a moment. “Well I’m not sure if he is the father”.
“What do you mean? You just said you had sex with him”.
“Well, yes, but he might not be the father”.
“For him not to be the father that means you had to”, and my voice began trailing off, “have had sex with someone else”.
“The third night, Jason did not come to bed until after dark. It was like he was a virgin all over again, fumbling around. He came too quickly. The next morning I woke up to him getting on top of me. Then it all became clear. It was Paul. They had tag-teamed me”.
I started laughing out loud. “Mom, you tramp, sleeping with any grandson that comes along”.
She also began laughing, “You are the one to talk. You are sleeping with eight, no, nine women. So far that is”.
“Don’t remind me. Well, what are you going to do”?
“I’ll have the baby of course. I just don’t know whether to let them know one of them is the father. I’m not sure if I can take everyone saying †˜look, little Jason and Paul got grandma pregnant’. I am inclined to tell everyone you are the father”.
“That is okay with me if you want. I might disagree if it was just one of them. But since you don’t know which one, you might be right”.
We stayed there for another hour without talking. Just watching the sun gradually go down, enjoying the quiet. When we finally got up mom said, “I think I will put a lock on it for the boys. I think they have had enough time in the classroom. Good luck to you though”.
“What do you mean by that”?
“Well I only have two boys to deal with. You have ten or more girls that are going to be running you ragged. I had better see what I can work up as an energy drink for you. I think you are going to need it”. With that said she went on inside. I stood by the door for a few minutes longer thinking about this. No, Mary would not get them all riled up. Would She?
Would she ever. It turned out mom was right about what was going on at the swimming hole. When the kids returned I was getting lots of glances from my oldest daughters, and some from the ten to twelve year-olds also. There were so many looks that I decided to go straight to bed, which was probably the big mistake that night. When I got there the room was pretty dark but the light in the bathroom showed me that someone, or from the look of it, some ones, was already in my bed. I was actually relieved. Two people meant Janelle and Mikey. I was back on safe ground. I did not have to think about whether or not it was okay to sleep with my daughters. I guess it was okay. Even mom seemed unconcerned about it.
I walked over into the bathroom and got ready for bed. I kept thinking about Mikey and Janelle and began getting hard. Mikey was the most, for lack of a better word, athletic of the girls. The two of them together and they were always together, could really wear me out. But I could use a distraction.
I turned out the light and went back into the bedroom. I walked over to the bed, lifted the covers and climbed over one of the girls to get in the middle. There was no point in having two girls in your bed without being in the middle is there? I remember mom walked in on me with Janelle and Mikey one time and called me an Oreo. Of course I did not get the joke and she had to explain it to me. I do like being that creamy center.
The girls were lying on their backs but did not do anything. Maybe they just came in to sleep with me. They sometimes did that. But maybe I can stir up some interest. I moved each hand over onto one of their thighs, just above their knees. They might have been dozing because they both jumped just a bit. I slowly moved my hand and inch or so up their thighs and then slid down between their legs. Whoever was on my left sucked in her breath and I could feel her legs tremble a bit. It must be Mikey on my right; she put her hand on mine and pushed it up towards her pussy. Mikey was never one to pussyfoot around, so to speak. I was glad to comply. I moved my hand up until my palm was resting on her mound so I could move my fingers around, caressing her clitoris, in and out of her pussy. Each time I came near her clitoris her hips rose up against my hand.
One the other side I was just getting up to her pussy. Just as the outside of my hand touched the lips of her pussy she clamped down on my hand with her thighs, trapping it there. Her hand had been lying between us, by her side. Now I could feel it slowly move up on to my hip as her thighs opened once again, freeing my hand, then she spread them farther apart that they were before. She rested her hand for a moment on my hipbone and then moved on to my pubic hair. I had finally reached the spot on her where my palm was also resting on her mound. I could feel her soft pubic hair and my fingers began wandering around her pussy. She very slowly moved her fingertips through my hair until she bumped into the base of my cock. He had been standing there like a good little soldier waiting for someone friendly to come by. But when she bumped into him, instead of grabbing him she moved her hand back several inches. That did not seem at all like Janelle. What is going on here? Her hand moved forward again until she again reached my cock. This time she took hold of me around the base of my shaft. That’s more like it.
My fingers had been busy and they were both starting to breathe hard, their hips beginning to rise up off the bed as I stroked them. While the hand on the left of me was exploring up and down my cock I felt the hand on my right begin its way up my hip. When it reached my cock the other hand moved to the base while the new hand moved up to the head. I could feel her fingers moving around the slippery head. At she touched the lubricated head it seemed to startle her. She pulled her hand back quickly and then hesitantly returned to touch the head with one finger and gradually took it in her whole hand. She began sliding her hand up and down on my shaft; down until she met the other hand and then back up, slowly and then a bit faster.
There is something wrong here. Mikey has never hesitated in anything in her life, especially in bed. Could it be my sisters, though they never came in two at a time? And the pubic hair is so sparse and so soft. Could it be Mary and someone else? Who ever it was, I really did not care too much at this point. It just felt too good. But it would be nice to know. Finally I asked, “Just who is in here with me”?
From my left side I heard, “It’s me daddy, it’s Elaine”, and then a voice from the other side, “And me, Debbie”. Even though they spoke up they did not stop moving their hands, they did slow down, but that made it feel even better. But I stopped, thinking, they are only fourteen. Elaine pleaded, “Daddy, please don’t stop. That feels really good”. Debbie added, a bit breathlessly, “Yeh, daddy, don’t stop”.
Already? When mom said they would begin chasing me I figured next week, next month, maybe next year. Plus I thought the fifteen year-olds would go first, then the fourteens next year. Boy was I wrong. It’s the youngest first, and on the same day as Mary.
I started moving my fingers again just a bit. I was confused about what I should be doing. I really enjoyed being with Mary this morning, but I guess I had not completely given myself absolution for having sex with my daughter. But the more I thought about it, these girls are the same age we were, my sisters and I, when we started. Now to tell the complete truth, my reasoning might have been influenced by the two soft hands traveling up and down on my cock, not to mention the two very wet pussies that my fingers were massaging. I lifted my right hand a bit higher on Debbie. My fingers were now up in her pubic hair. I felt her other hand settle on the back of mine, pushing my hand back down to her pussy.
I thought I would give it one last token effort. “Are you sure you girls want to do this? You are still pretty young. Are you sure you want to get pregnant”?
Debbie spoke first, “Daddy, we are the same age as our aunties and mom when they began. And besides, aren’t we doing it right? Doesn’t it feel good for you”?
I was about to say it felt very good when Elaine surprised me, “We don’t care about getting pregnant. We just want to have sex. Everyone says it feels so good and we are old enough now so we want to know what it is like. And besides, we won, so we get to go first”.
That caught my attention, “What do you mean, you won”?
“Daddy, can you stop for just a minute? I cannot think right when you are doing that”.
I moved my finger out of her pussy and then lowered my hand down to the inside of her thigh and gave her a squeeze. “Daddy, that does not help either”. I moved my hand up to her stomach and she continued, “We won the drawing. All of us over fourteen got together and drew straws. Mary did not get a straw because she already had sex with you. Debbie and I got the short straws so we get to go first. Or rather, I get to go first and she gets to go second. It was going to be on different days but since it is our first time, and we were kind of nervous, Mary said you would not mind if we went together. You don’t do you”?
“No, I don’t mind. But you say you just want to have fun, what if you get pregnant”?
It seemed that Elaine was going to do the talking, “That’s okay if we do. I mean, that is what we are supposed to start doing, but that’s not why we are here now. What do we do now? I get to go first, so, do you get on top of me? Will your penis fit in me? It feels awfully big”.
She’s still nervous I thought. “First things first. You are pretty little. I would squish you. Why don’t you get on top of me? Let go of my co, penis, no, not you Debbie”. They had both let go. “You are going to help”. Debbie eagerly grabbed a hold of me again.
While Debbie waited on one side of me, still holding my cock, I guided Elaine around until she was facing me, on her knees, next to my hips. “Would you two like a light on? It’s pretty dark in here”.
Debbie answered first, “Could I turn on the light in the bathroom. I don’t want it to be too bright”.
When I said yes, she let go of me, got off the bed and went over to the bathroom and turned on a light. It was a small light. With the door half closed it was like being outside with a partial moon, just enough so that we could see each other.
I watched Debbie as she walked back to the bed. She was no longer the little girl I had carried on my back on the living room floor. Her hips now had a woman’s curve to them. I looked up to Elaine as Debbie got back in bed and moved up next to me. Elaine’s breasts were like Debbie’s. They both were on the small side but while Debbie had small nipples Elaine’s were larger and were quite hard at the moment. My hands were still on Elaine’s hips. “Debbie, take me in your hand again”. She quickly grabbed me and then giggled. “He moved”.
“I think he was just showing how happy he was to see you”.
When I looked up at Elaine I saw her looking at my cock with a frown on her face. “Don’t worry honey. I won’t hurt you”.
She turned to me and smiled, the frown gone. “I know you won’t Daddy. What do you want me to do now”?
I moved my hands to her hips so I could guide her. “Move one leg over so that you are straddling me, like you are going to sit on me. But keep your legs straight like you are kneeling. Don’t sit on me yet”. She moved one leg over and stopped. I let my hands slide up her sides to support her. My thumbs were in front, right below the swell of her breasts. “Debbie, I want you to point me at her pus, err, her vagina. And keep your hand right at the top of my penis so that only an inch sticks out”. Debbie had moved behind Elaine when she got on me and I could see part of her face between Elaine’s thighs as she followed my directions.
I could feel just the faintest pressure of Elaine against me. I was dying to get inside of her but she was so small I needed to go slowly. “Now Debbie, I want you to move my cock around in small circles around the opening”. As Debbie did as I directed I watched Elaine’s face. Her eyelids got heavy and she closed her eyes. I knew that with Debbie’s hand at the top of my cock, Debbie’s hand would also be rubbing against Elaine’s clitoris. I moved my hands around her chest until they were covering both of her breasts. I slowly ran a finger over each nipple and her eyes flew open. She looked down at my hands and then closed her eyes again, a smile on her face.
I looked down at Debbie, “Debbie, move your hand down a little bit”. As she did, Elaine’s body sagged down on me trying to regain the contact with Debbie’s hand. When she did that I sank an inch inside of her. Elaine sucked in her breath at the sudden invasion in her. “Daddy, you’re inside me!”
I continued caressing her breasts, “Honey, does it hurt”?
“No. It feels so good. I want all of it in me”.
“Debbie, you can move your hand away. Come up here next to me”. As Debbie moved up alongside of me I looked down between Elaine’s legs. I could see my cock, all but the last inch, sticking straight up, disappearing into Elaine. “Now when you are ready you can start to lower yourself. Go at your own pace. If it starts to hurt you can stop”.
Elaine, her eyes closed began pushing down. She had to be very wet as I just sank into her. With my hands supporting her weight, she lowered herself on me, rose up, lowered, rose, sending that same couple of inches into her over and over again. It felt so tight and so smooth at the same time. I finally forgot my own instructions, dropped my hands to her hips and pulled them down towards mine. As I did this I lifted my hips up towards hers, plunging the final couple of inches into her. She gasped. Our bodies were now flush against each other with me trying to get in deeper. “Daddy, you are so deep in me”.
With my hands still on her hips, I began rocking her back and forth on me. She picked up the motion, and as I pulled my hands away she continued rocking on me. After a few minutes she began letting out a low cry. Through clenched teeth she managed, “Daddy, what’s happening to me?”
“It’s okay honey. You are having an orgasm. That happens during sex. Just let your body go with it”.
I could feel her pussy tightening around me. During this whole time I had been focused on her, trying to make it a great experience for her. But with her pussy clenching me, my own needs jumped up to be met. I waited just a moment longer so that she was at the end of her orgasm and relaxing just a bit, and then I moved my hands around to her butt and pulled her tightly against me and thrust hard into her. I began thrusting faster into her, trying to go as deep as I could on every stroke. It was not long before I felt her tense up again. She dug her fingernails into my shoulders. “Daddy, it’s happening again”. She buried her face in my chest and I heard that low cry escape her throat again. When her pussy began spasming around me again that was all I could take and I began spurting in her. My own grunts joined her cry as I shot all I had into her.
We lay there, her on top of me, catching our breath, our hearts slowly returning to normal. Elaine asked softly, “Is that what cumming is”?
I just nodded my head against her.
“I heard mom and the aunties use the word but I did not know what they meant”.
A quiet voice along side of me interrupted my recovery, “Daddy, it’s my turn now”. I had completely forgotten about Debbie.
“Okay honey. But you need to give Daddy some time to recover”. I pulled Debbie close to me and wrapped my arms around Elaine and Debbie, hugging them both.
Elaine turned her head around towards Debbie. Her eyes were still closed. All we heard from her were these gratified †˜hmmm’ sounds. Debbie asked, “What was it like? Did it hurt? Did you like it”?
At first all Elaine said was †˜hmmmm’. Then, in a soft, kind of dreamy voice she said, “It didn’t hurt. It felt really good. I don’t know how to describe it. It was like this huge thing was plunging into me but it felt so good. It was rubbing against that special spot, you know what I mean, and after a while it got so hot there, like it was on fire. And it felt like I was grabbing daddy. It was like cramps but in a good way. You are going to like it”.
Debbie reached out and shook Elaine’s shoulder, “Okay, get off Daddy. It’s my turn now”.
Elaine gave me a hug with her arms and squeezed my hips with her thighs. The squeeze caused her pussy to tighten and I slipped out a couple of inches. Then, as she lifted her leg to get off me, I slipped the rest of the way out of her and landed with a soft plop on my stomach. As Elaine settled in by my side Debbie reached out and lifted my cock up and then let it drop. “You used him all up. What am I going to get”?
Elaine looked at Debbie, “You remember what Mary said to do if this happened”?
Debbie wrapped her hand around me and moved me this way and that. “Could you help me? I’ve never done it before”. She moved down and sideways, putting her head on my stomach. I could only see the back of her head now.
Elaine started to move down to join Debbie. “Well neither have I”. She moved down until she was sideways on the bed, lying on her stomach across from Debbie. “What do we do now”?
I was just about to offer a suggestion when I saw Debbie’s head move forward and felt a tongue move across the head of my cock for just a moment and then it was gone. “What was it like”?
Debbie did not say anything. I just felt my cock being tilted over towards Elaine. Again I felt a tongue briefly move around the head of my cock, like it was being teased. I decided to just lie back and enjoy whatever they decided to do. I was not going to even see who did what. I lowered my head back to the bed and closed my eyes. I put one hand on Elaine’s butt and the other on Debbie’s hip. Every few seconds I could feel my cock being pushed one way and then the other as tongues began to swirl around me. Then suddenly someone lowered their head and took my entire limp cock in their mouth. It was so hot in there. As someone began sucking on it and running their tongue around me I could feel myself getting harder. Who ever it was tried to say something but I could not understand what it was. I almost laughed and said, “You are not supposed to talk with your mouth full”. Someone, Debbie I think, gave my stomach a playful slap but did not say anything.
I noticed Debbie’s butt was a bit closer to me now. I moved my hand from her hip found I could easily reach her pussy. I slowly began moving my fingers around, sliding a finger into her. I found I could easily get two fingers in her. I began moving them back and forth in her. After a while I pulled them out and then began rubbing against her clitoris.
As I got harder she had to pull me farther out of her mouth until finally just the head of my cock was in that hot mouth. When I heard Elaine say “Let me do that” I finally knew that it was Debbie that was giving me the erection. It only seemed appropriate since she is the one who was going to be using it. Debbie let go of me and Elaine pulled me over to her mouth. She worked me over with her tongue and then began kissing me down my shaft all the way to my balls. Debbie lowered her head on my stomach. I could feel her pushing back against my hand. Every so often she would tighten her thighs on my hand and then open them again.
I finally reached down and touched Elaine’s head. “You had better stop that. I’m loaded and ready to go off any second”.
Elaine moved her head back so she could talk, “That’s okay with me. I’d like to see what it looks like”.
Debbie’s head popped up off my stomach, “No. I want him in me”. She reached out, nudging Elaine back. My cock was tingling and I wanted in her too. Debbie got on her hands and knees and quickly moved above me. Her breasts were very small but the nipples were really hard now. As she lowered her chest to mine I could feel them against me. She lowered her hips to mine and began moving them around, trying to line up her pussy with my cock. When she got to just the right position she hesitated, holding her body with my cock pushed right against the lips of her pussy. I had my arms around her but now I moved them down to her butt and squeezed each cheek. As I pulled her to me the head slipped just inside of her. She let out a gasp and I let up the pressure with my hands and I slipped back out of her.
Debbie’s hips pushed down against me, “No, please put him back in”.
I moved my hands from her butt to the top of her hips and pushed down firmly, causing me to enter her again; this time by several inches. I held it there for several seconds, enjoying the sensations of being inside of her then I pulled back a couple of inches so I could stroke into her again but she thought I was pulling out. “No, please stay in me”.
“I’m not pulling out. It feels too good inside of you to do that”. I continued long, slow, steady strokes in her, each stroke sinking a bit deeper until I was finally buried to the hilt in her. I started to thrust faster into her but she turned to me, “No, slower, feels better”.
After a few minutes I put my hands under her shoulders and lifted her up so that she was sitting on me. “Okay, now push down with your hips against me and rock back and forth. You can go at whatever speed you like”. I used my hands on her hips to help her get the motion right. I was ready to cum in her at any time and was having difficulty holding back. It would be great if she could have her own orgasm first, like Elaine.
Debbie started slowly but it did not take long for the signs to show up. Her breathing got harder as her rocking increased in intensity on me. I moved my hands to her breasts. They did not quite fill my hands but they worked perfectly. As I began running my fingers around and over her nipples she began moaning softly. I lowered her to me so that I could suck first one and then the other nipple in my mouth. I ran my tongue around, flicking her nipples and then lifted her back up. She suddenly began grinding her pussy against me. “Daddy, I’m cumming too”.
I could feel her pussy kind of ripple around my cock. That pushed me to the edge and over. I let go of all those stray thoughts I had been concentrating on to keep me from cumming and focused on the hot, wet, clenching pussy that I was sliding in and out of. Holding my body still, I grabbed her butt and shoved her down on me so I was as deep in her as I could get. I then pulled her up a few inches and shoved her down on me again, faster and faster. Each time I hit bottom in her I could hear a little gasp from her. As I pushed her down on me it was like an electric charge was building up in my cock. It took about thirty seconds for it to discharge. One final thrust into her and I was cumming. I could feel stream after stream shooting out of me. I heard a cry and it was a moment before I realized it had come from me. I held her hard against me. I could feel her pussy grabbing me right to the base of my cock. I could feel myself softening but it still felt good to push into her. Finally I stopped and just held her against me as we relaxed.
After about a minute Elaine asked, “Did you like it”? I had completely forgotten she was there.
Debbie now had the sleepy voice that Elaine had earlier, “That was nice. Now I know why the aunties are pregnant all the time”.
I put my arm out. Elaine had been lying against me but now she put her head up on my shoulder and I put my arm around her. It was a pretty comfortable position for me. My arms around two beautiful naked young girls lying on me or against me, and my softening cock still partially buried in one of them. I was beat and was beginning to drift off. Their heads were right up next to each other and I could hear them through the fog, talking to each other, comparing what it was like, how it felt, how I felt inside of them.
“Hey girls, I’m right here”.
They both said “Oh Daddy” at the same time. Debbie added, “Go to sleep. It is going to be morning soon and you need your rest”. I closed my eyes again and knew I was drifting off. Tomorrow I have to be sure to tell Mary no more pairs. I’m too old for this. I’m sure I heard some giggles and I wondered, did I say that aloud or was that just a dream?
When I first stirred in the morning, I was still half asleep, but I could feel a hand moving around my cock. I already had a hard-on. It was that kind where it was so hard it kind of itched, you just ached to stick it in someone. Because of that I did not really pay attention to who was in bed with me. I was not awake enough to remember Elaine and Debbie being in my bed the night before. Somewhere in the recesses of my mind I must have thought I was with one of my sisters. Though if any thinking was taking place at all, it probably was being done with the other head.
She was lying on her back next to me so I quickly turned over and moved between her legs. Her legs did not spread and lift apart like I expected so I used my knees to move them apart and then pushed them up into the air. I moved forward just a bit until I was positioned right at her entrance. Any movement at all would push me into her. Still holding my body above her on my hands and knees, I lowered my head and found her mouth and kissed her gently on the lips. At first she did not respond. I continued little kisses, moving from her mouth to around her ear, and then on her eyes, before returning to her mouth. She put her arms around my head and began returning the kisses. I took my tongue and ran it over her lips and then into her open mouth and found her tongue. For the first few seconds her tongue did not move, and then it began returning the fencing I was doing with her. In a few more seconds she began exploring my mouth with her tongue on her own.
I was now in a spell of lust. I was not quite sure who I was with but I had to fuck them. I pushed forward with my hips and sank halfway into her. She sucked in her breath, threw her head back and arched her body up to mine. She felt so hot and tight around me I thrust again so I was completely buried in her. Just as I was about to lower my weight on her and fuck her with earnest, she cried out, “Oh Daddy”!
In that split second the entire previous night came back to me, Elaine and Debbie. I’m with Debbie. Where is Elaine? Who cares? I pulled back, almost until I came out of her and then pushed back into her. She was so small that I kept most of my weight on my knees and arms, but I did lower myself so that I was pushing her down into the bed. She was new to this and I did not want to scare her so I restrained myself from just pounding into her like I had intended. I began long, slow strokes into her.
And I was rewarded when she said, “Oh yes Daddy. That feels so good slow like that”.
So for what seemed like the next hour, I continued going slow, every now and then speeding up when I needed to, and then returning to the slow, long strokes that she liked. Each time I bottomed out in her I could feel her head bounce up in the bed. Finally I could not last any longer. I changed to short strokes, barely pulling out an inch before plunging back into her. When I began exploding in her like a roman candle I held myself tight against her with a sharp push against her as each stream left me to fill her.
When I was finally finished I could feel her hands caressing my back and the back of my head. I put my hands under her back and then rolled over, pulling her with me so that she ended up on top of me, careful to keep myself inside of her.
I finally noticed that we were alone. “Where’s Elaine”?
She gave a little laugh, “Wasn’t I enough for you”?
“You are more than enough for me. I just wondered what happened to her”.
“She had milking chores this morning. She said not to tire you out too much, that she would be back later”.
“Well I don’t think you followed directions very well. You tired me out pretty well”.
Debbie gave another little laugh, “Well that is her problem, or maybe yours. I got mine. I hate to say it but I had better get up too. I am supposed to help the aunties and grandma with breakfast this week”.
She started to move to get off of me. I took my last opportunity to grab her butt and push myself deep in her one last time. I was just hard enough so that I could appreciate it.
“Daddy, if you do that again I will just have to stay here in bed with you”.
“No, you better get up before your grandma comes looking for you”.
She got off of me and started to move to the side of the bed. I admired her trim ass and took a little slap at it. She giggled and then scooted off to the bathroom. The light came on and she partially shut the door.
Then I remembered something else from the night before, straws. “What happens now”?
She stuck her head out, “What do you mean”?
I turned to her, “The straws. Is someone else going to show up in my bed tonight”?
She smiled, “No. We get you for the whole week. Then they will have a new drawing with the remaining girls and someone else gets you next week, and so on, until everyone has had a turn”.
“You and Elaine will be here for the whole week”, I must have looked a bit startled to her.
“Don’t worry Daddy. We’ll take good care of you”. When she came out of the bathroom I saw she had put some shorts and a t-shirt on. It was getting pretty cool now. I wondered when they had brought their clothes to my bedroom. It must have been yesterday before I went to bed. She came over and kissed me. It was certainly a different kiss than I had ever received from her before. Not a child’s kiss on the cheek this, but a lingering kiss with promises involved, on the lips. And with a sway of the hips she was gone.
As it turned out I was saved that morning from having to repeat the performance with Elaine. When she returned to the house after milking the cows she was nabbed by her grandmother and enlisted into helping prepare breakfast. Meals were a real project now with so many people in our family. And I needed the rest. Elaine and Debbie were like Mikey and Janelle. They could exhaust you. It was great, but demanding.
Over the next several months all the girls eventually passed through my bedroom. My early fears that my sisters would beat the shit out of me never materialized. In fact they supported it. In part because they were getting older and were more than willing to pass on the major portion of the burden of childbearing to the next generation. It also got the girls off their backs asking about sex.
The time was almost eased by finding out two of the girls were more interested in sleeping with each other than with me. It ended up not being eased because several other girls passed their fourteenth birthday during this period. It was like there was a never ending line stretching out in front of me.
The two girls had been fighting against their feelings and did not really face them until the first of them was in bed with me. We had sex and afterwards she began crying and it all came out. I had her sister come in and we all talked about it. They both wanted to have a child, but did not really want to be tied to a man. They spent the week with me, just long enough for them both to get pregnant, and then they happily went back to their bedroom. It was an interesting week, the three of us in bed but the two of them spending more time with each other than with me. They were with me just long enough for the daily injection and then they spent the rest of the time with each other. I got quite a few ideas being the bystander though.
Another development during this time was the boys began maturing. They started chasing the girls, not to punch them or tease them, but with all the erections running around they finally had the right idea.
It was a welcome change for me. As much as I liked sex with all the girls, every morning and every night with so many could wear you down. The boys coming of age was going to spread things out and keep the sex special, not let it become just routine.
Over the next few years we had a second explosion of children that made the first one, fifteen years ago, pale in comparison. Our family was increasing by about fifteen children a year. All the younger girls were involved but some of my sisters were still having the occasional child also.
I was sitting with my seven sisters, I included Sharon, Janelle and Mikey as sisters, and mom talking about this, deciding what we should do to accommodate the numbers, when seven year-old Cindy ran into the kitchen shouting, “There is something wrong with Karen”.
It took a while to tell everyone what the town had been like. We tried but it was impossible to relate just how it felt being there. There were so many houses and buildings with no people around. It felt as if there were ghosts just sitting around watching you, not interfering.
After about a month everything pretty much returned to normal. Fall had arrived and we even had our first snow of the season. It was an early storm and the snow did not last but the kids had fun playing in it. The new clothes came in handy. Another month went by and the big news was that Sharon, Janelle and Mikey were all pregnant. Mom was right; it felt like they had always been part of our family. It did look a bit peculiar to everyone when all three of them delivered within 36 hours.
Over the next ten years we made many trips back to the city, sometimes several in the same year. Sharon was able to find supplies that repaired our solar panels and even added some new ones. We found all the materials that we needed to add wind-power to our grid. We now have lights on anytime we want, plus the kids can watch movies again and listen to music. We also brought back appliances, additional refrigerators and freezers. The girls even had hair dryers.
As the kids got older some of them joined us on the trips. With their help we were able to round up some livestock to bring back. We stopped at several farms along the way and found a couple more wagons.
We have quite a family now. Over the last ten years we had to build several new houses to hold everyone. There are over eighty children now. Even though there were different mothers, because I was the only father the kids all called each other brother and sister. Sometimes it was confusing figuring out whether they were really a brother or sister or just being called that. But I guess in the final analysis it really did not matter.
The sun was just starting to rise when Megan woke.
I turned over to look at Dan. It was hard to believe the thirty-year old man sleeping next to me was the little brother I used to tease so much. He was sleeping on his back so I thought it would be pretty easy to wake him. I reached over and ran my fingers up and down his cock. He certainly is not the “little” brother any more. Last night we went to bed and just fell asleep without any lovemaking. Maybe that is why I feel so horny this morning. When my light stroking did not wake him, at least not the big guy, the little guy was responding, I grabbed him with a firmer grip and began to move him around like a gearshift. It’s time to get into a higher gear Danny-boy.
Dan finally stirred. “What are you doing? It’s too early to get up”.
I waved his cock around to show him just how wrong he was, “I think you are wrong there, you’re already up”.
He reached over, grabbed me, and pulled me over on top of him. Once I was settled in on him, I rose up on my hands and let a nipple brush against his nose and then down into his waiting mouth. His tongue was giving me a real tingling between my legs. My pussy needed something to grab on to. I rocked back just a bit and my pussy found the perfect thing to grab onto. I had planned on teasing him a bit, sliding down on him slowly but it felt so good I pushed back until he was buried deep inside me.
His mouth could not reach my nipple any longer so he put his hands on the front of my shoulders and lifted me up so I sitting upright on him. If he went in me any deeper he would be popping out my mouth. I closed my eyes and began rocking back and forth on him. It was a perfect motion with direct pressure on my clitoris. It usually only took a few minutes for me to cum this way. But something was missing. I stopped rocking and reached down and brought his hands up to my breasts. That’s better. As I returned to my rocking he began rubbing my breasts. He gave both of them a big squeeze, and as I was about to reward him with my own squeeze he let out a yell. “Hey, stop that”.
I opened my eyes and looked around. I was sure he was talking to someone that had come in. When I did not see anyone I looked back at him and then had to laugh. His face was wet and I realized what had happened. I was still breast-feeding. He had given them a good squeeze and they had responded like they are supposed to. With a big smile I told him, “If you don’t want milk, don’t milk me”.
He held me up with one hand while he wiped his face with the other. “You squirted me”. He closed his eyes and put his hands on my hips and began pushing me back and forth on him. His tongue came out and licked a drop off his lip. “You don’t have chocolate in the other one do you”?
“You wish. I haven’t had chocolate since we were kids. You’ll have to try Janelle or Sharon. Maybe they have some”.
He laughed, “I already asked. They both said no. Janelle asked what chocolate milk was”.
I rocked back on him. “Besides, this is pay-back. You have been squirting me for years”. I had to add, “Don’t complain. I get milky white stuff if I squeeze you too much also”. I would have added more but the rocking was getting to me. I was finally ready to reward him with that squeeze when I heard one of the kids crying in the playground we have between the wings of the house. Just ignore it. Someone would come out and take care of him soon. But as the crying continued it was hard to ignore. The kids were my responsibility. Everyone had a major job in the family. The kids were mine. Maybe if I rock faster I can get this orgasm taken care of and then I can run out and see what the problem is.
If anything the crying was getting louder. It sounded like he was really hurt. Just one more minute, please. But it was not going to happen. The crying was too much of a distraction. “Dan, I have to go see what is wrong”.
As I rose to get off of him he lifted his hips trying to keep his cock inside of me. Once I was off of him his cock remained pointed in the air. “Don’t worry about me Megan; this will probably go down in an hour or so. There should not be any lasting medical problem”.
I gave his cock a playful slap and it waved back and forth. “You poor baby, I’ll be back if I can”.
I got up and put a t-shirt on and then went out the door and started down the hall. Just before I reached the end of the hall Mary, my oldest daughter, turned the corner and walked up to me. She was one of the reasons I had put on the t-shirt. It was not fair to be a mother in her thirties with a daughter that looked like her and who walked around naked. She had grown up to be a gorgeous young lady. Of course my breasts used to stick out like that before I had nine kids.
“Mom, I need help. I don’t know what to do”.
I had no idea what she was talking about, “What do you mean”?
“My fifteenth birthday was months ago. Grandma and you said that when I turned fourteen I would be ready for sex. Now I’m fifteen and still no sex. I’m ready but my oldest brother is thirteen and he is not the least bit interested”.
She was right. Jason showed no interest in girls yet. Hopefully all that meant was that he was a late bloomer. “You know girls mature earlier than boys. Have you tried anything with him”?
“Yes, but he just pokes my boobs with a finger, giggles, and then runs off to play with his brothers”.
“Well he is still a bit young. You might have to wait a couple of years for him or one of your other brothers to mature”.
“But it’s not fair. I’m old enough now, past old enough. I should not have to wait for them”.
Just then the child outside began wailing again. “Look, I have to go out and see what is wrong out there. Why don’t you go talk with your father? He is still in the bedroom. Maybe he knows something that can help you. I’ve got to run”. As I walked off I hoped Dan had pulled the covers up. That flagpole might scare a young girl. But then she has walked in on us a few times. It won’t be something she has not seen before.
As mom walked away, I thought what good could dad do? But then again, maybe if he knows what the problem is, there is something he could say to Jason to help. I walked on down and opened his bedroom door. I was surprised to see daddy lying in bed with an obvious erection sticking up in the air. Then I remembered mom just left. They must have been interrupted, poor dad.
As I walked up to the bed I noticed dad’s eyes were closed. I had never seen his whole cock this big before. I had walked in on him a couple of times while he was having sex with mom or one of my aunties but it was always inside of them and I could not see the whole thing. When he walked around it just kind of dangled. Now it looked really big and the end was kind of purple. I could see veins running up the sides. I was getting a tingle between my legs and my nipples were kind of itching just looking at it. I pushed my thighs together to try and satisfy the tingling; it helped but did nothing to satisfy it.
I leaned a bit against the bed to get a closer look. I was about to say something when he spoke first. “Oh good, you are back”. Huh? I looked down and saw his eyes were still closed, he did not know it was me. He thought mom had come back. He put his hand out like he wanted mine so I put my hand in his. He gave me a little tug to get me to climb in bed. I opened my mouth to tell him I’m not mom but hesitated and took another look at his cock. Then I remembered what mom had said, “Your dad can help you get pregnant”. Well, it was not exactly those words but I’m sure that is what she meant.
Dad started to reach out with his other hand to help guide me on top of him. I patted his hands away with mine and crawled across the bed on my knees until I was right next to him. I took one last look at his cock before lifting my leg to move over him so that I could straddle him. That is so big. I wondered how it would fit. My vagina did not seem anywhere near that big. But then, babies come out so that should be able to get in.
I reached down and grabbed his cock and put it right against the entrance. I let go and put my hands on his chest. I took a deep breath and then sat down just a bit so that it spread my lips and just barely went inside of me. It is too big. I could feel it stretching me. But it felt really good. Daddy reached up with his hands and cupped my breasts. He gave them a good squeeze and I felt his hips rise up, pushing his cock a couple more inches in me. I let out a gasp and daddy opened his eyes. He quickly pulled his hands away from my breasts and I fell forward until I got my hands on his chest, “Mary, what do you think you are doing?”
“I’m doing what mom said to do”. Even as I was talking I was slowly letting myself sink lower on daddy.
“What are you talking about? Your mother would certainly not tell you to come in and fu, uh, get in bed with your father”.
“Yes she did”. And I proceeded to tell him what I had told mom. That I’m fifteen now, I’m ready and no one was ready for me so mom had told me that daddy could help me get pregnant. I talked really fast trying to get everything out and the amazing thing was that he did not push me off of him.
“I don’t think your mother said that”.
“Yes she did. You can ask her later”. I put a bit of a pout on my face and went in from a different angle. “You just don’t think I’m pretty enough to have sex with. My breasts are not big like the others”. As I was talking I sat down on daddy a bit more. It did not feel quite as tight now. But the tingle was getting much worse. It was like an itch that you had to scratch. I wanted to move around on daddy to scratch it.
“Honey, that is not it at all. You are very pretty, and your breasts…..” Daddy’s voice trailed off.
“See I’m right. I don’t have nice breasts. You think they are tiny”.
That’s not true. You have very nice breasts. I just don’t think I’m supposed to be doing this with you”.
“Why not? You do it with grandma, mom and all my aunties and they are your sisters”? By this point I was sitting flush on dad. He was buried in me. Every so often I would feel his cock twitch in me. Whenever it happened I would squeeze my thighs against him. “And besides, mom said you could help me get pregnant so that means you are supposed to do it with me too”.
“Honey, I don’t think I’m…Oh please don’t do that”. When he had started talking I had pushed down and forward with my pelvis. If anything it pushed him even deeper in me and at the same time put pressure on that special spot. That tingle had spread from my pussy to my stomach. “I’m sorry daddy. It just feels so good”. I began slowly rocking back and forth on him. I could feel daddy pushing his hips up against me, lifting me in the air. I began moving faster on him.
Daddy had shut his eyes again, “Well, if your mother said I should help”.
“Daddy, would you touch my breasts again”. Daddy reached up and ran his fingers over and around both of my nipples. It was like they were on fire. Daddy let go of my hips and reached up to my shoulders and pulled me down towards him. I thought he wanted me to lie on him but as I got closer he raised his head up and took one of my nipples in his mouth and sucked on it. He moved his head back with my nipple still in his mouth, stretching it before letting go. It popped back to me, making my breast bounce. He then repeated it with the other nipple.
I had stopped rocking on him while he was doing this. The feeling in my breasts and between my legs was so intense. Daddy reached down to my hips and began pulling me forward and pushing me back, over and over. He was grinding that spot on me against him. Doing it to your self was nothing like this. That felt good but this was fantastic. Now I knew what I was missing. I needed something to grab onto when I had an orgasm. Then it hit me and I grabbed onto it. I could feel my thighs tightening against daddy, trying to squeeze him. I knew I was letting out this cry but I could not stop. It just felt too good. Daddy began pounding me. I could feel his cock slam into me, pull back, almost out of me and slam back again. He changed to shorter strokes, not pulling out so far, and was going faster and faster. After about thirty seconds daddy groaned, rammed into me hard and began jerking his hips against me. At first I did not know what he was doing. It was so different from before. Then I realized daddy is cumming in me. When he finished I lay down on him and put my head on his shoulder. He hugged me tight to him.
We lay there, covered with sweat, slowly catching our breath. Daddy was rubbing his hands up and down my back. It felt so nice. I could also feel him slowly getting soft in me and slipping out a bit. “Daddy, did you put your sperm in me”? Breathing hard he just nodded his head. “Daddy, am I pregnant now”?
“I don’t know honey. Sometimes once is enough. Sometimes it takes several times”.
I lay there thinking about that for a few minutes. “Well, just in case once does not do it, I think we should do it one more time”.
Dad gave a little laugh, “Mary, your dad is getting old. I don’t think he’s ready for another. You really tired me out. I may not be getting out of bed for a while”.
“Good, because I don’t want you to get out of bed yet”. Now daddy did not always close his bedroom door so I had learned a few things. A couple of times I saw one of my aunties go in the bedroom right after another had left. I had heard daddy utter these same words about being not ready and I saw what they did to him to change his mind.
I got up off of him and swung around. His cock was lying off to one side, limp. I lifted it up with my hand, straightened it out to point up his body, and let it drop with a plop.
Daddy sighed, “See honey. Your daddy is too pooped to pop”.
“We’ll see about that”. Now I was talking it up pretty good but I had no idea what to do now other than stick it in my mouth. I had watched mom and the others but I was clear over by the door. And I never had to nerve to go and ask mom, “What do you do with daddy’s cock when you have it in your mouth”?
I lifted his cock again, lowered my mouth right over the head and closed my lips around the shaft. I took my tongue and ran it around the head. Not really knowing if that was what I was supposed to do. I just wondered what it felt and tasted like. But as soon as I touched it with my tongue daddy’s hips lifted. I ran my tongue around and he moved again. I could also feel his cock expanding and getting harder. Apparently a warm, wet mouth and a tongue was all that was necessary for a guy.
I took him out of my mouth and kissed my way down his cock. When I got to the bottom of his shaft I could feel his balls. I tried to suck one into my mouth but they kept moving around. I moved my way back to the tip of his cock and put it in my mouth again. I started moving my mouth up and down on his cock like I had seen my mom do. After a few minutes of this daddy spoke up with a hoarse voice, “If you keep that up any longer you are going to waste a lot of sperm”.
I pulled his cock out of my mouth, “No way. I have plans for that sperm”. I moved around so that I was on my side next to him. He stayed where he was, waiting for me to get back on top of him. “Daddy, could you get on top of me this time”?
“Are you sure? I’m a lot bigger than you”.
“Please. I want you on top of me”.
Daddy moved back to the side of the bed. I moved into the middle and lay down on my back. Daddy got up and moved towards me, “Are you sure honey”?
“Daddy, don’t I look ready”? I did not know how I could look any more ready. I’m naked. My legs are spread out in front of him. “Come on daddy”. I put my arms out to him. As he moved around to get between my legs I could see his cock was back to its old glory. Yes, I’m ready. He moved between my legs and then up until his head reached my breasts. He gently kissed one and then the other. I could feel the head of his cock pushing against the inside of my thigh but missing my pussy. He shifted around and it bumped into my mound and slid through my pubic hair. “Here let me”. I reached down, grabbed him and pushed him down to my entrance. He pushed and immediately slid right in several inches. I moved my hand away and he lowered his body on mine. The weight of him on top of me, pushing me into the bed was really nice. I wrapped my arms around him. My legs did not feel right on the bed so I lifted them up in the air. That made my pelvis tilt up towards daddy’s body and he slid deeper in me. Daddy put his hands under my butt and began stroking into me, long, deep, steady strokes. I just lay there, holding him, enjoying the pleasure he was giving me.
While we were sweating away, my mom was in the kitchen with grandma taking care of Ben. Ben had fallen off the climbing bars in the playground and had broken his arm. Ben was one of Terri’s kids. When Terri walked in and saw his crooked arm she started crying. “Now Terri, he’s okay. He fell out of the playground bars. It’s a clean break. He’ll be fine in a few weeks. And he will have this great cast to show off”.
Terri came over wiping a tear away. “Ben, you know you are not supposed to climb those bars”.
I handed him to his mother. “Now if you will excuse me, Dan and I were busy, uh, talking about something”. She did not even notice as I walked away.
When I got to the bedroom door I could hear noises inside, pretty unmistakable noises. I was curious who had cut in line in front of me so I opened the door a bit and peaked in. I could see Dan was pretty occupied with whomever he was lying on top of but I could not see their face, it was on the far side, away from me. The legs sticking up in the air were much too slender to be mom or Susan or Shelly. It had to be Terri. She was the only one of us who had kept her girlish figure. The noises coming from Dan, and the vigorous pounding he was giving Terri, indicated he was cumming any moment. I should beat a quick retreat. My hand was on the door when the proverbial light bulb went off. Terri is in the kitchen with Ben. Who the hell is this?
Before I could move around to get a good look I saw Dan stroke in hard and hold it. Dan gave a loud grunt followed by, “I’m cumming”. Who ever it was moved their hands from his back down to his butt and they were pulling at him, like they were trying to pull him in deeper. When Dan was finished and had relaxed a bit I finally heard a small voice from under him, “Thank you daddy”.
What the hell? I know that voice. I almost shouted, “Mary? What are you doing”?
I quickly walked around to the far side of the bed. I could see her face now. Her body was completely covered by Dan, just her legs still sticking up in the air. She looked so little under him.
Dan was stammering. I could hear “I’s” and “Uh’s” and “We’s” but could not really understand anything. He was trying to get off Mary but she had a pretty good hold on him. Her legs were now wrapped around his waist and her arms were once again around his back.
Mary was very calm, “Mom. You said daddy could help me get pregnant. That is what we were doing”.
“What I said was, talk to your dad. I did not say anything about fucking him. I said he could help you with Jason or the other boys”.
Mary remained calm, “No. What you said was talk to dad. Maybe he knows something that can help you. And as you see, he does know something that can help me. You and my aunties have been fucking him for years. I’m old enough now, why can’t I”?
I was not sure why. I just felt that it was not right so I fell back on the parental standby, “Because I said so, that is why”.
“Mom, that is just stupid, †˜Because I said so’. You always say that when you don’t want us to do something but you do not have a good reason”.
I could see Dan squirming trying to get out of her but her legs had a pretty good grip on him. “Why don’t you let your dad go? We can talk about this later”.
She spread her legs wide allowing Dan to get up on his hands and knees. He then got out of bed and disappeared into the bathroom. Seeing her lying there, naked in bed with her legs spread out like that, I realized she was not my little baby any longer. Once Mary had left the room, I went over to the bathroom door and told Dan I would talk to him later. Then I left and went looking for mom and some advice.
Dan stayed in the shower for a pretty long time. Was what I did really wrong? Megan sure seemed to think so. But I have been having sex with my mother and sisters for years now. How is that different? Well for one thing, you never had sex before with someone you used to change a diaper on. But it sure felt good. Plus there is the excitement of being with someone new.
When I got downstairs I worked my way through the crowd to grab a bite. We have way too many kids. There are only nine adults but over eighty kids. It was hard to get an accurate count without paper and pen. Plus I was having a hard time remembering all the names. Too many times I was hearing things along the line of, “No Daddy, I’m not Timmy. He is over there. I’m Kenny”. There were so many of us we were stretching the resources of our land. We were going to have to address that pretty soon.
For the rest of the day I puttered around doing odd jobs. Now that we had a group of boys between twelve and fourteen I did not need to do all the hard work. They were more than capable. Jason, my oldest, had turned into a pretty good leader. Between him and Paul, the second oldest, they pretty much took care of all the routine tasks. It gave me time to do more planning. Right now my only planning was, what do I do about Mary?
During the day I kept an eye out for Megan and Mary. I thought one of them would show up for that “talk”. But throughout the day neither of them appeared. At dinner the oldest ones sat together. Mary, at fifteen, and a few of her sisters, were now in that group. When Mary made eye contact with me she would give me a little smile. Megan, while it did not seem like she was avoiding me, we did exchange a few †˜pass me this and that’s’, never really made lasting eye contact.
It had been an early dinner so afterwards most of the kids disappeared to the swimming hole. The remaining little ones made a run off to our playroom. It reminded me of a herd of deer running across the field. I went out on the porch and sat in one of the rocking chairs. It was one of those rare quiet moments. You had to grab them when you could. We had so many kids and they all needed and deserved attention. In the beginning I had no idea that things would turn out like this. Hey Dan, would you like to have sex all the time with five willing women? Scratch that, now eight willing women. Well duh. What guy would have followed that logic through to its natural conclusion, over eighty kids. Who am I kidding? I would still have said yes.
So here I am, enjoying a quiet moment rocking on the porch. The door opened and I looked up to see mom coming out to join me. She did not say anything, just sat in the chair next to me and began slowly rocking with me. I think she valued the quiet as much as I did. As always I marveled at what a fine looking woman she was. She was forty-eight now, I think, we did not pay a lot of attention to the calendar any more, and all the kids she had and she was still a fox. But then we had a lot of work here; it would be hard not to keep trim.
After about ten minutes she finally spoke, “I hear you have put a wrinkle in the sleeping arrangements”. I started to protest that I had not started it all but she put up a hand to stop me. “I know. I’ve talked with Megan and Mary. Mary takes the blame, though I think she really means the credit, for everything. And Megan is all right now. It just came as a shock to her at first. And Mary is right. We said she would be ready for sex when she turned fourteen and she is already past that now”.
“I don’t know mom. She just made sense when she was explaining it to me”.
“Yes she does, doesn’t she. Though I don’t think Jason is quite as innocent as she led you to believe. We can talk about that later”. That said mom rocked in quiet for a minute. I could not think of much to say after that so I kept my thoughts to myself.
Finally she turned towards me with a funny look on her face. Usually when I saw that look it was because the joke was on me. I wondered what’s coming.
“I don’t know if you have thought through the ramifications of this”.
I was not sure what she was getting at, “Ramifications of what”?
“Well it certainly is generous of you to help Mary get pregnant. I can see where you could be available for someone who is over fourteen”.
I just nodded my head, oblivious.
“So, have you thought about how many sisters Mary has who are over fourteen”?
“No, why”?
“Well, let see. If I count right she has nine sisters all over fourteen, and lest I forget, there are two more that turn fourteen later this year”.
I still did not see where she was going with this, “So”?
“What do you think Mary is doing right now”?
“She went swimming with the other kids”.
“That is not quite what I meant. What do you think she is talking about with her sisters while she is swimming”?
“I don’t know”. Then it finally hit me. “No, she wouldn’t”.
“Why wouldn’t she? She is a fifteen year-old girl who has just had sex for the first time and really good sex if I heard correctly. Why wouldn’t she be sharing with her sisters? And I think sharing is the right word for me to be using. They see their brothers as these dirty, nasty little bothersome toads that play tricks on them all the time, while you are the only man here. Their daddy, one they look up to”.
“Oh god, they are going to wear it off to a nub”.
Mom gave a small laugh, “Yep, I think they just might do that”. Then she added, “Now the good side to all this is that the rest of us women can either slow down or stop having babies all together, seeing as to how the new team is being sent in”.
I just did not know what to say. I just started rocking faster.
Several minutes had gone by before mom spoke up again, “I have my own confession to make. This is not easy so just be quiet and let me get it all out”.
She hesitated just long enough so that I thought she had changed her mind. She finally just blurted out, “I’m pregnant”.
“Mom, you can’t be”.
“I think I know if I’m pregnant or not. I’m about a month along”.
“But we have not slept together in months now”.
“That’s right, we, haven’t”.
I just looked at her with my mouth open. “Who”?
“About a month ago I had just gotten into bed when someone knocked on my door. It turned out to be Jason. He came in and asked if he could talk about something personal. I said sure and he came over and sat on the bed. It was pretty hot that day so I was under just a sheet and he was not wearing anything.
He said he was embarrassed and was having a hard time getting it out. I told him he could say anything he wanted. He said that Mary wanted to have sex with him but he did not know what to do. He asked if I could tell him some things, answer some questions. He said that Mary had made fun of him when he had fumbled around. He did not want it to happen again. I said I would do what I could. He asked what girls like boys to do, what they want them to do first. I told him girls like to be held, kissed, that before he tries to have sex with them he should touch them all over.
He asked if I meant their breasts. I told him yes, their breasts, but other places also. He asked how he should touch their breasts. Should it be soft, hard, fingers, hand? I just said yes, all of those, at different times. He wanted to know which one at what time. How will I know if I’m doing it right? Before I could answer, he asked if he could touch one of mine and would I tell him if he was doing it right. I did not know what to do. How do you let your grandson touch you? But then I wanted him to be a confident young man also. While I was thinking about what to do he took my silence as a yes. He reached up and pulled the sheet down to my waist. While I was still trying to figure out if I was saying yes or no he put a hand on top of one of my breasts. He asked if this is what he should do. I told him yes and that he should caress it. When he did it was much too hard. I gave a little yell. I then took my hand and showed him how to move it around a woman’s breast. I was about to tell him that he was doing fine, that he could stop, when he reached out with the other hand and began caressing my other breast.
It felt so good. I thought what is the harm? I had not been with you in a while so, it just felt so good, I did not say anything and just let him continue. After a minute or so I told him there were other areas that he should rub, †˜what were they’? I told him that a woman likes to have her stomach rubbed lightly, the inside of her thighs, I almost said more but stopped there.
I closed my eyes as he moved a hand down to my stomach. He moved it around in small circles and eventually I realized his hand was in my pubic hair, moving around feeling the hair. Every now and then his hand would move just a bit lower, closer to my pussy. I knew I was wet by now and would get embarrassed if he touched me and found out but I just could not help myself, I felt my legs move farther apart. I wanted him to touch me. He finally asked if he could look at my vagina, that he had never seen one up close. Again I did not say anything; I just moved my legs farther apart. As he moved down and between my legs I opened my eyes to watch him. He was on his knees between my legs. He touched me, spreading my lips and then ran his fingers around in circles over my lips. I new I should tell him to stop but I couldn’t. He looked up and saw me watching him. He put his hands on either side of me and began moving up. I could see his cock. It was completely erect and I knew what was going to happen. Once his head was up to mine I felt the head of his cock slide up along the inside of my thigh. He bumped around a bit like he was trying to find the entrance. I could not help myself, I moved so it was positioned right against my pussy. He looked down at me and smiled. He closed his eyes and then pushed right into me. He lay down on me and began thrusting at me. It took just a minute for him to finish. I had barely begun.
I could tell he felt bad. He said it’s not supposed to be that quick is it. That he did it all wrong. He asked if he could do it again and then get it right. I could feel his cock still hard in me. Well we’ve gone this far, why not. The second time he lasted a bit longer. Not long enough, but longer. He stayed in bed with me that night. The next morning was better yet. That night he came into my bedroom and without saying a word got in bed with me. He actually was quite good that night, both times”.
I had been listening in silence throughout her entire store. When she stopped for a moment, I finally said, “You are right, Jason is not quite so innocent. That makes me wonder about Mary. So now Jason is going to be a father”.
Mom got a funny look on her face and hemmed and hawed for a moment. “Well I’m not sure if he is the father”.
“What do you mean? You just said you had sex with him”.
“Well, yes, but he might not be the father”.
“For him not to be the father that means you had to”, and my voice began trailing off, “have had sex with someone else”.
“The third night, Jason did not come to bed until after dark. It was like he was a virgin all over again, fumbling around. He came too quickly. The next morning I woke up to him getting on top of me. Then it all became clear. It was Paul. They had tag-teamed me”.
I started laughing out loud. “Mom, you tramp, sleeping with any grandson that comes along”.
She also began laughing, “You are the one to talk. You are sleeping with eight, no, nine women. So far that is”.
“Don’t remind me. Well, what are you going to do”?
“I’ll have the baby of course. I just don’t know whether to let them know one of them is the father. I’m not sure if I can take everyone saying †˜look, little Jason and Paul got grandma pregnant’. I am inclined to tell everyone you are the father”.
“That is okay with me if you want. I might disagree if it was just one of them. But since you don’t know which one, you might be right”.
We stayed there for another hour without talking. Just watching the sun gradually go down, enjoying the quiet. When we finally got up mom said, “I think I will put a lock on it for the boys. I think they have had enough time in the classroom. Good luck to you though”.
“What do you mean by that”?
“Well I only have two boys to deal with. You have ten or more girls that are going to be running you ragged. I had better see what I can work up as an energy drink for you. I think you are going to need it”. With that said she went on inside. I stood by the door for a few minutes longer thinking about this. No, Mary would not get them all riled up. Would She?
Would she ever. It turned out mom was right about what was going on at the swimming hole. When the kids returned I was getting lots of glances from my oldest daughters, and some from the ten to twelve year-olds also. There were so many looks that I decided to go straight to bed, which was probably the big mistake that night. When I got there the room was pretty dark but the light in the bathroom showed me that someone, or from the look of it, some ones, was already in my bed. I was actually relieved. Two people meant Janelle and Mikey. I was back on safe ground. I did not have to think about whether or not it was okay to sleep with my daughters. I guess it was okay. Even mom seemed unconcerned about it.
I walked over into the bathroom and got ready for bed. I kept thinking about Mikey and Janelle and began getting hard. Mikey was the most, for lack of a better word, athletic of the girls. The two of them together and they were always together, could really wear me out. But I could use a distraction.
I turned out the light and went back into the bedroom. I walked over to the bed, lifted the covers and climbed over one of the girls to get in the middle. There was no point in having two girls in your bed without being in the middle is there? I remember mom walked in on me with Janelle and Mikey one time and called me an Oreo. Of course I did not get the joke and she had to explain it to me. I do like being that creamy center.
The girls were lying on their backs but did not do anything. Maybe they just came in to sleep with me. They sometimes did that. But maybe I can stir up some interest. I moved each hand over onto one of their thighs, just above their knees. They might have been dozing because they both jumped just a bit. I slowly moved my hand and inch or so up their thighs and then slid down between their legs. Whoever was on my left sucked in her breath and I could feel her legs tremble a bit. It must be Mikey on my right; she put her hand on mine and pushed it up towards her pussy. Mikey was never one to pussyfoot around, so to speak. I was glad to comply. I moved my hand up until my palm was resting on her mound so I could move my fingers around, caressing her clitoris, in and out of her pussy. Each time I came near her clitoris her hips rose up against my hand.
One the other side I was just getting up to her pussy. Just as the outside of my hand touched the lips of her pussy she clamped down on my hand with her thighs, trapping it there. Her hand had been lying between us, by her side. Now I could feel it slowly move up on to my hip as her thighs opened once again, freeing my hand, then she spread them farther apart that they were before. She rested her hand for a moment on my hipbone and then moved on to my pubic hair. I had finally reached the spot on her where my palm was also resting on her mound. I could feel her soft pubic hair and my fingers began wandering around her pussy. She very slowly moved her fingertips through my hair until she bumped into the base of my cock. He had been standing there like a good little soldier waiting for someone friendly to come by. But when she bumped into him, instead of grabbing him she moved her hand back several inches. That did not seem at all like Janelle. What is going on here? Her hand moved forward again until she again reached my cock. This time she took hold of me around the base of my shaft. That’s more like it.
My fingers had been busy and they were both starting to breathe hard, their hips beginning to rise up off the bed as I stroked them. While the hand on the left of me was exploring up and down my cock I felt the hand on my right begin its way up my hip. When it reached my cock the other hand moved to the base while the new hand moved up to the head. I could feel her fingers moving around the slippery head. At she touched the lubricated head it seemed to startle her. She pulled her hand back quickly and then hesitantly returned to touch the head with one finger and gradually took it in her whole hand. She began sliding her hand up and down on my shaft; down until she met the other hand and then back up, slowly and then a bit faster.
There is something wrong here. Mikey has never hesitated in anything in her life, especially in bed. Could it be my sisters, though they never came in two at a time? And the pubic hair is so sparse and so soft. Could it be Mary and someone else? Who ever it was, I really did not care too much at this point. It just felt too good. But it would be nice to know. Finally I asked, “Just who is in here with me”?
From my left side I heard, “It’s me daddy, it’s Elaine”, and then a voice from the other side, “And me, Debbie”. Even though they spoke up they did not stop moving their hands, they did slow down, but that made it feel even better. But I stopped, thinking, they are only fourteen. Elaine pleaded, “Daddy, please don’t stop. That feels really good”. Debbie added, a bit breathlessly, “Yeh, daddy, don’t stop”.
Already? When mom said they would begin chasing me I figured next week, next month, maybe next year. Plus I thought the fifteen year-olds would go first, then the fourteens next year. Boy was I wrong. It’s the youngest first, and on the same day as Mary.
I started moving my fingers again just a bit. I was confused about what I should be doing. I really enjoyed being with Mary this morning, but I guess I had not completely given myself absolution for having sex with my daughter. But the more I thought about it, these girls are the same age we were, my sisters and I, when we started. Now to tell the complete truth, my reasoning might have been influenced by the two soft hands traveling up and down on my cock, not to mention the two very wet pussies that my fingers were massaging. I lifted my right hand a bit higher on Debbie. My fingers were now up in her pubic hair. I felt her other hand settle on the back of mine, pushing my hand back down to her pussy.
I thought I would give it one last token effort. “Are you sure you girls want to do this? You are still pretty young. Are you sure you want to get pregnant”?
Debbie spoke first, “Daddy, we are the same age as our aunties and mom when they began. And besides, aren’t we doing it right? Doesn’t it feel good for you”?
I was about to say it felt very good when Elaine surprised me, “We don’t care about getting pregnant. We just want to have sex. Everyone says it feels so good and we are old enough now so we want to know what it is like. And besides, we won, so we get to go first”.
That caught my attention, “What do you mean, you won”?
“Daddy, can you stop for just a minute? I cannot think right when you are doing that”.
I moved my finger out of her pussy and then lowered my hand down to the inside of her thigh and gave her a squeeze. “Daddy, that does not help either”. I moved my hand up to her stomach and she continued, “We won the drawing. All of us over fourteen got together and drew straws. Mary did not get a straw because she already had sex with you. Debbie and I got the short straws so we get to go first. Or rather, I get to go first and she gets to go second. It was going to be on different days but since it is our first time, and we were kind of nervous, Mary said you would not mind if we went together. You don’t do you”?
“No, I don’t mind. But you say you just want to have fun, what if you get pregnant”?
It seemed that Elaine was going to do the talking, “That’s okay if we do. I mean, that is what we are supposed to start doing, but that’s not why we are here now. What do we do now? I get to go first, so, do you get on top of me? Will your penis fit in me? It feels awfully big”.
She’s still nervous I thought. “First things first. You are pretty little. I would squish you. Why don’t you get on top of me? Let go of my co, penis, no, not you Debbie”. They had both let go. “You are going to help”. Debbie eagerly grabbed a hold of me again.
While Debbie waited on one side of me, still holding my cock, I guided Elaine around until she was facing me, on her knees, next to my hips. “Would you two like a light on? It’s pretty dark in here”.
Debbie answered first, “Could I turn on the light in the bathroom. I don’t want it to be too bright”.
When I said yes, she let go of me, got off the bed and went over to the bathroom and turned on a light. It was a small light. With the door half closed it was like being outside with a partial moon, just enough so that we could see each other.
I watched Debbie as she walked back to the bed. She was no longer the little girl I had carried on my back on the living room floor. Her hips now had a woman’s curve to them. I looked up to Elaine as Debbie got back in bed and moved up next to me. Elaine’s breasts were like Debbie’s. They both were on the small side but while Debbie had small nipples Elaine’s were larger and were quite hard at the moment. My hands were still on Elaine’s hips. “Debbie, take me in your hand again”. She quickly grabbed me and then giggled. “He moved”.
“I think he was just showing how happy he was to see you”.
When I looked up at Elaine I saw her looking at my cock with a frown on her face. “Don’t worry honey. I won’t hurt you”.
She turned to me and smiled, the frown gone. “I know you won’t Daddy. What do you want me to do now”?
I moved my hands to her hips so I could guide her. “Move one leg over so that you are straddling me, like you are going to sit on me. But keep your legs straight like you are kneeling. Don’t sit on me yet”. She moved one leg over and stopped. I let my hands slide up her sides to support her. My thumbs were in front, right below the swell of her breasts. “Debbie, I want you to point me at her pus, err, her vagina. And keep your hand right at the top of my penis so that only an inch sticks out”. Debbie had moved behind Elaine when she got on me and I could see part of her face between Elaine’s thighs as she followed my directions.
I could feel just the faintest pressure of Elaine against me. I was dying to get inside of her but she was so small I needed to go slowly. “Now Debbie, I want you to move my cock around in small circles around the opening”. As Debbie did as I directed I watched Elaine’s face. Her eyelids got heavy and she closed her eyes. I knew that with Debbie’s hand at the top of my cock, Debbie’s hand would also be rubbing against Elaine’s clitoris. I moved my hands around her chest until they were covering both of her breasts. I slowly ran a finger over each nipple and her eyes flew open. She looked down at my hands and then closed her eyes again, a smile on her face.
I looked down at Debbie, “Debbie, move your hand down a little bit”. As she did, Elaine’s body sagged down on me trying to regain the contact with Debbie’s hand. When she did that I sank an inch inside of her. Elaine sucked in her breath at the sudden invasion in her. “Daddy, you’re inside me!”
I continued caressing her breasts, “Honey, does it hurt”?
“No. It feels so good. I want all of it in me”.
“Debbie, you can move your hand away. Come up here next to me”. As Debbie moved up alongside of me I looked down between Elaine’s legs. I could see my cock, all but the last inch, sticking straight up, disappearing into Elaine. “Now when you are ready you can start to lower yourself. Go at your own pace. If it starts to hurt you can stop”.
Elaine, her eyes closed began pushing down. She had to be very wet as I just sank into her. With my hands supporting her weight, she lowered herself on me, rose up, lowered, rose, sending that same couple of inches into her over and over again. It felt so tight and so smooth at the same time. I finally forgot my own instructions, dropped my hands to her hips and pulled them down towards mine. As I did this I lifted my hips up towards hers, plunging the final couple of inches into her. She gasped. Our bodies were now flush against each other with me trying to get in deeper. “Daddy, you are so deep in me”.
With my hands still on her hips, I began rocking her back and forth on me. She picked up the motion, and as I pulled my hands away she continued rocking on me. After a few minutes she began letting out a low cry. Through clenched teeth she managed, “Daddy, what’s happening to me?”
“It’s okay honey. You are having an orgasm. That happens during sex. Just let your body go with it”.
I could feel her pussy tightening around me. During this whole time I had been focused on her, trying to make it a great experience for her. But with her pussy clenching me, my own needs jumped up to be met. I waited just a moment longer so that she was at the end of her orgasm and relaxing just a bit, and then I moved my hands around to her butt and pulled her tightly against me and thrust hard into her. I began thrusting faster into her, trying to go as deep as I could on every stroke. It was not long before I felt her tense up again. She dug her fingernails into my shoulders. “Daddy, it’s happening again”. She buried her face in my chest and I heard that low cry escape her throat again. When her pussy began spasming around me again that was all I could take and I began spurting in her. My own grunts joined her cry as I shot all I had into her.
We lay there, her on top of me, catching our breath, our hearts slowly returning to normal. Elaine asked softly, “Is that what cumming is”?
I just nodded my head against her.
“I heard mom and the aunties use the word but I did not know what they meant”.
A quiet voice along side of me interrupted my recovery, “Daddy, it’s my turn now”. I had completely forgotten about Debbie.
“Okay honey. But you need to give Daddy some time to recover”. I pulled Debbie close to me and wrapped my arms around Elaine and Debbie, hugging them both.
Elaine turned her head around towards Debbie. Her eyes were still closed. All we heard from her were these gratified †˜hmmm’ sounds. Debbie asked, “What was it like? Did it hurt? Did you like it”?
At first all Elaine said was †˜hmmmm’. Then, in a soft, kind of dreamy voice she said, “It didn’t hurt. It felt really good. I don’t know how to describe it. It was like this huge thing was plunging into me but it felt so good. It was rubbing against that special spot, you know what I mean, and after a while it got so hot there, like it was on fire. And it felt like I was grabbing daddy. It was like cramps but in a good way. You are going to like it”.
Debbie reached out and shook Elaine’s shoulder, “Okay, get off Daddy. It’s my turn now”.
Elaine gave me a hug with her arms and squeezed my hips with her thighs. The squeeze caused her pussy to tighten and I slipped out a couple of inches. Then, as she lifted her leg to get off me, I slipped the rest of the way out of her and landed with a soft plop on my stomach. As Elaine settled in by my side Debbie reached out and lifted my cock up and then let it drop. “You used him all up. What am I going to get”?
Elaine looked at Debbie, “You remember what Mary said to do if this happened”?
Debbie wrapped her hand around me and moved me this way and that. “Could you help me? I’ve never done it before”. She moved down and sideways, putting her head on my stomach. I could only see the back of her head now.
Elaine started to move down to join Debbie. “Well neither have I”. She moved down until she was sideways on the bed, lying on her stomach across from Debbie. “What do we do now”?
I was just about to offer a suggestion when I saw Debbie’s head move forward and felt a tongue move across the head of my cock for just a moment and then it was gone. “What was it like”?
Debbie did not say anything. I just felt my cock being tilted over towards Elaine. Again I felt a tongue briefly move around the head of my cock, like it was being teased. I decided to just lie back and enjoy whatever they decided to do. I was not going to even see who did what. I lowered my head back to the bed and closed my eyes. I put one hand on Elaine’s butt and the other on Debbie’s hip. Every few seconds I could feel my cock being pushed one way and then the other as tongues began to swirl around me. Then suddenly someone lowered their head and took my entire limp cock in their mouth. It was so hot in there. As someone began sucking on it and running their tongue around me I could feel myself getting harder. Who ever it was tried to say something but I could not understand what it was. I almost laughed and said, “You are not supposed to talk with your mouth full”. Someone, Debbie I think, gave my stomach a playful slap but did not say anything.
I noticed Debbie’s butt was a bit closer to me now. I moved my hand from her hip found I could easily reach her pussy. I slowly began moving my fingers around, sliding a finger into her. I found I could easily get two fingers in her. I began moving them back and forth in her. After a while I pulled them out and then began rubbing against her clitoris.
As I got harder she had to pull me farther out of her mouth until finally just the head of my cock was in that hot mouth. When I heard Elaine say “Let me do that” I finally knew that it was Debbie that was giving me the erection. It only seemed appropriate since she is the one who was going to be using it. Debbie let go of me and Elaine pulled me over to her mouth. She worked me over with her tongue and then began kissing me down my shaft all the way to my balls. Debbie lowered her head on my stomach. I could feel her pushing back against my hand. Every so often she would tighten her thighs on my hand and then open them again.
I finally reached down and touched Elaine’s head. “You had better stop that. I’m loaded and ready to go off any second”.
Elaine moved her head back so she could talk, “That’s okay with me. I’d like to see what it looks like”.
Debbie’s head popped up off my stomach, “No. I want him in me”. She reached out, nudging Elaine back. My cock was tingling and I wanted in her too. Debbie got on her hands and knees and quickly moved above me. Her breasts were very small but the nipples were really hard now. As she lowered her chest to mine I could feel them against me. She lowered her hips to mine and began moving them around, trying to line up her pussy with my cock. When she got to just the right position she hesitated, holding her body with my cock pushed right against the lips of her pussy. I had my arms around her but now I moved them down to her butt and squeezed each cheek. As I pulled her to me the head slipped just inside of her. She let out a gasp and I let up the pressure with my hands and I slipped back out of her.
Debbie’s hips pushed down against me, “No, please put him back in”.
I moved my hands from her butt to the top of her hips and pushed down firmly, causing me to enter her again; this time by several inches. I held it there for several seconds, enjoying the sensations of being inside of her then I pulled back a couple of inches so I could stroke into her again but she thought I was pulling out. “No, please stay in me”.
“I’m not pulling out. It feels too good inside of you to do that”. I continued long, slow, steady strokes in her, each stroke sinking a bit deeper until I was finally buried to the hilt in her. I started to thrust faster into her but she turned to me, “No, slower, feels better”.
After a few minutes I put my hands under her shoulders and lifted her up so that she was sitting on me. “Okay, now push down with your hips against me and rock back and forth. You can go at whatever speed you like”. I used my hands on her hips to help her get the motion right. I was ready to cum in her at any time and was having difficulty holding back. It would be great if she could have her own orgasm first, like Elaine.
Debbie started slowly but it did not take long for the signs to show up. Her breathing got harder as her rocking increased in intensity on me. I moved my hands to her breasts. They did not quite fill my hands but they worked perfectly. As I began running my fingers around and over her nipples she began moaning softly. I lowered her to me so that I could suck first one and then the other nipple in my mouth. I ran my tongue around, flicking her nipples and then lifted her back up. She suddenly began grinding her pussy against me. “Daddy, I’m cumming too”.
I could feel her pussy kind of ripple around my cock. That pushed me to the edge and over. I let go of all those stray thoughts I had been concentrating on to keep me from cumming and focused on the hot, wet, clenching pussy that I was sliding in and out of. Holding my body still, I grabbed her butt and shoved her down on me so I was as deep in her as I could get. I then pulled her up a few inches and shoved her down on me again, faster and faster. Each time I hit bottom in her I could hear a little gasp from her. As I pushed her down on me it was like an electric charge was building up in my cock. It took about thirty seconds for it to discharge. One final thrust into her and I was cumming. I could feel stream after stream shooting out of me. I heard a cry and it was a moment before I realized it had come from me. I held her hard against me. I could feel her pussy grabbing me right to the base of my cock. I could feel myself softening but it still felt good to push into her. Finally I stopped and just held her against me as we relaxed.
After about a minute Elaine asked, “Did you like it”? I had completely forgotten she was there.
Debbie now had the sleepy voice that Elaine had earlier, “That was nice. Now I know why the aunties are pregnant all the time”.
I put my arm out. Elaine had been lying against me but now she put her head up on my shoulder and I put my arm around her. It was a pretty comfortable position for me. My arms around two beautiful naked young girls lying on me or against me, and my softening cock still partially buried in one of them. I was beat and was beginning to drift off. Their heads were right up next to each other and I could hear them through the fog, talking to each other, comparing what it was like, how it felt, how I felt inside of them.
“Hey girls, I’m right here”.
They both said “Oh Daddy” at the same time. Debbie added, “Go to sleep. It is going to be morning soon and you need your rest”. I closed my eyes again and knew I was drifting off. Tomorrow I have to be sure to tell Mary no more pairs. I’m too old for this. I’m sure I heard some giggles and I wondered, did I say that aloud or was that just a dream?
When I first stirred in the morning, I was still half asleep, but I could feel a hand moving around my cock. I already had a hard-on. It was that kind where it was so hard it kind of itched, you just ached to stick it in someone. Because of that I did not really pay attention to who was in bed with me. I was not awake enough to remember Elaine and Debbie being in my bed the night before. Somewhere in the recesses of my mind I must have thought I was with one of my sisters. Though if any thinking was taking place at all, it probably was being done with the other head.
She was lying on her back next to me so I quickly turned over and moved between her legs. Her legs did not spread and lift apart like I expected so I used my knees to move them apart and then pushed them up into the air. I moved forward just a bit until I was positioned right at her entrance. Any movement at all would push me into her. Still holding my body above her on my hands and knees, I lowered my head and found her mouth and kissed her gently on the lips. At first she did not respond. I continued little kisses, moving from her mouth to around her ear, and then on her eyes, before returning to her mouth. She put her arms around my head and began returning the kisses. I took my tongue and ran it over her lips and then into her open mouth and found her tongue. For the first few seconds her tongue did not move, and then it began returning the fencing I was doing with her. In a few more seconds she began exploring my mouth with her tongue on her own.
I was now in a spell of lust. I was not quite sure who I was with but I had to fuck them. I pushed forward with my hips and sank halfway into her. She sucked in her breath, threw her head back and arched her body up to mine. She felt so hot and tight around me I thrust again so I was completely buried in her. Just as I was about to lower my weight on her and fuck her with earnest, she cried out, “Oh Daddy”!
In that split second the entire previous night came back to me, Elaine and Debbie. I’m with Debbie. Where is Elaine? Who cares? I pulled back, almost until I came out of her and then pushed back into her. She was so small that I kept most of my weight on my knees and arms, but I did lower myself so that I was pushing her down into the bed. She was new to this and I did not want to scare her so I restrained myself from just pounding into her like I had intended. I began long, slow strokes into her.
And I was rewarded when she said, “Oh yes Daddy. That feels so good slow like that”.
So for what seemed like the next hour, I continued going slow, every now and then speeding up when I needed to, and then returning to the slow, long strokes that she liked. Each time I bottomed out in her I could feel her head bounce up in the bed. Finally I could not last any longer. I changed to short strokes, barely pulling out an inch before plunging back into her. When I began exploding in her like a roman candle I held myself tight against her with a sharp push against her as each stream left me to fill her.
When I was finally finished I could feel her hands caressing my back and the back of my head. I put my hands under her back and then rolled over, pulling her with me so that she ended up on top of me, careful to keep myself inside of her.
I finally noticed that we were alone. “Where’s Elaine”?
She gave a little laugh, “Wasn’t I enough for you”?
“You are more than enough for me. I just wondered what happened to her”.
“She had milking chores this morning. She said not to tire you out too much, that she would be back later”.
“Well I don’t think you followed directions very well. You tired me out pretty well”.
Debbie gave another little laugh, “Well that is her problem, or maybe yours. I got mine. I hate to say it but I had better get up too. I am supposed to help the aunties and grandma with breakfast this week”.
She started to move to get off of me. I took my last opportunity to grab her butt and push myself deep in her one last time. I was just hard enough so that I could appreciate it.
“Daddy, if you do that again I will just have to stay here in bed with you”.
“No, you better get up before your grandma comes looking for you”.
She got off of me and started to move to the side of the bed. I admired her trim ass and took a little slap at it. She giggled and then scooted off to the bathroom. The light came on and she partially shut the door.
Then I remembered something else from the night before, straws. “What happens now”?
She stuck her head out, “What do you mean”?
I turned to her, “The straws. Is someone else going to show up in my bed tonight”?
She smiled, “No. We get you for the whole week. Then they will have a new drawing with the remaining girls and someone else gets you next week, and so on, until everyone has had a turn”.
“You and Elaine will be here for the whole week”, I must have looked a bit startled to her.
“Don’t worry Daddy. We’ll take good care of you”. When she came out of the bathroom I saw she had put some shorts and a t-shirt on. It was getting pretty cool now. I wondered when they had brought their clothes to my bedroom. It must have been yesterday before I went to bed. She came over and kissed me. It was certainly a different kiss than I had ever received from her before. Not a child’s kiss on the cheek this, but a lingering kiss with promises involved, on the lips. And with a sway of the hips she was gone.
As it turned out I was saved that morning from having to repeat the performance with Elaine. When she returned to the house after milking the cows she was nabbed by her grandmother and enlisted into helping prepare breakfast. Meals were a real project now with so many people in our family. And I needed the rest. Elaine and Debbie were like Mikey and Janelle. They could exhaust you. It was great, but demanding.
Over the next several months all the girls eventually passed through my bedroom. My early fears that my sisters would beat the shit out of me never materialized. In fact they supported it. In part because they were getting older and were more than willing to pass on the major portion of the burden of childbearing to the next generation. It also got the girls off their backs asking about sex.
The time was almost eased by finding out two of the girls were more interested in sleeping with each other than with me. It ended up not being eased because several other girls passed their fourteenth birthday during this period. It was like there was a never ending line stretching out in front of me.
The two girls had been fighting against their feelings and did not really face them until the first of them was in bed with me. We had sex and afterwards she began crying and it all came out. I had her sister come in and we all talked about it. They both wanted to have a child, but did not really want to be tied to a man. They spent the week with me, just long enough for them both to get pregnant, and then they happily went back to their bedroom. It was an interesting week, the three of us in bed but the two of them spending more time with each other than with me. They were with me just long enough for the daily injection and then they spent the rest of the time with each other. I got quite a few ideas being the bystander though.
Another development during this time was the boys began maturing. They started chasing the girls, not to punch them or tease them, but with all the erections running around they finally had the right idea.
It was a welcome change for me. As much as I liked sex with all the girls, every morning and every night with so many could wear you down. The boys coming of age was going to spread things out and keep the sex special, not let it become just routine.
Over the next few years we had a second explosion of children that made the first one, fifteen years ago, pale in comparison. Our family was increasing by about fifteen children a year. All the younger girls were involved but some of my sisters were still having the occasional child also.
I was sitting with my seven sisters, I included Sharon, Janelle and Mikey as sisters, and mom talking about this, deciding what we should do to accommodate the numbers, when seven year-old Cindy ran into the kitchen shouting, “There is something wrong with Karen”.
Chapter 7
Spoiler:
Spring was just about over. Today was the first really warm day and everyone was taking advantage of it. It was a lazy afternoon and the kids were all out playing somewhere. Last summer we had created a ball diamond in one of the small meadows near the house and quite a few of the children were over there. Swimming was a favorite pastime, and on a warm day like today, and at least half of the children could be found there.
Eight of us were sitting on the porch, drinking lemonade. The group included my mom and all my sisters, I thought of Sharon, Janelle and Mikey as sisters, it seemed like they had always been with us at this point. We were trying to decide what to do about our growing numbers. We had stretched our land past its reasonable limits. This was a conversation we had put off many times before. Tough choices were going to come out of it and none of us were really ready to face them yet.
Mom had long supported the idea of our moving some families to other farms and ranches around us. “I don’t see why we cannot just use the farms that are already around us”.
I did not think it would work for us, “Mom, I understand. You don’t want the family to spread out, but we have to. We are right below the snow line. This is marginal farmland. It is hard to grow food here or for feed for our livestock”.
Megan supported mom, “We have been fine so far. Look how much we have grown and we feed everyone”.
I nodded. “You are right. We have grown. But we are going to have huge growth in the next couple of years. We have thirty girls of childbearing age now, not counting you”. Several of the women opened their mouths to protest but I raised my hand to stop them. “I know you all have really slowed down, or stopped, but accidents happen”. Several of the women smiled and pointed a finger at me. “Yes, I know. I’m the cause of the accidents, but I do get some help”. Then I continued, “That thirty is going to grow by several every year. So unless you are going to institute an abstinence program we are going to be up to our armpits in babies soon”.
Mom had been slowly rocking, looking at the floor, now she spoke up, “That is one genie that is not going back in the bottle”. That got everyone laughing.
I had more to my argument but before I could continue one of the children, seven year-old Cindy, came up and tugged on my arm. “Daddy, do you know where Karen is”?
Karen was ten, or was she eleven? It is hard to keep up. “She said she would help me fix my doll”. Cindy held up a doll in one hand and its head and an arm in the other.
Susan, her mother asked, “She might be swimming or playing baseball, have you looked there”?
“Yes mommy. She’s not there”.
“Well, what about the clubhouse”? I asked. We had built a small one-room playhouse for the kids in a meadow about a quarter mile away. There was a bed in there for them to take the occasional nap though I suspected the older kids used it for other purposes. It was far enough from the house that the kids could play away from the adults but close enough for us to check on them. There was a small spring in the middle of the meadow that had the coldest, sweetest water year around.
Cindy nodded her head and ran off to check.
I did not want to lose any headway I had made so I jumped right back in, “Regarding moving to other farms, we are already using some of those farms now. So simply moving there does not add anything for us other than spreading us out; though that does help us with sanitation. But even if we spread a bit farther we are still working with marginal land”. I pointed west, “But just thirty or forty miles west of us is great farmland. I have read about it in our books. It is some of the finest farmland in the world. It is just what we need. We will be able to grow things almost year around”. I looked at each of them in turn, “If we move some of the family there we will not have any of the issues with land that we have here. Then as we grow we will already be on land that will support us”.
As I looked around at my sisters, several of them were nodding their heads in agreement. Even mom seemed to be coming around. She said, “I guess I just do not want any of my babies to move away from me”.
Just as she was about to say something else Cindy came running up to me again, “There is something wrong with Karen”.
Susan, who was sitting next to me pulled Cindy up on her lap and asked, “What is it”?
“I don’t know. She’s crying and bleeding”.
I stood up, “Cindy, do you know what happened to her”?
“No, she would not talk to me”.
I turned to Megan, “Megan, would you get a first-aid kit and follow me over”? I started jogging over. Several of my sisters also followed behind me. I hoped it would not be too serious. Our small cemetery had grown over the years.
When I reached the meadow the clubhouse was about thirty feet in front of me. I did not see anyone around the outside but I could hear some faint crying. She must be inside. What could she have cut herself on? I walked through the door and saw Karen laying on her side, naked, her knees pulled up to her chest, on a bed in the far corner. From here I could see some blood on her face. It looked like it had dripped down from her chin onto her chest.
I went over to her, “Karen honey, are you okay”? I reached out to touch her but she shrank away from me. Then her eyes focused on me and she reached up and put her arms around me neck and cried a bit harder. As I held her I heard Susan and Megan come in. When I turned to look, Sharon also came in and they all walked over and stood behind me.
Karen’s crying gradually died away so I tried again, “What happened? How did you cut yourself”? I could see blood but could not see where it was coming from.
Megan had moved beside us and was looking at Karen. “Dan, she did not cut herself. Look”. Megan turned Karen’s face towards me and I could see she had a badly cut lip.
I could also see the imprint of an open hand on the side of her face. Like someone had slapped her hard. Megan then moved Karen’s legs apart “Look at all the bruising around her vagina. Someone tried to rape her. She is only eleven”.
“Tried”?
“Yes, it does not look like he was successful”.
That is impossible I thought. We have not seen anyone else here in years. Who could have done this? “Karen, who did this to you”?
Karen shook her head and then moved away from me to Megan and let her hold her.
I reached out to her, “Honey, please talk to Daddy. Who did this? What happened”?
“I can’t Daddy. He’ll hurt me again. He said not to say anything or he would get me and do it again”.
“Honey, you need to tell me who did this. Was it a stranger”? That seemed hardly likely though. It was starting to break through to me that it was not a stranger. We had not seen anyone since Sharon and her girls had arrived years ago. When Karen shook her head I asked, “Then it had to be one of your brothers, which one did this”? Even as I asked I was getting a suspicion of whom it had to be, the only brother that could possibly do this. But how could he do this to his sister?
Karen shook her head carefully, it must be really hurting her, and buried her face between Megan’s breasts. The warm weather had caused most of us to discard our clothing. Even though we had ample clothing now, a result of our frequent trips to the nearby town, we had gone nude for so many years that it seemed more natural to us than to go clothed.
Megan lifted Karen’s chin gently, “Karen, you need to tell us. We’ll protect you. We won’t let anyone hurt you”.
But she was still not convinced, “He said if I told he would get me when I’m sleeping”.
I reached out and touched her head, “Karen, you can sleep with mommy or with me. We will not let anything happen to you. Please tell us what happened? Did he find you here”?
Karen’s head turned slightly towards me, she seemed calmer now. “I was going swimming but he said he had something he wanted to show me here”.
Sharon moved up next to us with a wet rag in her hand. I had not even noticed that she had left the room. Megan mouthed a †˜thank you’ and took it and began gently cleaning up Karen’s face and chest. While she was doing this she asked, “Then what happened”?
“When we got here he told me to go and sit on the bed. After I sat down I asked him what he wanted to show me. I thought maybe he was going to give me a kitten. I saw him playing with one earlier this morning. He said to close my eyes and keep them closed. After I closed them I felt something bumping my face and then pushing against my lips. When I opened my eyes Frank was trying to push his penis into my mouth. It was really hard and pointing at me. He had been wearing shorts and he had taken them off”.
At the mention of Frank’s name Megan and I looked up at each other. Frank was the only possibility I could think of in the family and I found it hard to believe that even he could do this. Frank was Sharon’s oldest child. From his early years he was difficult. He could not share anything with his brothers or sisters. He would fight for anything he wanted that was not immediately given to him when he wanted it. And when he fought, he would not hold anything back. He seemed to have no concept of family. If he hurt someone he did not appear to care as long as he got what he wanted. And now at sixteen, he could hurt someone pretty easily.
“He kept telling me to open my mouth but I kept it closed. Every time he told me to open my mouth I shook me head no. Then he slapped me really hard so I opened my mouth and he put it in. I didn’t want to Daddy”.
I could see she was beginning to cry again. “That’s okay honey. You did not do anything wrong. How did you get the cut on your mouth”?
“I didn’t know what to do. He told me to suck it and lick it but it was too big. I tried but I don’t think I did it right, he got really mad at me. He told me to keep it in my mouth and he started rubbing his hand on it. Then it squirted in my mouth. I choked and I accidentally bit him. I didn’t mean to. I tried to tell him I was sorry but he got mad again. That’s when he slapped me on the mouth and I bit myself. Then he pushed me down and got on top of me, and hurt me”.
Once she finally got it all out she turned back to Megan and buried her head again. But it seemed the crying was done for now. Megan had cleaned up her face pretty good though the hand print still showed on the side of her face. The rest of the women moved up closer and gave her reassurance that she was going to be fine. Sharon did not move. She stayed back, watching me.
I stood up and quickly walked out of the playhouse, followed by Sharon, and started back to the main house. In my first reaction to the rage I felt I, wanted to go to the house, get a gun and just put an end to him. As I got closer to the house I had calmed down on the scale from a ten to a nine and now I was just going to go and beat the living crap out of him. I could hear Sharon calling for me to wait for her, trying to catch up to me. When I hesitated in front of the house, deciding whether to look for him first at the baseball game or the swimming hole, Sharon finally caught up to me.
Out of breath from chasing me, she asked, “Please Danny, don’t hurt him”? She must have guessed what I originally had intended because she moved around between me and the house. She had her arms on mine to try and stop me if I continued to the house. “He’s our son”.
“Yes, He’s our, my, son. But Karen is also my daughter. Think of what he did to her? You know something is wrong with Frank. He hurts other kids and does not care. He has no conscience. We cannot allow him to be with us”. Just saying the words finally helped me decide what to do. I would not hurt him, but he could not stay with us. He had stepped over too big a line.
“Okay, Sharon. I won’t hurt him. A beating will not do any good. It will only make me feel better. God knows, I want to feel better. But he is not going to change. If anything it will just give him a reason to hurt someone else. But he cannot stay here any more”.
“What do you mean? Where can he go”?
“I’m not sure yet. I have to think on it. For now I don’t want you to talk to him. I am going to go and find him and have a talk. I want you to stay away from him until tomorrow morning. I want you to sleep with me tonight”.
I could see the anger building in her face, “You tell me to stay away from my son, that you are going to send him away from our home, and at the same time you want to fuck me tonight”?
Oh god, she completely misunderstood. “That is not what I meant. I do not want you talking with Frank tonight. You can talk to him in the morning. I thought if we were together tonight we would have a chance to talk what to do, you and I”.
I said, “I’m going to go and find Frank now. I need to talk to him”. She took a step towards me and I held out my hand to stop her, “I said I would not hurt him”. That seemed to satisfy her.
I left her standing there, watching me, as I went towards the baseball field. When I got close to the field I stood back and scanned the area, looking for Frank. I spotted Jason and Paul, my two oldest sons sitting under a tree watching the game but no Frank. I moved on to them and squatted down beside them. They had grown into to fine young men, both of them twenty years old now. All my sons were fine young men. Well, almost all of them. But Jason and Paul were my oldest, there was a special place in my heart for them.
I waited a minute, trying not to be obvious. “Have either of you seen Frank”?
Without looking from the game, Jason answered, “I think I might have seen him going towards the swimming hole”.
“Thanks”. I was about to get up when I noticed that it was not the game that had Jason’s attention. He was staring at the twins. Mikey’s sixteen year-old twin daughters. If I did not have other things pressing I would stay and stare also. They were gorgeous. They both had long silky black hair like their mother. Where their mother was not five feet tall, she insisted she was, the rest of us doubted it, her daughters had inherited my DNA and were a good six inches taller than their mother. Where their mother had small, but really nice, breasts, the twins were nicely filled out. Not huge, just very nice, the kind where you wanted to wrap your hands around them. They also had a very exotic mixed race look. Somewhere between their Japanese mother and whatever mongrel European heritage I had. It was also the same with Sharon’s children though not quite as dramatic because Sharon was already very light skinned to begin with.
Somewhere along the line it seems the younger girls had started a tradition. I think Mary and Janice started it. As each of my daughters reached fourteen they slept with me first. Sometimes they just stayed for the one night. Sometimes they stayed up to a couple of weeks. It did not always result in a pregnancy, but frequently it did. I did not encourage it, but I certainly did nothing to discourage it. But it has been two years and Pam and Patricia, the twins, had never come to my bedroom. As far as I know they had not visited any of my son’s bedrooms either. Though I could tell they would be welcome by the erections I would sometimes see when the boys were looking at the twins.
When I finally pulled my eyes away from the twins I saw Jason looking at me. He said, “They are quite an eye full aren’t they”? I gave him a nod and stood up. Before I could leave he asked, “If you are looking for Frank, would you like Paul and I to come along”?
“No, that’s okay. I just need to talk to him”. As I left I could feel him watching me. Why would he think he and Paul should come also? What has been going on with Frank and the others? Have there been other things happening that we have not heard about?
As I approached the swimming hole I spotted Frank off to one side of the path on a little rise overlooking the area. He was sitting on a table in a little picnic area we had made.
Without really trying to, I was able to get within just a couple of feet before he was aware I was there. He was looking off to the side away from me and I turned to see what he was looking at. My anger rose again when I saw that there were six of my younger daughters, ages nine to twelve lying naked on a couple of blankets, sunbathing. About twenty feet to the left were around fifteen girls, aged fourteen to eighteen, all naked, very sexy, splashing around in the water. I could not see very many boys with them. Apparently most of them were over playing baseball. As I looked over the group I could see one young couple in the water. The two were facing each other and hugging. Then I noticed that the girl was slightly bouncing up and down. Well there was one young man having more fun than his brothers playing baseball.
Frank’s gaze never wavered from the young girls sunbathing. We did not have many rules here. Nothing like what I read it used to be like before, but one strict rule we did have was that we did not engage in sex before the age of fourteen.
Frank was wearing just his shorts. As I walked up next to him he turned to look at me, “Hi Dad. What brings you out this way”? Then he turned back to look at the girls. He had his hand in his shorts and it was obvious he was stroking himself. When I came up he did not bother to pull his hand out.
“Frank, I hear you had an accident today”.
“Nope, not me. I’m fine”.
“Well that is not what I heard. In fact, I heard you were doing so bad that I think you should go to the bunkhouse now to recuperate”.
“No. I’m fine Dad. No need. I’ll just stay here”.
“Frank that was not a request. I want you to go to the bunkhouse. I want you to stay there. Someone will bring you some dinner when it is time. In the morning we will talk”.
During all this Frank had never taken his eyes off the young girls nor taken his hand out of his shorts. Out of the corner of my eye I could still see his shorts bulging out as his hand moved in and out.
Now Frank turned to look at me, “Does this have something to do with that little girl in the playhouse”? His expression never changed. There was no fear of me in his face.
When I nodded he added, “She’ll get over it” and turned back to the girls sunning themselves.
I wanted to put my fist through his face. I could feel my hands clenching. My continued silence must have said something to him because he looked back at me again. I knew my anger was showing in my face. He looked down at my fists. “Do you think you can take me Dad”? That surprised me. At fifteen he was the same size I was, had the youth on me but not my experience.
Before I could reply I heard the sound of feet on leaves to one side behind me. Frank looked over my shoulder, “Well hello dear brothers, Jason, Paul. Come to help Daddy”? It was said with a smile on his face, but not in his voice.
I wondered, where does this fifteen year old asshole get the attitude? Before, he might have had an advantage because I would not have wanted to hurt him to badly. And in holding back he would have an advantage on me. That advantage was gone now.
Jason did not reply to Frank’s barb, “Hey Dad, we were looking for you”. They continued up until they were standing on each side of me, facing Frank. “We were bored with the game and thought maybe you could use a hand with something”. While he talked to me he never took his eyes off Frank.
Still looking at Frank myself, I said, “Frank. I want you to go to the bunkhouse and stay there. I’ll come and talk with you tomorrow morning”.
Frank just stared at me for a minute without saying anything. Then he turned and took one last long look at the girls. When he turned back to me he said, “So many girls, so much time”. The little smile on his face once again made me regret telling Sharon I would not hurt him.
He took a step towards us and stopped. The three of us parted and he walked between us and started back on the trail that would take him to the bunkhouse. We continued at a distance behind him. I did not want to push the issue and rub in it by walking right behind him. While we were walking back I said thank you to the boys. Yes, I did think I could take him but it might be an ugly fight.
After watching Frank enter the bunkhouse the three of us continued on up to the house and sat on the porch. None of us said anything for a few minutes. Finally Paul spoke, “Grandma came and told us what happened. We just came over for support”. I nodded but did not say anything. “What are you going to do?” he asked.
I had grown to rely on these two sons, they were good leaders, everyone in the family looked up to them and respected them, I thought they should know what I was planning to do. “Frank cannot stay here any longer. He is a danger to us. Something even worse will happen if he stays”. Jason and Paul both nodded their heads in agreement. I continued, “I think the best place for him to go to would be a house on the other side of the valley”. When they did not say anything I asked, “Any other ideas”?
Jason turned to me, “I think you are being too kind. I think we should take care of him right now”.
I shook my head, “I promised his mother I would not hurt him”.
Jason smiled, “Well you did not promise for Paul and me”.
I did not really need to reply so I remained silent and continued slowly rocking, watching the occasional child run around playing in the yard. Paul went in and came out with some lemonade for us. We just sat there making small talk for the next couple of hours until the sun began making its way down. The swimmers, suntanners and ball players gradually began drifting back to the house. The people who had dinner chores went in and began preparing dinner. Jason and Paul volunteered to take some dinner to Frank.
After dinner was over and cleared up, most of us drifted back out to the porch. The porch was large and was a favorite gathering place for the children and adults alike. The children would usually sit on the floor near their parents and either continue playing or engage in idle family chatter. Jason and Paul, and indeed a number of the older boys, now had several children of their own. They were all sitting in rocking chairs around me with little sons and daughters climbing in and out of their laps. Sitting there listening to all the kids laughing, watching them play, took me back twenty-odd years when these older children had been crawling in and out of my lap. I was pretty proud that the oldest of my children were now enjoying the same experiences. Then I remembered Frank and sadness hit me. He would never experience this.
I was brought out of my time trip by two arms suddenly draped around my neck. I looked back and saw Mikey had joined me. I knew Mikey pretty well and reached up quickly to take her hands in mine. My idea was right but my timing was off as I missed one of her hands as it drifted down my stomach, headed for regions below. Just the thought of it though made me begin to stir. I turned my head towards hers, “Mikey, not the right time” and quickly grabbed her wandering hand and brought it up to my chest.
I could hear her giggle, “Never bothered you before”. I rarely wore clothing unless it was cold. But with all the little children climbing on everyone I thought that might not be the right tool for a climbing four-year-old to grab onto. And if I let her continue there was certainly going to be a tool to grab onto.
Just as I was about to say something to Mikey, Pam and Patricia appeared before me, one by each knee. “Hi Mommy, Daddy”. A couple of the girls had put on t-shirts after the ballgame but they had not. I now found two delicious, gorgeous, completely naked teenage girls standing inches away from me. As they talked to their mother I tried to look straight ahead but it was impossible. Their standing while I was seated put their pelvises right at my eye level. The curves of their hips made you ache to reach out and put your hands on them. They had the slender thighs of their mother, though they were many inches taller than her. The gap between their thighs allowed me to see right up to the lips of their pussy, and the sparse pubic hair above it. I have to stop this. I am getting an erection just thinking about them and I need to stop before they notice. They have not made any overtures to me so I have to stop this. Then I made the mistake of looking up. When I did I was looking up to the undersides of their breasts. They were bigger than their mothers, and they had the long nipples of their mother.
Then Pam’s voice got my attention. “Look Patty, I think Mom is bothering Daddy”. When I looked up at her I saw her looking in my lap. I quickly let go of Mikey’s hand and grabbed my glass of lemonade. With the glass in my hand, a pretty poor shield I might add, I pushed my now, a bit more than half erect, cock against my stomach. Mikey looked over my shoulder and whispered, more than loud enough for her daughters to hear, “Why don’t we go inside and see what we can do for that”?
“I can’t honey. I have to spend the evening with Sharon. We have to talk about Frank”. I hoped she could hear the real regret in my voice. She patted my shoulder and said good luck and goodnight to me. Then she and the twins moved down the porch to visit others.
It had gotten fairly dark, so after waiting a few minutes for the old soldier to stop saluting every naked girl that passed by, I got up, said my goodnights and went inside to go to bed. When I got to my bedroom I saw that Sharon was in the bathroom, brushing her hair, preparing for bed. As I pushed the door completely open she looked up, saw me, and quickly jumped up and hugged me. My neck felt wet and I knew she was crying. I did not say anything, just held her and let her cry. After a few minutes she loosened her grip on me, took me by the hand and pulled me over to the bed.
“Sharon, I’m sorry. I don’t know what else to do”.
She moved the sheet and blanket aside and we got into bed. “I know. I’m sorry I reacted that way earlier. It is just that he is my oldest son, our oldest son. I went so many years thinking I would never have children and then Frank was born. He is special to me. But I know something is wrong with him. What are you going to do? You said you would not hurt him”?
I was on my back looking up at the ceiling. When we came to bed we had forgotten to turn out the bathroom light so the room had a very faint glow to it. Sharon moved up on her side against me. I said “I talked about this with Jason and Paul. They did not have any better ideas. What I am thinking is that, tomorrow morning, I am going to take Frank out early, before the rest of the family is up, and take him to the other side of the valley. There are plenty of farms over there that he can go to. There will be plenty of food and water for him”.
She leaned forward and kissed my cheek. “Thank you. I have thought about this also. I understand Frank needs to leave. I am just sick that Karen was hurt. But thank you for not hurting him”. Then she kissed me again. I turned to her and met her next kiss with one of my own on her lips. It was intended just as one of those little †˜good night’ pecks, but when her lips touched mine we held it. With our lips still touching, I kissed her lower lip, sucking it just a bit into my mouth, then her upper lip. She began kissing me back with more heat. I turned over on my side to face her and began kissing her neck and shoulder. Our arms were wrapped around one another pulling us tight against each other.
As I worked down from her shoulder towards her breasts she moved her mouth to my ear and ran a tongue around inside it. I rolled onto my back, pulling her with me so she was lying on top of me. She gave my ear a last lick and then whispered “Make love to me”.
I asked, “Are you sure”? My cock had the same idea several minutes ago. She had to know. He was trapped between our bodies, poking into her stomach.
“Oh Yes, I’m sure”. She moved her lips around my face, kissing my lips, nose, eye lids. Then she moved her body up on her knees, leaning forward, freeing my cock and also moving her breasts up on either side of my face. I turned my head and sucked one nipple and as much of her breast as I could into my mouth. There was plenty left. I spent the next couple of minutes caressing her breasts with my hands and moving my mouth back and forth from one nipple to the other. I pushed her breasts together so that I could then suck both nipples into my mouth at the same time.
For the last minute or so I had been lifting my hips, trying to find her pussy with my cock but she was too far up my body and I could not reach it. Finally she straightened her arms, pulling her breasts away from my face. I could just barely make out her face; she was looking down at me, smiling. “Okay, now I’m ready. I want you to do it nice and slow and easy”. She reached between her legs with one hand, found my aching cock and held it still while she slowly moved back. Yes she is ready. The head slid right into her, the proverbial hot knife into butter. She moved back, drawing me into her until her pussy was pushed against her hand. With her fist wrapped around me she began moving me in a tight circle in her. As I watched her face, her eyes closed and her mouth opened. I would love to think it was the effect of my massive, rock hard cock in her, but since I knew I was not massive, though I was definitely rock hard at the moment, I figured it must be her hand rubbing against her clitoris.
After several minutes of this I just laid back on the bed and let her do with me what she wanted. I was just getting to the point of wondering if I really needed to be here when she pulled her hand out from between us. She put her hands on my chest and then slowly lowered herself on me until I could go no deeper in her. She began slowly rocking back and forth on me. “Dan, you cannot cum in me. I’m fertile right now and I do not want to get pregnant tonight. I don’t want a baby to remind me every time I see them of the day that my son was taken away”.
She took my silence as a yes and began rocking a bit faster, pushing harder against me. I reached up and cupped her breasts with my thumbs covering each nipple. As I began running my thumbs lightly around her nipples she began pushing even harder against me. I thought I heard a sound and looked over at the door. It was hard to tell in this light but it looked like it was open several inches, but I could not see anyone. I could not remember if I had closed it or not when I came in. With Sharon rocking back and forth on me it was hard to think of anything clearly. The only thing I was really concentrating on was to not cum in her. No accidents tonight. But it was all I could do not to let loose in her. She was starting to squeeze me in her. I could feel the muscles in her pussy grabbing me as she got closer to cumming. Her face was tightening up and her body was hunching over me as her movements changed to hard sharp thrusts against me. She let out a long groan and then in a low, throaty voice, said, “Danny, I’m cumming”. Now I could feel her pussy grabbing me, spasming. I was ready to explode in her when I remembered, don’t cum. She gradually lowered herself down on me. I had to be careful not to stroke in her. I felt that any fucking at all would result in my letting loose. I felt so hard, and ready. I wanted to lower my hands to her butt and pull her tight against me as I thrust up hard into her. I moved my hands up to her back and hugged her to me instead.
She moved her lips to my ear again and whispered “Thank you. That was really nice”.
I let out a little laugh, “I don’t think I did much, I just laid there. You did all the work”.
She gave my earlobe a little nip and said, “Well you did provide a very nice cock to work with. And it appears it is still around”. As much as I was trying to not do anything in her my body was not entirely cooperating. I could feel myself pushing very slightly back and forth in her. She began to rise up off me, and as I fell out of her I let out a groan. “Poor Danny. Maybe I can thank you in a more meaningful way”. She moved off of me to one side and lifted my cock back up in the air. I was expecting her to jerk me off so I laid my head back on the bed and waited for her to begin. She shifted her weight forward over me and then I found out just how good my thank you was going to be. I felt her mouth close over the head of my cock. She took her hand away and now my cock felt just the sensations her mouth and tongue was giving me. She began moving her head very slowly up and down, taking me deep into her mouth and then pulling back. As her mouth got back up to the head she would stop and move her tongue around me, slowly, quickly, running it under the rim of the head; driving me wild. I was so close before that it took me just a few minutes to cum. I wanted it to last much longer but I could no longer hold it back. She had just moved her mouth back to the head and was again running her tongue around me when I raised my hips up and began shooting stream after stream of sperm into her mouth. She held it all in her mouth until I was finally finished and then pulled her mouth back off of me. I heard her swallow and then she moved back to my cock and licked it clean. When she was finished she laid my cock down on my stomach and came back up, lying beside me and hugged me.
I put my arm out so she could lay her head on it. She moved closer and put her head on my shoulder, me hugging her against me. We lay there for several minutes before I remembered. “When I came to bed do you remember if I closed the door”?
In a sleepy voice she replied, “Yes, you did”.
“Well it is not closed now”. I took a quick look to be sure. It was closed. “Well I’m wrong. It’s closed now, but a few minutes ago I’m sure it was open”.
“You know sometimes the girls peak in. Lots of the younger girls know they are going to have sex with you when they are old enough and they get curious. They sneak a peak to see what it is like”.
“No way”, I knew sometimes one of the girls would come in to ask something and sometimes I would be having sex with someone but I always assumed it was an accident.
“Yes way”. Then she added, “You go around naked most of the time. They see your cock and wonder what it looks like hard. Sometimes the younger boys get erections around the girls. They know they are going to be with you and wonder what it looks like, feels like”. She leaned closer and kissed me on the cheek. “They could ask me, I could tell them. Now go to sleep. You are getting up early”.
It seemed like I had barely closed my eyes when Sharon was nudging me awake. It was still dark outside. “You should get ready before people start waking. It will be harder on Frank if you take him away with people watching”. She moved around the bed and tossed a shirt and pants my way. “It’s pretty cool this morning. You should wear these”.
I got up, went into the bathroom to relieve myself, and then returned and put on the clothes she had set out.
“I’ve put out a few packs for Frank to take with him; food, clothes, some personal things of his”. She moved around to me and hugged me. “Take care out there. Frank will not be pleased about this. I don’t want anything to happen to him, but even more, I don’t want anything to happen to you. Come back to me safely, to us”. She kissed me lightly. “I’ve sent Jason and Paul out to saddle a couple of horses and to bring Frank up to the porch to wait for you”. With a slap on my butt she added, “Now get a move on”.
When I reached the porch Jason and Paul were sitting there talking to each other. Past them I could see Frank standing by three horses; two saddled, the third a packhorse. As I walked out Jason asked if I wanted him to come with me. I assured him I would be okay and continued on down to Frank.
Frank watched as I approached, “I guess we are going on a trip Dad. Is either of us returning”?
“You are leaving the family. I told your mother you would not be harmed”. I nodded my head to the west, “I am taking you to the other side of the valley. There are a number of ranches where you can make a home there. There is plenty of game there, water, and I’m sure you can grow what else you will need to live”.
Frank gave me a tight smile and mounted one of the saddled horses, “Well give mother my thanks for me”. He took the lead from the saddle horse and tied it to his pommel, turned, and started towards the trail leading away from the house. I mounted my horse and followed a few yards behind.
We continued through out the morning without talking. It was an unpleasant task. I tried to keep up a good pace when we were able to travel off the road on softer ground. I wanted to end this as soon as I could but I knew it would take several days. I figured I would leave him once we crossed the valley and reached the first reasonable ranch or farm. He could then move on until he found something he was happy with.
We had worked our way down the mountain and had finally reached rolling hills when Frank drew up his horse and stopped in front of me. I had drifted back about forty yards so it took me a minute to reach him. He was pulling something out of one of his packs as I reached him. I pulled up hard when I saw it was a revolver. He smiled at me, his hand lying on his thigh, not pointing it at me, but then he did not have to. It never occurred to me to be armed. He was my son.
“Well Dad. Are you still sure you can take me”?
“What do you want Frank”?
“I have been asking myself that since last night”. He looked down, moved the cylinder around, listening to the clicks. “I took it pretty hard; you’re kicking me out for trying to fuck a sister that I would get to fuck pretty soon anyway. But what really burns me was finding you fucking my mother, and then watching her suck your cock just hours before you kick me out”. He stared at me, no longer smiling. “Yes, that really burns me”.
So the door did open. He came in to get a gun. I watched as he pulled the hammer back, the click sounding so loud. “Dad, I don’t think your company is required any longer”. So this was it, no old age for me. He slowly lifted the revolver until it was pointing at my chest. He held it there for what seemed like an hour, though it was probably less than a minute, with neither of us speaking. The hole at the end of the barrel looked so big. A crazy thought went through my mind; I wonder if I'll see the bullet when it comes out.
I knew it would do no good talking to him so I kept quiet. Then he pointed to the road behind us. “I don’t need your watchful attendance. Go home, your home. I can find my way”. I stared back at him, wondering what I could say to make this any better. Is there anyway I can make him understand it is for his good also. "Dad, I meant now".
I pulled the reins to the side and my horse started to circle around. “Don’t make the mistake of looking for me again Dad. This is a one-time-only pass. If I ever see you again it will end differently”.
I continued turning and began moving away from him, back down the trail. I looked back a couple of times and he patiently sat there watching me. I turned a corner and lost view of him. When I reached an overlook I glanced back, he was no longer there, he had moved on.
It took until late afternoon before I reached home. Sharon was sitting on the porch and ran out to me. I could tell from the worry on her face that she thought the worst when I arrived home days earlier than I had planned. I told her what happened and then went to let the others know.
Life quickly returned to normal at home. We progressed into summer and the temperature rose. A level of tension was gone that I had not really noticed before. Even Karen showed happiness that I had worried that I would ever see again. But I was still bothered. Something was nagging at me. It took a several weeks before I was able to put a name to it. I wanted to know where Frank was. I was not comfortable just having him gone. I wanted to know where he was. It would help me knowing what distance separated us.
I was sitting with Jason one late afternoon and I shared my concern with him. “Why don’t we go out to the cliff and see if we can find out”. There was a cliff about fifteen miles from us that allowed you to look out clear across the valley. It was where my father, and then I, used to go out to watch for signs of life. “We can go out and camp out for a week. We’ll take the telescope and watch for his light at night”.
“Are you sure” I asked? “It would be pretty boring just sitting out there for a week”.
He smiled as he said, “Oh, I don’t know. It could be a lot of fun. I'll see if I can think of something we can do while we are out there”.
“Well, when do you want to go”?
“There is no point in waiting. Let’s go tomorrow”. He got up. “I’ll start getting some things ready for us to take. Let’s go right after lunch. That will let us miss the heat of the day”.
After dinner I let my sisters know what Jason and I had planned. Paul came around and asked if we wanted him to go also but Jason said we had everything in hand and that he should stay home to take care of things while we were gone.
That night mom came and spent the night with me. I asked how she was doing with Jason and Paul. She smiled, “I'm having a good time with them. They come and visit me every now and then. I did tell them that this was a private party. I don't want them telling their other brothers. I don't want to end up being a training exercise for them, like some people I know". With that she gave me a little jab in the ribs.
"Hey, I'm an old man. Give me some respect. I think I'm holding my own with these youngsters".
She laughed, "I don't know. I’m pretty sure that twenty goes into forty more times than thirty goes into fifteen”. A few minutes later I attempted to prove that she was wrong but I think she had me. We talked for a while afterwards and then both fell asleep.
The next day passed fairly quickly. After lunch I went out on the porch and found Jason leading two saddled horses and a pack horse up to the house. The surprise was who was sitting in the saddles, the twins, Pam and Patricia. Jason had a big grin on his face as he told me Pam and Patricia asked if they could come also. That seemed a bit unlikely but the girls insisted they wanted to go with us. Even after I explained we could be gone for as long as a week they assured me they wanted to go. They thought a camping trip would be fun, give them a chance to get away from everyone for a while.
Mom and Mikey, the girl’s mother, came out to see us off. As I got up in the saddle behind Pam, mom walked up to me. “Now remember that arithmetic” she said with a smile.
Mikey went over to each of her daughters, who bent down in turn to give her a kiss goodbye. “Now you girls be good and come back safe”.
We all said our goodbyes and began riding away; Pam and I took the lead with Jason and Patricia following with the packhorse. I was having a problem. Where could I put my hands? Pam was riding in front of me and there was not much room in a saddle for two people. I had to admit, the absence of clothes on the two of us did allow for a bit more room in the saddle. But where do I put my hands? She held the reins so I finally decided to just rest my hands on her hips. Both girls had long silky black hair. It hung down to the small of their backs. It felt very sensual against my chest and stomach.
We had gone a couple of miles and I chanced to look back to see where Jason and Patricia were. Jason was having no problem figuring out where to put his hands. I could see there were wrapped around Patricia and he was holding her breasts. She did not seem to mind in the least. A few minutes later Pam and I reached a bend in the trail. As we turned I looked to my left and saw that Patricia had turned in the saddle to face Jason. She had her legs wrapped around his waist and her head resting on his chest. I could see his hands supporting her butt and it looked like he was lifting her up and down. I hoped his legs were gripping the horse tightly. That looked like a mighty uncomfortable way to fall off a horse.
Seeing them was having an effect upon me. Pam was leaning back against me a bit more now and I was trying to avoid her sitting against my erection. She turned to me and said “Daddy, you can put your arms around me. That will hold me steady in the saddle”.
I moved my hands from her hips. She leaned back so our bodies were pressed together and I put my hands around her stomach. One hand was a bit low on her stomach. I could feel a few strands of pubic hair against the side of my little finger. The other hand was just below her breasts. I could feel her ribs under my fingers. We continued like this for a few miles. Every now and then I moved my hands slightly, like I was just adjusting my hands, but it was more like a caress to me. I was so hard now. She had to feel it pushing against her back, how could she not notice. I hoped she just did not know what it was, and at the same time hoped she did.
We went on like this for a few more minutes. Her head was below mine so I could see over her shoulder. I watched as her breasts bounced with the steps of the horse. Her nipples appeared hard. When we reached a part of the trail that stretched out flat before us Pam took the reins in one hand, and with the other hand, took my hand on her ribs and pushed it up to her right breast. She pushed my hand tight against her breast with hers on top of mine. I was right. Her nipple was hard. I started to lift my other hand to her other breast. “No Daddy” she said. She reached down to my hand and pushed it back down so that it was lower than before. My hand now covered her pubic mound with my fingers right against where the saddle met her body. She lifted up slightly off the saddle and I slid my fingers under her and she sat on them. She must have been thinking of this for a while because she was damp. I was able to move one finger up and it slid right into her. As the horse continued walking it made her rock around on my hand. I did not have to do anything. She just kept sliding around on my hand. I moved my other hand back and forth caressing each breast, moving it around her chest and stomach. Her breath started coming faster and became ragged. The constant rocking did not take long before she was moaning. “Daddy, that feels so good”. She pushed hard back against me and then my finger inside of her felt her muscles begin to pulse around me as she climaxed.
After a minute or so she lifted herself up a few inches and I pulled my finger out of her and wrapped my arms around her. “Thank you Daddy. That was really nice”.
“My pleasure honey”. I turned around to see if Jason was in sight. Had they seen what we were doing? But just then they came into sight on the straight stretch. They were once again riding normally, Patricia facing forward.
We continued on for a few more hours, resting the horses a couple of times when we crossed small streams, until we finally reached the cliff and outcrop which was our destination. It was getting late in the day, just beginning to get dark. We had brought sandwiches with us and ate a cold dinner. Afterwards Jason set his sleeping bag up off to one side of our camp. I laid mine out across the camp from him, about 20 yards away.
The girls had not said anything other than small talk since we had arrived. No mention of what either of us had done on the ride out. Because of that I was unsure what their plans were. It was getting cooler as the sun dropped. I knew everyone would be under covers soon. I put some supplies away, tied the horses in a grassy area and returned to find Pam laying her sleeping bag on top of mine. When she saw me approach she said, “I thought this would make it softer for us to sleep on”. I just nodded.
I looked over to see where Jason and Patricia were. They were already in their bed. Even in the dusk I could see Jason on top of Patricia, his legs between hers, his hips thrusting against hers. I turned away and found Pam looking at them also. Then she looked up at me. I lay down beside her, facing her. She looked at me for the longest time and then leaned towards me, kissed me, put her arms around my neck, and then pulled me towards her. I could feel her leg pushing against mine, trying to get underneath me. I lifted my leg up and she spread her legs out letting me lie between them. I was low enough on her that my now erect cock was not pushed against her.
I lifted my upper body off her, kissed her lightly on the lips and then began working my way down her neck. As I reached her breasts I gave each nipple a turn in my mouth, running my tongue around it, then flicking it back and forth. I left her breasts and began kissing my way down her stomach. As I reached her belly button she arched her back, lifting her body up to my lips. Then she took my head in her hands and began pulling me back up to her. I tried to stay where I was, “Honey, I’m not done kissing you”.
With some urgency in her voice she said, “Not this time Daddy. I want you to fuck me. I have been waiting so long. Please don’t make me wait any longer”.
It would have been very unkind of me not to comply. I let her pull my face up towards hers but as I passed her breasts I lowered head and sucked one of her nipples into my mouth again. “Please Daddy, hurry”. I was on my hands and knees and I could feel her hips lift off the ground pushing up against me, trying to find my cock. She just missed it. I settled back on my knees, with my butt on my heels. I reached down and took one of her ankles in each hand and lifted them up in the air to form a “V”. I motioned for her to hold them there and then let go. She kept them up in the air as I looked down at her naked body, her young breasts sticking up in the air, her nipples higher still. I took one hand and let a few fingers trail down from her chest, over her stomach, through her pubic hair until it was resting on her mound and my thumb covered her clitoris. I moved my thumb lightly in a tight circle, making several passes before sliding down to the lips of her pussy. She was so wet my thumb slid right into her. Her pussy was grasping at my finger, like it was trying to pull me in deeper. She said, “No Daddy, not your finger again” as she reached down and grabbed my cock, trying to pull it towards her, “I want your cock inside me this time”.
I leaned forward, catching my weight on my hands, lowering myself so that I was pushing her firmly down on the ground. Her hand was still holding me between us, moving me, trying to pull me inside her. When she finally got it right my head popped right inside of her. She let out a low moan and pulled her hand out. I leaned forward and slid in farther. She felt so tight, but she was so wet that there was no resistance as I continued to push myself deeper in her. I felt her bend her knees and then spread her thighs even farther apart. I pulled back, almost completely out of her, in preparation for a deep stroke back in and she clutched at my back. “No Daddy, don’t stop. It feels really good”.
I showed her I was not stopping by driving back into her, right to the hilt. I then pulled back again, stopped, and drove back into her faster, repeating it over and over again, faster yet, her breathing getting ragged. Each time I rammed back into her she involuntarily let out a little grunt “Unh…..unh……unh”. Her hands traveled down from my back until she was grabbing my butt, pulling me with each stroke into her. I looked at her under me, her eyes closed, her mouth open, her head bouncing up several inches as each stroke slammed back into her. She looked so beautiful. I kissed her lightly on the lips. Without opening her eyes she brought her hands up from my butt and ran them through the hair on my head, then pulling my lips back to hers, giving me a passionate kiss. Her tongue slipped between my lips and we began this little game of tag with each other. At the same time my thrusting became more frantic in her. It felt like my entire groin was on fire. Then her pussy grabbed me tightly, I knew she was not having an orgasm, I wanted to wait for her but it was too late. Her tongue dancing around mine, and that squeeze pushed me over the edge, “Oh honey, I’m cumming”. I pushed deep in her and held it as the streams shot out of me, my hips giving a little jab at her with each new release. Finally I was drained; I started to sag on her but remembered the hard ground under us and stopped in time, putting my weight on my knees and arms.
She continued running her hands slowly through my hair and then wrapped her arms around my back. Every now and then she would tighten her thighs against me. It had the effect of tightening her pussy around my slowly diminishing cock. It felt so good but finally I had softened enough that a final squeeze squeezed me right out of her. “Oh, please put him back”. Her voice had that little girl pleading sound to it.
With regret in mine I answered, “I would love to put him back but I think he has retired for a while, maybe after his nap”.
She gave a little giggle, “Promise”? I nodded my head. “Good, I’ll hold you to that”.
I lifted myself off her and moved to her side, I pushed a bit on her shoulder and she turned her back to me and then settled back against me with my arms wrapped around her. Then I remembered my ungentlemanly behavior, “I don’t think you had your orgasm. I feel very selfish. I’m sorry”.
She hugged me again, “Daddy, don’t be sorry, it’s your birthday. And besides, that felt really good whether I had an orgasm or not”.
I had completely forgotten it was my birthday. I’m thirty-six today. I guess no cake for me. Then I remembered what she said. “How did you know it was my birthday”?
“Jason told us. He was wondering what to give you. Patricia and I talked about it and we had an idea of what you might like”. She paused for a few seconds and added, “Happy Birthday”.
“Thank you. Jason’s idea huh”? I looked over to where Jason and Patricia were and saw them also lying on their sides looking our way. They both saw me look and gave us a wave with big smiles on their faces. Just how long had they been watching I wondered?
It was getting a bit chilly so I pulled the top blanket over us. We lay there without speaking, just enjoying each other’s warmth and touch. She drifted off and I turned over slightly so I could look at the stars. There were so many. I really enjoyed just laying out looking at them. I had read a book when I was just a kid. It told stories about the constellations. I could pick out almost all of them in view because of that book.
After about an hour I slipped out of bed. Everyone was sound asleep. I put some clothes on; it was pretty chilly at this hour, collected the telescope and a pair of binoculars and walked over to the outcrop that provided a view of the valley. You could see completely across it and up and down the valley for a good fifty miles or more. I had brought a cushion to sit on. My butt was too old to be sitting on rock for hours. I found a stop where I could sit on the cushion and lean back slightly against a rock.
Once I had the telescope set up I scanned the far side of the valley with binoculars first. Maybe I’ll get lucky and spot a light. After ten minutes of quick scanning I had not seen anything, now for the hard work. I picked a horizontal line across the valley and started working from south to north. Once I had finished I that line I set it lower and then repeated the motion from north to south. I was making my forth or fifth pass when a sound came from behind me. Someone had stepped on a twig. It was a good think I was not at the edge of the cliff. Since I was looking for Frank, it was Frank that I thought of when I heard the sound. I had quite a start. But it was Pam. She had come over wrapped in a blanket. Without saying a word she moved around in front of me and sat between my legs on the cushion. She wrapped the blanket around her and leaned back against me.
I was curious about something. Without taking my eye from the telescope I asked, “You seem to really like sex. Why did you wait so long? Why didn’t you come around to me or to one of your brothers? I know Jason has been interested in the two of you for quite a while”.
“The boys always saw us as twins. We would hear them talking about us. It was like a game to them. Who would get to fuck the two of us first? We did not want to play their game. We aren’t toys. Their games made us wait a while. Both of us wanted to come to your bedroom. We knew you were not like that. And I guess Jason and Paul aren’t either but there was such a long line of girls jumping around you that I guess we did not want to be part of it yet. So we waited a bit longer. Then a month became several and finally it became two years”. She was quiet for a while. “I’m here now”. I reached down and squeezed her shoulder and then left my hand there. After several minutes of quiet she drifted off and fell asleep against me.
I continued scanning for another hour or so with no results. I decided that was enough for one night, carefully got up trying not to disturb Pam too much, picked her up and carried her back to the camp. When we got there I laid her down on our sleeping bags and got in beside her. She never moved and I was asleep right after putting my head down.
When I woke the sun was just rising behind us. I could see Jason and Patricia in their bags, still asleep. Pam seemed to be asleep also. We were both on our sides with her back up against me. My left arm was once again under her head and my right wrapped around her body. I lifted my hand up and cupped one of her breasts, thinking of the night before. The memories quickly got me hard. Pam turned her head and said, “You are finally awake. I’ve been waiting an hour for you. I almost started without you”.
I kissed her neck and said, “That would not do”. My cock was poking her right at the top of her thighs. She lifted her right leg and I slid through. She hooked her knee over my leg and then reached down, covered my cock with her hand ,and began rubbing the shaft back and forth against her pussy. Once again I could just lay there and enjoy it. I began moving my hands, caressing her stomach up to her breasts, kissing her neck and shoulder. Then I took my right hand and ran it down the outside of her thigh all the way to her foot, massaging it once I got there; rubbing her instep, the bottom of her foot, her toes.
“Oh yes. That might even be better than an orgasm. I’ll let you know in a few minutes”.
When I was finished with her foot I started back up her leg but this time on the inside of her thigh. When I reached the top she moved her hand over mine and pulled it up to her pussy, pushing my cock out of the way. With my hand under hers she began moving my hand around on her clitoris. Once I started she moved her hand away and grabbed the head of my cock in her fist and began sliding her hand up and down on me.
I began pushing harder on her in response to what she was doing to me. “No Daddy, softer and slower, like this”. She let go of my cock and pushed my hand around her clitoris, very softly, just gently brushing her, and much slower than I had been. “Oh yes. That’s perfect. Now I just need one more thing”. She moved her hips forward and tilted her pelvis back towards me. She was trying to push my cock back but my hand was in her way. “Here let me”. I reached out with a couple of fingers, looped them around me and pulled my cock so the head was positioned against her pussy. She pushed back against me at the same time I pushed towards her. The result was that my entire cock was buried up to the hilt in her. It was still a bit chilly outside but it felt like a furnace inside of her.
Now that I was inside of her I continued the slow stroking of her clitoris and timed my strokes to the same pace. We laid there slowly rocking against each other, enjoying the sensations washing over us; me pushing forward and her pushing back to meet me. After several minutes of this she reached down and cupped my balls. She moved her fingers around, like a magician rolling coins from one finger to the next, my balls taking the place of the coins. After several minutes she turned her head a bit and said, “A little faster”. I responded my moving my fingers a little faster on her clitoris. It was just a minute before she asked, “Daddy, fuck me faster too”. I doubled my speed, sliding in and out of her faster now. “Oh yes. That’s perfect”. She began to breathe harder. I could tell she was getting close. “Squeeze my breasts”! I moved both hands to a breast and gently squeezed them. “Harder”! I needed little encouragement. I squeezed them harder, rubbing my fingers over her nipples. “Oh Daddy, I’m cumming”. She reached down to my balls and pushed them up against her pussy, trying to get me deeper in her. As her orgasm took over her body I could feel her pussy rippling around my cock, like she was trying to milk it. That sent an electric current through me. Her ear was near my mouth as I whispered to her, “I’m cumming too”. My hips began bucking against her butt as I came in her. This little sexy girl had me cumming more than I had in several years.
When I was finally drained of all my vital bodily fluids we lay there catching our breath.
I had my eyes closed, my head lying against hers. “Daddy, look”. I opened my eyes. She nodded towards Jason and Patricia. When I looked over I saw they were facing us, lying in the same position we were. The only odd part was watching Patricia with Jason behind her, her eyes closed, mouth open, head bobbing up and down. I wondered if they had seen us earlier and got the idea. Pam turned and whispered, “I wonder if that is what we looked like”.
After several minutes we could hear a bit of squealing, a few grunts and then the movement stopped. We waited a while and then began stirring under our blanket in an effort to get up. I knew this was a bit new to Pam so while she was standing there, folding our blankets I whispered in her ear, “You might want to wear shorts today”.
I could see the question on her face because it was going to be quite warm today. Then she looked down between her legs. I glanced down also and saw the inside of her thighs were both wet. She chuckled, “Oh, I see. Now there is something you would never think about when wondering what sex is going to be like. I’ll let Patricia know also. It is the first time for both of us”.
We spent a good portion of the morning just talking. I went over my plans for having the family separate and move to a better area with Jason. He had some good ideas and changed my mind of some things. The girls listened in and even at their young age also contributed several ideas. During the heat of the day we moved to a shady area and napped through it. Once it cooled off we walked around exploring our ridge. We even found a waterfall that I did not know existed. I knew a creek was nearby but it never occurred to me that it would end at the cliff, just around a bend, in a waterfall.
The girls decided they would make dinner for us. While they were working Jason and I walked back to the edge of the cliff. I wanted a good look during the day. “Well Dad. How was your birthday”? He had a big grin on his face. “I did not mean to use part of your present. I hope you don’t mind”.
I looked back at him and it was hard not to smile also. “It was a pretty good one, much better than last year’s. And I see you did not have to wrap my present”. He laughed again and nodded. “I thought you had a special feeling for these girls. I am a bit surprised you brought them”.
“Dad, I do like them. But I was talking to them back at home and they like you also. They were just a bit intimidated to approach you”. He looked like he wanted to add something but was hesitating. “Dad, they both like you”.
I nodded and we went back to join the girls for dinner. It was not until late that night that I finally understood what he meant when he said “they both like you”. Once it was dark I went back on the cliff edge and began working the telescope around the far side of the valley. I had been there for a couple of hours when Pam joined me again. She had brought a couple of blankets this time. She laid them out on a flat spot and then waited there. I continued looking at the valley and then decided to take a break and went over and sat beside her. One thing led to another and I shortly found myself flat on my back with her seated on me and my cock buried firmly in her pussy. She took her time on me and it was a good half hour before she came, with me following just a couple of minutes later. We were lying there, letting the sweat evaporate when she said, “Daddy, you are just as good as Pam said you were”.
“Patricia? What are you doing here”?
“Daddy, I thought you knew what I was doing”?
“I know, I mean, I know what…never mind. I thought you liked Jason. What are you doing on me”?
“I do like Jason. I like you too. Pam likes you and Jason. At home you fuck different girls. Our brothers fuck different sisters. What’s the problem”?
“You are right. There is no problem. I just was not thinking”. Seeing Patricia with Jason had me thinking they were pairing up with us. I had noticed that about myself the last few years. I would be with one of my daughters or sisters and then see them with someone else later and a bit of jealousy would run through me. I knew it was silly but it took a bit of ignoring. I had been wondering lately if what I wanted was to just settle down with someone. Well let’s not go off the deep end, maybe with just a few someone.
And so we continued over the next eight days. Each night I spent several hours at the cliff looking over the far side of the valley, sometimes alone, sometimes with one or the other of the girls and sometimes with Jason. The days were boring. There was little to do and there is only so much exploring you can do. Every couple of days the girls would switch with us. It must have been a game with them, switching and then seeing how long it took for either of us to guess they had switched. Their voices, faces and bodies were identical so it was a real test for Jason and I.
A week and a half and I was out on the cliff again, scanning the valley. I was discouraged. I wanted to know where Frank was holed up but it looked like he was not using a light where ever that was. I could have slapped myself in the head when it finally occurred to me that he just as easily could be living on the west side of a hill and I would never see his light from this direction. Pam was sitting there with me tonight, patiently leaning against me, waiting for me to finish so we could go to bed. I nudged her and she got up and picked up the blankets. I got up and began taking the telescope apart so I could put it in its case. We would not need it again. We would be starting home in the morning.
“Daddy, what would his light look like”? She was standing there looking out into the dark.
“Well, if we could see it, it should be just a pinprick out there. You might be able to see something with the binoculars but would need the telescope to be sure”. I turned towards her, “Do you want the binoculars to look at something”?
“No. That’s okay. Would it look something like that”?
Eight of us were sitting on the porch, drinking lemonade. The group included my mom and all my sisters, I thought of Sharon, Janelle and Mikey as sisters, it seemed like they had always been with us at this point. We were trying to decide what to do about our growing numbers. We had stretched our land past its reasonable limits. This was a conversation we had put off many times before. Tough choices were going to come out of it and none of us were really ready to face them yet.
Mom had long supported the idea of our moving some families to other farms and ranches around us. “I don’t see why we cannot just use the farms that are already around us”.
I did not think it would work for us, “Mom, I understand. You don’t want the family to spread out, but we have to. We are right below the snow line. This is marginal farmland. It is hard to grow food here or for feed for our livestock”.
Megan supported mom, “We have been fine so far. Look how much we have grown and we feed everyone”.
I nodded. “You are right. We have grown. But we are going to have huge growth in the next couple of years. We have thirty girls of childbearing age now, not counting you”. Several of the women opened their mouths to protest but I raised my hand to stop them. “I know you all have really slowed down, or stopped, but accidents happen”. Several of the women smiled and pointed a finger at me. “Yes, I know. I’m the cause of the accidents, but I do get some help”. Then I continued, “That thirty is going to grow by several every year. So unless you are going to institute an abstinence program we are going to be up to our armpits in babies soon”.
Mom had been slowly rocking, looking at the floor, now she spoke up, “That is one genie that is not going back in the bottle”. That got everyone laughing.
I had more to my argument but before I could continue one of the children, seven year-old Cindy, came up and tugged on my arm. “Daddy, do you know where Karen is”?
Karen was ten, or was she eleven? It is hard to keep up. “She said she would help me fix my doll”. Cindy held up a doll in one hand and its head and an arm in the other.
Susan, her mother asked, “She might be swimming or playing baseball, have you looked there”?
“Yes mommy. She’s not there”.
“Well, what about the clubhouse”? I asked. We had built a small one-room playhouse for the kids in a meadow about a quarter mile away. There was a bed in there for them to take the occasional nap though I suspected the older kids used it for other purposes. It was far enough from the house that the kids could play away from the adults but close enough for us to check on them. There was a small spring in the middle of the meadow that had the coldest, sweetest water year around.
Cindy nodded her head and ran off to check.
I did not want to lose any headway I had made so I jumped right back in, “Regarding moving to other farms, we are already using some of those farms now. So simply moving there does not add anything for us other than spreading us out; though that does help us with sanitation. But even if we spread a bit farther we are still working with marginal land”. I pointed west, “But just thirty or forty miles west of us is great farmland. I have read about it in our books. It is some of the finest farmland in the world. It is just what we need. We will be able to grow things almost year around”. I looked at each of them in turn, “If we move some of the family there we will not have any of the issues with land that we have here. Then as we grow we will already be on land that will support us”.
As I looked around at my sisters, several of them were nodding their heads in agreement. Even mom seemed to be coming around. She said, “I guess I just do not want any of my babies to move away from me”.
Just as she was about to say something else Cindy came running up to me again, “There is something wrong with Karen”.
Susan, who was sitting next to me pulled Cindy up on her lap and asked, “What is it”?
“I don’t know. She’s crying and bleeding”.
I stood up, “Cindy, do you know what happened to her”?
“No, she would not talk to me”.
I turned to Megan, “Megan, would you get a first-aid kit and follow me over”? I started jogging over. Several of my sisters also followed behind me. I hoped it would not be too serious. Our small cemetery had grown over the years.
When I reached the meadow the clubhouse was about thirty feet in front of me. I did not see anyone around the outside but I could hear some faint crying. She must be inside. What could she have cut herself on? I walked through the door and saw Karen laying on her side, naked, her knees pulled up to her chest, on a bed in the far corner. From here I could see some blood on her face. It looked like it had dripped down from her chin onto her chest.
I went over to her, “Karen honey, are you okay”? I reached out to touch her but she shrank away from me. Then her eyes focused on me and she reached up and put her arms around me neck and cried a bit harder. As I held her I heard Susan and Megan come in. When I turned to look, Sharon also came in and they all walked over and stood behind me.
Karen’s crying gradually died away so I tried again, “What happened? How did you cut yourself”? I could see blood but could not see where it was coming from.
Megan had moved beside us and was looking at Karen. “Dan, she did not cut herself. Look”. Megan turned Karen’s face towards me and I could see she had a badly cut lip.
I could also see the imprint of an open hand on the side of her face. Like someone had slapped her hard. Megan then moved Karen’s legs apart “Look at all the bruising around her vagina. Someone tried to rape her. She is only eleven”.
“Tried”?
“Yes, it does not look like he was successful”.
That is impossible I thought. We have not seen anyone else here in years. Who could have done this? “Karen, who did this to you”?
Karen shook her head and then moved away from me to Megan and let her hold her.
I reached out to her, “Honey, please talk to Daddy. Who did this? What happened”?
“I can’t Daddy. He’ll hurt me again. He said not to say anything or he would get me and do it again”.
“Honey, you need to tell me who did this. Was it a stranger”? That seemed hardly likely though. It was starting to break through to me that it was not a stranger. We had not seen anyone since Sharon and her girls had arrived years ago. When Karen shook her head I asked, “Then it had to be one of your brothers, which one did this”? Even as I asked I was getting a suspicion of whom it had to be, the only brother that could possibly do this. But how could he do this to his sister?
Karen shook her head carefully, it must be really hurting her, and buried her face between Megan’s breasts. The warm weather had caused most of us to discard our clothing. Even though we had ample clothing now, a result of our frequent trips to the nearby town, we had gone nude for so many years that it seemed more natural to us than to go clothed.
Megan lifted Karen’s chin gently, “Karen, you need to tell us. We’ll protect you. We won’t let anyone hurt you”.
But she was still not convinced, “He said if I told he would get me when I’m sleeping”.
I reached out and touched her head, “Karen, you can sleep with mommy or with me. We will not let anything happen to you. Please tell us what happened? Did he find you here”?
Karen’s head turned slightly towards me, she seemed calmer now. “I was going swimming but he said he had something he wanted to show me here”.
Sharon moved up next to us with a wet rag in her hand. I had not even noticed that she had left the room. Megan mouthed a †˜thank you’ and took it and began gently cleaning up Karen’s face and chest. While she was doing this she asked, “Then what happened”?
“When we got here he told me to go and sit on the bed. After I sat down I asked him what he wanted to show me. I thought maybe he was going to give me a kitten. I saw him playing with one earlier this morning. He said to close my eyes and keep them closed. After I closed them I felt something bumping my face and then pushing against my lips. When I opened my eyes Frank was trying to push his penis into my mouth. It was really hard and pointing at me. He had been wearing shorts and he had taken them off”.
At the mention of Frank’s name Megan and I looked up at each other. Frank was the only possibility I could think of in the family and I found it hard to believe that even he could do this. Frank was Sharon’s oldest child. From his early years he was difficult. He could not share anything with his brothers or sisters. He would fight for anything he wanted that was not immediately given to him when he wanted it. And when he fought, he would not hold anything back. He seemed to have no concept of family. If he hurt someone he did not appear to care as long as he got what he wanted. And now at sixteen, he could hurt someone pretty easily.
“He kept telling me to open my mouth but I kept it closed. Every time he told me to open my mouth I shook me head no. Then he slapped me really hard so I opened my mouth and he put it in. I didn’t want to Daddy”.
I could see she was beginning to cry again. “That’s okay honey. You did not do anything wrong. How did you get the cut on your mouth”?
“I didn’t know what to do. He told me to suck it and lick it but it was too big. I tried but I don’t think I did it right, he got really mad at me. He told me to keep it in my mouth and he started rubbing his hand on it. Then it squirted in my mouth. I choked and I accidentally bit him. I didn’t mean to. I tried to tell him I was sorry but he got mad again. That’s when he slapped me on the mouth and I bit myself. Then he pushed me down and got on top of me, and hurt me”.
Once she finally got it all out she turned back to Megan and buried her head again. But it seemed the crying was done for now. Megan had cleaned up her face pretty good though the hand print still showed on the side of her face. The rest of the women moved up closer and gave her reassurance that she was going to be fine. Sharon did not move. She stayed back, watching me.
I stood up and quickly walked out of the playhouse, followed by Sharon, and started back to the main house. In my first reaction to the rage I felt I, wanted to go to the house, get a gun and just put an end to him. As I got closer to the house I had calmed down on the scale from a ten to a nine and now I was just going to go and beat the living crap out of him. I could hear Sharon calling for me to wait for her, trying to catch up to me. When I hesitated in front of the house, deciding whether to look for him first at the baseball game or the swimming hole, Sharon finally caught up to me.
Out of breath from chasing me, she asked, “Please Danny, don’t hurt him”? She must have guessed what I originally had intended because she moved around between me and the house. She had her arms on mine to try and stop me if I continued to the house. “He’s our son”.
“Yes, He’s our, my, son. But Karen is also my daughter. Think of what he did to her? You know something is wrong with Frank. He hurts other kids and does not care. He has no conscience. We cannot allow him to be with us”. Just saying the words finally helped me decide what to do. I would not hurt him, but he could not stay with us. He had stepped over too big a line.
“Okay, Sharon. I won’t hurt him. A beating will not do any good. It will only make me feel better. God knows, I want to feel better. But he is not going to change. If anything it will just give him a reason to hurt someone else. But he cannot stay here any more”.
“What do you mean? Where can he go”?
“I’m not sure yet. I have to think on it. For now I don’t want you to talk to him. I am going to go and find him and have a talk. I want you to stay away from him until tomorrow morning. I want you to sleep with me tonight”.
I could see the anger building in her face, “You tell me to stay away from my son, that you are going to send him away from our home, and at the same time you want to fuck me tonight”?
Oh god, she completely misunderstood. “That is not what I meant. I do not want you talking with Frank tonight. You can talk to him in the morning. I thought if we were together tonight we would have a chance to talk what to do, you and I”.
I said, “I’m going to go and find Frank now. I need to talk to him”. She took a step towards me and I held out my hand to stop her, “I said I would not hurt him”. That seemed to satisfy her.
I left her standing there, watching me, as I went towards the baseball field. When I got close to the field I stood back and scanned the area, looking for Frank. I spotted Jason and Paul, my two oldest sons sitting under a tree watching the game but no Frank. I moved on to them and squatted down beside them. They had grown into to fine young men, both of them twenty years old now. All my sons were fine young men. Well, almost all of them. But Jason and Paul were my oldest, there was a special place in my heart for them.
I waited a minute, trying not to be obvious. “Have either of you seen Frank”?
Without looking from the game, Jason answered, “I think I might have seen him going towards the swimming hole”.
“Thanks”. I was about to get up when I noticed that it was not the game that had Jason’s attention. He was staring at the twins. Mikey’s sixteen year-old twin daughters. If I did not have other things pressing I would stay and stare also. They were gorgeous. They both had long silky black hair like their mother. Where their mother was not five feet tall, she insisted she was, the rest of us doubted it, her daughters had inherited my DNA and were a good six inches taller than their mother. Where their mother had small, but really nice, breasts, the twins were nicely filled out. Not huge, just very nice, the kind where you wanted to wrap your hands around them. They also had a very exotic mixed race look. Somewhere between their Japanese mother and whatever mongrel European heritage I had. It was also the same with Sharon’s children though not quite as dramatic because Sharon was already very light skinned to begin with.
Somewhere along the line it seems the younger girls had started a tradition. I think Mary and Janice started it. As each of my daughters reached fourteen they slept with me first. Sometimes they just stayed for the one night. Sometimes they stayed up to a couple of weeks. It did not always result in a pregnancy, but frequently it did. I did not encourage it, but I certainly did nothing to discourage it. But it has been two years and Pam and Patricia, the twins, had never come to my bedroom. As far as I know they had not visited any of my son’s bedrooms either. Though I could tell they would be welcome by the erections I would sometimes see when the boys were looking at the twins.
When I finally pulled my eyes away from the twins I saw Jason looking at me. He said, “They are quite an eye full aren’t they”? I gave him a nod and stood up. Before I could leave he asked, “If you are looking for Frank, would you like Paul and I to come along”?
“No, that’s okay. I just need to talk to him”. As I left I could feel him watching me. Why would he think he and Paul should come also? What has been going on with Frank and the others? Have there been other things happening that we have not heard about?
As I approached the swimming hole I spotted Frank off to one side of the path on a little rise overlooking the area. He was sitting on a table in a little picnic area we had made.
Without really trying to, I was able to get within just a couple of feet before he was aware I was there. He was looking off to the side away from me and I turned to see what he was looking at. My anger rose again when I saw that there were six of my younger daughters, ages nine to twelve lying naked on a couple of blankets, sunbathing. About twenty feet to the left were around fifteen girls, aged fourteen to eighteen, all naked, very sexy, splashing around in the water. I could not see very many boys with them. Apparently most of them were over playing baseball. As I looked over the group I could see one young couple in the water. The two were facing each other and hugging. Then I noticed that the girl was slightly bouncing up and down. Well there was one young man having more fun than his brothers playing baseball.
Frank’s gaze never wavered from the young girls sunbathing. We did not have many rules here. Nothing like what I read it used to be like before, but one strict rule we did have was that we did not engage in sex before the age of fourteen.
Frank was wearing just his shorts. As I walked up next to him he turned to look at me, “Hi Dad. What brings you out this way”? Then he turned back to look at the girls. He had his hand in his shorts and it was obvious he was stroking himself. When I came up he did not bother to pull his hand out.
“Frank, I hear you had an accident today”.
“Nope, not me. I’m fine”.
“Well that is not what I heard. In fact, I heard you were doing so bad that I think you should go to the bunkhouse now to recuperate”.
“No. I’m fine Dad. No need. I’ll just stay here”.
“Frank that was not a request. I want you to go to the bunkhouse. I want you to stay there. Someone will bring you some dinner when it is time. In the morning we will talk”.
During all this Frank had never taken his eyes off the young girls nor taken his hand out of his shorts. Out of the corner of my eye I could still see his shorts bulging out as his hand moved in and out.
Now Frank turned to look at me, “Does this have something to do with that little girl in the playhouse”? His expression never changed. There was no fear of me in his face.
When I nodded he added, “She’ll get over it” and turned back to the girls sunning themselves.
I wanted to put my fist through his face. I could feel my hands clenching. My continued silence must have said something to him because he looked back at me again. I knew my anger was showing in my face. He looked down at my fists. “Do you think you can take me Dad”? That surprised me. At fifteen he was the same size I was, had the youth on me but not my experience.
Before I could reply I heard the sound of feet on leaves to one side behind me. Frank looked over my shoulder, “Well hello dear brothers, Jason, Paul. Come to help Daddy”? It was said with a smile on his face, but not in his voice.
I wondered, where does this fifteen year old asshole get the attitude? Before, he might have had an advantage because I would not have wanted to hurt him to badly. And in holding back he would have an advantage on me. That advantage was gone now.
Jason did not reply to Frank’s barb, “Hey Dad, we were looking for you”. They continued up until they were standing on each side of me, facing Frank. “We were bored with the game and thought maybe you could use a hand with something”. While he talked to me he never took his eyes off Frank.
Still looking at Frank myself, I said, “Frank. I want you to go to the bunkhouse and stay there. I’ll come and talk with you tomorrow morning”.
Frank just stared at me for a minute without saying anything. Then he turned and took one last long look at the girls. When he turned back to me he said, “So many girls, so much time”. The little smile on his face once again made me regret telling Sharon I would not hurt him.
He took a step towards us and stopped. The three of us parted and he walked between us and started back on the trail that would take him to the bunkhouse. We continued at a distance behind him. I did not want to push the issue and rub in it by walking right behind him. While we were walking back I said thank you to the boys. Yes, I did think I could take him but it might be an ugly fight.
After watching Frank enter the bunkhouse the three of us continued on up to the house and sat on the porch. None of us said anything for a few minutes. Finally Paul spoke, “Grandma came and told us what happened. We just came over for support”. I nodded but did not say anything. “What are you going to do?” he asked.
I had grown to rely on these two sons, they were good leaders, everyone in the family looked up to them and respected them, I thought they should know what I was planning to do. “Frank cannot stay here any longer. He is a danger to us. Something even worse will happen if he stays”. Jason and Paul both nodded their heads in agreement. I continued, “I think the best place for him to go to would be a house on the other side of the valley”. When they did not say anything I asked, “Any other ideas”?
Jason turned to me, “I think you are being too kind. I think we should take care of him right now”.
I shook my head, “I promised his mother I would not hurt him”.
Jason smiled, “Well you did not promise for Paul and me”.
I did not really need to reply so I remained silent and continued slowly rocking, watching the occasional child run around playing in the yard. Paul went in and came out with some lemonade for us. We just sat there making small talk for the next couple of hours until the sun began making its way down. The swimmers, suntanners and ball players gradually began drifting back to the house. The people who had dinner chores went in and began preparing dinner. Jason and Paul volunteered to take some dinner to Frank.
After dinner was over and cleared up, most of us drifted back out to the porch. The porch was large and was a favorite gathering place for the children and adults alike. The children would usually sit on the floor near their parents and either continue playing or engage in idle family chatter. Jason and Paul, and indeed a number of the older boys, now had several children of their own. They were all sitting in rocking chairs around me with little sons and daughters climbing in and out of their laps. Sitting there listening to all the kids laughing, watching them play, took me back twenty-odd years when these older children had been crawling in and out of my lap. I was pretty proud that the oldest of my children were now enjoying the same experiences. Then I remembered Frank and sadness hit me. He would never experience this.
I was brought out of my time trip by two arms suddenly draped around my neck. I looked back and saw Mikey had joined me. I knew Mikey pretty well and reached up quickly to take her hands in mine. My idea was right but my timing was off as I missed one of her hands as it drifted down my stomach, headed for regions below. Just the thought of it though made me begin to stir. I turned my head towards hers, “Mikey, not the right time” and quickly grabbed her wandering hand and brought it up to my chest.
I could hear her giggle, “Never bothered you before”. I rarely wore clothing unless it was cold. But with all the little children climbing on everyone I thought that might not be the right tool for a climbing four-year-old to grab onto. And if I let her continue there was certainly going to be a tool to grab onto.
Just as I was about to say something to Mikey, Pam and Patricia appeared before me, one by each knee. “Hi Mommy, Daddy”. A couple of the girls had put on t-shirts after the ballgame but they had not. I now found two delicious, gorgeous, completely naked teenage girls standing inches away from me. As they talked to their mother I tried to look straight ahead but it was impossible. Their standing while I was seated put their pelvises right at my eye level. The curves of their hips made you ache to reach out and put your hands on them. They had the slender thighs of their mother, though they were many inches taller than her. The gap between their thighs allowed me to see right up to the lips of their pussy, and the sparse pubic hair above it. I have to stop this. I am getting an erection just thinking about them and I need to stop before they notice. They have not made any overtures to me so I have to stop this. Then I made the mistake of looking up. When I did I was looking up to the undersides of their breasts. They were bigger than their mothers, and they had the long nipples of their mother.
Then Pam’s voice got my attention. “Look Patty, I think Mom is bothering Daddy”. When I looked up at her I saw her looking in my lap. I quickly let go of Mikey’s hand and grabbed my glass of lemonade. With the glass in my hand, a pretty poor shield I might add, I pushed my now, a bit more than half erect, cock against my stomach. Mikey looked over my shoulder and whispered, more than loud enough for her daughters to hear, “Why don’t we go inside and see what we can do for that”?
“I can’t honey. I have to spend the evening with Sharon. We have to talk about Frank”. I hoped she could hear the real regret in my voice. She patted my shoulder and said good luck and goodnight to me. Then she and the twins moved down the porch to visit others.
It had gotten fairly dark, so after waiting a few minutes for the old soldier to stop saluting every naked girl that passed by, I got up, said my goodnights and went inside to go to bed. When I got to my bedroom I saw that Sharon was in the bathroom, brushing her hair, preparing for bed. As I pushed the door completely open she looked up, saw me, and quickly jumped up and hugged me. My neck felt wet and I knew she was crying. I did not say anything, just held her and let her cry. After a few minutes she loosened her grip on me, took me by the hand and pulled me over to the bed.
“Sharon, I’m sorry. I don’t know what else to do”.
She moved the sheet and blanket aside and we got into bed. “I know. I’m sorry I reacted that way earlier. It is just that he is my oldest son, our oldest son. I went so many years thinking I would never have children and then Frank was born. He is special to me. But I know something is wrong with him. What are you going to do? You said you would not hurt him”?
I was on my back looking up at the ceiling. When we came to bed we had forgotten to turn out the bathroom light so the room had a very faint glow to it. Sharon moved up on her side against me. I said “I talked about this with Jason and Paul. They did not have any better ideas. What I am thinking is that, tomorrow morning, I am going to take Frank out early, before the rest of the family is up, and take him to the other side of the valley. There are plenty of farms over there that he can go to. There will be plenty of food and water for him”.
She leaned forward and kissed my cheek. “Thank you. I have thought about this also. I understand Frank needs to leave. I am just sick that Karen was hurt. But thank you for not hurting him”. Then she kissed me again. I turned to her and met her next kiss with one of my own on her lips. It was intended just as one of those little †˜good night’ pecks, but when her lips touched mine we held it. With our lips still touching, I kissed her lower lip, sucking it just a bit into my mouth, then her upper lip. She began kissing me back with more heat. I turned over on my side to face her and began kissing her neck and shoulder. Our arms were wrapped around one another pulling us tight against each other.
As I worked down from her shoulder towards her breasts she moved her mouth to my ear and ran a tongue around inside it. I rolled onto my back, pulling her with me so she was lying on top of me. She gave my ear a last lick and then whispered “Make love to me”.
I asked, “Are you sure”? My cock had the same idea several minutes ago. She had to know. He was trapped between our bodies, poking into her stomach.
“Oh Yes, I’m sure”. She moved her lips around my face, kissing my lips, nose, eye lids. Then she moved her body up on her knees, leaning forward, freeing my cock and also moving her breasts up on either side of my face. I turned my head and sucked one nipple and as much of her breast as I could into my mouth. There was plenty left. I spent the next couple of minutes caressing her breasts with my hands and moving my mouth back and forth from one nipple to the other. I pushed her breasts together so that I could then suck both nipples into my mouth at the same time.
For the last minute or so I had been lifting my hips, trying to find her pussy with my cock but she was too far up my body and I could not reach it. Finally she straightened her arms, pulling her breasts away from my face. I could just barely make out her face; she was looking down at me, smiling. “Okay, now I’m ready. I want you to do it nice and slow and easy”. She reached between her legs with one hand, found my aching cock and held it still while she slowly moved back. Yes she is ready. The head slid right into her, the proverbial hot knife into butter. She moved back, drawing me into her until her pussy was pushed against her hand. With her fist wrapped around me she began moving me in a tight circle in her. As I watched her face, her eyes closed and her mouth opened. I would love to think it was the effect of my massive, rock hard cock in her, but since I knew I was not massive, though I was definitely rock hard at the moment, I figured it must be her hand rubbing against her clitoris.
After several minutes of this I just laid back on the bed and let her do with me what she wanted. I was just getting to the point of wondering if I really needed to be here when she pulled her hand out from between us. She put her hands on my chest and then slowly lowered herself on me until I could go no deeper in her. She began slowly rocking back and forth on me. “Dan, you cannot cum in me. I’m fertile right now and I do not want to get pregnant tonight. I don’t want a baby to remind me every time I see them of the day that my son was taken away”.
She took my silence as a yes and began rocking a bit faster, pushing harder against me. I reached up and cupped her breasts with my thumbs covering each nipple. As I began running my thumbs lightly around her nipples she began pushing even harder against me. I thought I heard a sound and looked over at the door. It was hard to tell in this light but it looked like it was open several inches, but I could not see anyone. I could not remember if I had closed it or not when I came in. With Sharon rocking back and forth on me it was hard to think of anything clearly. The only thing I was really concentrating on was to not cum in her. No accidents tonight. But it was all I could do not to let loose in her. She was starting to squeeze me in her. I could feel the muscles in her pussy grabbing me as she got closer to cumming. Her face was tightening up and her body was hunching over me as her movements changed to hard sharp thrusts against me. She let out a long groan and then in a low, throaty voice, said, “Danny, I’m cumming”. Now I could feel her pussy grabbing me, spasming. I was ready to explode in her when I remembered, don’t cum. She gradually lowered herself down on me. I had to be careful not to stroke in her. I felt that any fucking at all would result in my letting loose. I felt so hard, and ready. I wanted to lower my hands to her butt and pull her tight against me as I thrust up hard into her. I moved my hands up to her back and hugged her to me instead.
She moved her lips to my ear again and whispered “Thank you. That was really nice”.
I let out a little laugh, “I don’t think I did much, I just laid there. You did all the work”.
She gave my earlobe a little nip and said, “Well you did provide a very nice cock to work with. And it appears it is still around”. As much as I was trying to not do anything in her my body was not entirely cooperating. I could feel myself pushing very slightly back and forth in her. She began to rise up off me, and as I fell out of her I let out a groan. “Poor Danny. Maybe I can thank you in a more meaningful way”. She moved off of me to one side and lifted my cock back up in the air. I was expecting her to jerk me off so I laid my head back on the bed and waited for her to begin. She shifted her weight forward over me and then I found out just how good my thank you was going to be. I felt her mouth close over the head of my cock. She took her hand away and now my cock felt just the sensations her mouth and tongue was giving me. She began moving her head very slowly up and down, taking me deep into her mouth and then pulling back. As her mouth got back up to the head she would stop and move her tongue around me, slowly, quickly, running it under the rim of the head; driving me wild. I was so close before that it took me just a few minutes to cum. I wanted it to last much longer but I could no longer hold it back. She had just moved her mouth back to the head and was again running her tongue around me when I raised my hips up and began shooting stream after stream of sperm into her mouth. She held it all in her mouth until I was finally finished and then pulled her mouth back off of me. I heard her swallow and then she moved back to my cock and licked it clean. When she was finished she laid my cock down on my stomach and came back up, lying beside me and hugged me.
I put my arm out so she could lay her head on it. She moved closer and put her head on my shoulder, me hugging her against me. We lay there for several minutes before I remembered. “When I came to bed do you remember if I closed the door”?
In a sleepy voice she replied, “Yes, you did”.
“Well it is not closed now”. I took a quick look to be sure. It was closed. “Well I’m wrong. It’s closed now, but a few minutes ago I’m sure it was open”.
“You know sometimes the girls peak in. Lots of the younger girls know they are going to have sex with you when they are old enough and they get curious. They sneak a peak to see what it is like”.
“No way”, I knew sometimes one of the girls would come in to ask something and sometimes I would be having sex with someone but I always assumed it was an accident.
“Yes way”. Then she added, “You go around naked most of the time. They see your cock and wonder what it looks like hard. Sometimes the younger boys get erections around the girls. They know they are going to be with you and wonder what it looks like, feels like”. She leaned closer and kissed me on the cheek. “They could ask me, I could tell them. Now go to sleep. You are getting up early”.
It seemed like I had barely closed my eyes when Sharon was nudging me awake. It was still dark outside. “You should get ready before people start waking. It will be harder on Frank if you take him away with people watching”. She moved around the bed and tossed a shirt and pants my way. “It’s pretty cool this morning. You should wear these”.
I got up, went into the bathroom to relieve myself, and then returned and put on the clothes she had set out.
“I’ve put out a few packs for Frank to take with him; food, clothes, some personal things of his”. She moved around to me and hugged me. “Take care out there. Frank will not be pleased about this. I don’t want anything to happen to him, but even more, I don’t want anything to happen to you. Come back to me safely, to us”. She kissed me lightly. “I’ve sent Jason and Paul out to saddle a couple of horses and to bring Frank up to the porch to wait for you”. With a slap on my butt she added, “Now get a move on”.
When I reached the porch Jason and Paul were sitting there talking to each other. Past them I could see Frank standing by three horses; two saddled, the third a packhorse. As I walked out Jason asked if I wanted him to come with me. I assured him I would be okay and continued on down to Frank.
Frank watched as I approached, “I guess we are going on a trip Dad. Is either of us returning”?
“You are leaving the family. I told your mother you would not be harmed”. I nodded my head to the west, “I am taking you to the other side of the valley. There are a number of ranches where you can make a home there. There is plenty of game there, water, and I’m sure you can grow what else you will need to live”.
Frank gave me a tight smile and mounted one of the saddled horses, “Well give mother my thanks for me”. He took the lead from the saddle horse and tied it to his pommel, turned, and started towards the trail leading away from the house. I mounted my horse and followed a few yards behind.
We continued through out the morning without talking. It was an unpleasant task. I tried to keep up a good pace when we were able to travel off the road on softer ground. I wanted to end this as soon as I could but I knew it would take several days. I figured I would leave him once we crossed the valley and reached the first reasonable ranch or farm. He could then move on until he found something he was happy with.
We had worked our way down the mountain and had finally reached rolling hills when Frank drew up his horse and stopped in front of me. I had drifted back about forty yards so it took me a minute to reach him. He was pulling something out of one of his packs as I reached him. I pulled up hard when I saw it was a revolver. He smiled at me, his hand lying on his thigh, not pointing it at me, but then he did not have to. It never occurred to me to be armed. He was my son.
“Well Dad. Are you still sure you can take me”?
“What do you want Frank”?
“I have been asking myself that since last night”. He looked down, moved the cylinder around, listening to the clicks. “I took it pretty hard; you’re kicking me out for trying to fuck a sister that I would get to fuck pretty soon anyway. But what really burns me was finding you fucking my mother, and then watching her suck your cock just hours before you kick me out”. He stared at me, no longer smiling. “Yes, that really burns me”.
So the door did open. He came in to get a gun. I watched as he pulled the hammer back, the click sounding so loud. “Dad, I don’t think your company is required any longer”. So this was it, no old age for me. He slowly lifted the revolver until it was pointing at my chest. He held it there for what seemed like an hour, though it was probably less than a minute, with neither of us speaking. The hole at the end of the barrel looked so big. A crazy thought went through my mind; I wonder if I'll see the bullet when it comes out.
I knew it would do no good talking to him so I kept quiet. Then he pointed to the road behind us. “I don’t need your watchful attendance. Go home, your home. I can find my way”. I stared back at him, wondering what I could say to make this any better. Is there anyway I can make him understand it is for his good also. "Dad, I meant now".
I pulled the reins to the side and my horse started to circle around. “Don’t make the mistake of looking for me again Dad. This is a one-time-only pass. If I ever see you again it will end differently”.
I continued turning and began moving away from him, back down the trail. I looked back a couple of times and he patiently sat there watching me. I turned a corner and lost view of him. When I reached an overlook I glanced back, he was no longer there, he had moved on.
It took until late afternoon before I reached home. Sharon was sitting on the porch and ran out to me. I could tell from the worry on her face that she thought the worst when I arrived home days earlier than I had planned. I told her what happened and then went to let the others know.
Life quickly returned to normal at home. We progressed into summer and the temperature rose. A level of tension was gone that I had not really noticed before. Even Karen showed happiness that I had worried that I would ever see again. But I was still bothered. Something was nagging at me. It took a several weeks before I was able to put a name to it. I wanted to know where Frank was. I was not comfortable just having him gone. I wanted to know where he was. It would help me knowing what distance separated us.
I was sitting with Jason one late afternoon and I shared my concern with him. “Why don’t we go out to the cliff and see if we can find out”. There was a cliff about fifteen miles from us that allowed you to look out clear across the valley. It was where my father, and then I, used to go out to watch for signs of life. “We can go out and camp out for a week. We’ll take the telescope and watch for his light at night”.
“Are you sure” I asked? “It would be pretty boring just sitting out there for a week”.
He smiled as he said, “Oh, I don’t know. It could be a lot of fun. I'll see if I can think of something we can do while we are out there”.
“Well, when do you want to go”?
“There is no point in waiting. Let’s go tomorrow”. He got up. “I’ll start getting some things ready for us to take. Let’s go right after lunch. That will let us miss the heat of the day”.
After dinner I let my sisters know what Jason and I had planned. Paul came around and asked if we wanted him to go also but Jason said we had everything in hand and that he should stay home to take care of things while we were gone.
That night mom came and spent the night with me. I asked how she was doing with Jason and Paul. She smiled, “I'm having a good time with them. They come and visit me every now and then. I did tell them that this was a private party. I don't want them telling their other brothers. I don't want to end up being a training exercise for them, like some people I know". With that she gave me a little jab in the ribs.
"Hey, I'm an old man. Give me some respect. I think I'm holding my own with these youngsters".
She laughed, "I don't know. I’m pretty sure that twenty goes into forty more times than thirty goes into fifteen”. A few minutes later I attempted to prove that she was wrong but I think she had me. We talked for a while afterwards and then both fell asleep.
The next day passed fairly quickly. After lunch I went out on the porch and found Jason leading two saddled horses and a pack horse up to the house. The surprise was who was sitting in the saddles, the twins, Pam and Patricia. Jason had a big grin on his face as he told me Pam and Patricia asked if they could come also. That seemed a bit unlikely but the girls insisted they wanted to go with us. Even after I explained we could be gone for as long as a week they assured me they wanted to go. They thought a camping trip would be fun, give them a chance to get away from everyone for a while.
Mom and Mikey, the girl’s mother, came out to see us off. As I got up in the saddle behind Pam, mom walked up to me. “Now remember that arithmetic” she said with a smile.
Mikey went over to each of her daughters, who bent down in turn to give her a kiss goodbye. “Now you girls be good and come back safe”.
We all said our goodbyes and began riding away; Pam and I took the lead with Jason and Patricia following with the packhorse. I was having a problem. Where could I put my hands? Pam was riding in front of me and there was not much room in a saddle for two people. I had to admit, the absence of clothes on the two of us did allow for a bit more room in the saddle. But where do I put my hands? She held the reins so I finally decided to just rest my hands on her hips. Both girls had long silky black hair. It hung down to the small of their backs. It felt very sensual against my chest and stomach.
We had gone a couple of miles and I chanced to look back to see where Jason and Patricia were. Jason was having no problem figuring out where to put his hands. I could see there were wrapped around Patricia and he was holding her breasts. She did not seem to mind in the least. A few minutes later Pam and I reached a bend in the trail. As we turned I looked to my left and saw that Patricia had turned in the saddle to face Jason. She had her legs wrapped around his waist and her head resting on his chest. I could see his hands supporting her butt and it looked like he was lifting her up and down. I hoped his legs were gripping the horse tightly. That looked like a mighty uncomfortable way to fall off a horse.
Seeing them was having an effect upon me. Pam was leaning back against me a bit more now and I was trying to avoid her sitting against my erection. She turned to me and said “Daddy, you can put your arms around me. That will hold me steady in the saddle”.
I moved my hands from her hips. She leaned back so our bodies were pressed together and I put my hands around her stomach. One hand was a bit low on her stomach. I could feel a few strands of pubic hair against the side of my little finger. The other hand was just below her breasts. I could feel her ribs under my fingers. We continued like this for a few miles. Every now and then I moved my hands slightly, like I was just adjusting my hands, but it was more like a caress to me. I was so hard now. She had to feel it pushing against her back, how could she not notice. I hoped she just did not know what it was, and at the same time hoped she did.
We went on like this for a few more minutes. Her head was below mine so I could see over her shoulder. I watched as her breasts bounced with the steps of the horse. Her nipples appeared hard. When we reached a part of the trail that stretched out flat before us Pam took the reins in one hand, and with the other hand, took my hand on her ribs and pushed it up to her right breast. She pushed my hand tight against her breast with hers on top of mine. I was right. Her nipple was hard. I started to lift my other hand to her other breast. “No Daddy” she said. She reached down to my hand and pushed it back down so that it was lower than before. My hand now covered her pubic mound with my fingers right against where the saddle met her body. She lifted up slightly off the saddle and I slid my fingers under her and she sat on them. She must have been thinking of this for a while because she was damp. I was able to move one finger up and it slid right into her. As the horse continued walking it made her rock around on my hand. I did not have to do anything. She just kept sliding around on my hand. I moved my other hand back and forth caressing each breast, moving it around her chest and stomach. Her breath started coming faster and became ragged. The constant rocking did not take long before she was moaning. “Daddy, that feels so good”. She pushed hard back against me and then my finger inside of her felt her muscles begin to pulse around me as she climaxed.
After a minute or so she lifted herself up a few inches and I pulled my finger out of her and wrapped my arms around her. “Thank you Daddy. That was really nice”.
“My pleasure honey”. I turned around to see if Jason was in sight. Had they seen what we were doing? But just then they came into sight on the straight stretch. They were once again riding normally, Patricia facing forward.
We continued on for a few more hours, resting the horses a couple of times when we crossed small streams, until we finally reached the cliff and outcrop which was our destination. It was getting late in the day, just beginning to get dark. We had brought sandwiches with us and ate a cold dinner. Afterwards Jason set his sleeping bag up off to one side of our camp. I laid mine out across the camp from him, about 20 yards away.
The girls had not said anything other than small talk since we had arrived. No mention of what either of us had done on the ride out. Because of that I was unsure what their plans were. It was getting cooler as the sun dropped. I knew everyone would be under covers soon. I put some supplies away, tied the horses in a grassy area and returned to find Pam laying her sleeping bag on top of mine. When she saw me approach she said, “I thought this would make it softer for us to sleep on”. I just nodded.
I looked over to see where Jason and Patricia were. They were already in their bed. Even in the dusk I could see Jason on top of Patricia, his legs between hers, his hips thrusting against hers. I turned away and found Pam looking at them also. Then she looked up at me. I lay down beside her, facing her. She looked at me for the longest time and then leaned towards me, kissed me, put her arms around my neck, and then pulled me towards her. I could feel her leg pushing against mine, trying to get underneath me. I lifted my leg up and she spread her legs out letting me lie between them. I was low enough on her that my now erect cock was not pushed against her.
I lifted my upper body off her, kissed her lightly on the lips and then began working my way down her neck. As I reached her breasts I gave each nipple a turn in my mouth, running my tongue around it, then flicking it back and forth. I left her breasts and began kissing my way down her stomach. As I reached her belly button she arched her back, lifting her body up to my lips. Then she took my head in her hands and began pulling me back up to her. I tried to stay where I was, “Honey, I’m not done kissing you”.
With some urgency in her voice she said, “Not this time Daddy. I want you to fuck me. I have been waiting so long. Please don’t make me wait any longer”.
It would have been very unkind of me not to comply. I let her pull my face up towards hers but as I passed her breasts I lowered head and sucked one of her nipples into my mouth again. “Please Daddy, hurry”. I was on my hands and knees and I could feel her hips lift off the ground pushing up against me, trying to find my cock. She just missed it. I settled back on my knees, with my butt on my heels. I reached down and took one of her ankles in each hand and lifted them up in the air to form a “V”. I motioned for her to hold them there and then let go. She kept them up in the air as I looked down at her naked body, her young breasts sticking up in the air, her nipples higher still. I took one hand and let a few fingers trail down from her chest, over her stomach, through her pubic hair until it was resting on her mound and my thumb covered her clitoris. I moved my thumb lightly in a tight circle, making several passes before sliding down to the lips of her pussy. She was so wet my thumb slid right into her. Her pussy was grasping at my finger, like it was trying to pull me in deeper. She said, “No Daddy, not your finger again” as she reached down and grabbed my cock, trying to pull it towards her, “I want your cock inside me this time”.
I leaned forward, catching my weight on my hands, lowering myself so that I was pushing her firmly down on the ground. Her hand was still holding me between us, moving me, trying to pull me inside her. When she finally got it right my head popped right inside of her. She let out a low moan and pulled her hand out. I leaned forward and slid in farther. She felt so tight, but she was so wet that there was no resistance as I continued to push myself deeper in her. I felt her bend her knees and then spread her thighs even farther apart. I pulled back, almost completely out of her, in preparation for a deep stroke back in and she clutched at my back. “No Daddy, don’t stop. It feels really good”.
I showed her I was not stopping by driving back into her, right to the hilt. I then pulled back again, stopped, and drove back into her faster, repeating it over and over again, faster yet, her breathing getting ragged. Each time I rammed back into her she involuntarily let out a little grunt “Unh…..unh……unh”. Her hands traveled down from my back until she was grabbing my butt, pulling me with each stroke into her. I looked at her under me, her eyes closed, her mouth open, her head bouncing up several inches as each stroke slammed back into her. She looked so beautiful. I kissed her lightly on the lips. Without opening her eyes she brought her hands up from my butt and ran them through the hair on my head, then pulling my lips back to hers, giving me a passionate kiss. Her tongue slipped between my lips and we began this little game of tag with each other. At the same time my thrusting became more frantic in her. It felt like my entire groin was on fire. Then her pussy grabbed me tightly, I knew she was not having an orgasm, I wanted to wait for her but it was too late. Her tongue dancing around mine, and that squeeze pushed me over the edge, “Oh honey, I’m cumming”. I pushed deep in her and held it as the streams shot out of me, my hips giving a little jab at her with each new release. Finally I was drained; I started to sag on her but remembered the hard ground under us and stopped in time, putting my weight on my knees and arms.
She continued running her hands slowly through my hair and then wrapped her arms around my back. Every now and then she would tighten her thighs against me. It had the effect of tightening her pussy around my slowly diminishing cock. It felt so good but finally I had softened enough that a final squeeze squeezed me right out of her. “Oh, please put him back”. Her voice had that little girl pleading sound to it.
With regret in mine I answered, “I would love to put him back but I think he has retired for a while, maybe after his nap”.
She gave a little giggle, “Promise”? I nodded my head. “Good, I’ll hold you to that”.
I lifted myself off her and moved to her side, I pushed a bit on her shoulder and she turned her back to me and then settled back against me with my arms wrapped around her. Then I remembered my ungentlemanly behavior, “I don’t think you had your orgasm. I feel very selfish. I’m sorry”.
She hugged me again, “Daddy, don’t be sorry, it’s your birthday. And besides, that felt really good whether I had an orgasm or not”.
I had completely forgotten it was my birthday. I’m thirty-six today. I guess no cake for me. Then I remembered what she said. “How did you know it was my birthday”?
“Jason told us. He was wondering what to give you. Patricia and I talked about it and we had an idea of what you might like”. She paused for a few seconds and added, “Happy Birthday”.
“Thank you. Jason’s idea huh”? I looked over to where Jason and Patricia were and saw them also lying on their sides looking our way. They both saw me look and gave us a wave with big smiles on their faces. Just how long had they been watching I wondered?
It was getting a bit chilly so I pulled the top blanket over us. We lay there without speaking, just enjoying each other’s warmth and touch. She drifted off and I turned over slightly so I could look at the stars. There were so many. I really enjoyed just laying out looking at them. I had read a book when I was just a kid. It told stories about the constellations. I could pick out almost all of them in view because of that book.
After about an hour I slipped out of bed. Everyone was sound asleep. I put some clothes on; it was pretty chilly at this hour, collected the telescope and a pair of binoculars and walked over to the outcrop that provided a view of the valley. You could see completely across it and up and down the valley for a good fifty miles or more. I had brought a cushion to sit on. My butt was too old to be sitting on rock for hours. I found a stop where I could sit on the cushion and lean back slightly against a rock.
Once I had the telescope set up I scanned the far side of the valley with binoculars first. Maybe I’ll get lucky and spot a light. After ten minutes of quick scanning I had not seen anything, now for the hard work. I picked a horizontal line across the valley and started working from south to north. Once I had finished I that line I set it lower and then repeated the motion from north to south. I was making my forth or fifth pass when a sound came from behind me. Someone had stepped on a twig. It was a good think I was not at the edge of the cliff. Since I was looking for Frank, it was Frank that I thought of when I heard the sound. I had quite a start. But it was Pam. She had come over wrapped in a blanket. Without saying a word she moved around in front of me and sat between my legs on the cushion. She wrapped the blanket around her and leaned back against me.
I was curious about something. Without taking my eye from the telescope I asked, “You seem to really like sex. Why did you wait so long? Why didn’t you come around to me or to one of your brothers? I know Jason has been interested in the two of you for quite a while”.
“The boys always saw us as twins. We would hear them talking about us. It was like a game to them. Who would get to fuck the two of us first? We did not want to play their game. We aren’t toys. Their games made us wait a while. Both of us wanted to come to your bedroom. We knew you were not like that. And I guess Jason and Paul aren’t either but there was such a long line of girls jumping around you that I guess we did not want to be part of it yet. So we waited a bit longer. Then a month became several and finally it became two years”. She was quiet for a while. “I’m here now”. I reached down and squeezed her shoulder and then left my hand there. After several minutes of quiet she drifted off and fell asleep against me.
I continued scanning for another hour or so with no results. I decided that was enough for one night, carefully got up trying not to disturb Pam too much, picked her up and carried her back to the camp. When we got there I laid her down on our sleeping bags and got in beside her. She never moved and I was asleep right after putting my head down.
When I woke the sun was just rising behind us. I could see Jason and Patricia in their bags, still asleep. Pam seemed to be asleep also. We were both on our sides with her back up against me. My left arm was once again under her head and my right wrapped around her body. I lifted my hand up and cupped one of her breasts, thinking of the night before. The memories quickly got me hard. Pam turned her head and said, “You are finally awake. I’ve been waiting an hour for you. I almost started without you”.
I kissed her neck and said, “That would not do”. My cock was poking her right at the top of her thighs. She lifted her right leg and I slid through. She hooked her knee over my leg and then reached down, covered my cock with her hand ,and began rubbing the shaft back and forth against her pussy. Once again I could just lay there and enjoy it. I began moving my hands, caressing her stomach up to her breasts, kissing her neck and shoulder. Then I took my right hand and ran it down the outside of her thigh all the way to her foot, massaging it once I got there; rubbing her instep, the bottom of her foot, her toes.
“Oh yes. That might even be better than an orgasm. I’ll let you know in a few minutes”.
When I was finished with her foot I started back up her leg but this time on the inside of her thigh. When I reached the top she moved her hand over mine and pulled it up to her pussy, pushing my cock out of the way. With my hand under hers she began moving my hand around on her clitoris. Once I started she moved her hand away and grabbed the head of my cock in her fist and began sliding her hand up and down on me.
I began pushing harder on her in response to what she was doing to me. “No Daddy, softer and slower, like this”. She let go of my cock and pushed my hand around her clitoris, very softly, just gently brushing her, and much slower than I had been. “Oh yes. That’s perfect. Now I just need one more thing”. She moved her hips forward and tilted her pelvis back towards me. She was trying to push my cock back but my hand was in her way. “Here let me”. I reached out with a couple of fingers, looped them around me and pulled my cock so the head was positioned against her pussy. She pushed back against me at the same time I pushed towards her. The result was that my entire cock was buried up to the hilt in her. It was still a bit chilly outside but it felt like a furnace inside of her.
Now that I was inside of her I continued the slow stroking of her clitoris and timed my strokes to the same pace. We laid there slowly rocking against each other, enjoying the sensations washing over us; me pushing forward and her pushing back to meet me. After several minutes of this she reached down and cupped my balls. She moved her fingers around, like a magician rolling coins from one finger to the next, my balls taking the place of the coins. After several minutes she turned her head a bit and said, “A little faster”. I responded my moving my fingers a little faster on her clitoris. It was just a minute before she asked, “Daddy, fuck me faster too”. I doubled my speed, sliding in and out of her faster now. “Oh yes. That’s perfect”. She began to breathe harder. I could tell she was getting close. “Squeeze my breasts”! I moved both hands to a breast and gently squeezed them. “Harder”! I needed little encouragement. I squeezed them harder, rubbing my fingers over her nipples. “Oh Daddy, I’m cumming”. She reached down to my balls and pushed them up against her pussy, trying to get me deeper in her. As her orgasm took over her body I could feel her pussy rippling around my cock, like she was trying to milk it. That sent an electric current through me. Her ear was near my mouth as I whispered to her, “I’m cumming too”. My hips began bucking against her butt as I came in her. This little sexy girl had me cumming more than I had in several years.
When I was finally drained of all my vital bodily fluids we lay there catching our breath.
I had my eyes closed, my head lying against hers. “Daddy, look”. I opened my eyes. She nodded towards Jason and Patricia. When I looked over I saw they were facing us, lying in the same position we were. The only odd part was watching Patricia with Jason behind her, her eyes closed, mouth open, head bobbing up and down. I wondered if they had seen us earlier and got the idea. Pam turned and whispered, “I wonder if that is what we looked like”.
After several minutes we could hear a bit of squealing, a few grunts and then the movement stopped. We waited a while and then began stirring under our blanket in an effort to get up. I knew this was a bit new to Pam so while she was standing there, folding our blankets I whispered in her ear, “You might want to wear shorts today”.
I could see the question on her face because it was going to be quite warm today. Then she looked down between her legs. I glanced down also and saw the inside of her thighs were both wet. She chuckled, “Oh, I see. Now there is something you would never think about when wondering what sex is going to be like. I’ll let Patricia know also. It is the first time for both of us”.
We spent a good portion of the morning just talking. I went over my plans for having the family separate and move to a better area with Jason. He had some good ideas and changed my mind of some things. The girls listened in and even at their young age also contributed several ideas. During the heat of the day we moved to a shady area and napped through it. Once it cooled off we walked around exploring our ridge. We even found a waterfall that I did not know existed. I knew a creek was nearby but it never occurred to me that it would end at the cliff, just around a bend, in a waterfall.
The girls decided they would make dinner for us. While they were working Jason and I walked back to the edge of the cliff. I wanted a good look during the day. “Well Dad. How was your birthday”? He had a big grin on his face. “I did not mean to use part of your present. I hope you don’t mind”.
I looked back at him and it was hard not to smile also. “It was a pretty good one, much better than last year’s. And I see you did not have to wrap my present”. He laughed again and nodded. “I thought you had a special feeling for these girls. I am a bit surprised you brought them”.
“Dad, I do like them. But I was talking to them back at home and they like you also. They were just a bit intimidated to approach you”. He looked like he wanted to add something but was hesitating. “Dad, they both like you”.
I nodded and we went back to join the girls for dinner. It was not until late that night that I finally understood what he meant when he said “they both like you”. Once it was dark I went back on the cliff edge and began working the telescope around the far side of the valley. I had been there for a couple of hours when Pam joined me again. She had brought a couple of blankets this time. She laid them out on a flat spot and then waited there. I continued looking at the valley and then decided to take a break and went over and sat beside her. One thing led to another and I shortly found myself flat on my back with her seated on me and my cock buried firmly in her pussy. She took her time on me and it was a good half hour before she came, with me following just a couple of minutes later. We were lying there, letting the sweat evaporate when she said, “Daddy, you are just as good as Pam said you were”.
“Patricia? What are you doing here”?
“Daddy, I thought you knew what I was doing”?
“I know, I mean, I know what…never mind. I thought you liked Jason. What are you doing on me”?
“I do like Jason. I like you too. Pam likes you and Jason. At home you fuck different girls. Our brothers fuck different sisters. What’s the problem”?
“You are right. There is no problem. I just was not thinking”. Seeing Patricia with Jason had me thinking they were pairing up with us. I had noticed that about myself the last few years. I would be with one of my daughters or sisters and then see them with someone else later and a bit of jealousy would run through me. I knew it was silly but it took a bit of ignoring. I had been wondering lately if what I wanted was to just settle down with someone. Well let’s not go off the deep end, maybe with just a few someone.
And so we continued over the next eight days. Each night I spent several hours at the cliff looking over the far side of the valley, sometimes alone, sometimes with one or the other of the girls and sometimes with Jason. The days were boring. There was little to do and there is only so much exploring you can do. Every couple of days the girls would switch with us. It must have been a game with them, switching and then seeing how long it took for either of us to guess they had switched. Their voices, faces and bodies were identical so it was a real test for Jason and I.
A week and a half and I was out on the cliff again, scanning the valley. I was discouraged. I wanted to know where Frank was holed up but it looked like he was not using a light where ever that was. I could have slapped myself in the head when it finally occurred to me that he just as easily could be living on the west side of a hill and I would never see his light from this direction. Pam was sitting there with me tonight, patiently leaning against me, waiting for me to finish so we could go to bed. I nudged her and she got up and picked up the blankets. I got up and began taking the telescope apart so I could put it in its case. We would not need it again. We would be starting home in the morning.
“Daddy, what would his light look like”? She was standing there looking out into the dark.
“Well, if we could see it, it should be just a pinprick out there. You might be able to see something with the binoculars but would need the telescope to be sure”. I turned towards her, “Do you want the binoculars to look at something”?
“No. That’s okay. Would it look something like that”?
Chapter 8
Spoiler:
For the last week and a half, Jason, one of my sons, and two of my daughters, Pam and Patricia, and I had been camped out on the edge of a cliff overlooking the Central California Valley. We, mostly I, had been looking out across the valley each night, watching for a light that would indicate where Frank, another of my sons had settled. He had been banished from our family because of his antisocial behavior. When it happened I left home with him to take him across the valley to find somewhere he could call home. Before we got too far he pulled a weapon and indicated my companionship was no longer required. I left him there and returned home but over the next several weeks I grew increasingly uncomfortable, threatened, not knowing where he was. The four of us had traveled to this spot that overlooked the valley where we could see fifty miles west, across the valley, and easily that much north and south. During this time we had seen no sign of him. It was our last night watching and we had come up empty again. I was packing up our equipment, preparing to leave, when Pam said, “Would it look something like that”?
Pam was pointing down the mountain on our side of the valley. It had never occurred to me to watch this side. I was so focused on where I had told him to go. If I had any intelligence at all I should have started looking at all the places I did not tell him to go. There was just the tiniest spot of light in the distance, down the mountainside from us. My first thought was it was just a star reflecting off water. But as we stared, every now and then it would disappear. I quickly reassembled the telescope. It seemed to take forever to find the light in the viewer. Once I had it centered I stepped up the power. I was looking at a window. I could see the lines dividing the panes but a curtain was blocking the view inside. The light had a flickering quality to it. It must be a fireplace. After a few minutes it went dark for a moment and then the light appeared again. It wasn’t until the second time it happened before I figured out Frank must have walked between the fireplace and the window. I made some marks on the ground to help me find it again in the morning and then we went back to our camp.
Our fire was out and I could see that Patricia and Jason were “snuggling” under their blankets. We politely waited for them to finish though Pam suggested several times, that as long as we were waiting we might find something more entertaining to do.
A while later we gathered around the campfire. When I told Jason what we had found he was all for getting down there now and having a confrontation. When I pointed out that we had not brought any weapons with us and we knew that Frank definitely had a revolver, and probably had the couple of rifles that we later found were missing from the house, it would be a good idea to give this some thought and not be too hasty. Jason calmed down but I could see he was still annoyed. He and Frank had never gotten along. But then I could not think of anyone who had got along with Frank. It was getting late and we were going to have a long ride home tomorrow so we finally called it a night.
The next morning I woke before sunrise. Pam was lying beside me, asleep, warm and inviting, but first-things first. I left the camp and went back to the cliff. I watched as the sun slowly rose, waiting until it was light enough to see. The side of the mountain slowly came out of the shadows. I began looking with the scope on low power. It took a minute to relocate house. A tree covered most of the view of the building from our direction, but if you knew it was there, you could see it. I stepped up the power and it was almost like I was standing beside the house. I could see some signs of life. It looked like a garden had been worked in. I saw a fenced pasture with livestock in it that could not have been in there very long. No sign of Frank though. No smoke from the chimney. It took over an hour for him to appear. If I had taken a break I would have missed him. He walked out of the house and went over to a barn. He was inside less than a minute and then went back to the house.
Now that I was sure, I slowly began taking the telescope apart again. Should I go down and force his hand, make him move across the valley? But what good would it do? Plus my advice to Jason still held; Frank had weapons and we did not. Other than just putting him farther away from us, was I just trying to feed my ego by getting him to do what I told him to do? Or would it be better to let him have his little victory? The net result was that he was away from us. That is what I wanted to accomplish.
By the time I had finished packing I had decided to leave him be. If circumstances changed we could always come back now that we knew where he was. When I got back to the camp I saw that Jason and Patricia were awake and from the way their blanket was moving around they might need several more minutes before they would be ready to leave. When I took a second look I revised my estimate, they might need a half hour. I think our rabbits back at the house had more willpower then Jason and Patricia.
Pam was awake, lying on her side, watching Jason and her sister. When I got to her she lifted the blanket, inviting me back in. I smiled at her and said, “It is very tempting, but we should get ready to go”.
Pam pointed at her sister and brother, “I think we have the time. Besides old man, you can’t last very long anyway, can you”? And, as things turned out, she was right. I did not last very long. Though I would like to think that was more due to her efforts than to my age. I do think I gave her the pounding she deserved for calling me an old man.
One the way home Jason renewed his argument that we should force Frank to move on. I tried to get him to just let it be but I could see that it irked him that Frank could feel that he got the upper hand on us. I was content that I knew where he was and that he was far enough away from us that he was not a concern.
Once we were packed and on the road home Pam sat behind me. Most of the way home she had one arm wrapped around my stomach and the other between my legs, wrapped around my dick. When I told her it was not nice keeping me hard this long she suggested we stop and fix it so that it would not be so hard. I guess I hesitated too long in answering and she took that as a yes, because she managed to get up on her knees behind me and tried to move around in front of me. All she managed to do was to almost fall off the horse. She leaned close to my ear and said, “Well, are you going to help or not”? My mind was not really made up until she nibbled on my earlobe and then ran her tongue around the inside of my ear. I reached back, took her by the waist and swung her around me so she was facing me, her thighs on top of mine. She giggled, “I saw Jason and my sister do it this way on our way out. It looked like fun”.
I had thought it looked like fun also. “Any time I’m in you, it’s bound to be fun”. I just hoped we would not scare the horse.
She put her arms on my shoulders and lifted herself up a bit, wrapping her legs around my waist. “You are so sweet”. She lifted up just a bit more until her breasts were right at the level of my face. “Now don’t talk with your mouth full”.
I started to say my mouth isn’t full but only got as far as “My mouff” when she leaned forward and slid a nipple right into my open mouth. I sucked more of her breast into my mouth and then ran my tongue around and over her nipple for a bit. She was right. I should not talk with my mouth full.
She pulled back a few inches from me and then pushed the other breast towards me, “Now the other one”. As I repeated the treatment to that one she began pushing herself against me. I could feel her pelvis push tight against my stomach, her pussy shoved up right against me, her whole crotch felt so hot. Then she slid down a few inches, rubbing her pussy against me before lifting up and then repeating the motion several times. She finally gave a little low moan and then said, “I’m ready now”. She lowered herself a few inches as she was moving her pelvis around trying to find me. She did not have to look far. Once she got everything lined, up she lowered herself on me. And she was right. She was ready, very ready. I easily slide right into her, not stopping until I bottomed out in her. She ground herself around on me for a few seconds and then stopped. She looked up at me, pulled my head down to her, and began softly kissing me. After a bit she stopped and just rested her head on my shoulder.
The horse had continued walking this entire time. I had one hand on the reins and the other wrapped around her, holding her tight to me. We found very quickly that we really did not need to do anything. The motion of the horse was all we needed. Just sitting on the horse while it walked, had us rocking back and forth against each other. I might slide out an inch but the next step drove me back into her. We continued like that, the horse rocking us, sometimes kissing gently, sometimes passionately, for what felt like hours, but surely wasn’t. My brain would have atrophied from lack of blood by then. Pam finally reached the point of cumming. I could feel her begin to add her own movements to what we were getting from the horse. I quickly wrapped the reins around the pommel so I could use both hands. She pushed her face hard into my chest. “Daddy, I’m cumming”. She pulled herself tight against me and held herself there. I could feel a pulse going through her as she climaxed. Each time it hit her she would try and push me deeper into her. Gradually she relaxed, leaning back away from me; my hands holding her, again letting the horse provide all the movement she needed as the feeling slowly passed in her.
Then she perked up, “Okay Daddy, your turn”. She pulled herself back up tight against me. I expected her to begin sliding up and down on me but she had a surprise for me. She just held me tight and then I began feeling her pussy grab me. It was like a fist was squeezing me and then relaxing. She did this over and over. I had been close to cumming for a while now but this was quickly bringing things to a head.
“Where did you learn how to do that”? I gasped.
“Mom told me about it. Do you like it”?
It was all I could do not to cum right then. I was trying to delay it so I could feel this for a while longer. “That feels great. Wait, your mom told you”?
“Yes. She told me how to do it and then told me to save it for a special occasion. Happy Birthday, special occasion”.
Before I could say anything else she began squeezing me faster. That was the last straw. I let my hands drop to her butt and pulled her tighter against me. Then I had that feeling, like when you pull a rubber band so tight it finally breaks. It was like an explosion went off inside my cock. I could feel the sperm begin coursing out of my body into hers. It felt like all the fluid in my body was being sucked out of me into her.
We held each other tight as the horse continued on the path. After a few minutes I could feel myself deflating. I would be sliding out of her any minute. The return of blood to my system must have brought my brain back to life because I finally noticed the sound of another horse behind us. I whispered to Pam, “Would you look over my shoulder? Are they right behind us”?
When she rose up to look I finally slipped out of her. She looked back down at me with a little pout on her face, “Oh put him back. I might not have been done with him yet”. I leaned forward and gave her breast a little nip in response. “Just for that I think I’ll stay right here the rest of the way home”.
I looked up at her, “Don’t kid yourself. I think you liked it. Now are they behind us”?
She rose up again and I could feel her wave. I guess that answered that question. Now I wondered how long had they been there. Just as I was about to ask how far back they were Jason and Patricia come along side us. They both had big grins on their face. I guess that answers the question of how long they had been in sight of us.
Jason spoke up, “Kind of nice that way, isn’t it”?
He had an infectious smile and I couldn’t help smiling myself. I nodded yes and then Pam and I worked on getting her turned around to face forward.
It had been a nice break but now the day began to stretch on. We continued right through lunch, wanting to get home. We only stopped to rest the horses on occasion and let them have some water. When we came up the final rise, bringing the house in view, it was getting pretty dark.
When we finally arrived in front of the house a crowd came out to greet us. Mikey, the girl’s mother, met us first. She looked at Pam and Patricia and then at me, “I hope you had a good birthday”.
I could not help smiling, “The best”.
I got off the horse and helped Pam down. She leaned over to me and whispered, “I’ve had you pretty much to myself for the last week or so. I know some of the girls will have missed you. I’ll give them a week and then I want to spend some time with you”.
“I’m looking forward to that” I said and gave her a quick kiss on the cheek.
A couple of the kids took the horses and the gear to be put away while we went inside and shared what we had learned. There were mixed feelings. They were split like Jason and I. Some felt that it was okay and others felt that Frank was getting away with something and should be made to move on, be taught a lesson. I felt any lesson would be lost on him. Eventually my argument won out. It was getting late so everyone started drifting away to get ready for bed.
I went out on the porch and sat in a rocker and watched some of the kids play out in the yard. They would stay out until they could not see their hand in front of their face if we let them. There were several large trees out there from which we had hung tire swings. Some of the older kids were pushing the little ones to cries of †˜higher, higher’, and screams of delight’.
I thought again of what Pam had said earlier. Over the years I have had sex with almost all of the girls, and I enjoyed it every time, no complaints on my side. But I was always moving from girl to girl. I rarely spent more than a week with any one of them and many times in the last few years it was just a night or two with the younger ones who were coming of age. Earlier it had all been centered on the girls getting pregnant, growing our numbers quickly. Now it seemed the emphasis was more on having fun. And I had to admit it was fun. But it felt like I was missing something. The week and a half with Pam was the longest I had been with one of the girls in a long time. I had really enjoyed it with her and it seemed like she had also. It made me wonder. We still had a shortage of males to females so it would probably be looked at as being selfish if I wanted to be with just one girl all the time but maybe there is another girl or two out there who felt the same and we could make a small group.
Megan came out and sat beside me. We made small talk for a while before she got to what was on her mind. “Karen has been sleeping with me while you were gone. She wakes up almost every night crying. She’s still having nightmares. Just eleven and getting attacked like that, I’d have nightmares also. A couple of times she asked me if you really meant it when you said she could sleep with you if she did not feel safe”.
“Sure, you know I meant it”.
Megan nodded, “I’ll let her know you said that. Maybe that will help her sleep better”.
It was getting pretty late so I got up to go to bed. The kids were still out playing but I was beat. A week-plus with Pam, followed by the ride home had tired me out. I was lying in bed, about to drift off when I heard a small knock at the door. “Come in”.
The door opened and I could see Karen standing there in an oversized t-shirt, Megan standing behind her. Karen stepped in but did not say anything. Megan spoke up first, “Karen wanted to say goodnight to you”. I sat up in bed and held out my arms to her. That was all she needed. She ran over to me and I gave her a big hug. “Honey, would you like to stay here with me tonight”? She looked up at me with a big smile and nodded her head. I turned to Megan and asked, “Would you mind if Karen sleeps with me tonight”?
Megan answered, “I think that is a great idea”. As she turned to leave she said, “I’ll see you two in the morning”.
Once Megan was gone Kathy snuggled up against me and went right to sleep. We had been asleep for several hours and Karen must have moved away from me in the bed. She woke up and was far enough away from me that she did not feel me around her. She woke me with a scream, “Daddy. Daddy, where are you”.
I reached out to her and pulled her to me. “I’m right here. I would not leave you”. She moved into my arms and fell back asleep. This was repeated for the next two nights. On the fourth night she finally slept through the night without waking.
Life pretty much had returned to normal at home. My only problem now was to figure out what how to convince the family we needed to split up to survive. There was still some resistance to breaking the family up. They just did not seem to have the foresight to see what the future held for us the way we were growing. Jason, Paul and a few others made a trip down to town and I had them get some books for me from the local library. I wanted to see what I could find out about businesses in our part of the valley.
We were having a hotter than normal summer and today had been particularly brutal. I had been out with several of my older sons repairing fences. Livestock and the weather gradually took their toll. Even though we had stopped during the hottest part of the afternoon, I was beat by the time we finished for the day. When I got home I took a shower to cool off, ate a small dinner and then just went to bed. It was so hot that I pulled all the covers off the bed. Karen was outside playing so I stayed up for a while reading from a couple of the books Jason and Paul brought back for me. I was having trouble staying awake so I put the books aside, turned off the light and went to sleep.
I was having a great dream. A couple of the girls were holding me down and giving me a fantastic blowjob. Just as I reached the point in my dream where I was going to cum, dammit, I always woke up then, so of course, I woke up. You know that feeling where you have just woken up from a dream and you are trying to get back in it? That was what I was doing. I wanted to feel those lips again. It had been over a week for a guy that was used to having sex almost every day and night. I was going through withdrawal.
Then I realized I’m not dreaming the hand that is going up and down my cock. It felt so good. Whoever it was must have been doing it for a while because I was well lubricated. Maybe Pam finally came over, or one of the other girls. I kind of hoped it was Pam. I must have moved because then I heard Karen’s voice, “Daddy, are you awake”?
“Honey, what are you doing”?
“I just wanted to know how it felt. I’ve never really touched a penis before. Frank stuck it in my mouth, and, then, you know, tried to stick it in me. But I never really touched it, you know, with my hand”. Then I could feel her fingers moving around on me. “It was so soft when I started but now it is really hard”.
“Honey, you should not be doing this”. Even while saying the words I did not move her hand away. It felt so good. I could feel that electric zing going through me. It would take just another minute and I would be cumming.
“I’ve watched some of my sisters and brothers. Am I doing this right”? Her little hand started moving up and down my cock; the electric charge building.
“Yes honey, you are doing it right”. I started raising my hips slightly each time as her hand went down. “You should stop now or I’ll make a mess in the bed”.
“That’s okay Daddy. I know what to do”.
Before I had time to think about what she said I let out a grunt and brought my hips up sharply. She moved over me and I felt something hot and wet engulf the head of my cock. I looked down and saw she had moved over to take the head of my cock in her mouth. I did not have time to think of anything else when her tongue ran around the head, the built-up electricity suddenly discharged and I started to pump sperm in her mouth. Her tongue continued moving around the head as my sperm went out over and around, coating her tongue. When I had finished she carefully pulled her mouth back, keeping her lips tight against my cock, until she finally had me out of her mouth. Her lips were still tightly closed. I saw her cheeks bulge a bit as she moved her tongue around in her mouth. She visibly swallowed and then moved up to lay along side me.
“Daddy, did I do it right? Sometimes one of the boys comes into our bedroom to be with one of my sisters”. Karen shared a bedroom with three sisters, one her age and two others that I thought must be fourteen or fifteen. “Sometimes they are on top of the covers and I’ve watched what they do, but I did not know if I was doing it right. Cindy always spits the sperm out when the boy squirts it in her mouth but Debbie swallows it. I wanted to see what it tasted like; what yours tasted like. A couple of times the boys tried to get in bed with me when my sisters were already with someone but I didn’t let them. I wanted to do it with you first”.
“Well, yes honey. You did it just right. But you are too young for this. We cannot do this again. Do you understand? I will get in big trouble with your mother. I know I look pretty big to you but she will beat my butt like a drum if she knew what we were just doing. You need to wait a few more years”.
“I know Daddy. I was just curious. I didn’t think you would wake up. I didn’t like it when Frank made me do it. That wasn’t right, and he’s mean. It was fun with you though. I wasn’t sure it would be, but it was. Besides, I had my birthday and I’m over twelve now. It won’t be long”.
I have to admit it was a nice way to end a day. She moved up next to me and we both drifted off to sleep. When I woke up at daybreak, Karen was already up and gone. Her chores this week included collecting eggs and then helping fix breakfast so she had an early start.
After a good breakfast I joined my sons and we continued working on the fences. It was another hot day, though this time we got smart, quit early, and then moved to some work in the shade when it got hot. I called it an early night once again after dinner and was on my way to bed when I met Jason in the hallway. He asked if I wanted to join a bunch of them in the gym. Oh great, the last thing I needed was to go play some basketball with the boys on a hot day. “No, I’m beat. I think I’ll just go to bed early”.
“Dad, I think you’ll…”
“That’s okay son, maybe another time”.
Last year we had built an extension to the house. It was a large one-room building, connected to the house by a hallway. The room was about 30 feet square and was used for classes and as a gym. When the little kids were using it mats were pulled out to cover the floor so they could take naps.
As I was turning to walk away, Jason and several of the boys, followed by around twice as many girls, started down the hall to the gym. I hope the girls get to play too and that the boys don’t make them just sit and watch.
For the next couple of weeks things were fairly uneventful. Karen did not have any further bouts of curiosity. She began alternating with Megan and I, spending a week with me and then a week with Megan. When she was with Megan some of the other girls would come and stay with me, usually just a day or two, sometimes longer. Pam had not come as she said she would and I found I was disappointed. I was looking forward to being with her. She probably was busy with the other boys. I couldn’t really complain. I was with other girls all the time, how could I expect her to come to me whenever I wanted.
Our numbers were gradually changing now. We now had one male for every two females if you counted everyone. Nature appeared to be doing her job. In the beginning we needed females and that is what we got. Now we need more males and she is answering once again. The ratio in the group over fourteen was still one male to about every five females, but that would change as the younger ones got older. I guess I will just have to rough it until they arrive to help. It’s a dirty job but someone has to do it.
I was on my way to my bedroom one night when Jason once again passed me on the way to the gym with a group his brothers and sisters. I politely turned down their invitation to join them and continued on my way to bed. When I got there, Beth, one of Sharon’s younger daughters, thankfully over fourteen, was waiting for me. We had been together a couple of months earlier. She had wanted to get pregnant but had been unsuccessful so far. I had assumed she had been spending time with one of the younger boys since she had not come back to my bed. Whatever the reason, I was happy to find her there, she was, how do you say, enthusiastic in bed. After a strenuous bout of lovemaking we both drifted off to sleep.
I could not have been asleep long. I was still feeling the effects of our earlier activity when I felt her moving around on top of me, trying to wake me. And Beth, climbing on top of you, was bound to wake anyone up. She was sitting astride me with her hands on the bed under my armpits, her breasts dangling in my face. She ran one nipple over my lips and I sucked it into my mouth. Then she pulled back up, stretching her nipple out until I let it go with a pop, followed by running the other nipple over my lips. It appeared I was rising to the occasion, not quite there, but just about, when I felt her begin to dig her pelvis around trying to find me and get me back into her. Unfortunately I was not quite there yet so the poor boy was lying on my stomach and not sticking up in the air where she was busy rooting around.
With a little frustration in her voice she said, “Why don’t you help me”?
I was trying to get my arms down to help with some guidance but her arms blocked mine. Just as I was trying to figure out how to get my arms around hers, I felt her grab me in her fist and begin rubbing the head of my cock against her pussy. That got me to full attention. She then pushed back against me, pushing me half way inside her, and let out a long groan, followed by “Oh thank you, I needed that”.
I heard a familiar voice down towards my feet say “You’re welcome”.
Oh god, when had Karen come in? “Karen, you know you should not be in here”.
Beth, who had begun thrusting her hips at me so that I was now deep inside of her said, “Oh Daddy, let her stay. She has already helped. And besides, I know you have had two girls with you before”.
“Yes Daddy. Let me stay. Maybe I can help again”.
I tried to protest “But she’s too young, and the two girls were both older”. Beth sat up on me and put her arms at her side. I would have said more but by now Beth was moving faster, grinding her pelvis against me. I guess Karen will not see anything she has not seen before. She’ll just be closer.
Karen had moved around alongside Beth and was watching her. She reached out and touched one of Beth’s nipples and said, “Your nipple is really hard. Does that always happen when you have sex”?
Beth opened her eyes to look at Karen. She slowly nodded and said, “So is the other one”. Beth turned her body slightly towards Karen.
Karen reached out with her other hand and touched Beth’s other nipple. She started to pull her hands away and Beth reached out to stop her. “It’s okay. It feels good when you do that”.
Karen began rubbing each of Beth’s breasts. Beth reached over to Karen, and with her hands on her waist, pulled Karen towards her. Karen lifted one leg and moved over and sat on my stomach, facing Beth, just inches away from her. Karen continued rubbing Beth’s nipples, “Your breasts are big. I wish mine were as big as yours”.
“Oooohhhhhhh, that’s nice. Don’t worry yours will get bigger this year or next”.
Karen looked down at herself, “I don’t know. I’m pretty flat. Andrea, she is twelve, and she is almost as big as you”.
I watched as Beth’s hands moved up from Karen’s waist to her chest and then moved around to the front where I could not see. “Does this feel good”?
Karen leaned back towards me, arching her back. “Oh yes. That feels really good”. That surprised me. Beth is rubbing Karen’s breasts, and she likes it. Apparently they both do.
“Well see, the size does not matter much, it is how it feels. Besides, it is only the guys and the babies who care about the size anyway; guys to play with and babies to drink from. Now how about leaning over and giving mine a kiss”.
I watched as Beth moved her hands from Karen’s chest and then felt her slide a hand between my stomach and Karen’s crotch. When Karen jumped Beth asked, “Do you want me to move my hand”?
I could feel Beth’s fingers moving in a slow circle. Karen replied, “No, you just surprised me. It’s okay. You can leave it there. It feels good”.
“That’s kind of what Daddy feels like in me, only Daddy feels a bit better, and much bigger”.
I was beginning to feel left out, “Only a bit better”?
Beth looked around Karen at me, “Now Daddy. This is just girl talk. Of course you feel much better. This is Karen’s first time at this. She needs to learn a few things. You just lay back and enjoy this. I know I’m going to”.
Beth had slowed down on me while she was talking to Karen. Now she began picking up speed, rocking her hips back and forth and then in tight circles on me. Karen had her face in Beth’s chest. I could only assume she was sucking on Beth’s nipples. Karen was also beginning to squirm around on my stomach. We continued like this for several more minutes until Karen began bucking hard on me, pushing down on Beth’s fingers. I could hear little squeals coming from her. When she slowed down and then relaxed, Karen leaned forward to Beth and hugged her, “Congratulations. That was your first orgasm. Now it’s my turn. Move over off Daddy”.
Karen got off me and lay down beside me, still breathing hard. “I always wondered what one felt like. I’ve seen the other girls have one but wondered when I would”.
Beth had closed her eyes and was beginning to rock back and forth faster on me, grinding her pelvis against me. A bit breathlessly she said, “Daddy is great for orgasms. He always lets you cum first. The other boys aren’t so considerate. Most of them will just jump on you, pump it in and out for a while, leave their stuff in you and then they are done, whether you are or not. Daddy will let you cum as many times as you want”.
Now that my ego was too big to fit through any doorways, I thought I should reward her. I moved one hand down to her stomach and rubbed it firmly, right where the head of my cock must be. The other hand moved back and forth from one breast to the other, teasing her nipples, firmly squeezing her breasts.
She pushed hard down on me and said, “Daddy, I’m cumming”. She grimaced like she was in pain and hunched over me. She held the position for several seconds, squeezing me with her thighs, and then collapsed on me. She lay there breathing hard for a minute then said, “Okay Daddy, now your turn”. She leaned over and whispered something in Karen’s ear that I could not hear. Karen giggled and Beth moved back on top of me. “Daddy, you just lie still and let us do everything”. She began gently sliding up and down on me, letting my cock slide almost out of her and then all the way back into her. I just lay there with my eyes closed and my arms spread on the bed, enjoying the sensations she was sending through me.
I had not noticed Karen had moved until a warm hand cupped my balls. The shock made me jump. I started to say something but Karen stopped me, “Let her. It was my idea. She wanted to help. It is helping isn’t it”?
I had to admit it sent chills through me. When Beth moved up on me I could feel Karen’s hand slide up my cock, squeezing me, sometimes just running a finger or two up my shaft. Then Beth would push back down, pushing Karen’s hand back down. The feeling was getting too much for me. I moved my hands to Beth’s butt, pulling her tight to me as I began thrusting into her. It was only seconds before I began picking up speed, thrusting harder. Then Karen circled her thumb and forefinger around the base of my cock and I couldn’t take any more. I began sending streams of sperm through the circle of Karen’s fingers into Beth’s pussy. When I was finished Karen gave my balls one last caress and then moved up beside me.
“Beth, did Daddy put his sperm in you”?
Beth, still lying on top of me, turned her head towards Karen. “He sure did. Didn’t you feel it when you put your fingers where I told you”?
“Yes, I felt something. It was like when water goes through a hose, but it was in spurts”.
“Well if you think about it, it is just like water going through a hose. It just isn’t water and it’s better than a hose”. With that they both began giggling.
“Beth, are you pregnant now”?
“I don’t know. It takes a while to find out”.
I just lay there listening to them talk. It was kind of funny in a way. It was like you were the fly on the wall listening in on a conversation. Except this fly was on the bed with his cock still buried in a young girl’s pussy. They continued whispering back and forth as I drifted off. I woke up a few hours later and they were both asleep, snuggled up on either side of me. I thought about how lucky I was and then drifted back to sleep.
Beth came back the next few nights. Karen was doing much better and without anything being said, returned to her own bedroom. As it turned out, Beth did get pregnant; one more girl passing through.
I was alone in my bedroom a couple nights later when Pam came in and shut the door. She came over and sat on the side of the bed. “Do you remember what we talked about when we returned from the cliff”?
“Yes I do. I thought you were going to come and spend some time with me. You didn’t so I thought maybe you had changed your mind”.
“No, I did not change my mind. I did not want to interfere with Karen. She needed you more at the time. Plus, I wanted to give you some time to be sure you would really want me around more. Then when I was ready Beth was monopolizing you”.
“I’m sorry. I didn’t know”.
“That’s okay. I don’t mind sharing you a bit. They are my sisters and there are not enough guys to go around. I just want more of you for me, that is, if you want more of me”.
I laughed, “I did not know there was more of you to be had”.
She poked me in the ribs, “You know what I mean. I’m serious”.
The last words came out softly, “Yes, I do want more of you”.
She got up, turned out the light, got into bed and moved up next to me. “I am so glad to hear that because there is going to be more of me to get. I’m pregnant. It must have been that horse ride”. That memory brought smiles to both of our faces.
We made love slowly that night, savoring the feeling. Afterwards, as she drifted off to sleep, I lay there wondering how our lives might change from this point. So far no one had really paired off, or, if not pairs, settled as a small group. It would be interesting. With those thoughts still bouncing around in my head I finally drifted off to sleep.
The days had started getting shorter though the temperatures were still warm. Most of our summer work was finished. The harvests were all in. If we got anything more it would be gravy. We had moved the livestock from the higher pastures down where the weather would be gentler to them. We could all take it a bit easier now.
For the last couple of months I had been turning down Jason and Paul’s invitations to join them in the gym. They seemed to come every Friday. Tonight was Friday and I thought I’d finally join in if they asked. I have not played basketball with them since right after we built the gym. I could use some fun.
After dinner I went to my bedroom to get a pair of shorts and some shoes. Most of the boys I had seen going to the gym were wearing shorts and shoes. I guess it could get a little uncomfortable with a dick slapping around while you were playing. The girls were a real mix. Most of the older girls still wore little if any clothing except when it got cold. Many of the younger girls now wore some clothing, even in the summer. It was a funny thing. I was used to seeing the girls naked all these years, and I got a sexual rise when I thought about them sexually. But seeing some of the girls clothed all the time could get me aroused even more, just wondering what their uncovered body looked like.
I was going through my closet looking for a pair of shorts I liked when Pam came in and asked, “What are you looking for”?
“I’m looking for those purple shorts,” I said.
She poked her head in the closet and pointed, “They are over there”. I found them, stepped out of the closet and put them on. “What do you need them for”?
I sat on the bed and started putting on my shoes. “Jason and Paul have been after me for quite a while to play some basketball in the gym. I thought I would join them tonight and have a little fun”.
“Isn’t today Friday”?
“I think so. Yes, I’m sure it is”.
“I don’t think they play basketball on Friday’s, but go ahead. I’m sure you will have fun”. She came up to me and put her arms around my neck, pressing her breasts into my chest and kissed me. “You always could stay here and have some fun. I’m sure I could give you the exercise you need”.
I smiled at her and then rubbed her big tummy. Yes, that would be fun indeed. “I’ll try and not play too long. I’ll be back soon. They usually start around 8 o’clock and it is just past that now”.
She gave me a little smile, “You might be surprised. Friday nights in the gym can get pretty wild. You might not have anything left for me later. But I might come over in a while and watch”.
“I save some energy for you” I assured her. Then with a kiss on her bare tummy and a quick pat on her butt, I was out the door. I went through the house, past the kitchen, to the hallway that connected the gym to the house. We had built the connection hallway so that we could get to the gym even in bad weather. The hallway was a good forty feet long. As I approached the end of it I was surprised not to hear the sound of a bouncing basketball. They must be between games.
When I reached the door, I turned the doorknob and pulled the door open. The scene was so unexpected that at first I did not know what I was looking at. There seemed to be a sea of naked bodies in front of me. There were bodies lying on top of each other, side by side, sitting on one another. I could not see a stitch of clothing on anyone.
Just a few feet to my right I could see a woman that I was guessing was one of my sisters. I guessed because she was facing away from me and I could not see her face though I could tell she was much older than the other girls in here. She was on her hands and knees between the spread legs of one of the younger boys. It looked like Jimmy, fifteen, one of Shelly’s boys. He had his eyes closed and his mouth open as her head bobbed up and down on his cock. Behind her, Jimmy’s seventeen-year-old brother David was on his knees moving up closer to her. His cock was as hard as it would ever get in his lifetime and I could see that he was moving up to fuck her from behind. I continued watching him as he got right behind her, put his hands on her hips and positioned himself to plunge into her. When the head of his cock touched her pussy she waved one hand back at him like she was trying to wave him off. He did not even notice. His attention was on getting that cock into her pussy. He moved a bit closer and then pulled back on her hips and thrust forward at the same time. In one smooth stroke he was buried in her. He held her hips tight against him. I could tell he was just enjoying the sensation of being buried so deep inside of her. The thrust had a different effect upon her though. Her head popped up off of Jimmy. She turned around to see who was fucking her and I got my second surprise, though not my last one of the night. It was my sister Shelly. She was sucking off one of her sons and getting fucked by another at the same time. She motioned at David to stop but he had his eyes closed and was beginning to thrust faster into her. I could see him bury himself right up to his balls in her. Seeing she could not stop him, and from the look on her face, deciding she did not want to, she went back to Jimmy’s cock. It was just a minute before David was slamming so hard into her she could not keep her mouth on Jimmy. She lay her head down on Jimmy’s stomach and let David pound her.
I could see Jimmy attention had wandered and he slid out from under his mother’s head. Just inside the door there were seven or eight girls sitting on the floor just in front of me to my left. They must be the second string waiting to go in. As soon as Jimmy had slid away from his mother two of the girls got up and moved over to him. One of them immediately sat down and impaled herself on his cock and began rocking back and forth on him. The other girl moved around to his head and knelt above him facing the other girl. The girls began kissing each other and rubbing each other’s breasts while Jimmy began licking the pussy above him.
I looked back at Shelly and her son just as he started cumming in her. This was some basketball game. As I looked around the room I could see that there were around fifteen of the boys there. With each one of them there were two girls and with a couple of the boys there were three. There were girl’s knees up in the air, legs up in the air, girls sitting on cocks, and sitting on quite a few faces. On the far side of the room I spotted one of my other sisters, Susan, lying on her back with one of the teenage boys on top of her, his hips pounding at her. I watched for a moment as he finished and rolled off of her. Another of the boys, dick at full attention, was crawling by at the moment, headed for two girls in the corner, saw Susan still lying on her back with her knees up in the air, changed directions and crawled right up on top of her. He just slid right into her and continued the pounding she had been getting earlier.
By the back wall were three girls that apparently did not need any guys, or at the least, were tired of waiting for one. They formed a kind of triangle with a head buried between each pair of thighs.
I must have made some sound because a couple of the girls sitting in front of me turned their heads and saw me standing there. They nudged the other girls and suddenly they all got up and surrounded me. “Daddy, you made it. Come join us”. A girl grabbed each arm, and began pulling me. I felt my shorts drop to my knees. There were so many girls around me I did not even know which one had pulled them down. As I stepped out of them someone was pulling my shoes off. Then two girls were behind me pushing at me, and one, and honestly, I did not even know I was hard, grabbed my very hard cock and pulled me over to where they had been sitting. Before I knew it I was flat on my back and they were arguing over who was going to go first. “I saw him first”. “No you didn’t, I did”. One of the smarter girls did not bother to argue. She just climbed on me and with one well-placed squat, put me halfway inside of her. “Oh Daddy. That’s perfect”. She was a bit tight and it took her several pushes to get me all the way inside of her. By now the other girls saw what was happening and their cries changed to “Don’t let Daddy cum. We all want a turn”.
All I could think of was that there were six of them. They’d kill me before I could satisfy all of them. Then I remembered the boy with the two girls. I looked around me. All I could see were breasts and nipples everywhere. I reached out for the closest girl and pulled her over until her pussy was right above me. I started moving my tongue around her pussy slowly. I sucked her labia into my mouth and then ran my tongue into her pussy as far as I could reach, sweeping up and down her slit. After a few minutes she began to squirm. Now it was time. I started flicking my tongue across her clitoris, then in circles around it. I could hear moaning but was not sure if it was from the one on my face or sitting on my cock. I could tell from her movements she had to be close also. They both came minutes apart and two more took their place as soon as they could get the first two to move. And so we continued. I was getting worried about what would happen after everyone had a turn. Would they want seconds? Would I pass out from dehydration? When the last two girls were having their turn I was saved by the arrival of a couple new boys. The first four girls immediately grabbed them before anyone else saw them and moved over to an empty corner.
I was down to my last ride. She had started out very slowly, rocking back and forth with my cock inside of her. Then she slid off me to one side and pulled at me to get me on her. As I moved above her she spread her legs out wide. When I settled in on top of her she brought her legs up and locked her ankles behind me back. I slowly lowered my weight on her and began pumping into her. “Fuck me Daddy”. Every few strokes she would repeat it. “Fuck me harder Daddy”. I did my best to accommodate.
She tilted her pelvis up to me as I was driving into her, putting hard pressure on her clitoris. “Oh yes Daddy, fuck me”. I was trying hard not to cum but after three pussies wrapped around my cock I just could not wait any longer, I surrendered and let myself go inside of her. As the sperm gushed out of me I grabbed her hips and began grinding against her clitoris. It worked as she gave a little gasp and began thrusting with me. Over the next thirty seconds she began pushing harder and harder with me until she finally arched her back and to my dismay, sank her nails into my back. She finally relaxed, unlocked her legs and lay there breathing hard. I had stayed hard enough for her to finish but the nails had ended that.
“Daddy, you need to come back next week. The other boys don’t fuck me like that”.
“I don’t know. I think I’m going to take up badminton. Basketball might be a little too hard on me”.
“What”?
“Never mind, private joke”.
I looked around the room again. Several of the girls had left but it looked like all the boys were still there. The room was almost down to one-to-one. In fact there were a couple of unpaired boys in a far corner. “Hey, Dad’s finished for the night but I see a couple of boys over there who look interested”.
She raised her head, “Where”?
I moved my head slightly towards them. She looked around at them and then back to me. “You don’t mind”?
“Of course not. Go get’em tiger”.
She smiled and gave me a kiss on the lips. Then she moved off me and began moving towards the two boys. Two images quickly went through my mind; that of a tiger stalking its prey, and two honeybees pollinating a flower. I was not sure which was more appropriate. I finally decided they were both right.
I took one last look around and saw two girls to my right look my way. Before they could get up I got to my feet and scooted out the door. No shame in a strategic retreat. I was finished pollinating flowers for the night and did not want to be prey. As I walked down the hall I met Jason walking back to the gym with a big platter of fruit in his hands. “Glad to see you could make it Dad”.
“You might have told me you guys weren’t playing basketball in the gym”.
Jason laughed, “I never said we were playing basketball. I hope you weren’t disappointed”.
I had to smile. “I wouldn’t say disappointment is what I’m feeling right now”.
Jason started to move past me, “I’d better get in there. Some of the guys are getting pretty dehydrated. Are you coming back next week”?
I stepped aside so he could get the platter through, “We’ll see if I’ve recovered by then”.
When I got back to my bedroom Pam was already asleep. I got in bed and moved up behind her, put my arm around her waist and up between her breasts to her shoulder. In a sleepy voice she said, “I must have fell asleep. How was basketball”?
I could swear she was smiling as she said it. “It was fine. But I think I might have to go back to bucking hay to get a rest from that game”.
I could not see it, but I could hear the smile in her voice, “I’m not saying I told you so, but, I told you so”. What could I say? I just hugged her and we both dropped off to sleep.
Over the winter I studied all the books on the valley the boys had brought back for me. A plan was forming in my mind of how we could disperse to our advantage and not just spread out. From the books I learned there where a number of industries and businesses in the area that we could take advantage. There were huge amounts of rice grown in the central valley. There were also huge fruit orchards and vegetable fields up and down the valley. There were even several dehydrators out there. We would not be able to use the natural gas they had but we could utilize much of the equipment and we always had the sun. There was a farm museum about fifty miles from us that had a huge amount of horse drawn farm equipment. And just fifteen miles from us was a historical site that had a water-driven sawmill. And not too far from there was another site that had a water-driven mill for grinding grain into flour.
Once spring arrived we began checking these out. It took the first month to get around and check out all the sites I had identified as our best bets. All the sites looked promising but we decided that the rice fields and the fruit orchards would help us the most in the least amount of time. Along with the orchards we also found vast fields with vegetables.
Then we reached the tough part; who goes where? I had been mulling on this for over a year and it still was not a clear decision. We finally decided to break along the lines of what our objectives were. We decided that being able to harvest rice was the most important and then the orchards and vegetables. Later we would tackle the mills and anything else that we found to help us.
There were enough people interested in the adventure that we did not have to force anyone, at least for now. We decided that a cross-section of ages and family lines would make up each group. Regarding the family lines, we had Mikey, Sharon, Janelle and our group, all with different DNA. There would always be more from our family but we added people from each of the other groups for the widest diversity that we could get.
During the middle of the summer, Terri, my youngest sister, and her group left for the valley. Jason and Paul went along for the ride and to help them set up. They did not expect to accomplish much before winter except ready living quarters. I considered going but Pam’s first baby was due in a couple of months and I wanted to be there.
The rest of the year went by uneventfully. When Pam’s time came there were three other of the girls giving birth on the same day. It made things interesting having four girls giving birth in the same room. When that happened in the past usually I was the father in each case. This time I could only take credit for Pam. We had our first girl.
During the winter, Sharon came around several times to talk about her interest in heading up the group that would move out to the orchards. She also asked that if she did go, could Paul also be part of the group. So I was not too surprised a few weeks later when Paul made the same request. It seems that I was not the only one interested in a change in our relationships.
As spring approached once again we were readying the second group to leave. All the equipment they were going to take with them was ready but there were still problems picking the group. There were a number of teenagers and their allegiances changed everyday. One day Bobby like Sally and they wanted to be with each other forever, the next they could not stand the sight of each other.
I was once again out in my thinking chair on the porch, thinking, that is napping, when Sharon found me in the afternoon. “Dan, I think I have a group that will work now. I have tried to remove all the Romeo and Juliets”.
She handed me her list and I looked it over. “Yes. I think this will work. Now that it’s settled, when do you want to go”?
She sat next to me and put her hand on my forearm. “It should be soon. How about two weeks from now”?
“That would be good. It will give you a lot of time to get organized once you get there”. I put my other hand on top of hers and we both rocked slowly together for a few minutes. I thought she said something so I turned to look at her. I could see she was fighting back tears. “I’m going to miss my children. So many of them have to stay. For most of them you are their father. You’ll watch after them”?
“You know I will”.
We talked for a while longer about moving plans, what to expect when they got there. How it will be completely different than whatever we could plan for here. Then dinner time arrived, followed by games with the kids out in the yard.
A few days later I was upstairs in what we called the TV room. It was a large room with plenty of room on the floor for playing and couches along three walls. It was where the kids played games on the floor or watched our old taped movies plus the newer ones we brought back from town. Occasionally I would go up and watch one of the old comedy movies. I was all alone and was watching one of my favorites. I made the mistake of then lying on my side to watch. I should have known better. Every time I do this I fall asleep and this time was no different. I don’t know how long I had been asleep when someone sat down on the couch by my stomach and said, “Can I watch with you Daddy”?
In my fog I recognized Karen’s voice. “Sure honey”. I started to sit up but she put a hand on me to stop me. “That’s okay Daddy. You can lay there”. She moved around and lay in front of me, facing the TV. I decided I would just drift back off and let her watch the movie. I put my arm over hers and across her stomach. Karen was pretty much like me. If it was not freezing she was always without clothes, so when I put my hand down it ended up on bare skin, right below her breasts. I could feel the swell of one of her breasts against my hand. It felt warm and inviting, soft yet firm at the same time. I knew I should not be doing this, Karen was still just thirteen. I was about to move my hand away when one of Karen’s hands lifted mine up and laid it down directly across her breasts. My first thought was, Beth was right. My second thought was, forget that thought, she has nice breasts. We’re just laying here watching a movie and we are alone. Plus it was her idea for my hand to be there I rationalized. Then just to be polite I moved it around a bit over both breasts before cupping one breast in my hand.
Karen squirmed around a bit to get comfortable. She was still a bit short so her butt was sticking back into my stomach even though her head was up by mine. The breast in my hand and the squirming was starting to get a rise out of me, sleep now becoming a distant thought. I could feel myself beginning to poke her in the back of her thighs. She felt it too because she lifted her left leg, then reached down and pulled me straight so I was sticking out between her thighs. When she lowered her leg I was trapped between her thighs, those hot thighs plus her pussy and its heat was against the middle of my shaft. Her fingers began moving around the head of my cock, then down the little bit of the shaft that was sticking out from between her thighs.
I did not think I could get any harder but I was wrong. I could feel an ache now, like my cock was trying to stretch out its skin. Without conscious thought I began ever so slightly pushing against her butt as her fingers danced around my cock. My hands began moving from one breast to the other, caressing the breast then her nipple. She lifted her leg slightly and moved her pelvis forward a bit and then tilted back towards me. When she pushed on the head of my cock again I felt the head slide just a bit into her; just the head. She was so tight that I went in just an inch and stopped. I pulled back so I could push in again and I came out. Karen quickly took the head and pushed it back into her. I slid in just a bit further. Now I could pull back a bit without falling out. I was getting ready to stroke again when Karen pushed back against me, and then again. I began sinking deeper in her. She was so tight it was slow progress. The feeling was so intense I wanted to just thrust hard into her. I wanted my whole shaft to feel that grip. It was difficult to restrain myself but I had to go slowly. If it was this tight I might hurt her.
After a few minutes I realized I was halfway inside of her. I heard her give a little gasp after one stroke, and was just about to ask if she was okay when she bent forward, reached down and cupped my balls in her hand and wrapped her forefinger and thumb around the base of my cock. It brought back memories of her and Beth. I thought she was just going to hold me but I found out different when she began pulling my cock towards her pussy. “Please Daddy, deeper. I want you all the way inside of me”. I needed no further encouragement. I had been trying to be very gentle. Now I began thrusting harder against her. I also wanted to be deeper inside of her. It only took a few strokes before both of our wishes were granted. Karen moved her hand down to just cup my balls as the last of my shaft disappeared in her. Karen’s head pushed back to mine, “Oh Daddy, that’s perfect”.
I began slowly pulling out of her a couple of inches and then sliding back into her. Each time I was about to bottom out in her I added a little thrust, pushing her body up on the couch. I was so focused on the sensations I was getting inside of her that at first I did not even notice several of the kids had come into the room. My head was behind Karen’s so I could not see them but I could hear them when they began talking. It only took a few comments from them to realize that Cindy and Debbie, two of Karen’s roommates, and several of the younger children had come in the room.
I thought maybe what we were doing was hidden from them and would go unnoticed until I heard one of the young children say, “Cindy? Why is Karen’s head bouncing up and down”? As I was wondering what she meant by that, I continued thrusting up into Karen. I finally got a clue when I heard Cindy whisper rather loudly to Debbie, “Deb, look between Karen’s legs”. Then it hit me and I froze. I could hear them giggling. After a few moments and no further movements from me Cindy said, “Hey kids, how about we go outside and Debbie and I’ll push you on the swings really high”? The kids thought that was a great idea and were out of the room in a flash. As Cindy and Debbie were leaving I could hear them whispering to each other, “Who do you think is fucking her”? “I don’t know. I couldn’t see who it is”. Then Debbie made one last comment meant for Karen, “Hey girl, don’t let him push you too high”.
Once they were gone I stayed where I was and did not resume moving in her. I was still a bit embarrassed. Well, not embarrassed enough to pull out of her, just enough not to resume enthusiastically fucking her. Karen had no reservations though. “Come on Daddy, they are gone, don’t stop”.
Just to be sure I did not have other ideas; Karen began pushing her hips back against me. She had just enough room to get me moving in her an inch or so and that was enough. She felt so tight around me I immediately forgot about the other girls; I was focused again, and Karen’s head began bouncing up and down again. Karen leaned forward slightly. I felt her fingers brush against my shaft and I thought she was going to grab me again, I was wrong. Every few seconds her fingers would brush against me. It took me a while to realize she was not reaching for me and missing, she was rubbing herself. Just thinking about that got me hotter; I began thrusting harder in her. I just hoped she finished before I did because I would not be much longer.
I could hear her breathing getting more ragged and she began pushing her pussy down to meet my stroke into her. It was a feeling you wanted to last a long time but we were both too far gone. As she began jerking against me in her climax, I started cumming in her. When I jerked against her as the first stream entered her, I felt her fingers push against the underside of my cock.
We were just lying there afterwards when it occurred to me that we should probably make our strategic retreat before more kids arrived. Before I could say anything Karen said, “That was neat Daddy”.
“Yes. It felt really good to me too”.
“No. I mean I could feel your sperm going into me. That felt really neat”.
I laughed, “I thought it felt pretty neat too”.
Before I could add more we heard footsteps coming up the stairs. We had just enough time to get up and move towards the door before they arrived. A group of our young girls came in as we went out. From the looks and smiles they gave us I guess it was no secret as to what was going on at the movies today.
We were about halfway down the stairs with me in front when Karen let out an “eeuw”.
I turned around and asked, “What’s wrong”?
She was looking down at herself, “I’m leaking. I thought it was supposed to stay inside. How do girls get pregnant if it all leaks out”?
I had to work hard not to laugh out loud. “It’s not all going to leak out, just some of it”. I took her hand and we continued down the stairs.
“It better not. I worked hard for that”.
I turned to her, “You were working”?
She laughed and punched me in the arm, “You know what I mean. I want to have your baby. It was all supposed to stay inside me”.
“Don’t worry. There is plenty there”. She did not seem too convinced so I added, “Do you remember when you thought your breasts would never get bigger? Well they did didn’t they”. When she nodded I reached out and caressed her breasts for a moment. “And very nicely I might add. Well the same thing goes for sperm. When it is time for you to get pregnant there will be plenty”.
When we got to my bedroom Pam was there with the baby. Karen ran over to her and asked to hold the baby. They sat on the bed and talked while I went in the bathroom to take a shower. When I came out the both turned to look at me but did not say anything. “What”?
Pam stood up and came over to me while Karen stayed on the bed with the baby. She took my hands in hers and said, “We have a pretty big bed in here. Do you think there would be room for Karen with us”?
I looked down at her, “I think so if you are sure”.
Pam turned around to Karen, “He said yes”.
Karen jumped up with a squeal and came over and joined in a three-way hug. Well I guess it was a four-way since she was carrying the baby. “Thank you Daddy”.
We all went back and sat on the bed. Pam began feeding the baby while we made small talk. When the topic moved around and finally ended up on the next groups leaving, I left to find Sharon to talk about some last minute plan changes.
I looked around the house but could not find her. After twenty minutes looking around the other buildings and the fields I still had not found her. I poked my head in my old hideaway room in the barn. She was not there but I did surprise Richard, one of her sons, underneath two of the girls. “Oops, Sorry”. I started to close the door.
“Were you looking for something Dad”?
“I was trying to find your mom”.
“Last time I saw her she was headed to her bedroom”.
I said “Thanks” and finished closing the door. From the other side of the closed door I could hear giggles and then a moan from Richard. Obviously they had recovered from the interruption.
Sharon had moved from the main house to one of our newer buildings several years ago. She could be closer to her children that way. When I got to her bedroom I knocked on the door. There was no answer so I opened the door. I looked around but no one was there. I was about to leave when I saw a crumpled piece of paper on the floor by the bed. Sharon was anal about cleaning. She would never have tossed paper on the floor. As I was bending to pick it up a thought went through my head that it might have been left by one of the kids. I almost left it there, but I’ve gone this far I might as well pick it up. Then curiosity won out. I picked up the balled up paper and straightened it out. It was a note.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dear Mom,
It has been a while since I’ve seen you. I hope you’ve been well. I came back to tell you I’m going to leave the valley. I’ve read about San Francisco and I want to go and see it. There is an area south of there, along the coast, that I am planning on moving to.
Before I left I wanted to see you and say goodbye. I’ll be in the old clubhouse for a couple of hours. I hope you will come and say goodbye. It would mean a lot to me if you could bring Candace and Vicky. They were always my favorite sisters. I would love to say goodbye to them also. If it is possible for you to bring Karen, I would like to apologize to her. I know what I did was wrong and I would like to tell her I’m sorry.
I would appreciate it if you did not let Dad know I’m here. I know he would not understand and not want me to say goodbye to you.
Your son,
Frank
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This did not feel right. Nothing meant a lot to Frank except what he wanted at the moment. He did not get emotional. He would never say he was wrong or even know he was wrong. And he did not have any favorite sisters. Then I remembered his threat to Karen.
I hurried out of the house and started running for the clubhouse. I only got a few yards before changing direction and ran for the house. I would not make the same mistake twice. When I got to the house I found the key to the gun locker, unlocked it and pulled out a revolver. I loaded it and then started again for the clubhouse.
As I neared the clubhouse I slowed to a walk. Once I was insight I stepped off the path. There was no point in being a clear target. I carefully walked closer through the trees. I could not hear anything from the clubhouse. That might not mean anything if they were just sitting there talking. I would not be able to hear them from here. Each time I stepped on a leaf it sounded like a gunshot. I finally reached the back wall. As I slowly moved up to a window I still could not hear a sound inside. I took a quick peak though the window and pulled back. I thought I saw legs on the bed to my right but I did not see anyone else. After a few seconds I took a longer look. I was right. There was no one else in the room except someone on the bed. I could not see her face from here but I was sure it was Sharon.
I moved around the building and went in the door. The room was quiet. She did not turn as I walked in. Could she be asleep? I had a bad feeling. Sadness came over me like a dark cloud covering the sun. Her arms and legs were all spread out on the bed. Her hands were clenched as though she was in pain. I knew as I walked up to her. I just did not want to admit it to myself. Her eyes were open, staring at the ceiling. I could see the mark of hands around her neck. Then I noticed the liquid on her face and inside her mouth. I looked down her body and saw droplets of semen in her pubic hair. When I looked closer I could see some oozing out of her vagina. Then I realized there’s too much. He must have raped her and then beat off on her face. The sadness I felt for her was being quickly replaced by a rage towards Frank.
Then I remembered, where are the girls? Where are Candace and Vicky? What about Karen? Had Sharon even brought them or had she come alone. Was that why Frank got angry? Did he take it out on his mother?
I was about to leave the room when I noticed there was a slip of paper in one of Sharon’s clenched hands. I pulled it out and saw it was another note from Frank:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hey Dad, isn’t this a turnaround. The last time I saw Mom she was blowing you. This time she got to blow me. I had been thinking about this since I left. It did not turn out quite as good as I planned but you can’t have everything. I asked nicely but in the end I had to be a bit assertive.
I had hoped to say one last goodbye to Karen but Mom did not bring her, my loss. Well, hope I run into you some time. I’d better be going. I have a long way to travel.
Best wishes,
Frank
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I was so angry I was shaking. Without realizing it I wadded up the note into a tight little ball and dropped it on the floor. I looked back at Sharon, some of the sadness returning. I leaned over and closed her eyes. I kissed her lightly on the forehead and started out the door.
I began walking quickly back to the house. The semen on Sharon had not yet dried. Frank did not have a big head start on us. As I returned to the house a plan was forming in my mind. I found Jason by the barn repairing some tools that Sharon was going to take on the trip. “Jason, I have some bad news. Come with me to the house”.
As he fell in beside me I told him what had happened. “Dad, I knew we should have done something about him”. I turned and looked at him. “No, I didn’t mean it that way. You didn’t know he, none of us knew he would do this. Oh, never mind. Why would he take Candace and Vicky? They are what, maybe eleven or twelve”?
I replied, “Yes, the same age as Karen when he attacked her”.
We were almost to the house and I saw Paul on the porch with my mother and Megan and Shelly, two of my sisters. “Well first of all I need to tell Paul. While I’m doing that I want you to take Richard and David and check the entire area. We need to know where Karen, Candace and Vicky are. I want you to check every building until you either see them or we know they are not here. Don’t take someone’s word that they are here. I want you to actually see them. If you find them, bring them to the house. I want to know they are safe. I think Frank is gone but we should not take any unnecessary chances”.
Jason ran off to get his brother and begin the search. I went on up to Paul. He took the news better than I had expected though tears were running down his face as he ran off to join Jason in the search. My mother and sisters took it harder. After they composed themselves, they went off to the clubhouse to take care of Sharon’s body.
I went on into the house and went to my bedroom. As I entered the room I saw Karen putting clothes away in the closet. I went over and hugged her to me. Although we were always very affectionate she sensed something was different, “Daddy, what’s wrong”. As I told her about Sharon I could see her tense up. “She’s dead? What happened”? Then she looked at me sharply, It’s Frank isn’t it? Is he still here”?
“No, I don’t think he is. But I want you to stay here in the house. We are going to go after him. I don’t want you to go out until I get back. I’m going to have Paul stay with you”.
I talked with her for a while longer to calm her down. She sat and watched me as I pulled out jeans, a pair of boots and one of my good shirts. They were all pretty good since I did not wear them much. After I got dressed I left the bedroom and she was right at my heels. I returned to the living room and went to the gun locker. I laid out five additional revolvers to go with the one I already had. I then pulled out six rifles and set out ammunition for all of them. When I was finished I sat down and waited for my sons to finish the search.
I was anxious for the results, and to get going after Frank. I wanted to run him down like the mad dog he had proved to be. I sat there watching the clock tick off the minutes. It was almost an hour before I decided it would be better to let him get home before we accosted him. One the way there he could always hear us coming and just move off the trail and let us go by. We would never know. If we let him get home we would have the advantage. We knew where he was going and he did not know that.
By the time Jason came in the door, followed by several of his brothers, all the planning that had run through my head had calmed me down. Jason saw me and said, “We could not find any of…”, then he saw Karen sitting next to me. “Oh good, Karen is okay. But Dad, we could not find any sign of Candace or Vicky. A couple of the girls said they saw them with Sharon earlier but were not sure of the time”.
Seven of us went into the kitchen and sat around the table. Besides myself, there was Jason, Paul, Richard, David, Jimmy and, oddly enough his brother, James. I began laying out my plan. I wanted Paul to stay at the house with a picked team of his brothers to protect the girls, especially Karen in light of Frank’s threat, in case we were wrong about Frank’s plans. Paul argued strongly until I explained to him the importance of protecting the family, plus the chance that Frank might still show up.
“Jason, we need two more for my plan. Do you have any suggestions? I would prefer not to have any of Sharon’s sons. I want everyone to be clear headed when we are there”.
“Tom would be good and Sam. They are both good shots. They don’t get excited easily and Megan and Terri are their mothers”. Then he pressed for more info, “But what is your plan”?
“It looks pretty likely that he has the girls. I think the best way to get him is to let him get home. He does not know that we know where that is. That gives us the advantage. He should not be on his guard once he gets there. I’m afraid that if we try to get him on the trail back that he might hear us and just avoid us and go somewhere else. It could take us a long time to find him then. Remember that old John Wayne movie I watch sometimes, The Searchers? Well think about how long they looked? I don’t want Candace and Vicky with him that long”.
I could see the kids were anxious to just charge off. But as we kept talking it out they all finally came to see that the plan was the best way of getting the girls back, hopefully unharmed.
From the books I had read of the area, I had a pretty good understanding of the roads around here. I knew there was a road to the north of us, away from the route Frank and I had taken earlier, that would get us close to Frank’s new home. It would take us a bit longer to get there but that would be safer. There was always the risk that Frank might sit off the road to see if we would try and follow him. It took us a couple of hours to put together everything we wanted. I had a tearful goodbye with Karen and Pam. Terri came around and said she would look after the girls for me. She had that old fierce look in her eye again. I knew she always regretted not being the one to take care of John when we were younger. I thought she would relish the thought of Frank coming in the house.
All the boys were outside and mounted. We wanted to get on the road before the day was over. Get as many miles behind us as we could. I was still in the house, about to leave when Megan came up to me and hugged me. “Be careful. I want you to come home to me safe”. Then she quickly added, “I mean for Karen and Pam. They need you”.
“I’ll do my best”.
“Well be sure you do because I’ll kick your butt up and down the mountain if you don’t”.
She really surprised me. Megan, my sister, who teased me unmercifully when I was a kid. The one who was somewhat reluctant when our family began growing. The only one who was out here telling me to come home safe. I gave her a hug back and a light kiss on the lips. Before I could let go Karen and Pam came up and joined in our hug. Pam looked at Megan and gave her a little smile, “Maybe you would like to join us when Dan returns”?
Megan smiled back at her, “Maybe I would”. Then she turned back to me, “But first you come back safe”.
I gave each of them a kiss and then went out the door. Seven of my sons were in their saddles, waiting. Grouped around us was the entire family to see us off. Several of the girls were coming up to each of the boys, telling them to be careful. It was several minutes before we could finally get off.
Little was said as we rode. There was a full moon so we rode until after midnight. We camped and just put down bedrolls and slept for a few hours. As soon as it began to get light we hit the road again. We stopped just to rest the horses every couple of hours. It was late afternoon when we finally found the side road that would take us near where Frank had settled. By early evening we crested a rise and, with the help of the binoculars, I could see the back of Frank’s house in the distance. It looked like we were around two miles or so from him. There were no signs of anyone there. I continued watching as the sun went down. When it finally got dark a light appeared at a window. Frank was back.
We moved back down the hill so we would be out of sight. We started a fire and had our meal. While we were sitting there eating, I outlined what we would do the next day. Two of us would approach the house from each side. I would approach from the front with Jason hanging back to cover me if necessary. “I will try and draw Frank out. We want to try and get him out of the house, away from the girls. If we are successful, Richard and David, you are going to come in from the rear, will enter the house and get the girls out. Once we have done that we will take care of Frank. If Frank is outside and armed, if he makes a move towards me, you on the two sides, take him out”. I looked around at each of them in turn, “Now remember what he did to Sharon. Do not hesitate when it is time. Frank won’t”. They all nodded. “We’ll get up a couple hours before daylight and make our way to our positions. When we get there, you will all wait for me to make my way in. You will stay out of sight until then. Understand”? They all nodded again.
We put the fire out and all lay down to get some rest. I was having a hard time getting to sleep. As much as I figured he deserved his fate, I did not relish being the cause of it. From the way the others were fidgeting under their blankets, they must be having trouble also, as they should. We were going to take a man’s life.
When I woke, my clock said it was just before 4 O’clock. It was still dark, the moon was gone. I went around and woke the others. We had a quick bite of the food the women had sent with us, and some water. Everyone checked their weapons and then we set out.
It took a good two hours to get there. The sun was not up but it was getting light; false dawn. We got into our positions, each of us about 100 yards out from the house, and then hunkered down to wait. It was another two hours before I saw Frank come out the front door and go to the barn, he had Vicky with him, her hand in his. I could not be sure, but it looked like a holster was on his hip. This was the opportunity I wanted. I stood but was having trouble taking the first step towards the house. Then I remembered the fear in Karen’s face, I started walking.
I was within thirty yards of the house when Frank walked out of the barn with his back to me. Vicky’s hand was still in his, a basket in her other hand. It looked to be filled with eggs. I stopped and called out to him, “Good morning Frank”.
He stopped, dropped the basket, and whirled around to face me, one hand dropping to his hip, the other pulling Vicky in front of him, tight against him, his arm moving around her waist. I was right. He had a holster. His hand now rested on the grip but did not pull the pistol out. That is a start. Maybe this will go easier than I thought.
“Well good morning Dad. You surprised me. Good job”. He watched me for a moment. “Ah, now I remember. You used to watch the valley when I was little. You saw a light didn’t you”. He was nodding his head. I kept watching his hand for any movement. I thought he was talking to try and distract me. I could see his head move slightly to his left and right, trying to see if there is anyone else with me. I kept focused on him. Let him think about it.
“Well what do we do now Dad”?
“I came to get Candace and Vicky. Why don’t you let Vicky come over here”?
Keeping my eyes on him, I could see Richard and David coming around the back of the house and start working very carefully to my Right. David was carrying Candice. In a few seconds they were out of sight behind the barn. They were safe. That left Vicky, and of course, Frank.
“I don’t think they want to leave me. They’re having too much fun. Aren’t you Vicky”? Vicky started to shake her head but Frank bent down to her, his arm tightening around her. “Aren’t you Vicky”?
“Daddy”? She sounded so scared.
“Vicky, we talked about this. You are having fun aren’t you”?
“Yes”.
“Yes what”?
“Yes, I’m having fun”.
“See Dad, you can go now”.
I was okay until he smiled. The rage I felt finding Sharon returned. I took a step towards him. All those cautions for my sons and I could not follow them myself. I was about ten yards from him when Frank pushed down on his pistol grip and the holster swung on his hip. There was a roar.
I could see the sky. It looked so blue. But I was having trouble focusing. There was one small cloud up there but it kept moving around. How can a cloud do that? How did I get down here? What was I doing? I should get up. I tried to move my legs but they felt so heavy, I felt so tired. Maybe if I just rest for a moment, then I’ll get up.
I was still trying to focus on that cloud when Frank’s face blocked it out. Now I remember.
“Dad, didn’t I tell you what would happen if I ever saw you again”?
His voice sounded so small. I could barely hear him. I was trying to tell him to speak up but my tongue kept getting in the way.
“What Dad”?
As he bent over me he let Vicky go. He opened his mouth to say something and a small hole appeared in his forehead. He dropped out of my sight. I tried to move my head to see where he went but it seemed to take so much effort.
“Dad! Dad! Are you okay”?
Jason was there. His lips were moving but I could not hear what he was saying. Why was he so worried?
“Dad. It happened so fast. Vicky was in the way. I did not have a good shot. Dad, can you hear me”?
It's getting so dark. I must have been here for quite a while. We should be going. We need to get the girls home. What’s he doing? He’s tearing my good shirt. Why are his hands so red?
“Dad, hold on. Please Dad”.
Oh good, the other boys are here. There’s David and Richard, Jim and James, and, and, what’s his name? I know him, what is his name? Oh yes, Tom. Now why couldn't I remember that?
“Dad”.
It's so cold? It must be getting late. It’s so dark, and so cold. I wonder why I can’t hear what they're saying? I can see their lips move. Maybe if I closed my eyes for a minute and rested. I just need to rest.
“Dad, no”.
"Dad".
Pam was pointing down the mountain on our side of the valley. It had never occurred to me to watch this side. I was so focused on where I had told him to go. If I had any intelligence at all I should have started looking at all the places I did not tell him to go. There was just the tiniest spot of light in the distance, down the mountainside from us. My first thought was it was just a star reflecting off water. But as we stared, every now and then it would disappear. I quickly reassembled the telescope. It seemed to take forever to find the light in the viewer. Once I had it centered I stepped up the power. I was looking at a window. I could see the lines dividing the panes but a curtain was blocking the view inside. The light had a flickering quality to it. It must be a fireplace. After a few minutes it went dark for a moment and then the light appeared again. It wasn’t until the second time it happened before I figured out Frank must have walked between the fireplace and the window. I made some marks on the ground to help me find it again in the morning and then we went back to our camp.
Our fire was out and I could see that Patricia and Jason were “snuggling” under their blankets. We politely waited for them to finish though Pam suggested several times, that as long as we were waiting we might find something more entertaining to do.
A while later we gathered around the campfire. When I told Jason what we had found he was all for getting down there now and having a confrontation. When I pointed out that we had not brought any weapons with us and we knew that Frank definitely had a revolver, and probably had the couple of rifles that we later found were missing from the house, it would be a good idea to give this some thought and not be too hasty. Jason calmed down but I could see he was still annoyed. He and Frank had never gotten along. But then I could not think of anyone who had got along with Frank. It was getting late and we were going to have a long ride home tomorrow so we finally called it a night.
The next morning I woke before sunrise. Pam was lying beside me, asleep, warm and inviting, but first-things first. I left the camp and went back to the cliff. I watched as the sun slowly rose, waiting until it was light enough to see. The side of the mountain slowly came out of the shadows. I began looking with the scope on low power. It took a minute to relocate house. A tree covered most of the view of the building from our direction, but if you knew it was there, you could see it. I stepped up the power and it was almost like I was standing beside the house. I could see some signs of life. It looked like a garden had been worked in. I saw a fenced pasture with livestock in it that could not have been in there very long. No sign of Frank though. No smoke from the chimney. It took over an hour for him to appear. If I had taken a break I would have missed him. He walked out of the house and went over to a barn. He was inside less than a minute and then went back to the house.
Now that I was sure, I slowly began taking the telescope apart again. Should I go down and force his hand, make him move across the valley? But what good would it do? Plus my advice to Jason still held; Frank had weapons and we did not. Other than just putting him farther away from us, was I just trying to feed my ego by getting him to do what I told him to do? Or would it be better to let him have his little victory? The net result was that he was away from us. That is what I wanted to accomplish.
By the time I had finished packing I had decided to leave him be. If circumstances changed we could always come back now that we knew where he was. When I got back to the camp I saw that Jason and Patricia were awake and from the way their blanket was moving around they might need several more minutes before they would be ready to leave. When I took a second look I revised my estimate, they might need a half hour. I think our rabbits back at the house had more willpower then Jason and Patricia.
Pam was awake, lying on her side, watching Jason and her sister. When I got to her she lifted the blanket, inviting me back in. I smiled at her and said, “It is very tempting, but we should get ready to go”.
Pam pointed at her sister and brother, “I think we have the time. Besides old man, you can’t last very long anyway, can you”? And, as things turned out, she was right. I did not last very long. Though I would like to think that was more due to her efforts than to my age. I do think I gave her the pounding she deserved for calling me an old man.
One the way home Jason renewed his argument that we should force Frank to move on. I tried to get him to just let it be but I could see that it irked him that Frank could feel that he got the upper hand on us. I was content that I knew where he was and that he was far enough away from us that he was not a concern.
Once we were packed and on the road home Pam sat behind me. Most of the way home she had one arm wrapped around my stomach and the other between my legs, wrapped around my dick. When I told her it was not nice keeping me hard this long she suggested we stop and fix it so that it would not be so hard. I guess I hesitated too long in answering and she took that as a yes, because she managed to get up on her knees behind me and tried to move around in front of me. All she managed to do was to almost fall off the horse. She leaned close to my ear and said, “Well, are you going to help or not”? My mind was not really made up until she nibbled on my earlobe and then ran her tongue around the inside of my ear. I reached back, took her by the waist and swung her around me so she was facing me, her thighs on top of mine. She giggled, “I saw Jason and my sister do it this way on our way out. It looked like fun”.
I had thought it looked like fun also. “Any time I’m in you, it’s bound to be fun”. I just hoped we would not scare the horse.
She put her arms on my shoulders and lifted herself up a bit, wrapping her legs around my waist. “You are so sweet”. She lifted up just a bit more until her breasts were right at the level of my face. “Now don’t talk with your mouth full”.
I started to say my mouth isn’t full but only got as far as “My mouff” when she leaned forward and slid a nipple right into my open mouth. I sucked more of her breast into my mouth and then ran my tongue around and over her nipple for a bit. She was right. I should not talk with my mouth full.
She pulled back a few inches from me and then pushed the other breast towards me, “Now the other one”. As I repeated the treatment to that one she began pushing herself against me. I could feel her pelvis push tight against my stomach, her pussy shoved up right against me, her whole crotch felt so hot. Then she slid down a few inches, rubbing her pussy against me before lifting up and then repeating the motion several times. She finally gave a little low moan and then said, “I’m ready now”. She lowered herself a few inches as she was moving her pelvis around trying to find me. She did not have to look far. Once she got everything lined, up she lowered herself on me. And she was right. She was ready, very ready. I easily slide right into her, not stopping until I bottomed out in her. She ground herself around on me for a few seconds and then stopped. She looked up at me, pulled my head down to her, and began softly kissing me. After a bit she stopped and just rested her head on my shoulder.
The horse had continued walking this entire time. I had one hand on the reins and the other wrapped around her, holding her tight to me. We found very quickly that we really did not need to do anything. The motion of the horse was all we needed. Just sitting on the horse while it walked, had us rocking back and forth against each other. I might slide out an inch but the next step drove me back into her. We continued like that, the horse rocking us, sometimes kissing gently, sometimes passionately, for what felt like hours, but surely wasn’t. My brain would have atrophied from lack of blood by then. Pam finally reached the point of cumming. I could feel her begin to add her own movements to what we were getting from the horse. I quickly wrapped the reins around the pommel so I could use both hands. She pushed her face hard into my chest. “Daddy, I’m cumming”. She pulled herself tight against me and held herself there. I could feel a pulse going through her as she climaxed. Each time it hit her she would try and push me deeper into her. Gradually she relaxed, leaning back away from me; my hands holding her, again letting the horse provide all the movement she needed as the feeling slowly passed in her.
Then she perked up, “Okay Daddy, your turn”. She pulled herself back up tight against me. I expected her to begin sliding up and down on me but she had a surprise for me. She just held me tight and then I began feeling her pussy grab me. It was like a fist was squeezing me and then relaxing. She did this over and over. I had been close to cumming for a while now but this was quickly bringing things to a head.
“Where did you learn how to do that”? I gasped.
“Mom told me about it. Do you like it”?
It was all I could do not to cum right then. I was trying to delay it so I could feel this for a while longer. “That feels great. Wait, your mom told you”?
“Yes. She told me how to do it and then told me to save it for a special occasion. Happy Birthday, special occasion”.
Before I could say anything else she began squeezing me faster. That was the last straw. I let my hands drop to her butt and pulled her tighter against me. Then I had that feeling, like when you pull a rubber band so tight it finally breaks. It was like an explosion went off inside my cock. I could feel the sperm begin coursing out of my body into hers. It felt like all the fluid in my body was being sucked out of me into her.
We held each other tight as the horse continued on the path. After a few minutes I could feel myself deflating. I would be sliding out of her any minute. The return of blood to my system must have brought my brain back to life because I finally noticed the sound of another horse behind us. I whispered to Pam, “Would you look over my shoulder? Are they right behind us”?
When she rose up to look I finally slipped out of her. She looked back down at me with a little pout on her face, “Oh put him back. I might not have been done with him yet”. I leaned forward and gave her breast a little nip in response. “Just for that I think I’ll stay right here the rest of the way home”.
I looked up at her, “Don’t kid yourself. I think you liked it. Now are they behind us”?
She rose up again and I could feel her wave. I guess that answered that question. Now I wondered how long had they been there. Just as I was about to ask how far back they were Jason and Patricia come along side us. They both had big grins on their face. I guess that answers the question of how long they had been in sight of us.
Jason spoke up, “Kind of nice that way, isn’t it”?
He had an infectious smile and I couldn’t help smiling myself. I nodded yes and then Pam and I worked on getting her turned around to face forward.
It had been a nice break but now the day began to stretch on. We continued right through lunch, wanting to get home. We only stopped to rest the horses on occasion and let them have some water. When we came up the final rise, bringing the house in view, it was getting pretty dark.
When we finally arrived in front of the house a crowd came out to greet us. Mikey, the girl’s mother, met us first. She looked at Pam and Patricia and then at me, “I hope you had a good birthday”.
I could not help smiling, “The best”.
I got off the horse and helped Pam down. She leaned over to me and whispered, “I’ve had you pretty much to myself for the last week or so. I know some of the girls will have missed you. I’ll give them a week and then I want to spend some time with you”.
“I’m looking forward to that” I said and gave her a quick kiss on the cheek.
A couple of the kids took the horses and the gear to be put away while we went inside and shared what we had learned. There were mixed feelings. They were split like Jason and I. Some felt that it was okay and others felt that Frank was getting away with something and should be made to move on, be taught a lesson. I felt any lesson would be lost on him. Eventually my argument won out. It was getting late so everyone started drifting away to get ready for bed.
I went out on the porch and sat in a rocker and watched some of the kids play out in the yard. They would stay out until they could not see their hand in front of their face if we let them. There were several large trees out there from which we had hung tire swings. Some of the older kids were pushing the little ones to cries of †˜higher, higher’, and screams of delight’.
I thought again of what Pam had said earlier. Over the years I have had sex with almost all of the girls, and I enjoyed it every time, no complaints on my side. But I was always moving from girl to girl. I rarely spent more than a week with any one of them and many times in the last few years it was just a night or two with the younger ones who were coming of age. Earlier it had all been centered on the girls getting pregnant, growing our numbers quickly. Now it seemed the emphasis was more on having fun. And I had to admit it was fun. But it felt like I was missing something. The week and a half with Pam was the longest I had been with one of the girls in a long time. I had really enjoyed it with her and it seemed like she had also. It made me wonder. We still had a shortage of males to females so it would probably be looked at as being selfish if I wanted to be with just one girl all the time but maybe there is another girl or two out there who felt the same and we could make a small group.
Megan came out and sat beside me. We made small talk for a while before she got to what was on her mind. “Karen has been sleeping with me while you were gone. She wakes up almost every night crying. She’s still having nightmares. Just eleven and getting attacked like that, I’d have nightmares also. A couple of times she asked me if you really meant it when you said she could sleep with you if she did not feel safe”.
“Sure, you know I meant it”.
Megan nodded, “I’ll let her know you said that. Maybe that will help her sleep better”.
It was getting pretty late so I got up to go to bed. The kids were still out playing but I was beat. A week-plus with Pam, followed by the ride home had tired me out. I was lying in bed, about to drift off when I heard a small knock at the door. “Come in”.
The door opened and I could see Karen standing there in an oversized t-shirt, Megan standing behind her. Karen stepped in but did not say anything. Megan spoke up first, “Karen wanted to say goodnight to you”. I sat up in bed and held out my arms to her. That was all she needed. She ran over to me and I gave her a big hug. “Honey, would you like to stay here with me tonight”? She looked up at me with a big smile and nodded her head. I turned to Megan and asked, “Would you mind if Karen sleeps with me tonight”?
Megan answered, “I think that is a great idea”. As she turned to leave she said, “I’ll see you two in the morning”.
Once Megan was gone Kathy snuggled up against me and went right to sleep. We had been asleep for several hours and Karen must have moved away from me in the bed. She woke up and was far enough away from me that she did not feel me around her. She woke me with a scream, “Daddy. Daddy, where are you”.
I reached out to her and pulled her to me. “I’m right here. I would not leave you”. She moved into my arms and fell back asleep. This was repeated for the next two nights. On the fourth night she finally slept through the night without waking.
Life pretty much had returned to normal at home. My only problem now was to figure out what how to convince the family we needed to split up to survive. There was still some resistance to breaking the family up. They just did not seem to have the foresight to see what the future held for us the way we were growing. Jason, Paul and a few others made a trip down to town and I had them get some books for me from the local library. I wanted to see what I could find out about businesses in our part of the valley.
We were having a hotter than normal summer and today had been particularly brutal. I had been out with several of my older sons repairing fences. Livestock and the weather gradually took their toll. Even though we had stopped during the hottest part of the afternoon, I was beat by the time we finished for the day. When I got home I took a shower to cool off, ate a small dinner and then just went to bed. It was so hot that I pulled all the covers off the bed. Karen was outside playing so I stayed up for a while reading from a couple of the books Jason and Paul brought back for me. I was having trouble staying awake so I put the books aside, turned off the light and went to sleep.
I was having a great dream. A couple of the girls were holding me down and giving me a fantastic blowjob. Just as I reached the point in my dream where I was going to cum, dammit, I always woke up then, so of course, I woke up. You know that feeling where you have just woken up from a dream and you are trying to get back in it? That was what I was doing. I wanted to feel those lips again. It had been over a week for a guy that was used to having sex almost every day and night. I was going through withdrawal.
Then I realized I’m not dreaming the hand that is going up and down my cock. It felt so good. Whoever it was must have been doing it for a while because I was well lubricated. Maybe Pam finally came over, or one of the other girls. I kind of hoped it was Pam. I must have moved because then I heard Karen’s voice, “Daddy, are you awake”?
“Honey, what are you doing”?
“I just wanted to know how it felt. I’ve never really touched a penis before. Frank stuck it in my mouth, and, then, you know, tried to stick it in me. But I never really touched it, you know, with my hand”. Then I could feel her fingers moving around on me. “It was so soft when I started but now it is really hard”.
“Honey, you should not be doing this”. Even while saying the words I did not move her hand away. It felt so good. I could feel that electric zing going through me. It would take just another minute and I would be cumming.
“I’ve watched some of my sisters and brothers. Am I doing this right”? Her little hand started moving up and down my cock; the electric charge building.
“Yes honey, you are doing it right”. I started raising my hips slightly each time as her hand went down. “You should stop now or I’ll make a mess in the bed”.
“That’s okay Daddy. I know what to do”.
Before I had time to think about what she said I let out a grunt and brought my hips up sharply. She moved over me and I felt something hot and wet engulf the head of my cock. I looked down and saw she had moved over to take the head of my cock in her mouth. I did not have time to think of anything else when her tongue ran around the head, the built-up electricity suddenly discharged and I started to pump sperm in her mouth. Her tongue continued moving around the head as my sperm went out over and around, coating her tongue. When I had finished she carefully pulled her mouth back, keeping her lips tight against my cock, until she finally had me out of her mouth. Her lips were still tightly closed. I saw her cheeks bulge a bit as she moved her tongue around in her mouth. She visibly swallowed and then moved up to lay along side me.
“Daddy, did I do it right? Sometimes one of the boys comes into our bedroom to be with one of my sisters”. Karen shared a bedroom with three sisters, one her age and two others that I thought must be fourteen or fifteen. “Sometimes they are on top of the covers and I’ve watched what they do, but I did not know if I was doing it right. Cindy always spits the sperm out when the boy squirts it in her mouth but Debbie swallows it. I wanted to see what it tasted like; what yours tasted like. A couple of times the boys tried to get in bed with me when my sisters were already with someone but I didn’t let them. I wanted to do it with you first”.
“Well, yes honey. You did it just right. But you are too young for this. We cannot do this again. Do you understand? I will get in big trouble with your mother. I know I look pretty big to you but she will beat my butt like a drum if she knew what we were just doing. You need to wait a few more years”.
“I know Daddy. I was just curious. I didn’t think you would wake up. I didn’t like it when Frank made me do it. That wasn’t right, and he’s mean. It was fun with you though. I wasn’t sure it would be, but it was. Besides, I had my birthday and I’m over twelve now. It won’t be long”.
I have to admit it was a nice way to end a day. She moved up next to me and we both drifted off to sleep. When I woke up at daybreak, Karen was already up and gone. Her chores this week included collecting eggs and then helping fix breakfast so she had an early start.
After a good breakfast I joined my sons and we continued working on the fences. It was another hot day, though this time we got smart, quit early, and then moved to some work in the shade when it got hot. I called it an early night once again after dinner and was on my way to bed when I met Jason in the hallway. He asked if I wanted to join a bunch of them in the gym. Oh great, the last thing I needed was to go play some basketball with the boys on a hot day. “No, I’m beat. I think I’ll just go to bed early”.
“Dad, I think you’ll…”
“That’s okay son, maybe another time”.
Last year we had built an extension to the house. It was a large one-room building, connected to the house by a hallway. The room was about 30 feet square and was used for classes and as a gym. When the little kids were using it mats were pulled out to cover the floor so they could take naps.
As I was turning to walk away, Jason and several of the boys, followed by around twice as many girls, started down the hall to the gym. I hope the girls get to play too and that the boys don’t make them just sit and watch.
For the next couple of weeks things were fairly uneventful. Karen did not have any further bouts of curiosity. She began alternating with Megan and I, spending a week with me and then a week with Megan. When she was with Megan some of the other girls would come and stay with me, usually just a day or two, sometimes longer. Pam had not come as she said she would and I found I was disappointed. I was looking forward to being with her. She probably was busy with the other boys. I couldn’t really complain. I was with other girls all the time, how could I expect her to come to me whenever I wanted.
Our numbers were gradually changing now. We now had one male for every two females if you counted everyone. Nature appeared to be doing her job. In the beginning we needed females and that is what we got. Now we need more males and she is answering once again. The ratio in the group over fourteen was still one male to about every five females, but that would change as the younger ones got older. I guess I will just have to rough it until they arrive to help. It’s a dirty job but someone has to do it.
I was on my way to my bedroom one night when Jason once again passed me on the way to the gym with a group his brothers and sisters. I politely turned down their invitation to join them and continued on my way to bed. When I got there, Beth, one of Sharon’s younger daughters, thankfully over fourteen, was waiting for me. We had been together a couple of months earlier. She had wanted to get pregnant but had been unsuccessful so far. I had assumed she had been spending time with one of the younger boys since she had not come back to my bed. Whatever the reason, I was happy to find her there, she was, how do you say, enthusiastic in bed. After a strenuous bout of lovemaking we both drifted off to sleep.
I could not have been asleep long. I was still feeling the effects of our earlier activity when I felt her moving around on top of me, trying to wake me. And Beth, climbing on top of you, was bound to wake anyone up. She was sitting astride me with her hands on the bed under my armpits, her breasts dangling in my face. She ran one nipple over my lips and I sucked it into my mouth. Then she pulled back up, stretching her nipple out until I let it go with a pop, followed by running the other nipple over my lips. It appeared I was rising to the occasion, not quite there, but just about, when I felt her begin to dig her pelvis around trying to find me and get me back into her. Unfortunately I was not quite there yet so the poor boy was lying on my stomach and not sticking up in the air where she was busy rooting around.
With a little frustration in her voice she said, “Why don’t you help me”?
I was trying to get my arms down to help with some guidance but her arms blocked mine. Just as I was trying to figure out how to get my arms around hers, I felt her grab me in her fist and begin rubbing the head of my cock against her pussy. That got me to full attention. She then pushed back against me, pushing me half way inside her, and let out a long groan, followed by “Oh thank you, I needed that”.
I heard a familiar voice down towards my feet say “You’re welcome”.
Oh god, when had Karen come in? “Karen, you know you should not be in here”.
Beth, who had begun thrusting her hips at me so that I was now deep inside of her said, “Oh Daddy, let her stay. She has already helped. And besides, I know you have had two girls with you before”.
“Yes Daddy. Let me stay. Maybe I can help again”.
I tried to protest “But she’s too young, and the two girls were both older”. Beth sat up on me and put her arms at her side. I would have said more but by now Beth was moving faster, grinding her pelvis against me. I guess Karen will not see anything she has not seen before. She’ll just be closer.
Karen had moved around alongside Beth and was watching her. She reached out and touched one of Beth’s nipples and said, “Your nipple is really hard. Does that always happen when you have sex”?
Beth opened her eyes to look at Karen. She slowly nodded and said, “So is the other one”. Beth turned her body slightly towards Karen.
Karen reached out with her other hand and touched Beth’s other nipple. She started to pull her hands away and Beth reached out to stop her. “It’s okay. It feels good when you do that”.
Karen began rubbing each of Beth’s breasts. Beth reached over to Karen, and with her hands on her waist, pulled Karen towards her. Karen lifted one leg and moved over and sat on my stomach, facing Beth, just inches away from her. Karen continued rubbing Beth’s nipples, “Your breasts are big. I wish mine were as big as yours”.
“Oooohhhhhhh, that’s nice. Don’t worry yours will get bigger this year or next”.
Karen looked down at herself, “I don’t know. I’m pretty flat. Andrea, she is twelve, and she is almost as big as you”.
I watched as Beth’s hands moved up from Karen’s waist to her chest and then moved around to the front where I could not see. “Does this feel good”?
Karen leaned back towards me, arching her back. “Oh yes. That feels really good”. That surprised me. Beth is rubbing Karen’s breasts, and she likes it. Apparently they both do.
“Well see, the size does not matter much, it is how it feels. Besides, it is only the guys and the babies who care about the size anyway; guys to play with and babies to drink from. Now how about leaning over and giving mine a kiss”.
I watched as Beth moved her hands from Karen’s chest and then felt her slide a hand between my stomach and Karen’s crotch. When Karen jumped Beth asked, “Do you want me to move my hand”?
I could feel Beth’s fingers moving in a slow circle. Karen replied, “No, you just surprised me. It’s okay. You can leave it there. It feels good”.
“That’s kind of what Daddy feels like in me, only Daddy feels a bit better, and much bigger”.
I was beginning to feel left out, “Only a bit better”?
Beth looked around Karen at me, “Now Daddy. This is just girl talk. Of course you feel much better. This is Karen’s first time at this. She needs to learn a few things. You just lay back and enjoy this. I know I’m going to”.
Beth had slowed down on me while she was talking to Karen. Now she began picking up speed, rocking her hips back and forth and then in tight circles on me. Karen had her face in Beth’s chest. I could only assume she was sucking on Beth’s nipples. Karen was also beginning to squirm around on my stomach. We continued like this for several more minutes until Karen began bucking hard on me, pushing down on Beth’s fingers. I could hear little squeals coming from her. When she slowed down and then relaxed, Karen leaned forward to Beth and hugged her, “Congratulations. That was your first orgasm. Now it’s my turn. Move over off Daddy”.
Karen got off me and lay down beside me, still breathing hard. “I always wondered what one felt like. I’ve seen the other girls have one but wondered when I would”.
Beth had closed her eyes and was beginning to rock back and forth faster on me, grinding her pelvis against me. A bit breathlessly she said, “Daddy is great for orgasms. He always lets you cum first. The other boys aren’t so considerate. Most of them will just jump on you, pump it in and out for a while, leave their stuff in you and then they are done, whether you are or not. Daddy will let you cum as many times as you want”.
Now that my ego was too big to fit through any doorways, I thought I should reward her. I moved one hand down to her stomach and rubbed it firmly, right where the head of my cock must be. The other hand moved back and forth from one breast to the other, teasing her nipples, firmly squeezing her breasts.
She pushed hard down on me and said, “Daddy, I’m cumming”. She grimaced like she was in pain and hunched over me. She held the position for several seconds, squeezing me with her thighs, and then collapsed on me. She lay there breathing hard for a minute then said, “Okay Daddy, now your turn”. She leaned over and whispered something in Karen’s ear that I could not hear. Karen giggled and Beth moved back on top of me. “Daddy, you just lie still and let us do everything”. She began gently sliding up and down on me, letting my cock slide almost out of her and then all the way back into her. I just lay there with my eyes closed and my arms spread on the bed, enjoying the sensations she was sending through me.
I had not noticed Karen had moved until a warm hand cupped my balls. The shock made me jump. I started to say something but Karen stopped me, “Let her. It was my idea. She wanted to help. It is helping isn’t it”?
I had to admit it sent chills through me. When Beth moved up on me I could feel Karen’s hand slide up my cock, squeezing me, sometimes just running a finger or two up my shaft. Then Beth would push back down, pushing Karen’s hand back down. The feeling was getting too much for me. I moved my hands to Beth’s butt, pulling her tight to me as I began thrusting into her. It was only seconds before I began picking up speed, thrusting harder. Then Karen circled her thumb and forefinger around the base of my cock and I couldn’t take any more. I began sending streams of sperm through the circle of Karen’s fingers into Beth’s pussy. When I was finished Karen gave my balls one last caress and then moved up beside me.
“Beth, did Daddy put his sperm in you”?
Beth, still lying on top of me, turned her head towards Karen. “He sure did. Didn’t you feel it when you put your fingers where I told you”?
“Yes, I felt something. It was like when water goes through a hose, but it was in spurts”.
“Well if you think about it, it is just like water going through a hose. It just isn’t water and it’s better than a hose”. With that they both began giggling.
“Beth, are you pregnant now”?
“I don’t know. It takes a while to find out”.
I just lay there listening to them talk. It was kind of funny in a way. It was like you were the fly on the wall listening in on a conversation. Except this fly was on the bed with his cock still buried in a young girl’s pussy. They continued whispering back and forth as I drifted off. I woke up a few hours later and they were both asleep, snuggled up on either side of me. I thought about how lucky I was and then drifted back to sleep.
Beth came back the next few nights. Karen was doing much better and without anything being said, returned to her own bedroom. As it turned out, Beth did get pregnant; one more girl passing through.
I was alone in my bedroom a couple nights later when Pam came in and shut the door. She came over and sat on the side of the bed. “Do you remember what we talked about when we returned from the cliff”?
“Yes I do. I thought you were going to come and spend some time with me. You didn’t so I thought maybe you had changed your mind”.
“No, I did not change my mind. I did not want to interfere with Karen. She needed you more at the time. Plus, I wanted to give you some time to be sure you would really want me around more. Then when I was ready Beth was monopolizing you”.
“I’m sorry. I didn’t know”.
“That’s okay. I don’t mind sharing you a bit. They are my sisters and there are not enough guys to go around. I just want more of you for me, that is, if you want more of me”.
I laughed, “I did not know there was more of you to be had”.
She poked me in the ribs, “You know what I mean. I’m serious”.
The last words came out softly, “Yes, I do want more of you”.
She got up, turned out the light, got into bed and moved up next to me. “I am so glad to hear that because there is going to be more of me to get. I’m pregnant. It must have been that horse ride”. That memory brought smiles to both of our faces.
We made love slowly that night, savoring the feeling. Afterwards, as she drifted off to sleep, I lay there wondering how our lives might change from this point. So far no one had really paired off, or, if not pairs, settled as a small group. It would be interesting. With those thoughts still bouncing around in my head I finally drifted off to sleep.
The days had started getting shorter though the temperatures were still warm. Most of our summer work was finished. The harvests were all in. If we got anything more it would be gravy. We had moved the livestock from the higher pastures down where the weather would be gentler to them. We could all take it a bit easier now.
For the last couple of months I had been turning down Jason and Paul’s invitations to join them in the gym. They seemed to come every Friday. Tonight was Friday and I thought I’d finally join in if they asked. I have not played basketball with them since right after we built the gym. I could use some fun.
After dinner I went to my bedroom to get a pair of shorts and some shoes. Most of the boys I had seen going to the gym were wearing shorts and shoes. I guess it could get a little uncomfortable with a dick slapping around while you were playing. The girls were a real mix. Most of the older girls still wore little if any clothing except when it got cold. Many of the younger girls now wore some clothing, even in the summer. It was a funny thing. I was used to seeing the girls naked all these years, and I got a sexual rise when I thought about them sexually. But seeing some of the girls clothed all the time could get me aroused even more, just wondering what their uncovered body looked like.
I was going through my closet looking for a pair of shorts I liked when Pam came in and asked, “What are you looking for”?
“I’m looking for those purple shorts,” I said.
She poked her head in the closet and pointed, “They are over there”. I found them, stepped out of the closet and put them on. “What do you need them for”?
I sat on the bed and started putting on my shoes. “Jason and Paul have been after me for quite a while to play some basketball in the gym. I thought I would join them tonight and have a little fun”.
“Isn’t today Friday”?
“I think so. Yes, I’m sure it is”.
“I don’t think they play basketball on Friday’s, but go ahead. I’m sure you will have fun”. She came up to me and put her arms around my neck, pressing her breasts into my chest and kissed me. “You always could stay here and have some fun. I’m sure I could give you the exercise you need”.
I smiled at her and then rubbed her big tummy. Yes, that would be fun indeed. “I’ll try and not play too long. I’ll be back soon. They usually start around 8 o’clock and it is just past that now”.
She gave me a little smile, “You might be surprised. Friday nights in the gym can get pretty wild. You might not have anything left for me later. But I might come over in a while and watch”.
“I save some energy for you” I assured her. Then with a kiss on her bare tummy and a quick pat on her butt, I was out the door. I went through the house, past the kitchen, to the hallway that connected the gym to the house. We had built the connection hallway so that we could get to the gym even in bad weather. The hallway was a good forty feet long. As I approached the end of it I was surprised not to hear the sound of a bouncing basketball. They must be between games.
When I reached the door, I turned the doorknob and pulled the door open. The scene was so unexpected that at first I did not know what I was looking at. There seemed to be a sea of naked bodies in front of me. There were bodies lying on top of each other, side by side, sitting on one another. I could not see a stitch of clothing on anyone.
Just a few feet to my right I could see a woman that I was guessing was one of my sisters. I guessed because she was facing away from me and I could not see her face though I could tell she was much older than the other girls in here. She was on her hands and knees between the spread legs of one of the younger boys. It looked like Jimmy, fifteen, one of Shelly’s boys. He had his eyes closed and his mouth open as her head bobbed up and down on his cock. Behind her, Jimmy’s seventeen-year-old brother David was on his knees moving up closer to her. His cock was as hard as it would ever get in his lifetime and I could see that he was moving up to fuck her from behind. I continued watching him as he got right behind her, put his hands on her hips and positioned himself to plunge into her. When the head of his cock touched her pussy she waved one hand back at him like she was trying to wave him off. He did not even notice. His attention was on getting that cock into her pussy. He moved a bit closer and then pulled back on her hips and thrust forward at the same time. In one smooth stroke he was buried in her. He held her hips tight against him. I could tell he was just enjoying the sensation of being buried so deep inside of her. The thrust had a different effect upon her though. Her head popped up off of Jimmy. She turned around to see who was fucking her and I got my second surprise, though not my last one of the night. It was my sister Shelly. She was sucking off one of her sons and getting fucked by another at the same time. She motioned at David to stop but he had his eyes closed and was beginning to thrust faster into her. I could see him bury himself right up to his balls in her. Seeing she could not stop him, and from the look on her face, deciding she did not want to, she went back to Jimmy’s cock. It was just a minute before David was slamming so hard into her she could not keep her mouth on Jimmy. She lay her head down on Jimmy’s stomach and let David pound her.
I could see Jimmy attention had wandered and he slid out from under his mother’s head. Just inside the door there were seven or eight girls sitting on the floor just in front of me to my left. They must be the second string waiting to go in. As soon as Jimmy had slid away from his mother two of the girls got up and moved over to him. One of them immediately sat down and impaled herself on his cock and began rocking back and forth on him. The other girl moved around to his head and knelt above him facing the other girl. The girls began kissing each other and rubbing each other’s breasts while Jimmy began licking the pussy above him.
I looked back at Shelly and her son just as he started cumming in her. This was some basketball game. As I looked around the room I could see that there were around fifteen of the boys there. With each one of them there were two girls and with a couple of the boys there were three. There were girl’s knees up in the air, legs up in the air, girls sitting on cocks, and sitting on quite a few faces. On the far side of the room I spotted one of my other sisters, Susan, lying on her back with one of the teenage boys on top of her, his hips pounding at her. I watched for a moment as he finished and rolled off of her. Another of the boys, dick at full attention, was crawling by at the moment, headed for two girls in the corner, saw Susan still lying on her back with her knees up in the air, changed directions and crawled right up on top of her. He just slid right into her and continued the pounding she had been getting earlier.
By the back wall were three girls that apparently did not need any guys, or at the least, were tired of waiting for one. They formed a kind of triangle with a head buried between each pair of thighs.
I must have made some sound because a couple of the girls sitting in front of me turned their heads and saw me standing there. They nudged the other girls and suddenly they all got up and surrounded me. “Daddy, you made it. Come join us”. A girl grabbed each arm, and began pulling me. I felt my shorts drop to my knees. There were so many girls around me I did not even know which one had pulled them down. As I stepped out of them someone was pulling my shoes off. Then two girls were behind me pushing at me, and one, and honestly, I did not even know I was hard, grabbed my very hard cock and pulled me over to where they had been sitting. Before I knew it I was flat on my back and they were arguing over who was going to go first. “I saw him first”. “No you didn’t, I did”. One of the smarter girls did not bother to argue. She just climbed on me and with one well-placed squat, put me halfway inside of her. “Oh Daddy. That’s perfect”. She was a bit tight and it took her several pushes to get me all the way inside of her. By now the other girls saw what was happening and their cries changed to “Don’t let Daddy cum. We all want a turn”.
All I could think of was that there were six of them. They’d kill me before I could satisfy all of them. Then I remembered the boy with the two girls. I looked around me. All I could see were breasts and nipples everywhere. I reached out for the closest girl and pulled her over until her pussy was right above me. I started moving my tongue around her pussy slowly. I sucked her labia into my mouth and then ran my tongue into her pussy as far as I could reach, sweeping up and down her slit. After a few minutes she began to squirm. Now it was time. I started flicking my tongue across her clitoris, then in circles around it. I could hear moaning but was not sure if it was from the one on my face or sitting on my cock. I could tell from her movements she had to be close also. They both came minutes apart and two more took their place as soon as they could get the first two to move. And so we continued. I was getting worried about what would happen after everyone had a turn. Would they want seconds? Would I pass out from dehydration? When the last two girls were having their turn I was saved by the arrival of a couple new boys. The first four girls immediately grabbed them before anyone else saw them and moved over to an empty corner.
I was down to my last ride. She had started out very slowly, rocking back and forth with my cock inside of her. Then she slid off me to one side and pulled at me to get me on her. As I moved above her she spread her legs out wide. When I settled in on top of her she brought her legs up and locked her ankles behind me back. I slowly lowered my weight on her and began pumping into her. “Fuck me Daddy”. Every few strokes she would repeat it. “Fuck me harder Daddy”. I did my best to accommodate.
She tilted her pelvis up to me as I was driving into her, putting hard pressure on her clitoris. “Oh yes Daddy, fuck me”. I was trying hard not to cum but after three pussies wrapped around my cock I just could not wait any longer, I surrendered and let myself go inside of her. As the sperm gushed out of me I grabbed her hips and began grinding against her clitoris. It worked as she gave a little gasp and began thrusting with me. Over the next thirty seconds she began pushing harder and harder with me until she finally arched her back and to my dismay, sank her nails into my back. She finally relaxed, unlocked her legs and lay there breathing hard. I had stayed hard enough for her to finish but the nails had ended that.
“Daddy, you need to come back next week. The other boys don’t fuck me like that”.
“I don’t know. I think I’m going to take up badminton. Basketball might be a little too hard on me”.
“What”?
“Never mind, private joke”.
I looked around the room again. Several of the girls had left but it looked like all the boys were still there. The room was almost down to one-to-one. In fact there were a couple of unpaired boys in a far corner. “Hey, Dad’s finished for the night but I see a couple of boys over there who look interested”.
She raised her head, “Where”?
I moved my head slightly towards them. She looked around at them and then back to me. “You don’t mind”?
“Of course not. Go get’em tiger”.
She smiled and gave me a kiss on the lips. Then she moved off me and began moving towards the two boys. Two images quickly went through my mind; that of a tiger stalking its prey, and two honeybees pollinating a flower. I was not sure which was more appropriate. I finally decided they were both right.
I took one last look around and saw two girls to my right look my way. Before they could get up I got to my feet and scooted out the door. No shame in a strategic retreat. I was finished pollinating flowers for the night and did not want to be prey. As I walked down the hall I met Jason walking back to the gym with a big platter of fruit in his hands. “Glad to see you could make it Dad”.
“You might have told me you guys weren’t playing basketball in the gym”.
Jason laughed, “I never said we were playing basketball. I hope you weren’t disappointed”.
I had to smile. “I wouldn’t say disappointment is what I’m feeling right now”.
Jason started to move past me, “I’d better get in there. Some of the guys are getting pretty dehydrated. Are you coming back next week”?
I stepped aside so he could get the platter through, “We’ll see if I’ve recovered by then”.
When I got back to my bedroom Pam was already asleep. I got in bed and moved up behind her, put my arm around her waist and up between her breasts to her shoulder. In a sleepy voice she said, “I must have fell asleep. How was basketball”?
I could swear she was smiling as she said it. “It was fine. But I think I might have to go back to bucking hay to get a rest from that game”.
I could not see it, but I could hear the smile in her voice, “I’m not saying I told you so, but, I told you so”. What could I say? I just hugged her and we both dropped off to sleep.
Over the winter I studied all the books on the valley the boys had brought back for me. A plan was forming in my mind of how we could disperse to our advantage and not just spread out. From the books I learned there where a number of industries and businesses in the area that we could take advantage. There were huge amounts of rice grown in the central valley. There were also huge fruit orchards and vegetable fields up and down the valley. There were even several dehydrators out there. We would not be able to use the natural gas they had but we could utilize much of the equipment and we always had the sun. There was a farm museum about fifty miles from us that had a huge amount of horse drawn farm equipment. And just fifteen miles from us was a historical site that had a water-driven sawmill. And not too far from there was another site that had a water-driven mill for grinding grain into flour.
Once spring arrived we began checking these out. It took the first month to get around and check out all the sites I had identified as our best bets. All the sites looked promising but we decided that the rice fields and the fruit orchards would help us the most in the least amount of time. Along with the orchards we also found vast fields with vegetables.
Then we reached the tough part; who goes where? I had been mulling on this for over a year and it still was not a clear decision. We finally decided to break along the lines of what our objectives were. We decided that being able to harvest rice was the most important and then the orchards and vegetables. Later we would tackle the mills and anything else that we found to help us.
There were enough people interested in the adventure that we did not have to force anyone, at least for now. We decided that a cross-section of ages and family lines would make up each group. Regarding the family lines, we had Mikey, Sharon, Janelle and our group, all with different DNA. There would always be more from our family but we added people from each of the other groups for the widest diversity that we could get.
During the middle of the summer, Terri, my youngest sister, and her group left for the valley. Jason and Paul went along for the ride and to help them set up. They did not expect to accomplish much before winter except ready living quarters. I considered going but Pam’s first baby was due in a couple of months and I wanted to be there.
The rest of the year went by uneventfully. When Pam’s time came there were three other of the girls giving birth on the same day. It made things interesting having four girls giving birth in the same room. When that happened in the past usually I was the father in each case. This time I could only take credit for Pam. We had our first girl.
During the winter, Sharon came around several times to talk about her interest in heading up the group that would move out to the orchards. She also asked that if she did go, could Paul also be part of the group. So I was not too surprised a few weeks later when Paul made the same request. It seems that I was not the only one interested in a change in our relationships.
As spring approached once again we were readying the second group to leave. All the equipment they were going to take with them was ready but there were still problems picking the group. There were a number of teenagers and their allegiances changed everyday. One day Bobby like Sally and they wanted to be with each other forever, the next they could not stand the sight of each other.
I was once again out in my thinking chair on the porch, thinking, that is napping, when Sharon found me in the afternoon. “Dan, I think I have a group that will work now. I have tried to remove all the Romeo and Juliets”.
She handed me her list and I looked it over. “Yes. I think this will work. Now that it’s settled, when do you want to go”?
She sat next to me and put her hand on my forearm. “It should be soon. How about two weeks from now”?
“That would be good. It will give you a lot of time to get organized once you get there”. I put my other hand on top of hers and we both rocked slowly together for a few minutes. I thought she said something so I turned to look at her. I could see she was fighting back tears. “I’m going to miss my children. So many of them have to stay. For most of them you are their father. You’ll watch after them”?
“You know I will”.
We talked for a while longer about moving plans, what to expect when they got there. How it will be completely different than whatever we could plan for here. Then dinner time arrived, followed by games with the kids out in the yard.
A few days later I was upstairs in what we called the TV room. It was a large room with plenty of room on the floor for playing and couches along three walls. It was where the kids played games on the floor or watched our old taped movies plus the newer ones we brought back from town. Occasionally I would go up and watch one of the old comedy movies. I was all alone and was watching one of my favorites. I made the mistake of then lying on my side to watch. I should have known better. Every time I do this I fall asleep and this time was no different. I don’t know how long I had been asleep when someone sat down on the couch by my stomach and said, “Can I watch with you Daddy”?
In my fog I recognized Karen’s voice. “Sure honey”. I started to sit up but she put a hand on me to stop me. “That’s okay Daddy. You can lay there”. She moved around and lay in front of me, facing the TV. I decided I would just drift back off and let her watch the movie. I put my arm over hers and across her stomach. Karen was pretty much like me. If it was not freezing she was always without clothes, so when I put my hand down it ended up on bare skin, right below her breasts. I could feel the swell of one of her breasts against my hand. It felt warm and inviting, soft yet firm at the same time. I knew I should not be doing this, Karen was still just thirteen. I was about to move my hand away when one of Karen’s hands lifted mine up and laid it down directly across her breasts. My first thought was, Beth was right. My second thought was, forget that thought, she has nice breasts. We’re just laying here watching a movie and we are alone. Plus it was her idea for my hand to be there I rationalized. Then just to be polite I moved it around a bit over both breasts before cupping one breast in my hand.
Karen squirmed around a bit to get comfortable. She was still a bit short so her butt was sticking back into my stomach even though her head was up by mine. The breast in my hand and the squirming was starting to get a rise out of me, sleep now becoming a distant thought. I could feel myself beginning to poke her in the back of her thighs. She felt it too because she lifted her left leg, then reached down and pulled me straight so I was sticking out between her thighs. When she lowered her leg I was trapped between her thighs, those hot thighs plus her pussy and its heat was against the middle of my shaft. Her fingers began moving around the head of my cock, then down the little bit of the shaft that was sticking out from between her thighs.
I did not think I could get any harder but I was wrong. I could feel an ache now, like my cock was trying to stretch out its skin. Without conscious thought I began ever so slightly pushing against her butt as her fingers danced around my cock. My hands began moving from one breast to the other, caressing the breast then her nipple. She lifted her leg slightly and moved her pelvis forward a bit and then tilted back towards me. When she pushed on the head of my cock again I felt the head slide just a bit into her; just the head. She was so tight that I went in just an inch and stopped. I pulled back so I could push in again and I came out. Karen quickly took the head and pushed it back into her. I slid in just a bit further. Now I could pull back a bit without falling out. I was getting ready to stroke again when Karen pushed back against me, and then again. I began sinking deeper in her. She was so tight it was slow progress. The feeling was so intense I wanted to just thrust hard into her. I wanted my whole shaft to feel that grip. It was difficult to restrain myself but I had to go slowly. If it was this tight I might hurt her.
After a few minutes I realized I was halfway inside of her. I heard her give a little gasp after one stroke, and was just about to ask if she was okay when she bent forward, reached down and cupped my balls in her hand and wrapped her forefinger and thumb around the base of my cock. It brought back memories of her and Beth. I thought she was just going to hold me but I found out different when she began pulling my cock towards her pussy. “Please Daddy, deeper. I want you all the way inside of me”. I needed no further encouragement. I had been trying to be very gentle. Now I began thrusting harder against her. I also wanted to be deeper inside of her. It only took a few strokes before both of our wishes were granted. Karen moved her hand down to just cup my balls as the last of my shaft disappeared in her. Karen’s head pushed back to mine, “Oh Daddy, that’s perfect”.
I began slowly pulling out of her a couple of inches and then sliding back into her. Each time I was about to bottom out in her I added a little thrust, pushing her body up on the couch. I was so focused on the sensations I was getting inside of her that at first I did not even notice several of the kids had come into the room. My head was behind Karen’s so I could not see them but I could hear them when they began talking. It only took a few comments from them to realize that Cindy and Debbie, two of Karen’s roommates, and several of the younger children had come in the room.
I thought maybe what we were doing was hidden from them and would go unnoticed until I heard one of the young children say, “Cindy? Why is Karen’s head bouncing up and down”? As I was wondering what she meant by that, I continued thrusting up into Karen. I finally got a clue when I heard Cindy whisper rather loudly to Debbie, “Deb, look between Karen’s legs”. Then it hit me and I froze. I could hear them giggling. After a few moments and no further movements from me Cindy said, “Hey kids, how about we go outside and Debbie and I’ll push you on the swings really high”? The kids thought that was a great idea and were out of the room in a flash. As Cindy and Debbie were leaving I could hear them whispering to each other, “Who do you think is fucking her”? “I don’t know. I couldn’t see who it is”. Then Debbie made one last comment meant for Karen, “Hey girl, don’t let him push you too high”.
Once they were gone I stayed where I was and did not resume moving in her. I was still a bit embarrassed. Well, not embarrassed enough to pull out of her, just enough not to resume enthusiastically fucking her. Karen had no reservations though. “Come on Daddy, they are gone, don’t stop”.
Just to be sure I did not have other ideas; Karen began pushing her hips back against me. She had just enough room to get me moving in her an inch or so and that was enough. She felt so tight around me I immediately forgot about the other girls; I was focused again, and Karen’s head began bouncing up and down again. Karen leaned forward slightly. I felt her fingers brush against my shaft and I thought she was going to grab me again, I was wrong. Every few seconds her fingers would brush against me. It took me a while to realize she was not reaching for me and missing, she was rubbing herself. Just thinking about that got me hotter; I began thrusting harder in her. I just hoped she finished before I did because I would not be much longer.
I could hear her breathing getting more ragged and she began pushing her pussy down to meet my stroke into her. It was a feeling you wanted to last a long time but we were both too far gone. As she began jerking against me in her climax, I started cumming in her. When I jerked against her as the first stream entered her, I felt her fingers push against the underside of my cock.
We were just lying there afterwards when it occurred to me that we should probably make our strategic retreat before more kids arrived. Before I could say anything Karen said, “That was neat Daddy”.
“Yes. It felt really good to me too”.
“No. I mean I could feel your sperm going into me. That felt really neat”.
I laughed, “I thought it felt pretty neat too”.
Before I could add more we heard footsteps coming up the stairs. We had just enough time to get up and move towards the door before they arrived. A group of our young girls came in as we went out. From the looks and smiles they gave us I guess it was no secret as to what was going on at the movies today.
We were about halfway down the stairs with me in front when Karen let out an “eeuw”.
I turned around and asked, “What’s wrong”?
She was looking down at herself, “I’m leaking. I thought it was supposed to stay inside. How do girls get pregnant if it all leaks out”?
I had to work hard not to laugh out loud. “It’s not all going to leak out, just some of it”. I took her hand and we continued down the stairs.
“It better not. I worked hard for that”.
I turned to her, “You were working”?
She laughed and punched me in the arm, “You know what I mean. I want to have your baby. It was all supposed to stay inside me”.
“Don’t worry. There is plenty there”. She did not seem too convinced so I added, “Do you remember when you thought your breasts would never get bigger? Well they did didn’t they”. When she nodded I reached out and caressed her breasts for a moment. “And very nicely I might add. Well the same thing goes for sperm. When it is time for you to get pregnant there will be plenty”.
When we got to my bedroom Pam was there with the baby. Karen ran over to her and asked to hold the baby. They sat on the bed and talked while I went in the bathroom to take a shower. When I came out the both turned to look at me but did not say anything. “What”?
Pam stood up and came over to me while Karen stayed on the bed with the baby. She took my hands in hers and said, “We have a pretty big bed in here. Do you think there would be room for Karen with us”?
I looked down at her, “I think so if you are sure”.
Pam turned around to Karen, “He said yes”.
Karen jumped up with a squeal and came over and joined in a three-way hug. Well I guess it was a four-way since she was carrying the baby. “Thank you Daddy”.
We all went back and sat on the bed. Pam began feeding the baby while we made small talk. When the topic moved around and finally ended up on the next groups leaving, I left to find Sharon to talk about some last minute plan changes.
I looked around the house but could not find her. After twenty minutes looking around the other buildings and the fields I still had not found her. I poked my head in my old hideaway room in the barn. She was not there but I did surprise Richard, one of her sons, underneath two of the girls. “Oops, Sorry”. I started to close the door.
“Were you looking for something Dad”?
“I was trying to find your mom”.
“Last time I saw her she was headed to her bedroom”.
I said “Thanks” and finished closing the door. From the other side of the closed door I could hear giggles and then a moan from Richard. Obviously they had recovered from the interruption.
Sharon had moved from the main house to one of our newer buildings several years ago. She could be closer to her children that way. When I got to her bedroom I knocked on the door. There was no answer so I opened the door. I looked around but no one was there. I was about to leave when I saw a crumpled piece of paper on the floor by the bed. Sharon was anal about cleaning. She would never have tossed paper on the floor. As I was bending to pick it up a thought went through my head that it might have been left by one of the kids. I almost left it there, but I’ve gone this far I might as well pick it up. Then curiosity won out. I picked up the balled up paper and straightened it out. It was a note.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dear Mom,
It has been a while since I’ve seen you. I hope you’ve been well. I came back to tell you I’m going to leave the valley. I’ve read about San Francisco and I want to go and see it. There is an area south of there, along the coast, that I am planning on moving to.
Before I left I wanted to see you and say goodbye. I’ll be in the old clubhouse for a couple of hours. I hope you will come and say goodbye. It would mean a lot to me if you could bring Candace and Vicky. They were always my favorite sisters. I would love to say goodbye to them also. If it is possible for you to bring Karen, I would like to apologize to her. I know what I did was wrong and I would like to tell her I’m sorry.
I would appreciate it if you did not let Dad know I’m here. I know he would not understand and not want me to say goodbye to you.
Your son,
Frank
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This did not feel right. Nothing meant a lot to Frank except what he wanted at the moment. He did not get emotional. He would never say he was wrong or even know he was wrong. And he did not have any favorite sisters. Then I remembered his threat to Karen.
I hurried out of the house and started running for the clubhouse. I only got a few yards before changing direction and ran for the house. I would not make the same mistake twice. When I got to the house I found the key to the gun locker, unlocked it and pulled out a revolver. I loaded it and then started again for the clubhouse.
As I neared the clubhouse I slowed to a walk. Once I was insight I stepped off the path. There was no point in being a clear target. I carefully walked closer through the trees. I could not hear anything from the clubhouse. That might not mean anything if they were just sitting there talking. I would not be able to hear them from here. Each time I stepped on a leaf it sounded like a gunshot. I finally reached the back wall. As I slowly moved up to a window I still could not hear a sound inside. I took a quick peak though the window and pulled back. I thought I saw legs on the bed to my right but I did not see anyone else. After a few seconds I took a longer look. I was right. There was no one else in the room except someone on the bed. I could not see her face from here but I was sure it was Sharon.
I moved around the building and went in the door. The room was quiet. She did not turn as I walked in. Could she be asleep? I had a bad feeling. Sadness came over me like a dark cloud covering the sun. Her arms and legs were all spread out on the bed. Her hands were clenched as though she was in pain. I knew as I walked up to her. I just did not want to admit it to myself. Her eyes were open, staring at the ceiling. I could see the mark of hands around her neck. Then I noticed the liquid on her face and inside her mouth. I looked down her body and saw droplets of semen in her pubic hair. When I looked closer I could see some oozing out of her vagina. Then I realized there’s too much. He must have raped her and then beat off on her face. The sadness I felt for her was being quickly replaced by a rage towards Frank.
Then I remembered, where are the girls? Where are Candace and Vicky? What about Karen? Had Sharon even brought them or had she come alone. Was that why Frank got angry? Did he take it out on his mother?
I was about to leave the room when I noticed there was a slip of paper in one of Sharon’s clenched hands. I pulled it out and saw it was another note from Frank:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hey Dad, isn’t this a turnaround. The last time I saw Mom she was blowing you. This time she got to blow me. I had been thinking about this since I left. It did not turn out quite as good as I planned but you can’t have everything. I asked nicely but in the end I had to be a bit assertive.
I had hoped to say one last goodbye to Karen but Mom did not bring her, my loss. Well, hope I run into you some time. I’d better be going. I have a long way to travel.
Best wishes,
Frank
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I was so angry I was shaking. Without realizing it I wadded up the note into a tight little ball and dropped it on the floor. I looked back at Sharon, some of the sadness returning. I leaned over and closed her eyes. I kissed her lightly on the forehead and started out the door.
I began walking quickly back to the house. The semen on Sharon had not yet dried. Frank did not have a big head start on us. As I returned to the house a plan was forming in my mind. I found Jason by the barn repairing some tools that Sharon was going to take on the trip. “Jason, I have some bad news. Come with me to the house”.
As he fell in beside me I told him what had happened. “Dad, I knew we should have done something about him”. I turned and looked at him. “No, I didn’t mean it that way. You didn’t know he, none of us knew he would do this. Oh, never mind. Why would he take Candace and Vicky? They are what, maybe eleven or twelve”?
I replied, “Yes, the same age as Karen when he attacked her”.
We were almost to the house and I saw Paul on the porch with my mother and Megan and Shelly, two of my sisters. “Well first of all I need to tell Paul. While I’m doing that I want you to take Richard and David and check the entire area. We need to know where Karen, Candace and Vicky are. I want you to check every building until you either see them or we know they are not here. Don’t take someone’s word that they are here. I want you to actually see them. If you find them, bring them to the house. I want to know they are safe. I think Frank is gone but we should not take any unnecessary chances”.
Jason ran off to get his brother and begin the search. I went on up to Paul. He took the news better than I had expected though tears were running down his face as he ran off to join Jason in the search. My mother and sisters took it harder. After they composed themselves, they went off to the clubhouse to take care of Sharon’s body.
I went on into the house and went to my bedroom. As I entered the room I saw Karen putting clothes away in the closet. I went over and hugged her to me. Although we were always very affectionate she sensed something was different, “Daddy, what’s wrong”. As I told her about Sharon I could see her tense up. “She’s dead? What happened”? Then she looked at me sharply, It’s Frank isn’t it? Is he still here”?
“No, I don’t think he is. But I want you to stay here in the house. We are going to go after him. I don’t want you to go out until I get back. I’m going to have Paul stay with you”.
I talked with her for a while longer to calm her down. She sat and watched me as I pulled out jeans, a pair of boots and one of my good shirts. They were all pretty good since I did not wear them much. After I got dressed I left the bedroom and she was right at my heels. I returned to the living room and went to the gun locker. I laid out five additional revolvers to go with the one I already had. I then pulled out six rifles and set out ammunition for all of them. When I was finished I sat down and waited for my sons to finish the search.
I was anxious for the results, and to get going after Frank. I wanted to run him down like the mad dog he had proved to be. I sat there watching the clock tick off the minutes. It was almost an hour before I decided it would be better to let him get home before we accosted him. One the way there he could always hear us coming and just move off the trail and let us go by. We would never know. If we let him get home we would have the advantage. We knew where he was going and he did not know that.
By the time Jason came in the door, followed by several of his brothers, all the planning that had run through my head had calmed me down. Jason saw me and said, “We could not find any of…”, then he saw Karen sitting next to me. “Oh good, Karen is okay. But Dad, we could not find any sign of Candace or Vicky. A couple of the girls said they saw them with Sharon earlier but were not sure of the time”.
Seven of us went into the kitchen and sat around the table. Besides myself, there was Jason, Paul, Richard, David, Jimmy and, oddly enough his brother, James. I began laying out my plan. I wanted Paul to stay at the house with a picked team of his brothers to protect the girls, especially Karen in light of Frank’s threat, in case we were wrong about Frank’s plans. Paul argued strongly until I explained to him the importance of protecting the family, plus the chance that Frank might still show up.
“Jason, we need two more for my plan. Do you have any suggestions? I would prefer not to have any of Sharon’s sons. I want everyone to be clear headed when we are there”.
“Tom would be good and Sam. They are both good shots. They don’t get excited easily and Megan and Terri are their mothers”. Then he pressed for more info, “But what is your plan”?
“It looks pretty likely that he has the girls. I think the best way to get him is to let him get home. He does not know that we know where that is. That gives us the advantage. He should not be on his guard once he gets there. I’m afraid that if we try to get him on the trail back that he might hear us and just avoid us and go somewhere else. It could take us a long time to find him then. Remember that old John Wayne movie I watch sometimes, The Searchers? Well think about how long they looked? I don’t want Candace and Vicky with him that long”.
I could see the kids were anxious to just charge off. But as we kept talking it out they all finally came to see that the plan was the best way of getting the girls back, hopefully unharmed.
From the books I had read of the area, I had a pretty good understanding of the roads around here. I knew there was a road to the north of us, away from the route Frank and I had taken earlier, that would get us close to Frank’s new home. It would take us a bit longer to get there but that would be safer. There was always the risk that Frank might sit off the road to see if we would try and follow him. It took us a couple of hours to put together everything we wanted. I had a tearful goodbye with Karen and Pam. Terri came around and said she would look after the girls for me. She had that old fierce look in her eye again. I knew she always regretted not being the one to take care of John when we were younger. I thought she would relish the thought of Frank coming in the house.
All the boys were outside and mounted. We wanted to get on the road before the day was over. Get as many miles behind us as we could. I was still in the house, about to leave when Megan came up to me and hugged me. “Be careful. I want you to come home to me safe”. Then she quickly added, “I mean for Karen and Pam. They need you”.
“I’ll do my best”.
“Well be sure you do because I’ll kick your butt up and down the mountain if you don’t”.
She really surprised me. Megan, my sister, who teased me unmercifully when I was a kid. The one who was somewhat reluctant when our family began growing. The only one who was out here telling me to come home safe. I gave her a hug back and a light kiss on the lips. Before I could let go Karen and Pam came up and joined in our hug. Pam looked at Megan and gave her a little smile, “Maybe you would like to join us when Dan returns”?
Megan smiled back at her, “Maybe I would”. Then she turned back to me, “But first you come back safe”.
I gave each of them a kiss and then went out the door. Seven of my sons were in their saddles, waiting. Grouped around us was the entire family to see us off. Several of the girls were coming up to each of the boys, telling them to be careful. It was several minutes before we could finally get off.
Little was said as we rode. There was a full moon so we rode until after midnight. We camped and just put down bedrolls and slept for a few hours. As soon as it began to get light we hit the road again. We stopped just to rest the horses every couple of hours. It was late afternoon when we finally found the side road that would take us near where Frank had settled. By early evening we crested a rise and, with the help of the binoculars, I could see the back of Frank’s house in the distance. It looked like we were around two miles or so from him. There were no signs of anyone there. I continued watching as the sun went down. When it finally got dark a light appeared at a window. Frank was back.
We moved back down the hill so we would be out of sight. We started a fire and had our meal. While we were sitting there eating, I outlined what we would do the next day. Two of us would approach the house from each side. I would approach from the front with Jason hanging back to cover me if necessary. “I will try and draw Frank out. We want to try and get him out of the house, away from the girls. If we are successful, Richard and David, you are going to come in from the rear, will enter the house and get the girls out. Once we have done that we will take care of Frank. If Frank is outside and armed, if he makes a move towards me, you on the two sides, take him out”. I looked around at each of them in turn, “Now remember what he did to Sharon. Do not hesitate when it is time. Frank won’t”. They all nodded. “We’ll get up a couple hours before daylight and make our way to our positions. When we get there, you will all wait for me to make my way in. You will stay out of sight until then. Understand”? They all nodded again.
We put the fire out and all lay down to get some rest. I was having a hard time getting to sleep. As much as I figured he deserved his fate, I did not relish being the cause of it. From the way the others were fidgeting under their blankets, they must be having trouble also, as they should. We were going to take a man’s life.
When I woke, my clock said it was just before 4 O’clock. It was still dark, the moon was gone. I went around and woke the others. We had a quick bite of the food the women had sent with us, and some water. Everyone checked their weapons and then we set out.
It took a good two hours to get there. The sun was not up but it was getting light; false dawn. We got into our positions, each of us about 100 yards out from the house, and then hunkered down to wait. It was another two hours before I saw Frank come out the front door and go to the barn, he had Vicky with him, her hand in his. I could not be sure, but it looked like a holster was on his hip. This was the opportunity I wanted. I stood but was having trouble taking the first step towards the house. Then I remembered the fear in Karen’s face, I started walking.
I was within thirty yards of the house when Frank walked out of the barn with his back to me. Vicky’s hand was still in his, a basket in her other hand. It looked to be filled with eggs. I stopped and called out to him, “Good morning Frank”.
He stopped, dropped the basket, and whirled around to face me, one hand dropping to his hip, the other pulling Vicky in front of him, tight against him, his arm moving around her waist. I was right. He had a holster. His hand now rested on the grip but did not pull the pistol out. That is a start. Maybe this will go easier than I thought.
“Well good morning Dad. You surprised me. Good job”. He watched me for a moment. “Ah, now I remember. You used to watch the valley when I was little. You saw a light didn’t you”. He was nodding his head. I kept watching his hand for any movement. I thought he was talking to try and distract me. I could see his head move slightly to his left and right, trying to see if there is anyone else with me. I kept focused on him. Let him think about it.
“Well what do we do now Dad”?
“I came to get Candace and Vicky. Why don’t you let Vicky come over here”?
Keeping my eyes on him, I could see Richard and David coming around the back of the house and start working very carefully to my Right. David was carrying Candice. In a few seconds they were out of sight behind the barn. They were safe. That left Vicky, and of course, Frank.
“I don’t think they want to leave me. They’re having too much fun. Aren’t you Vicky”? Vicky started to shake her head but Frank bent down to her, his arm tightening around her. “Aren’t you Vicky”?
“Daddy”? She sounded so scared.
“Vicky, we talked about this. You are having fun aren’t you”?
“Yes”.
“Yes what”?
“Yes, I’m having fun”.
“See Dad, you can go now”.
I was okay until he smiled. The rage I felt finding Sharon returned. I took a step towards him. All those cautions for my sons and I could not follow them myself. I was about ten yards from him when Frank pushed down on his pistol grip and the holster swung on his hip. There was a roar.
I could see the sky. It looked so blue. But I was having trouble focusing. There was one small cloud up there but it kept moving around. How can a cloud do that? How did I get down here? What was I doing? I should get up. I tried to move my legs but they felt so heavy, I felt so tired. Maybe if I just rest for a moment, then I’ll get up.
I was still trying to focus on that cloud when Frank’s face blocked it out. Now I remember.
“Dad, didn’t I tell you what would happen if I ever saw you again”?
His voice sounded so small. I could barely hear him. I was trying to tell him to speak up but my tongue kept getting in the way.
“What Dad”?
As he bent over me he let Vicky go. He opened his mouth to say something and a small hole appeared in his forehead. He dropped out of my sight. I tried to move my head to see where he went but it seemed to take so much effort.
“Dad! Dad! Are you okay”?
Jason was there. His lips were moving but I could not hear what he was saying. Why was he so worried?
“Dad. It happened so fast. Vicky was in the way. I did not have a good shot. Dad, can you hear me”?
It's getting so dark. I must have been here for quite a while. We should be going. We need to get the girls home. What’s he doing? He’s tearing my good shirt. Why are his hands so red?
“Dad, hold on. Please Dad”.
Oh good, the other boys are here. There’s David and Richard, Jim and James, and, and, what’s his name? I know him, what is his name? Oh yes, Tom. Now why couldn't I remember that?
“Dad”.
It's so cold? It must be getting late. It’s so dark, and so cold. I wonder why I can’t hear what they're saying? I can see their lips move. Maybe if I closed my eyes for a minute and rested. I just need to rest.
“Dad, no”.
"Dad".
Epilogue:
Spoiler:
Fall has come early this year. It’s only the end of September and we have already had a couple days of light snow. It has been so cold that the snow is still on the ground, not a good sign. Lately the days have been dark and heavy with clouds. It looks to be a bad winter. Good thing the livestock has already been moved to a new home.
I’ve been coming up here to our small graveyard about once a month or so, since it happened, to talk to Dad. It has been just over two years since we lost him. Richard made a tombstone for him. He went down to town and looked around until he found a stonemason’s shop. He came back with a nice stone and worked on it. He did a good job. It’s nice. I did not know he had that skill. I guess we are all developing skills we did not know we had.
Almost everyone is gone now. Come springtime I’ll be leaving too and then there will be no one left. At our high point, right after Dad and auntie Sharon died, we had over four hundred people here. We were like a small town. Now it feels more like a ghost town.
Megan, my mom, was pretty broken up when Dad was died. After that she did not really want to be here any longer. She took Sharon’s place, leading a group down to the valley and was gone just a week later. Then we began splitting up rather quickly. Jason and Paul both left the same summer; Jason for the lumber mill and Paul for the mill to grind grain. They were supposed to leave the next year but they did not want to wait. I was not surprised when Karen and Pam left with Jason. Jason was always a lot like Dad.
The following year auntie Shelly and Terri took groups out. Our plan had been for one group to leave each year but with Dad gone, well, things were just different. And now I’m the last.
I know it’s just a sentimental crutch, talking things over with Dad. And of course, he’s the perfect Dad. He just stays quiet and lets me figure them out for myself. Jason always kidded me when he saw me up here. He’d tell me the answer was always inside of me. I just have to find it, let it out. But then, he’s like Dad. He always knows what to do. He would not understand. You see, it was my fault. It will always be my fault. I did not shoot soon enough.
I’ve been coming up here to our small graveyard about once a month or so, since it happened, to talk to Dad. It has been just over two years since we lost him. Richard made a tombstone for him. He went down to town and looked around until he found a stonemason’s shop. He came back with a nice stone and worked on it. He did a good job. It’s nice. I did not know he had that skill. I guess we are all developing skills we did not know we had.
Almost everyone is gone now. Come springtime I’ll be leaving too and then there will be no one left. At our high point, right after Dad and auntie Sharon died, we had over four hundred people here. We were like a small town. Now it feels more like a ghost town.
Megan, my mom, was pretty broken up when Dad was died. After that she did not really want to be here any longer. She took Sharon’s place, leading a group down to the valley and was gone just a week later. Then we began splitting up rather quickly. Jason and Paul both left the same summer; Jason for the lumber mill and Paul for the mill to grind grain. They were supposed to leave the next year but they did not want to wait. I was not surprised when Karen and Pam left with Jason. Jason was always a lot like Dad.
The following year auntie Shelly and Terri took groups out. Our plan had been for one group to leave each year but with Dad gone, well, things were just different. And now I’m the last.
I know it’s just a sentimental crutch, talking things over with Dad. And of course, he’s the perfect Dad. He just stays quiet and lets me figure them out for myself. Jason always kidded me when he saw me up here. He’d tell me the answer was always inside of me. I just have to find it, let it out. But then, he’s like Dad. He always knows what to do. He would not understand. You see, it was my fault. It will always be my fault. I did not shoot soon enough.
1
Not going to give too much away, but this is way more than mother/son incest. Like "400" times more. If you read the whole thing you'll get my meaning.
0
Can't remember where I found it, but if you google the first sentence you should be able to find it. If you can, set it to search for the exact phrase.
0
Ok, I read the whole thing. It's not just a mother/son type of incest. It's a whole whirlwind of incest. lol.
Well, I'd have to admit that though I'm not that interested in such a wide range of incest, it's quite a realistic situation for a post-apocalyptic era. John and Frank's characters, at least, left out a reminder that not everyone in the world would turn out nice.
I don't remember which son was narrating the epilogue, but I think that part somehow ended the story quite nicely. +rep from me when I'm able to. =)
Well, I'd have to admit that though I'm not that interested in such a wide range of incest, it's quite a realistic situation for a post-apocalyptic era. John and Frank's characters, at least, left out a reminder that not everyone in the world would turn out nice.
I don't remember which son was narrating the epilogue, but I think that part somehow ended the story quite nicely. +rep from me when I'm able to. =)